EAST END CONNECTION 100% SUBMITTAL …_EEC-SPECS_(VOL_2_OF____0301-0182.pdfITEM #0101133A DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED RAILROAD TIES* ... ITEM #1501900A UNDERGROUND PROPANE GAS LINE

NEW HAVEN RAIL YARD FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT

EAST END CONNECTION

100% SUBMITTAL

SPECIFICATIONS (SPECIAL PROVISIONS – VOLUME 2)

OCTOBER 2017

STATE PROJECT NO. 0301-0182

Prepared For: Connecticut Department of Transportation 2800 Berlin Turnpike Newington, Connecticut 06131-7546 Submitted by: WSP USA 500 Winding Brook Drive Glastonbury, Connecticut 06033

NEW HAVEN RAIL YARD FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS 10/27/17 EAST END CONNECTION STATE PROJECT 0301-0182 100% SUBMITTAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SPECIAL PROVISIONS ITEM #0202315A DISPOSAL OF CONTROLLED MATERIAL* ITEM #0202317A DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS* ITEM #0204151A HANLING WATER* ITEM #0204210A HANDLING CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER* ITEM #0000190A NON-DESTRUCTIVE UTILITY INVESTIGATION ITEM #0000426A ELECTRIC HANDHOLE ITEM #0000545A 5” PVC DUCT BANKS – 2 DUCTS ITEM #1115010A 5” POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT ITEM #0000461A 600V COPPER WIRE NO. 8 AWG ITEM #0000462A 600V COPPER WIRE NO. 6 AWG ITEM #0000463A 600V COPPER WIRE NO. 4 AWG ITEM #0000468A 600V COPPER WIRE NO. 4/0 AWG ITEM #0000523A 600V COPPER WIRE NO. 500 KCMIL ITEM #0000641A 600V COPPER WIRE NO. 250 KCMIL ITEM #0020801A ASBESTOS ABATEMENT* ITEM #0020901A LEAD ABATEMENT* ITEM #0090042A CATENARY SYSTEMS ITEM #0090045A AERIAL GROUND WIRE SYSTEMS ITEM #0090050A HIGH SPEED SECTION INSULATORS ITEM #0090070A INSPECTION AND TESTING ITEM #0090075A GUY ASSEMBLIES ITEM #0090079A MODIFICATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO EXISTING CATENARY SYSTEMS ITEM #0090098A SCREW ANCHORS, TYPE 1 ITEM #0096017A TRACTION POWER RETURN BONDING LAYOUTS ITEM #0096018A COPPER BUS BAR FOR NEUTRAL RETURN BONDINGS ITEM #0096065A REMOVAL OF CATENARY ITEM #0096069A REMOVAL OF CATENARY POLE STRUCTURE ITEM #0096071A REMOVAL OF GUY AND GUY ANCHOR RODS ITEM #0096106A SNOW MELTER HEATER ELEMENTS ITEM #0096108A DISCONNECT SWITCH AND SECTIONALIZING JUMPER TAPS ITEM #0100079A ELECTRIC TRACTION STEEL WORK ITEM #0100244A SIGNS ITEM #0100500A CONSTRUCTION COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT (ESTIMATED COST) ITEM #0101000A ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY* ITEM #0101117A CONTROLLED MATERIALS HANDLING* ITEM #0101126A DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTE* ITEM #0101130A ENVIRONMENTAL WORK – SOLIDIFICATION* ITEM #0101133A DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED RAILROAD TIES*


TABLE OF CONTENTS

ITEM #0101143A HANDLING AND DISPOSAL OF REGULATED ITEMS (ESTIMATE COST)* ITEM #0101176A DISPOSAL OF PCB WASTE* ITEM #0104057A POLE FOUNDATIONS, TYPE A ITEM #0201001A CLEARING AND GRUBBING ITEM #0202000A EARTH EXCAVATION ITEM #0202315A DISPOSAL OF CONTROLLED MATERIAL* ITEM #0202317A DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS* ITEM #0202482A REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF CONCRETE SLABS ITEM #0202522A REMOVAL OF BITUMINOUS TYPE PAVEMENT ITEM #0202528A REMOVAL OF RAILROAD TRACKS ITEM #0203000A STRUCTURE EXCAVATION-EARTH (COMPLETE) ITEM #0204151A HANDLING WATER* ITEM #0204210A HANDLING CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER* ITEM #0204503A DEWATERING ITEM #0205003A TRENCH EXCAVATION 0'-10' DEEP ITEM #0211000A ANTI-TRACKING PAD ITEM #0213902A SUBBALLAST ITEM #0216012A CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL ITEM #0219011A SEDIMENT CONTROL SYSTEM AT CATCH BASIN ITEM #0406999A ASPHALT ADJUSTMENT COST (ESTIMATED COST) ITEM #0502182A RUBBER GRADE CROSSING ITEM #0502234A TEMPORARY GRADE CROSSING ITEM #0503004A LIFT AND LINE EXISTING TRACK ITEM #0503471A TURNOUT INSTALLATION ITEM #0504010A RAILROAD TRACK WORK ITEM #0507105A CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE AND/OR CATCH BASIN ITEM #0507484A TYPE "C-L" CATCH BASIN, DOUBLE GRATE TYPE II (4' SUMP) ITEM #0507601A MANHOLE ITEM #0507495A MODIFY EXISTING CATCH BASIN ITEM #0507781A RESET MANHOLE ITEM #0601211A CLASS “F” CONCRETE (SPECIAL) ITEM #0601365A CONCRETE PAD ITEM #0603169A PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS*** ITEM #0651757A 18” POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE ITEM #0728020A STONE BALLAST ITEM #0728032A NO. 6 CRUSHED STONE ITEM #0751711A 6” UNDERDRAIN ITEM #0901003A STEEL BOLLARD ITEM #0913000A REMOVE CHAIN LINK FENCE ITEM #0913041A 8’ CHAIN LINK FENCE ITEM #0913046A 10' CHAIN LINK FENCE WITH BARBED WIRE ITEM #0913351A 4’ CHAIN LINK GATE 8’ HIGH


TABLE OF CONTENTS

ITEM #0913835A REMOVE AND RESET CHAIN LINK FENCE ITEM #0921001A CONCRETE SIDEWALK ITEM #0921007A SPECIAL CONCRETE SIDEWALK ITEM #0969000A PROJECT COORDINATOR** ITEM #0969050A DOCUMENT CONTROL SPECIALIST** ITEM #0969051A CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM** ITEM #0969064A CONSTRUCTION FIELD OFFICE, LARGE ITEM #0971001A MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC ITEM #0980101A CONSTRUCTION STAKING (SITE 1) ITEM #0992033A ELECTRICAL WORK ITEM #0999002A DISPOSAL OF BUILDINGS ITEM #1003997A REMOVE POLE ITEM #1014901A REMOVE CABLE ITEM #1019030A REMOVE AERIAL CABLE ITEM #1015034A GROUNDING AND BONDING ITEM #1020005A WOOD POLE (45 FEET) ITEM #1206094A RELOCATION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING SIGNING ITEM #1301082A 8” DUCTILE IRON PIPE (WATER MAIN) ITEM #1301084A 12” DUCTILE IRON PIPE (WATER MAIN) ITEM #1302004A 8” GATE VALVE ITEM #1302006A 12” GATE VALVE ITEM #1302918A PRECAST CONCRETE VALVE VAULT (WATER MAIN) ITEM #1303204A HYDRANT ASSEMBLY (WATER MAIN) ITEM #1304083A POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT OF PIPE (WATER MAIN) ITEM #1302047A RESET GATE BOXES ITEM #1500006A UTILITY ADJUSTMENT (ESTIMATED COST PLUS) ITEM #1501900A UNDERGROUND PROPANE GAS LINE ITEM #1501901A RELOCATE PROPANE GAS TANKS ITEM #1504010A TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF UTILITIES * TO BE PROVIDED BY ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT PRIOR TO BID DOCUMENTS ** TO BE UPDATED BY PROGRAM MANAGER PRIOR TO BID DOCUMENTS *** TO BE COMPLETED BY CTDOT PRIOR TO BID DOCUMENTS

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000190A

ITEM #0000190A – NON-DESTRUCTIVE UTILITY INVESTIGATION

Description: This item shall consist of investigating and locating utilities using non-destructive methods, using the services of a professional utility locating company in accordance with this specification. This item shall include the field survey/location, field paint/stake marking, and color marking of the located utilities onto a clean set of contract drawings as directed by the Engineer.

Equipment and Materials:

General:

The Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment and materials needed to identify underground utilities through the use of non-destructive methods such as ground penetrating radar, magnetic or electrical detectors, and other such scanning methods.

Construction:

General:

The locations of utilities present shall first be reviewed on the plans and in the field, reconciling all surface evidence of utilities (such as gate valves, manholes, handholes, etc) with what is depicted on the plans. The professional utility location company shall use this information to conduct the non-destructive locating, using the method appropriate to the utility being investigated. Types of utilities which require locating shall include, but not be limited to, gas lines, water lines, sewer lines, drainage lines, electrical conduits/wires/cables/duct banks and fiber optic cables, including related structures such as valves, handholes and manholes. In addition to the above, all areas subject to excavation or subsurface work for the Project shall be investigated for the presence of subsurface utilities regardless of existing utilities indicated on the plans.

Marking and Labeling:

All located utilities shall be tagged, marked, or labeled in the field using standard industrial/engineering/construction methods such as spray paint, stakes, vertical markers, labels, ribbons, identification tapes etc.

1

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000190A

Marking Plans:

All located utilities shall be marked onto a clean set of project plans and submitted to the Designer. The colors, patterns and/or symbols shall comply with current industrial/engineering/construction design standards. The limits of this work will correspond to the limit of work shown on the contract plans.

Coordination of Work:

Some work as shown on the contract plans will be performed within the New Haven Rail Yard Facility which consists of territory operated by Metro-North Railroad. The work must be accomplished simultaneously with ongoing daily railroad operations. The Contactor shall coordinate the professional utility locating Subcontractor’s activities with the Designer and Metro-North Railroad. Refer to the General Conditions of the Contract.

Method of Measurement: Utility investigation shall not be measured for payment. Utility investigation shall include all work as specified in this Special Provision.

Basis of Payment:

Payment will be made at the contract lump sum price for non-destructive utility investigation, performed by a professional utility location company hired by the Contractor, and accepted by the Designer. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this item.

Pay Item Pay Unit Non-Destructive Utility Investigation LS

2

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000426A, #0000545A, #1115010A

ITEM #0000426A – ELECTRIC HANDHOLE

ITEM #0000545A – 5” PVC DUCT BANKS – 2 DUCTS

ITEM #1115010A – 5” POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT

Description:

Scope:

A. This Section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and site-specific detailed design of concrete-encased duct banks, direct buried conduits, and precast concrete handholes as indicated on the Plans.

B. The Contractor shall perform additional underground exploratory investigations as indicated on the Plans (i.e., test pits, utility detection services, etc.) or as directed the Engineer to determine a clear path/space for all new underground duct banks, direct buried conduits and handholes. Revisions are to be made to the relevant Plans by the Contractor based on the underground exploratory investigations. These alterations are to be submitted to the Designer, along with the accompanying profile and detail drawings, for approval prior to proceeding with the work in the field.

Related Sections:

Related requirements are included in, but not limited to, the following:

A. Non-Destructive Utility Investigation

B. Trench Excavation Items

C. Special Provisions for Wire and Cable

D. Temporary Support of Utilities

3

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000426A, #0000545A, #1115010A

References:

A. All work furnished under this Section shall be in accordance with the latest applicable standards of ASTM, NEMA, UL, and National Electrical Code with regard to material, design, construction and testing, except for any specific variations provided in this Section. The standards applicable shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

Organization Number Title AASHTO M199 Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections AASHTO HS20-44 Live Loads for Highway Bridges

ASTM A48 Gray Iron Casting ASTM A438 Transverse Bending Test

ASTM C136 Coarse Aggregates ASTM C150 Portland Cement ASTM C827 Early Volume Change of Cementitious Mixtures

NEMA TC-6 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utility Ducts for Underground Installations

ANSI C80.1 Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit

Submittals:

The Contractor shall submit the following:

A. Catalog data on metallic and non-metallic conduit, all conduit couplings and fittings, conduit stands, cable support material, waterproofing sealer, pull string, detectable warning tape, conduit bonding agents, and concrete curing compound.

B. Shop drawings of handholes including layout of cable accessories. The Contractor shall not commence the installation of the handhole until the drawings are approved by the Designer.

C. Conduit Stub-Up Plans: Include all locations where conduit transitions from below-grade to above-grade.

D. Detailed as-built survey plan and profile drawings for duct banks, conduits and precast structures.

Materials:

Precast Handholes:

A. Casting: May be constructed monolithically or in sections. All structures shall be watertight. Splices in structures shall be suitable for submersible use. If the structure is

4

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000426A, #0000545A, #1115010A

constructed in sections, the joint between sections shall be made watertight with an approved hydrocarbon resistant gasket or with an approved epoxy mortar grout.

B. Access openings: shall be centered in the roof slab and This shall be constructed in size and shape to accommodate the cast iron cover and frame as shown on the Plans.

C. Penetrations: duct bank knockouts or termaducts shall be centered in the walls, unless otherwise noted. Grounding rod shall be as indicated on the Plans.

D. Size: Minimum inside dimensions of handholes shall be as indicated on the Plans.

E. Design Loads: Handhole design loads shall consist of live loads, live load impact, dead load, soil loads, and any other expected loads that may occur.

1. Live loads shall be for HS-20 for handholes.

2. Impact loading shall be 30 percent of the live loads.

3. Soil loads shall consist of an earth cover over manhole/handhole from zero (0) feet minimum to five (5) feet maximum. Average unit weight of earth shall be assumed to be 130 lbs. per cubic feet.

F. The final production shop drawings and calculations shall be approved and signed by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered in the State of Connecticut.

G. Concrete: Cement for concrete shall be Portland cement, meeting the requirements of ASTM C150, Type I or Type II. Concrete shall be thoroughly cured and shall attain a compressive strength of at least 5,000 psi prior to delivery.

H. Concrete Reinforcing: Bars shall be in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and per current industry standards.

I. Pulling Irons / Utility Anchors: 7/8-inch minimum diameter galvanized steel pulling irons which shall be cast into the manhole walls and not penetrate completely through manhole walls.

J. Exterior Surfaces: Refer to waterproofing within this specification.

Handhole Frames and Covers:

A. Handhole frames and covers shall be cast from gray iron in accordance with the applicable requirements of ASTM A48, Class 35. Inscription on handhole covers shall be as indicated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. All frames and covers shall be rated “heavy duty” or stronger. All castings shall, at a minimum, withstand AASHTO HS-20 traffic loading. The transverse bending test shall be considered the primary test for qualification and shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A-438.

5

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000426A, #0000545A, #1115010A

B. Cleaning and Inspection:

1. All castings which have passed the required tests shall be thoroughly cleaned, inside and out, without the aid of acid or other liquid, and shall be subjected to careful inspection and hammer tests.

2. The castings shall be of the dimensions indicated on the Plans and shall be free from sand or blowholes and cold shuts. No plugging or stopping of holes will be allowed. Casting lines and excess materials shall be ground smooth.

Cable Accessories

A. The Contractor shall furnish handhole hardware, as specified hereinafter, or approved equal. Drop-in anchors shall have a 1/2-13 thread, a rated pullout working capacity of at least 2100 pounds and shall be made from either 303 or 316 stainless steel. A 316 stainless steel 1/2-13 hex head cap screw and a 316 stainless steel flat washer shall be used with each drop-in anchor.

Waterproofing

A. All exterior surfaces of handholes shall be waterproofed with an elastomeric membrane. Membrane shall be hydrocarbon resistant, rubber reinforced asphalt which forms a highly elastomeric waterproof coating, as manufactured by Karnak Corporation “229AR Elastomeric,” or approved equal. The membrane shall be shop applied and touched up in the field as required to repair damage during shipping and to seal field penetrations. Membrane shall be applied at a minimum rate of 4 gallons per 100 sq. ft. to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 40 mils. Joints and cracks shall be filled and reinforced per manufacturer’s recommendations.

Aggregate Base: A. Aggregate bases for handholes shall be gradation No. 6 crushed stone at depths as

indicated in the Plans.

Grout: A. Non-shrinking, non-metallic grout shall be in accordance with ASTM C150 premixed

compound capable of minimum compression strength of 5,000 pounds per square inch (psi).

B. Water shall be clean and free from deleterious substances.

C. Non-metallic non-shrinking grout shall be factory pre-mixed requiring only water addition in the field.

6

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000426A, #0000545A, #1115010A

D. Shrinkage, if any, shall be in accordance with ASTM C827.

Underground Duct Work:

A. All underground duct work shall be schedule 80 PVC unless noted otherwise.

B. All bends shall be large radius, 48 inches minimum.

C. All duct bank and direct buried conduit stub-up conduits, stub-up conduit sweeps, and 90 degree bends shall Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS).

D. All exposed stub-up conduits with conductors shall have the void around the conductor seal with UL listed moldable duct seal compound. All exposed sub-up conduits without conductors shall be capped.

E. Duct sizes shall be as indicated on the Plans. F. Reinforcement is required continuously for entire run of ductbank and arranged as

depicted on the Plans. G. Concrete Encasement: Concrete encasement for these duct banks shall contain Class “C”

concrete as specified within Section M.03 of the Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall use any means deemed acceptable by the Engineer to construct the duct bank to the dimensions and grades as shown on the plans. Trench forming will be considered an acceptable method.

H. Conduits: PVC and RGS conduits and fittings shall be as specified herein. Asbestos

cement conduit or fittings are prohibited. I. Separators: Conduit separators or spacers shall be non-metallic and of the type

recommended by the conduit manufacturer. J. Pull rope: Pull tape shall be 1/8 inch width minimum, prelubricated nylon with a

minimum strength of 1250 lbs and marked with durable text providing sequential footage.

Backfill

A. Backfill material shall be in accordance with applicable parts of the Contract Documents and approved by the Engineer.

Marker

A. Duct Bank Markers: markers shall be located at the ends of all conduit runs except at structures, at approximately every 200 feet along the conduit run, and at each change in direction of the conduit run. Markers shall be placed approximately 2 feet to the right of

7

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000426A, #0000545A, #1115010A

the conduit when facing the longitudinal axis of the run and in the direction of the electrical load. Markers shall be made of Class “C” concrete as specified within Section M.03 of the Standard Specifications. Markers shall be a 6 inch square or round section by 2 feet long. The top edges of the marker shall have a 1/2 inch chamfer all around. The letter “D” with two arrows shall be impressed or cast on top of the marker. One arrow shall be located below the letter and shall point toward the ducts. The second arrow shall be located adjacent to the letter and shall point in a direction parallel to the ducts. The letter and the arrows shall be V shaped and shall have a width of stroke at least 1/4 inch at the top, and depth of 1/4 inch. The top of the markers shall be flush with the adjacent elevation of the paved or unpaved areas. Where the duct bank changes direction, the arrow located adjacent to the letter shall be cast or impressed with an angle in the arrow approximately the same as the angular change of the run.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Warning tape shall meet the requirement set forth in the Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.05.15 – Facilities Construction – Markings for Underground Facilities and comply with APWA color code requirements. The warning tape shall be acid and alkali-resistant with a minimum tape thickness of 5.0 mils. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 5,800 psi, and a maximum 80 percent elongation.

Construction Methods: Excavation and Backfill

A. Excavation and backfill shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Engineer.

Installation of Handholes

A. The Contractor shall install handholes as indicated on the Plans and as approved by the Designer.

B. Prior to burial and installation, ensure waterproofing has been applied and allowed to cure completely per manufacturer requirements. field-apply two (2) coats of concrete sealer to exposed exterior surfaces of the handhole around the duct bank penetrations, conduit penetrations, frame, and field joints. Sealer shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and must be of high quality to prevent water entry.

C. Handhole cover and frame shall be installed as shown on the approved shop drawings. Cover frame shall be adjusted level and flush with finished grade.

D. Weld handhole identification names to each cover. The identification names shall be as depicted on the Contract Drawings or as directed by Engineer.

8

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000426A, #0000545A, #1115010A

E. Install a ground rod per details and seal around ground rod with grout. Bond ground rod to metallic cable supports, rigid steel conduit terminations and other metallic components with bare copper cable as depicted on the Contract Drawings or as directed by Engineer.

F. Connections to handholes: Duct bank envelopes connecting to handholes shall be flared toward the inside or keyed to provide for a positive interlock between the duct bank and the wall of the handhole. Vibrators shall be used when this portion of the envelope is poured to assure a seal between the envelope and the wall of the handhole.

Installation of Conduits and Duct Banks

A. Conduits shall be installed as shown on the Plans. Duct bank configuration may be adapted to route obstructions such as underground utilities per the Designer’s approval; such adaptations may include rotating and fanning out of ducts.

B. Conduits: Minimum burial depth of duct bank from final grade to top of concrete shall be 18 inches when not under track, and 36 inches from the bottom of tie to the top of concrete when located under tracks. The Contractor shall coordinate installation of conduits with the Designer.

C. The manufacturer’s directions shall be followed in placing all conduits, fittings, supports and spacers, and in compensating for temperature effects.

D. Spacers shall be placed at not greater than five (5) feet intervals on center. Use of metallic spacers will not be permitted. Spacer system shall be designed to support duct bank longitudinal reinforcing bars. Unless noted otherwise on the Plans, install one (1) #5 longitudinal reinforcement bar through the spacers at each of the four outer corners of the duct bank, providing a minimum of one (1) inch of concrete cover over the bars.

E. For concrete-encased duct banks, the Contractor shall completely encase the duct bank without disturbing its vertical or horizontal alignment or damaging the conduits.

F. The exposed surface of duct encasement concrete shall be floated smooth after placement, and an approved curing compound shall be applied in conformance with the concrete manufacturer’s recommendations.

G. At all stages of the work, the Contractor shall exercise care to prevent foreign materials from entering the ducts.

H. Following installation, each conduit shall be thoroughly cleaned and then tested by the successful pulling of a brush and mandrel approved by the Engineer. The mandrel shall be not less than ¼ inch smaller than the inside nominal diameter of the conduit. The Contractor shall give the Engineer 24 hours notice prior to witness the cleaning and testing.

I. The pull rope shall be installed in each conduit run and secured at each end.

9

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000426A, #0000545A, #1115010A

J. All conduit terminations shall be plugged using approved removable plugs.

K. Warning tape is to be installed in the fill over all duct banks at a minimum depth of one (1) foot above the duct bank and as required by the Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.05.15 – Facilities Construction – Markings for Underground Facilities. This tape shall be over the longitudinal centerline of the duct banks.

L. Pulling tension of cable shall not exceed the cable manufacturer’s recommendations.

M. Partially Completed Duct banks: During construction, wherever a construction joint is necessary in a duct bank, without exception always prevent debris such as mud, sand, and dirt from entering ducts by providing suitable conduit plugs. Fit concrete envelope of a partially completed duct bank with reinforcing steel extending a minimum of twenty-four (24) inches back into the envelope and a minimum of twenty-four (24) inches beyond the end of the envelope. Provide the rebar as required per the Contract Documents in each corner, three (3) inches from the edge of the envelope. Secure corner bars with two No. 3 ties, spaced approximately four (4) inches apart. Restrain reinforcing assembly from moving during concrete pouring.

N. Conduit Plugs and Pull Rope: New conduit indicated as being unused or empty shall be provided with plugs on each end. Plugs shall contain a weephole or screen to allow water drainage. Provide a plastic pull rope having thirty-six (36) inches of slack at each end of unused or empty conduits.

O. Duct bank and conduits shall slope down to prevent collection of water inside the conduit unless otherwise directed by Engineer due to project site constraints.

Method of Measurement:

A. Conduit and Duct Banks will be measured on a per “linear foot” basis. Measurement shall not occur until the task is complete, backfilled, proofed, and pull-strings installed.

B. Handholes will be measured on a per “each” basis completely installed, electrically grounded, and fully connected to the incoming/outgoing duct banks and ready for the installation of cable.

Basis of Payment:

A. Conduit and Duct Banks will be paid for at the Contract unit price bid. This price shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials and tools required to perform this work.

B. Handholes will be paid for at the Contract unit price bid. This price shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials and tools required to perform this work.

10

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000426A, #0000545A, #1115010A

C. Trench Excavation, Rock-in-Trench Excavation, No. 6 Crushed Stone, Granular Fill and Suitable Backfill Material shall be paid separately under the applicable Items. Pay Item Pay Unit Electric Handhole EA. 5” PVC Duct Banks – 2 Ducts L.F. 5” Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit L.F.

11

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000461A, #0000462A, #0000463A, #0000468A #0000523A, 0000641A

ITEM #0000461A - 600V COPPER WIRE NO 8 AWG

ITEM #0000462A – 600V COPPER WIRE NO. 6 AWG

ITEM #0000463A – 600V COPPER WIRE NO. 4 AWG

ITEM #0000468A – 600V COPPER WIRE NO 4/0 AWG

ITEM #0000523A - 600V COPPER WIRE NO 500 KCMIL

ITEM #0000641A - 600V COPPER WIRE NO 250 KCMIL

Description:

Scope:

A. This specification section describes the furnishing and installation of cables, splices, terminations, and other materials as shown on the Plans and specified herein.

B. This specification section describes bare copper wire and 600VAC insulated copper wire.

Quality Assurance:

A. Cable Manufacturers’ Qualification: Not less than fifteen (15) years experience in the actual production of the specified products.

B. Workmanship shall conform to the best modern practices in the manufacturing of a rugged, durable, and safe product for use in a public transportation system. Materials used shall be new and of the highest commercial grade as specified.

C. The Insulated Cable shall be manufactured and tested under the control of a Quality Assurance system that conforms to the requirements of ISO 9000.

D. The Quality Assurance system shall demonstrate conformance to the above criteria by having passed yearly quality audits conducted by outside independent organizations.

Submittals:

The Contractor shall submit the following for review in accordance with Standard Specifications Section 1.20-1.05 at various stages of planning, manufacturing, and installation of cable and wire as requested:

A. Submit catalog data consisting of manufacturer’s standard catalog cuts, descriptive literature and diagrams, other pertinent information, and in sufficient detail so as to clearly

12

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000461A, #0000462A, #0000463A, #0000468A #0000523A, 0000641A

indicate compliance with all specified requirements and standards and Contract Documents for the following:

1. Wires and cables for each type and size

2. Splice kit materials and installation procedures.

B. Submit samples not less than twenty-four (24) inches in length, with five (5) copies of the notarized certified test reports of each type and size of wire and cable to be furnished for review and inspection prior to release.

C. Cable pulling plan showing cable feed and pulling winch locations, cable lengths, and calculated pulling tensions for each cable pull over 200 feet in length, or with a total of 180° or more of conduit bends.

D. Proposed cable lubricants and associated lubricating devices.

E. Proposed cable pulling equipment including cable grips, pulling rope, tensiometers, swivels, and cable pullers (winches).

F. Qualifications of all cable splicers proposed to be utilized for splicing work.

G. As-built lengths of all cable installed under this Contract.

H. Manufacturer's Certification: Manufacturer shall submit signed certification confirming that they comply with the qualifications requirements and shall provide evidence of experience upon request.

I. Product Certification: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products comply with the specified specification requirements.

J. Submit field test results for wires and cables, including megger readings with the method used.

Materials:

General:

A. Contractor will procure wire and cable from one of the approved manufacturers. The quantity and sizes purchased shall be decided by the designer based on the approved pulling plans submitted by the Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate with the manufacturers regarding paralleling of cables to be installed in the same raceways.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting the correct reel and cable segment for each pull. Errors in matching the appropriate reel and cable segment to each pull will be at the Contractor’s risk.

13

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000461A, #0000462A, #0000463A, #0000468A #0000523A, 0000641A

C. Wires and Cables shall be suitable for use in wet or dry locations, installation in underground ducts and in above-ground OCS feeder riser pole assemblies where they will be exposed to sunlight and weather.

D. Water-based, gel-type, high-performance cable-pulling lubricants shall be utilized in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations. Minimum pulling lubricant requirements shall include a UL Listing and a non-combustible residue.

E. Unless stated otherwise, all conductors shall be stranded.

F. The copper conductors shall be annealed after stranding on all compact cables of sizes larger than 500 kcmil.

G. Bare copper wire shall be as shown on the Plans.

600 V Wires and Cables:

A. Wires and cables shall be UL 44 Type RHW-2 unless noted otherwise. All wires, cables, splices, and terminations, for which there are established UL standards, shall bear the UL label.

B. Conductor:

1. Single conductor wires and cables shall be ASTM B8 Class B stranded, 600 V, sizes and number as required or as shown on the Plans.

C. Insulation:

1. 600V class insulation shall be EPR insulated and shall meet or exceed the requirements of NEMA WC 70 and UL 44.

D. Jacket:

1. Wires and cables for interior use: Flame-retardant, low-smoke density rating, ethylene propylene rubber insulation with overall heavy-duty thermosetting jackets conforming to NEMA WC 8, UL 44, and vertical tray flame test of UL 1581.

2. Wires and cables for exterior use shall be either of the following types:

a. Polyethylene insulation with individual and overall polyvinyl chloride jackets, conforming to NEMA WC 5.

b. Cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene insulation with overall polyvinyl chloride jackets, conforming to NEMA WC 7 and Vertical Tray Flame Test of UL 1581.

14

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000461A, #0000462A, #0000463A, #0000468A #0000523A, 0000641A

Manufacturers:

A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of this Section, the Contractor shall provide wire and cable splicing, termination, and arc-proofing materials from one of the following manufacturers, or approved equal:

1. Splicing, Terminating, and Arc-Proofing Materials: Square D Company; Thomas and Betts Corporation; Burndy Corporation; Cadweld (Erico Products, Inc.); Raychem Corporation; Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company (3M); MAC Products; Bishop Electric Corporation; Plymouth Rubber Company, Inc.; Okonite Company; Tyco.

B. The Contractor shall provide cables from one of the following manufacturers, or approved equal:

1. 600 V Wires and Cables: American Insulated Wire Corporation; Pirelli Cable Corporation; Okonite Company; BIW Cable Systems, Inc.; Rome Cable Corporation; Triangle PWC, Inc.; Cable-Insulated Cable Company; Brand Rex Company; Belden Wire and Cable; Aetna Insulated Wire Company.

Identification and Labeling:

A. The following information shall be printed on jacket, using contrasting indelible color ink, at intervals per NEMA WC 70 as applicable:

1. Conductor size and material

2. Voltage rating

3. Insulation type and thickness (mils)

4. Other appropriate conductor information

B. Color-Coding for Conductors:

1. Insulation or covering of wires and cables shall be factory color-coded by the use of colored compounds or coatings. The color code shall be followed consistently throughout the performance of the work.

2. Upon written request of Contractor, the Engineer may permit the use of other

methods of color coding, including the following methods in lieu of the wire or cable manufacturer's color coding, when limited quantities of wire and cable are involved, for sizes No. 8 AWG and larger. Method used shall conform to NEC and approved by the Engineer.

15

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000461A, #0000462A, #0000463A, #0000468A #0000523A, 0000641A

a. For dry locations only, spiral application of 3/4-inch wide, colored pressure sensitive plastic tape, half lapped for a distance of not less than six (6) inches may be used. To prevent unwinding, the last two wraps of tape shall be applied with no tension.

b. For wet or dry locations, application of three, 3/16-inch wide, colored,

fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, self-locking, nylon cable ties spaced three (3) inches apart may be used. The ties shall be snugly applied with a special tool or pliers, and any excess removed.

c. Each wire and cable shall be color-coded at all terminal points, manholes,

boxes, or other similar enclosures. d. Color markings shall be applied so as not to obliterate the manufacturer's

identification markings.

C. Wire and Cable Tags:

1. Dry Locations:

a. Fiberglass tags, 3/4-inch wide, minimum, indented with letters and numbers 5/16-inch high, with No. 14 AWG copper or nylon, weather-resistant cable ties.

b. Single conductor signal and control wiring may be identified with

"Quiklabels" manufactured by W.H. Brady Company, or approved equal.

2. Wet Locations: Stainless steel metal tags, No. 28 gauge and 3/4-inch wide, minimum, embossed with letters and numbers 5/16-inch high, with No. 14 AWG copper or nylon, weather-resistant cable ties, or stainless steel cable ties.

Grounding Wires and Cables:

Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, grounding conductors shall be as follows:

A. Insulated:

1. Solid for sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller; ASTM B8, Class B stranded for sizes No. 8 AWG and larger; and of the same insulation type as the power conductors.

2. Covering shall be a continuous green color and conform to ASTM B33 and UL 44.

B. Uninsulated:

1. General: Solid for sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller; ASTM B8, Class B, stranded for sizes No. 8 AWG and larger.

16

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000461A, #0000462A, #0000463A, #0000468A #0000523A, 0000641A

2. In raceways: Soft drawn and conforming to ASTM B3.

3. Direct buried or encased in concrete: Soft drawn, medium-hard drawn, or hard drawn and conforming to ASTM B1, B2, or B3, respectively.

Splicing, Terminating, and Arc-Proofing Materials:

A. Connectors: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, provide connectors of the following types:

1. Solderless, uninsulated, high-conductivity, corrosion-resistant, compression connectors conforming to UL 467.

2. Insulated, indenter-type compression butt connectors.

3. Insulated, integral self-locking flexible shell, expandable spring connectors.

4. Uninsulated, indenter-type compression pigtail connectors.

5. Welded-type connectors.

B. Terminals: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, provide terminals of the following types:

1. Insulated, compression terminals.

2. Solderless, high-conductivity, corrosion-resistant, hex screw-type, bolted terminals.

C. Tapes and Sealers:

1. Vinyl Tapes: Flame retardant, cold and weather-resistant, 3/4-inch or 1-1/2-inches wide, as required, and conforming to UL 510 and ASTM D 3005.

a. For interior, dry locations, provide seven mils, conforming to ASTM D3005 (Type 1); Scotch (3M) No. 33, or approved equal.

b. For exterior or damp and wet locations, provide 8.5 mils, conforming to ASTM D3005 (Type II); Scotch (3M) No. 88, or approved equal.

D. Resin Filled Splices:

1. Epoxy Molded Type: Two-piece, snap-together molded bodies, sized for wire or cable, with two-part low velocity polyurethane insulating and sealing compound, rated for 600 V, using crimp-type wire connector; Scotch (3M) No. 87-A1, 87-A2 or 87-A3 compound, or approved equal.

17

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000461A, #0000462A, #0000463A, #0000468A #0000523A, 0000641A

2. Re-Enterable Type: Transparent, molded bodies clamped with stainless steel strain relief bar and shield continuity connectors, sized for wire or cable, with loosely woven polyester spacer web and jelly-like urethane formulation for permanent re-entry capability; Scotch (3M) No. 78-R1 through 78-R5, with No. 2114 compound, or approved equal.

E. Special splicing materials and methods shall be as shown on the Plans.

F. Grounding Wires and Cables:

1. In hazardous or classified locations, splices and terminations shall be solderless, high conductivity, corrosion resistant, compression type connectors and terminations shall be clamp type pressure connectors suitable for such use.

2. All underground connections shall be covered with two coats of asphalt base paint.

G. Control Wires and Cables:

1. Splice shall be enclosed in a re-enterable splicing case. Where shielded cable is shown on the Plans, the shielding shall be continued through the space. Shields shall be grounded at one location only unless otherwise shown on the Plans.

2. Terminations shall be insulated, indenter-type ring tongue terminals.

Construction Methods:

Shipping, Storage, and Handling:

A. Wire and cable shall be packaged in accordance with NEMA WC 26 and the requirements stated herein. Protective reel coverings shall be Level 3 or greater in accordance with NEMA WC 26.

B. Insulated Cable for this design package shall be furnished in accordance with the Plans and with the following requirements:

1. A watertight seal shall be applied to each end of the cable to prevent moisture ingress during shipment or outdoor storage. The manufacturer shall provide factory-applied caps to wire and cable sizes No. 4/0 AWG and larger unless otherwise shown on the Plans. End seals shall be heat-shrink, irradiated, modified polyolefin, and shall be sized for individual wires and cables.

2. A durable, weatherproof label shall be securely attached to the outside of both flanges of each reel. Each label shall indicate the following:

a. Purchase order number

b. Name and address of manufacturer

18

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000461A, #0000462A, #0000463A, #0000468A #0000523A, 0000641A

c. Reel number

d. Total length on reel

e. Description of wire and cable

f. Tare and total weight of reel and rolling direction.

C. All cable for this contract shall remain the property and responsibility of the manufacturer until it has been off-loaded at the designated storage facility in the presence of the Engineer, has been inspected by the Engineer, and has been approved in writing by the Engineer. Only after written approval by the Engineer will the cable become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor reserves the right to reject any reels that appear to have been damaged in transit. Damaged, defective or missing cable will be replaced by the manufacturer at no additional cost to the Contractor.

D. Single conductor wire or cable sizes No. 4/0 AWG and larger that are to be installed in the same raceway shall be paralleled by the cable manufacturer before shipment. Cable assembly overall diameter shall be kept to a minimum.

Preparation:

A. Prior to pulling wires and cables, clean raceway systems of all foreign matter and perform all operations necessary so as not to cause damage to wires and cables while pulling.

B. Prior to pulling wires and cables into underground conduit systems, place a feeding tube approved by the Engineer at the entrance of such systems.

Installation Requirements:

A. Double-braided pulling rope shall be used for all pulls; the use of steel cable for cable pulling is not permitted.

B. Keep wires and cable dry at all times.

C. Wire and cable ends shall be properly sealed before being pulled into ducts. The ends shall not be left with insulation exposed after cutting unless splicing is to be performed immediately.

D. Wire or cable shall be installed directly from reel or coil and shall not be allowed to drag along the ground.

E. Strip all nails from outside edges of reel heads before pulling of cable. Conveniently locate reels for feeding cable into the duct without excessive bending or possible injury to cable by abrasion. Reels shall be jacked to clear ground level or obstructions by at least six (6) inches before pulling of cable.

19

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000461A, #0000462A, #0000463A, #0000468A #0000523A, 0000641A

F. Pre-lubricate the ducts utilizing pumps, “front-end packs”, and duct swabs where required to fully lubricate the entire length of duct in front of the advance of the wire or cable. Continuously apply pulling lubricant to the cable itself at the duct entrance during the pull.

G. Attach pulling ropes to cables with approved grips and swivels to prevent twisting of cable during pulling. The use of break-away swivels is not permitted.

H. Pull wire and cable into ducts and conduits under moderate tension. Manufacturers' recommended maximum pulling tension and minimum bending radius shall not be exceeded. Pulling tension shall be continuously monitored by an approved measuring device (tensiometer) equipped with a chart or digital recorder. Copies of the pulling tension chart recordings shall be provided to the Engineer for each pull.

I. Station sufficient personnel between the reel and the duct entrance during pulling operations to inspect, control and direct the passage of the wire and cable. Utilize split nylon tube-type duct shields and cable-feeding tubes to prevent chafing of the duct entrance and the cable.

J. Do not permit wire and cable to chafe on the ground, ballast, manhole edges, or any sharp surfaces. Provide timbers and flexible cable-pulling tubes to guide and protect the cable where necessary.

K. Wires and cables shall be arranged and neatly racked along the manhole walls. Provide sufficient bends and freedom of horizontal motion to accommodate normal cable thermal expansion and contraction. “Straight through” cable installations, without the additional bends and racking noted above, will not be permitted.

L. Before splicing or terminating wires and cables, make a thorough inspection to determine that water has not entered the wires and cables or that the wires and cables have not been damaged.

L. Identification of Wires and Cables:

1. Each wire and cable shall be identified by its circuit in all cabinets, boxes, manholes, wireways and other enclosures and access locations, and at all terminal points.

2. The circuit designations shall be as shown on the Plans or as requested by the owner. Tags shall be attached to wires and cables in such a manner as to be readily visible.

3. The tag ties shall be wrapped around all conductors compromising the circuit or feeder to be identified.

4. Wires and cables that are arc-proofed shall also be identified outside the applied arc proofing.

20

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000461A, #0000462A, #0000463A, #0000468A #0000523A, 0000641A

Cable Warranty:

A. The Contractor shall agree to replace any length of cable installed by the Contractor which fails during normal use within one year of the date of being placed in service, provided immediate written notice of such failure is given to the Contractor with all reasonable opportunity provided thereto to inspect such failure.

B. The date of placing into service shall be interpreted as the date on which the operating voltage is first continuously applied to the completed cable installation.

Field Tests:

A. Inspect wires and cables at terminations and pull boxes for physical damage and proper connection.

B. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor.

C. The Contractor shall test all 600 V wires and cables installed under this Contract with a 1,000 V megohmmeter/Megger. Furnish the Engineer with a copy of the megger readings together with an outline of the method used. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any reading is lower than that required by applicable codes, promptly replace the materials involved, at Contractor's expense, and retest.

E. Acceptance Tests: After installation of the entire length of cable, the Contractor shall perform the tests listed below on each cable. To preclude damage to equipment and devices, the tests shall be conducted before the cable is terminated at electrical equipment. If terminations have already been made, cables shall be disconnected from the equipment for testing and shall be reconnected after completion of tests.

1. Insulation Resistance Test:

a. This test shall be performed to determine continuity and the cable insulation resistance to ground.

b. Tests shall be conducted with a motor-driven megger. Test voltage shall be applied between the conductor and ground and shall be held until the reading reaches a constant value for five (5) minutes. Insulation resistance values obtained by the megger tests shall not be less than two megohms at 1000 V. Contractor shall bring to the attention of the Engineer the results of similar tests having unequal readings with the variations of twenty-five (25) percent or more.

c. For each test, the Contractor shall record the temperature, humidity and duration of the test.

2. Phasing Test:

21

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0000461A, #0000462A, #0000463A, #0000468A #0000523A, 0000641A

a. Phasing test shall be performed to establish the phase identification of the conductors of a cable for the purpose of phasing.

F. Defective Cables:

1. Any cable installed under this Contract found defective during the testing shall be replaced with new cable at the expense of the Contractor.


Unless otherwise directed on the Contract Drawings, all bare copper wires and 600 V insulated wires and cables will be measured on a per “linear foot” basis, completely installed, spliced, tested, terminated and ready for use.

Basis of Payment:

Installation of all bare copper wires and 600 V insulated wires and cables will be paid for at the Contract unit price bid. This price shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, and tools required to perform this work, including the splices and terminations.

Pay Item Pay Unit

600V Copper Wire No. 8 AWG L.F. 600V Copper Wire No. 6 AWG L.F. 600V Copper Wire No. 4 AWG L.F. 600V Copper Wire No. 4/0 AWG L.F. 600V Copper Wire No. 500 kcmil L.F. 600V Copper Wire No. 250 kcmil L.F.

22

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

ITEM #0090042A - CATENARY SYSTEMS

ITEM #0090045A - AERIAL GROUND WIRE SYSTEM

Description: Scope: A. The work of this Section covers the application design, furnishing, installation, testing

and placing into service the catenary, traction power feeder and ground wire systems, based on the details shown in the Contract Documents.

B. The individual systems as shown in the Contract Drawings and described herein,

comprise the conductors complete with insulated and non-insulated supporting assemblies, hangers, jumpers, sectionalizing assemblies, termination assemblies, crossing wire arrangements and all connectors, splices, in-span components, hardware and all other fittings and miscellaneous steel assemblies necessary to complete and place into service each wire run, as indicated in the Contract Drawings and in any supplemental approved construction plans prepared by the Contractor.

C. The Contractors work also includes coordination with the MNR for necessary outages for

performing the work and for any catenary, power distribution, or grounding systems work to be performed by MNR forces at the project segment interfaces, as required to accomplish the construction work and place the systems in operation. The Contractors work also includes coordination with other Contractors performing work within the project area.

D. The Contractor is alerted to the constraints imposed on installation of the catenary system

due to the necessity for maintaining revenue railroad operations. Installation, adjustment and pre-operation inspections of the constructed segments shall be performed within the periods of agreed line outages, or other times as agreed by the MNR.

E. Insulators:

1. The design, manufacture, and supply of insulators for the catenary and traction power systems, including, but not limited to suspension, strain, and stand-off insulators, as shown on the Contract Plans and specified herein.

2. Insulators shall be incorporated into support, registration, termination and “in-

span” and other assemblies comprising the Catenary and Traction Power Systems as shown on the plans and specified herein.

23

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

F. Grounding and Bonding Systems:

1. The design, furnishing, installing and testing of the grounding and bonding systems for the electric traction system, as depicted in the contract Documents and specified herein.

2. Grounding and bonding of electric traction facilities includes, but is not limited

to: a. Bonding new and modified existing catenary steelwork to the aerial

ground wire and/or ground wire as shown on the plans. b. Bonding and grounding of personnel ground mats to earth, disconnect

switch operating rods and disconnect switch supporting steel at all disconnect switch locations as shown on the plans.

3. The work also includes the application design, furnishing, installing and testing of

temporary grounding and bonding systems required to connect temporary supporting steelwork installed by the Contractor for his staging work.

G. Fittings and Hardware:

1. This Section covers the design, manufacture and supply of ferrous and non-ferrous metal material, hardware and fittings for use individually, and in the various assemblies comprising the catenary systems, traction power supply systems, aerial ground wire systems and grounding and bonding systems.

2. The Contractor is advised that high-strength alloy shackles and turnbuckles are

specified and to be furnished on this Project. The Contractor is responsible for insuring that these high-strength alloy shackles and turnbuckles are furnished and installed in the Project work as per plans and specifications. The procurement and correct use of non-alloy turnbuckles and shackles shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3. The work includes but is not limited to the following:

Hanger assemblies Wire crossing assembly Clevis - tongue fittings Clevis-clevis fittings Parallel wire clamps Nuts, bolts, washers, keys and cotter pins Shackles Links and eyebolts Messenger, contact and span, wire terminations and turnbuckles Double clevis end fittings Thimbles

24

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

Wire sleeves Wire splices Messenger suspension clamps and span wire supports Span wire clamps Wire connectors Full tension compression joint fittings Strain clamps Wire knuckles Anti-torsion pipe hangers

H. Catenary Assemblies:

1. Work under these items covers the manufacture, supply and installation of the following types of catenary support and registration assemblies.

Pull-off and push-off cantilevers - all types for one or more

catenaries Two track cantilevers for one or more catenaries Multi-track cross-catenary and cross-span support and registration

assemblies Multi-track steady wire registration assemblies Cross-catenary assemblies Wire pull-off registration assemblies for one or more catenaries Termination assemblies

2. The Contractor shall design, manufacture, supply, fabricate and install all

assemblies as indicated on the Contract Plans, as necessary to provide a complete, reliable and safe system.

I. Stainless Steel Wire Rope and Rods:

1. This Specification covers the supply of stainless steel wire rope and rod as shown on the Contract Plans. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following:

Cantilever nose hangers Stainless steel catenary hangers Supporting rods for signage

J. Uninsulated Wires:

1. This Specification covers the supply of uninsulated wires as shown on the plans. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following:

Messenger Wires

25

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

Contact Wires Catenary Jumper Wires Traction Power Aerial Feeder and Jumper Wires Aerial Ground Wires Cross Span Wires Pull-Off Wires Steady Wires

2. Supply all applicable bare conductors and wires for the new electric traction

facilities in accordance with the requirements specified in the Contract Plans and these Technical Specifications.

Related Sections, Notices and References: A. Related Bid Item Sections

High Speed Section Insulators Guy Assemblies Modifications and Additions to Existing Catenary Systems Disconnect Switch and Sectionalizing Jumper Taps Inspection and Testing

B. References:

1. The Contract Drawings and pertinent provisions of all applicable Codes and Standards, as referenced in other Sections of the Specifications, shall apply to the work of this Section, and are hereby made a part of this Specification to the extent required.

C. If other types of materials are proposed, the Contractor shall, along with the product

description, submit the relevant standards and information on that material for approval of the Engineer.

Meetings & Coordination: A. Conduct a Pre-Installation Meeting at the Project Site in compliance with the

requirements of Standard Specifications. B. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with the Engineer and with the work of other

Contractors to assure no interference to train operations, other than work planned.

C. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with MNR and affiliate rail operators within the New Haven Rail Yard to ensure impact to ongoing operations is minimized.

26

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

Submittals: A. Catenary Assemblies:

1. At least forty five (45) days prior to commencing the installation work, the Contractor shall submit for review, a Systems Installation Plan. This plan shall indicate the sequence, methods, procedures and permanent and temporary materials and equipment proposed for construction and pre-revenue operation inspections of each element of the individual systems to be built. The plan shall contain sufficient detail to allow assessment by the MNR.

B. The Installation Plan shall demonstrate maintenance of operations and compliance with

the railroad’s requirements for work over or adjacent to the railroad. C. The Contractor shall prepare and submit completely detailed allocation drawings,

component shop drawings, assembly and sub-assembly drawings and required certification for all Contractor-furnished components for each system, based on designs shown in the Contract Drawings and MNR’s approved Standards for Electric Traction Facilities. Any deviation from these criteria, or supplements thereto, shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer. Fabrication of components shall not proceed until the shop drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer.

D. The Contractor shall revise or submit supplemental details of the Systems Installation

Plan, as requested by the Engineer. E. The Contractor shall submit a Testing Plan as per Catenary Assemblies, for approval of

the Engineer. F. Provide sufficient detail and clarity so that the work can be properly controlled and

interfaced, and the Engineer can readily monitor and follow progress for all portions of the work. The Contractor shall comply with the various limits imposed by the construction staging and by any contractually specified milestone and completion dates. Limit activity durations to achieve the milestones as agreed. The degree of detail shall be to the satisfaction of the designer.

G. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe and successful construction of the work.

Construction Drawings requiring original design which is the responsibility of the Contractor, shall bear the seal of a professional engineer registered in the State of Connecticut who was in responsible charge of the design.

H. All submittals shall be made sufficiently in advance of the fabrication associated with the

temporary and permanent construction, to permit review by the designer.

27

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

I. If drawings show variations from the Contract requirements for any reason, describe such variations in the letter of transmittal. If acceptable, the designer may approve any or all such variations, subject to a proper adjustment in the Contract. If the Contractor fails to describe such variations he shall not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even though such drawings have been accepted. Drawings or schedules submitted showing minor departures from the Contract requirements which do not involve a change in the Contract price or time for performance may be accepted at the discretion of the designer.

J. Insulators:

1. For Insulators, Manufacturer's certification shall be provided showing compliance with the applicable requirements of the referenced Standards, these Specifications and the Contract Plans, as follows:

a. Steel analysis b. Hot dip galvanizing c. Adhesive materials d. Insulator materials e. In-service record of proposed insulators f. Certified quality control procedures used in the manufacturing process.

2. Insulator Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall be submitted prior to procurement

and fabrication. Included, as a minimum, shall be:

a. Electrical:

Creepage length (inches) Insulation level (impulse withstand test voltage, kV). Maximum working voltage (kV)

b. Mechanical:

Attachment centers or overall length (inches). Shed diameters (inches). Core diameters (inches). Breakdown of weights, insulator and fittings (pounds). Tensile withstand load (pounds). Tensioned strength (pounds). Cantilever withstand load (pound-inches). Recommended Maximum working tensile load (inch-pounds). Recommended Maximum working cantilever load (inch-pounds). Material (including end caps and touch-up insulator sealants).

c. Manufacturer's design mechanical and electrical safety factors.

28

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

d. Drawings of hardware and components. e. Listing and description of components and hardware. f. Weights (including weight of components). g. Storage and handling instructions.

3. Factory Test Reports

K. Grounding and Bonding Systems:

1. Reports of all field tests shall be submitted to the Engineer as required by these Specifications and referenced standards.

2. The Contractor shall submit product data including test results and relevant

drawings for all components proposed for use in the work of this Section. 3. Submit samples of mechanical and compression grounding connectors and

indicate the intended application. L. Fittings and Hardware:

1. Submit shop drawings for all components for approval prior to ordering or fabrication showing details and dimensions, and giving designations of the materials comprising the various components together with technical, mechanical and electrical characteristics as appropriate. Also submit details of the manufacturing methods and quality assurance and inspection procedures.

2. Samples of certain components shall be submitted, including: hanger assemblies,

wire crossing assembly, clevis-tongue fittings, clevis-clevis fittings, parallel wire clamps, thimbles, wire splices, wire connectors and full tension compression joint fittings. Samples of other items shall be submitted as may be directed by the Engineer.

M. Catenary Assemblies:

1. Within forty days of notice to proceed, a complete package of application design calculations, installation sequence, field measurements of existing structures, and component shop drawings and catalog cuts shall be assembled by the Contractor, for each type of catenary assembly, supporting device and associated attachments. This package shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and acceptance.

2. Furnish a certification verifying that all material included in the assemblies has

been manufactured, inspected and tested in accordance with the referenced standards and these specifications.

29

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

3. The Engineer reserves the right to check and inspect the manufacture, testing and

quality control procedures at any time. 4. Furnish complete manufacturer’s data and drawings. Furnish calculations for the

design of each component to demonstrate adequate load capacity of each item in the configuration.

N. Stainless Steel Wire Ropes and Rods:

1. Certification: Furnish certification verifying that the stainless steel wire rope, and rod have been designed, manufactured, inspected and tested in accordance with the referenced standards and these Specifications.

2. Test Reports: Furnish copies of reports of all factory tests as required by these

Specifications and referenced standards. 3. Manufacturer's Data: Furnish complete manufacturer's data and relevant

drawings. O. Uninsulated Wires:

1. Submit product data and relevant drawings for approval prior to wire manufacture. Included as a minimum shall be:

a. Physical Characteristics and Parameters: b. Size c. Type d. Material e. Number of and diameter of individual wires f. Overall diameter g. Cross section area h. Weight per foot i. Rated breaking load.

2. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Rated current carrying size (AWG/Kcmil) b. Resistance per unit length

3. Provide samples of conductors, as requested by the Engineer. 4. Furnish certification from the manufacturer verifying that the conductors have

been designed, manufactured, inspected and tested in accordance with applicable portions of the referenced standards, these Specifications, and the plans.

30

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

5. Provide certified copies of manufacturer's test reports for the specific conductors furnished, which shall include but not limited to the following:

a. Initial and Final Modulus of Elasticity b. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion c. Yield stress d. Hardness values e. Contact wire joint strength test.

Quality Assurance: A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, on request, evidence confirming the

qualifications of the person responsible for installation of the Catenary, Power Distribution and Grounding and Bonding Systems. Such confirmation shall indicate successful completion of at least three (3) similar transit overhead projects, and references shall be furnished.

B. Fittings and Hardware:

1. For tension tests, a minimum of three test bars shall be poured from each lot of metal.

2. For chemical analysis each lot of castings shall be analyzed for conformance with

the chemical composition specified in the referenced ASTM Standards. 3. A lot shall consist of all castings produced from a furnace melt.

Materials: A. Catenary Assemblies:

1. The Contractor shall furnish all conductors, insulators, spans, guys and all other components, miscellaneous steel assemblies and materials necessary to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Engineer, in accordance with the Contract Drawings, this Specification and the agreed Construction Schedule.

2. No previously used materials shall be used for construction under this contract

unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. B. Insulator Materials:

1. General:

a. Insulators shall have a minimum in-service life expectancy of 30 years under normal operating conditions.

31

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

b. The insulators shall be designed to suit the various assembly arrangements, as shown on the plans.

c. Insulators shall be unconditionally guaranteed by the manufacturer and/or

supplier to be free from defects for a period not less than 5 years. d. The mechanical strength of insulators shall meet or exceed the strength

indicated on the plans. Where the strength is not indicated, insulators shall exceed the ultimate strength of the conductor or guy to which it is attached.

e. Insulators for various uses shall have ratings not lower than the classes

indicated on the plans. f. Types and suggested electrical classes and minimum mechanical

characteristics for OCS insulators shall conform to the plans. The overall length of the insulators shall conform to the plans for standardization.

g. Each insulator shall bear the manufacturer’s name, mark number and year

of manufacture, clearly and permanently imprinted without affecting the appearance or the function of the item. The insulators shall be supplied complete with hardware, etc. as indicated on the plans.

h. The insulators shall be designed for the class of insulation specified on the

plans for the specific application and operating and environmental conditions.

i. The insulators shall have the following minimum classifications,

characteristics and ratings:

Characteristic Catenary System* Traction Power System* Pin Type Station Post Type

Insulator Class 25kV 34.5kV 34.5kV Creepage Distance

(minimum) 24" 21" 37"

Wet Flashover 60kV 80kV 80kV Impulse Withstand 150kV 200kV 200kV

*Catenary insulators include but are not limited to suspension, strain, and stand-off insulators.

32

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

2. Cantilevers:

a. Catenary cantilever pipe support insulators shall be made of the best commercial-grade wet-process porcelain, in accordance with ASTM D116.

b. The entire porcelain surface of the insulators that will be exposed after

assembly shall be glazed in No. 70 light gray color as specified in ASME B16.11

c. The surface shall be free of imperfections. Pieces with imperfections in the

glaze repaired by refloating and refiring, as well as those pieces repaired by re-touching with paint, will be rejected.

d. Cement used for assembling porcelain to metal shall meet or exceed the

requirements of ASTM C150 and C151.

3. Non-ceramic insulators shall be used for all other applications:

a. The non-ceramic insulator shall be a unit consisting of a rod, weathersheds as required, and end fittings. The rod shall be made of glass fiber or reinforced polymer (silicon, rubber, teflon, or cycloalipathic resin), with its fibers running longitudinally through the rod length. The rod may be attached to the end fittings or hardware by a compression sleeve, wedge or adhesive. If adhesive is used, the adhesive shall encapsulate the rod in the end-fitting cavity and shall form a compressive wedge upon loading. Weathersheds shall, for the expected life of the insulator, protect the rod from the elements and insure the necessary leakage distance.

b. The non-ceramic insulator shall be constructed so as to be a light-weight,

compact unit with high-impact strength. Weathersheds shall be "self-cleaning" and weather resistant to reduce the possibility of ice-bridging between sheds. They shall be of a material that is vandal resistant insofar as being shatterproof, thereby reducing vandalism damage.

c. All non-ceramic material shall have a smooth, void-free finish. All

adhesive coatings shall be sealed to the fittings to protect them against the ingress of moisture.

d. The design shall be such that stress due to temperature variation, and

mechanical extension/contraction in any part of the insulator under load and normal handling, shall not lead to deterioration. The materials used shall not cause degradation by chemical interactions.

33

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

e. The end fittings attached to the insulator's fiberglass rod shall ensure exact alignment with the rod and correct assembly in respect to each other to avoid torsional stress when the insulator is installed.

f. The insulators shall be so designed that no sparking or arcing shall occur

on the surface on the insulator when energized at the maximum design voltage under clean and dry conditions.

g. The contact wire non-riding insulators shall be used for the horizontal

insulation of the grooved contact wire as cut-in tension member for insulated overlap spans. These shall be manufactured from the glass fiber reinforced resin without weather-sheds.

h. The metal parts of the insulators shall be made of malleable iron, Grade

35018, to conform with ASTM A47, or open-hearth or electric furnace steel. All ferrous metal parts shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. Insulator fittings shall provide for connections as shown on the plans.

i. To protect the galvanizing from harmful chemical action of the cement,

the hardware which is in contact with cement shall be coated with a bituminous paint, or shall be as recommended by the insulator manufacturer for use with his materials.

C. Grounding and Bonding Systems: 1. Conductors for grounding and bonding shall be ASTM B8, Class B stranded

annealed copper, and sized as indicated on the plans. Grounding cable from aerial ground wire to ground rod shall be 4/0 copper, and fastened with straps (Ransom type or approved equal) to the pole.

2. Connectors and Clamps: Bolts, washers and stop nuts shall be of high-copper

alloy, Everdur, Durium, Duronze or silicone bronze. Ferrous hardware will not be acceptable.

D. Fittings and Hardware:

1. The identification mark of the manufacturer or foundry and the pattern numbers assigned by the supplier shall be cast into all castings. Marks and numbers shall be readable size, and in such a position that they will not affect the electrical or mechanical performance.

2. Material for hardware and fittings shall comply with the applicable referenced

standards. Substitutions will be considered and approved if the requirements of the Contract Documents are satisfied. The Contractor shall be responsible for

34

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

form and fit of all components and hardware, as necessary to meet the design intent and function required.

3. Malleable Iron: Fittings or components made of malleable iron shall be grade

32510 or better and shall conform to ASTM A47. All components and fittings shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.

4. Forged Steel: Material for forged steel shall comply with ASTM A711 or A668.

All components and fittings shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. 5. Ductile Iron: Fittings, or components requiring high yield strength shall be of

ductile iron, grade 60.40.18 or better and shall conform to ASTM A536. All fittings and components shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.

6. Stainless Steel: Stainless Steel hardware shall conform to ASTM A747. 7. Non-Ferrous Metals: Copper alloys for fittings and components shall conform

with ASTM B30, B584 and B148. 8. Copper: All copper components shall conform to ASTM B248 or B249. 9. All cotter pins shall be made out of stainless steel. 10. The designated metals shall be produced by an approved method that will meet

the requirements of the referenced Standards, these Specifications and the Contract Plans.

11. Castings shall be of uniform quality and shall be made in such a manner that the

material of the casting conforms to the chemical and mechanical properties prescribed in the referenced ASTM Standards.

12. The castings shall be free of adhering sand, voids, cracks, surface porosity and

non-uniform dimensions. 13. The Contractor shall be responsible for the dimensional accuracy of all fittings

and hardware. 14. Repairs shall be permitted only to the extent allowed by the referenced ASTM

Standards. If welding or repair of a greater magnitude is required, the Contractor shall obtain approval prior to processing.

15. All fittings and hardware used for catenary assemblies shall be selected and made

such that they can be reused after removal.

35

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

16. All fittings and hardware shall be designed with maximum interchangeability and standardization for easy interface with the other components of the catenary system.

17. All fittings and hardware shall be designed and installed to provide a homogenous

catenary hardware and assembly arrangement. 18. Components and assemblies shall be designed such that all fastenings and

adjustments are accomplished with the same dimensional standards or tools.

E. Catenary Assemblies:

1. All materials used in the components or the support and registration assemblies shall be of sufficient strength and durability to withstand the loads as indicated on the Contract Plans, with the addition of a factor of safety of 2.5. Any substitution of materials shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

2. The material shall be light in weight and reliable to ensure a 30 year life period. 3. The assemblies shall be of a proven, tested and approved Metro North design,

which shall have been used on previous Metro North overhead electrified railroad projects.

4. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, equipment, apparatus and facilities as

required to perform manufacture, supply, and installation work as required. 5. Malleable Iron: Fittings or components made of malleable iron shall be grade

32510 or better and shall conform to ASTM A47. All components and fittings shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.

6. Structural Steel: Material for structural steel shall comply with ASTM A36 or

A588. A36 material must be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. 7. Stainless Steel: Stainless Steel material shall conform to ASTM A484. 8. Aluminum components shall conform to ASTM B150. 9. All cotter pins shall be made out of stainless steel.

F. Stainless Steel Wire Ropes and Rods:

1. The wire rope shall be shipped on reels suitable for the weight carried. 2. High corrosion resistant austenitic grade stainless steel compatible with

component items shall be used.

36

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

3. The component items shall be designed to carry maximum working loads with a

factor of safety of 2.5 minimum. 4. Stainless Steel Wire Rope shall be extra flexible and manufactured, and tested and

in conformance with requirements of ASTM A368, A492, A555 and A580. 5. Stainless Steel Rod shall be round and manufactured and tested and in

conformance with requirements of ASTM A276.

G. Uninsulated Wires:

1. Conductor materials shall be of a composition, quality and purity such that the finished product shall have the physical, mechanical, electrical properties, characteristics and parameters conforming to this Specification and the plans.

2. The conductors shall have a minimum in-service life expectancy of 30 years

under normal operating conditions. 3. The conductors shall be unconditionally guaranteed by the manufacturer and/or

supplier to be free from defects for a period not less than five (5) years. 4. The Engineer reserves the right to witness the manufacture, testing and packing of

all conductors. The manufacturer shall notify the Engineer not less than 10 days in advance of manufacturing and testing operations.

5. All conductors shall be subject to factory quality control tests as required in the

applicable Standards. Tests shall be performed on each reel prior to shipment. A certified copy of the test report for each reel shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment. A copy of the test report shall be packed with each reel.

6. Grooved contact wire shall be subject to the twist test in addition to other required

tests required by the applicable ASTM. The twist test shall be performed as specified for round wire, except that 6 twists shall be required. Contact wire not meeting this test will be rejected.

7. Each reel shall consist of one continuous, unspliced conductor; and shall have the

required length of conductor so that no splices are required in the tension sections as installed unless approved by the Engineer.

8. Contact wire shall be permanently identified at intervals of 300 feet along its

length on the surface of the top lobe, showing the manufacturer's marks, material, size in AWG and year of manufacture.

37

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

9. Each reel shall have a strong, weatherproof tag or marker securely fastened to it, showing the size and type of conductor as well as the ASTM designation, name and mark of the manufacturer, total reel length, and weight and manufacturer's special instructions.

10. A stripe in any contrasting color approximately 1" wide shall be painted across

the outermost layer on each reel. Any visible conductor shift at this line, upon receipt at the job site, will be treated as indicating a relative wire movement during shipment, and is cause for reel rejection.

11. Joints in contact wire shall be marked with paint or dye prior to wire drawing. The

marks shall be readily distinguishable after the wire drawing process. 12. Any damage to the wire shall be the Contractor's responsibility and all repairs and

replacements of the damaged wires shall be at the Contractor’s expense. Testing: A. Insulators:

1. Insulators shall be tested in accordance with NEMA C29.1 2. Factory tests shall be made as required by these specifications and the referenced

standards. Test reports shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer. 3. The Engineer reserves the right to witness the manufacture, testing and packing of

all insulators. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than ten days in advance of manufacturing and testing operations.

Delivery, Storage and Handling: A. The Contractor shall ensure that all materials furnished are suitably packaged, stored and

protected from damage during handling, shipping, storage, exposure, and installation. B. Deliver the components to the site at intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of the

work and to not impede the progress of staged construction. C. All shipping boxes, bags, or crates shall be clearly and properly marked with strong

waterproof tags securely fastened to the shipping vessel showing the contents of each. If different materials are packaged in a box, bag or crate, all items of kind shall be collectively boxed, bagged or crated in a properly marked or tagged prior to placement in the shipping vessel. The tags shall provide information including but not limited to the assembly or component name, number, or identification code.

38

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

D. The materials, when necessary to store on site, shall be stored in a manner to permit easy access for inspection and identification in areas as designated on the plans or as directed by Engineer which do not impeded the progress of staged construction.

E. The Contractor shall handle and otherwise use the components in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions, so as to ensure that the products are not damaged or misused prior to or during installation.

F. Any damage to the components prior to acceptance by the Engineer shall be the

Contractor's responsibility. G. Replacement of rejected components shall be accomplished by the Contractor in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions at no cost to Connecticut Department of Transportation.

H. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. I. Fittings and hardware shall be packaged in a manner to allow stacking and outdoor

storage until installation with no harmful effects. J. Catenary Assemblies packing and/or packing methods of all assemblies or components

shall be approved by the Engineer. K. Stainless Steel Rope and Rods shall be shipped on reels suitable for the weight carried or

in straight lengths, securely bundled. Rods shipped on reels shall be straightened prior to use.

L. Stainless Steel Rope and Rods shall be protected against damage during handling and

shipping. Each reel or bundle shall have a strong, weatherproof tag securely fastened showing the physical and mechanical properties as well as type designation. ASTM designation and the name and mark of the manufacturer, the total length and weight of the wire rope, strand or rod on each reel or bundle

M. Uninsulated Wire shall be shipped on wooden reels, suitable for the weight of the

conductors and shall be protected from damage. The diameter of the drum shall be sufficiently large so as to avoid difficulty with waves or kinks when the conductor is strung. The grooved contact wire shall be wound on the reel in such manner that the vertical axis of cross section shall be parallel to the axis of the reel.

Execution: A. Construction Staging:

1. The Contractor is alerted to the constraints imposed on installation work due to the necessity for maintaining revenue electric train operations. Installation,

39

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

adjustment and pre-revenue operation inspections of the longitudinal catenary wires shall be performed in discrete segments of the route as necessary to comply with these requirements.

2. Actual stringing, adjustment and pre-revenue testing of any specific system, or

segment thereof, must be accomplished within the agreed line outage.

Construction Methods: A. Installation Tools:

1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain, subject to continual inspection by the Engineer, sufficient resources, including tools, mechanical equipment and apparatus necessary to complete the work in accordance with the Contract Drawings, this Specification and the agreed Systems Installation Plan. The equipment shall include all temporary materials, apparatus, consumable materials and any special tools recommended by the manufacturer for installing assemblies and arrangements. For dynamometers used, submit calibration certification certifying accuracy of the devices within the limits prescribed by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall be responsible to insure the continuing accuracy of these devices throughout the duration of their use.

B. All electrical connectors and clamps shall be prepared and protected externally and

internally in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Pre-installed Assemblies:

1. Prior to stringing wires for the individual systems to be constructed during any stage, all permanent supporting poles, trusses, insulated supporting devices, insulated termination assemblies, wire anchors and guy assemblies shall be installed. The Contractor also shall install temporary guys where temporary dead-ending of wires will be necessary for construction staging and to avoid over stressing of structural elements during the stringing process. The Contractor shall review locations selected for such temporary guys with the Engineer.

D. Insulators:

1. All insulators shall be cleaned before and after installation. Only clean rags, free from any abrasive material shall be used for cleaning insulators. Wire brushes shall not be used for cleaning any parts, metal or otherwise. In the completed line, all insulator assemblies and hardware shall be clean, bright and free from nicks, chips or other marks.

E. Hardware:

40

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

1. All hardware shall be installed as indicated on the plans and as recommended by the manufacturer. Bolts and nuts shall be properly tightened in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All bolts shall be of sufficient length for a full thread beyond the nut and/or locknut, but shall not protrude beyond the nut and/or locknut more than ½ of an inch. Bolt ends shall not be cut off. Where locknuts are not used, lock washers shall be provided.

2. Hardware shall be installed using tools and methods specified by the

manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. 3. Hardware shall be inspected for cleanliness and damage. Any item that does not

fit, creates scraping of galvanizing during installation, or is found defective shall be rejected. Replacement, prior to acceptance by the Engineer, shall be at the Contractor's expense.

4. Cotter pins shall be installed with the open end toward the ground.

F. Connectors:

1. Current-carrying connectors, shall be as shown on the plans and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Connectors for copper or bronze wire shall be copper or bronze. Connectors for bi-metallic connections shall be tin plated.

2. Bolts in bolt-type connectors shall be lubricated as recommended by the

manufacturer and torqued to the manufacturer's recommendation, using a calibrated torque wrench.

3. Connectors shall preferably be factory-loaded with a corrosion inhibitor which is

made for the specific purpose. 4. Wire surfaces which are in contact with conducting surfaces of the connector shall

be thoroughly wire brushed and an inhibitor applied. Where connectors are not factory-loaded with a corrosion inhibitor, the same inhibitor shall be applied in the field to the connector.

5. Corrosion inhibitors shall be stable over a wide temperature range, adhere to cold

metal surfaces, be water-repellent, weather resistant and inert to copper, aluminum, zinc, tin, cadmium, steel and neoprene rubber. Grit-bearing inhibitors shall be used except for flat lugs, sliding surfaces or where not recommended by the connector manufacturer. Grit shall be compatible with the connector and wire metal. Inhibitor for copper and bronze shall be T&B "Kopr Shiel", Fargo "Farpolene", Penn-Union "Cual-Aid", Burndy "Penetrox A", or approved equal.

41

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

6. One typical full-tension test of each type of splice for each type of conductor shall be fabricated and tested by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer or by another means acceptable to the Engineer.

7. Supporting Devices and assemblies used for holding wires in the correct horizontal and vertical position, shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. It is suggested that the Contractor take field measurements at the support location, immediately prior to the fabrication of such support assemblies, to determine the as-built conditions.

G. Conductors:

1. For each length of conductor installed, a record shall be kept by the Contractor of the reel number from which the conductor was used. Partly used reels shall be recorded as such.

2. All conductors shall be handled in accordance with good overhead line practice

and the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Conductors shall normally be ordered with one continuous length on one reel to

satisfy several runs. As the length required to install each run is removed, the length remaining on the reel shall be determined and recorded both on the reel and on substantiating documentation.

4. Care must be taken with handling reels so as not to prejudice the stringing

operation. Damaged reels shall be set aside for repair before use. 5. For tension conditions wire temperatures shall be measured by thermometer. The

bulb of the thermometer shall be in intimate contact with the wire and shall be closely taped to the wire to prevent drafts around the bulb. The thermometer shall be read after 15 minutes of contact.

6. A record of wire temperature and the tension recorded at both ends of the tension

sections shall be kept for all conductors. A copy shall be given to the Engineer within 7 days of measurement.

H. Installation of Conductors:

1. Wires shall not be strung without the guy anchor assemblies being in place, ready to receive loads. Where necessary for staging of the work, the Contractor shall install temporary guy assemblies at locations agreed in conjunction with the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide any temporary anchors and down guys required to facilitate installation and construction staging at his own expense.

42

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

2. The Contractor’s sequence and methods of erecting the individual wires shall be furnished for approval of the Engineer.

3. Care shall be taken to prevent kinks or other damage in the wires and cables. The

Engineer reserves the right to reject any wire in its entirety if it is judged that any damage will prejudice performance and/or service life. “Bird-caging” of stranded wire shall be cause for rejection.

4. The erection tension in any conductor shall be as shown on the plans with

tolerance of plus/minus 5 percent. 5. In general, one splice will be permitted in an entire length of conductor run.

Additional splices in any specific wire run shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

6. Splices will not be permitted within 5 feet of a support clamp. 7. Any damage to the conductors shall be immediately reported verbally to the

Engineer. Remedial action must be approved by the Engineer and will be performed as directed by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. Within 5 days of the verbal report and action determined, the Contractor shall submit a Conductor Damage Report describing the damage and remedial action, in writing, to the Engineer.

8. Roller-bearing sheaves of the closed type shall be used at all support points for

stringing. Sheaves shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the conductor without damage.

9. Dynamometers, or other tension measuring devices, shall be calibrated not more

than one month prior to use on this Contract and shall be calibrated at monthly intervals, or as approved, during the Contract.

10. Stringing of the wires shall start from an anchor location. At splice locations, the

existing conductor shall be rigged to relieve tension, the wire cut and the splice between existing and new wire installed. After the initial termination is made, the conductor shall be pulled from the reel and lifted into the sheaves at each support. Sufficient tension must be maintained in the conductor during stringing to ensure that, under no circumstances, does the conductor touch the ground or the track between support points.

11. When the second anchor location is reached, a tensioning rig shall be erected on

the pole, anchoring point or on the existing conductor, as appropriate. The rig shall contain a dynamometer or other device for measuring tension. If the first termination point was a splice location, the tensioning rig at the cut conductor point shall be gradually eased as tension is applied at the second termination

43

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

point. The changeover in tension from the existing conductor to the new conductor shall be coordinated carefully, preferably by radio, in order to avoid damage to the conductors at the initial splice location. After satisfactory transfer of tension, the wire shall be tensioned above the specified erection tension to minimize future creep. The required over-tensioning amount shall be established by the Contractor in conjunction with the wire manufacturer, bearing in mind the time constraints on construction. This tension shall then be slackened to the specified erection tension, and the dead-end assembly attached.

12. Erection tensions shall be governed by the plans, based on the equivalent span for

the tension length and temperature of the conductor. The Contractor shall submit his stringing procedure to the Engineer for approval.

13. During stringing of new conductors, proper vertical and horizontal electrical

clearances must be maintained away from existing conductors and structures. I. Catenary System:

1. Contact wires shall be erected in temporary wire loops attached to the messenger wire at appropriate intervals and lengths. "Figure Eight" loops made of No. 9 iron wire annealed, or other approved loops, may be used. In any case, the contact wire shall not be restrained from longitudinal movement during tensioning.

2. Contact wires shall be held in proper lateral position at the support, in relation to

the center line of elevated track, using temporary rollers to prevent kinking. 3. Similar preparations, as described for other wires, shall be employed at

commencement of stringing, and for tensioning of the contact wire.

4. Final adjustment of catenary messenger, aerial ground wire and traction power feeder to the specified stringing tension shall be made progressively, working any slack from the first anchor location toward the second anchor location at the other end of the run.

a. Final adjustment to the specified stringing tension shall be made progressively, working any slack from the first termination location toward the second anchor or splice location at the other end of the run.

b. The tension in the wire shall be adjusted so that it is within 5%, plus or

minus, of the erection tension derived from the charts. c. When the proper tension has been obtained, the conductor shall be secured

clamped in permanent position. d. Contact wires shall be tensioned in accordance with the tensions shown on

the plans for the appropriate equivalent span and temperature. The contact

44

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

wire should be over tensioned by an amount necessary to minimize future elongation. The required over-tensioning amount shall be established by the Contractor in conjunction with the wire manufacturer, bearing in mind the time constraints on construction.

e. Turnbuckles and other adjustable fasteners shall have at least 60-percent

of their take-up adjustment remaining to provide for future maintenance. J. Hangers:

1. Hanger lengths for each installed span shall be determined by the Contractor based on the data given on the plans.

2. Hangers shall be fabricated to a tolerance of plus/minus 1/4 inch. 3. The along-track position of each hanger shall be within plus/minus 2 inches of the

design position. 4. As the hanger clips are fastened and steady arms attached, any twist in the contact

wire shall be removed by working from one anchor to the other. 5. As far as practical, bolts shall be installed in the various clips so that the nuts will

be on the same side giving a uniform appearance. On curves, the nuts shall be placed on the inside of the curve to provide the best clearance to the pantograph.

6. Saddles for loop-type hangers shall clamp the messenger tightly. The loops shall

have a loose fit around the saddle, permitting free rise and fall without binding. K. Wire pull-offs shall be installed as necessary and in locations as shown on the plans. The

Contractor shall furnish and install such additional wire pull-offs as necessary to support and locate wires in the optimum position for operations during the staging work.

L. Crossed-contact wire assemblies shall be fitted at all in-running contact wire crossings as

necessary and as shown on the plans. M. Catenary jumpers shall be installed as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as directed

by the Engineer. N. Jumpers shall protrude through their clamps ½" maximum, and jumper ends shall be

wrapped. O. The configuration of jumpers shall make due allowance for the relative movement

between conductors for all temperatures. P. Final Adjustment:

45

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

1. Catenary System

a. After catenary tensioning has been completed, hangers and clips fastened, steady arms erected, and pull-offs installed, a check of the construction and adjustment to final position shall be made.

b. Any hangers with improper fit shall be replaced with hangers of proper

length. c. Height and lateral position of the contact wire shall be checked in

accordance with the plans and adjusted where necessary and is to be measured normal to the track along the elevated centerline. To accommodate construction staging, the Contractor may, subject to approval of the Engineer, leave final adjustment of partly constructed catenary systems to a later stage provided that the installation will not impact railroad operations.

d. The contact wire height given in the plans is the height at mean ambient

temperature (60F). e. Where the normal height of contact wire is 18'-0" and above, a tolerance

of plus 3" from the height shown on the plans will be permitted, except at the interface with existing system. The contact wire gradient between any two adjacent structures shall not exceed 1 in 100 relative to track, subject to maintaining safe pantograph operation.

f. Midspan heights must be at the average of the support heights at the

structures at each end of the span. g. The staggers of the contact wire shown on the plans are relative to the

inclined centerline of track which coincides with the nominal centerline of the static pantograph.

h. The lateral position of the contact wire will vary with the curvature and

span length. The stagger at each support shall be as shown on the plans. i. The installation tolerance for contact wire stagger shall be plus/minus 1

inch on the values specified on the plans. When required to achieve acceptable midspan offset, this tolerance may be increased with the approval of the Engineer.

j. The messenger wire generally shall be installed vertically above the final

staggered contact wire. An allowance of plus or minus 2 inches will be permitted on system heights 2 feet and above.

46

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

Q. Field Measurement and Clearance Check of Catenary System.

1. The following measurements shall be made and recorded with the catenary in its final position:

a. Messenger and contact wire heights above each track at each catenary support point and at midspan.

b. Wire temperature and air temperature including time of day. c. Contact wire stagger relative to design superelevated track centerline at

each registration point and at midspan. d. Track centerline to face of pole at rail level at each structure location,

actual track superelevation and pole deflection at contact wire level. e. A complete set of the final wire heights and stagger dimensions, as

accepted, shall be made available to the Engineer at the final inspection. f. The Contractor shall make a physical/mechanical clearance check, using a

pantograph height and stagger gauge fitted with removable clearance ears. If fouling occurs at any point, it shall be brought immediately to the attention of the Engineer.

g. The physical/mechanical clearance shall allow for 3" of uplift of the

contact wire with an additional allowance of 3" for mechanical clearance, except at the steady arm where 1" minimum mechanical clearance shall be allowed.

R. Pantograph Running Tests:

1. After installation of the individual catenary systems and prior to acceptance of the line for normal electric operations, Metro North reserves the right to conduct pantograph tests on the catenary, using a vehicle with the pantograph in contact with the contact wire. These tests are to assure a smooth, shock-free passage of the pantograph with no interruption to current collection especially at turnouts, section insulators, and overlaps. Particular attention will be focused on wire takeover at overlaps, turnouts and crossovers, and the lack of arcing at all locations. The Contractor shall be responsible for all adjustments required as a result of these tests.

47

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

S. Grounding and Bonding Systems:

1. General

a. The work shall be arranged in such a manner that each part of the grounding system which is laid below finished grade shall be completed, tested and inspected by the Engineer before backfilling is done. All precautions shall be taken to assure that no damage is done to the grounding and bonding conductors or connections during backfilling, compacting and concreting operations. Testing for ground resistance shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of this Specification before any finish surfacing is laid above the grounding and bonding conductors.

b. Ground tap connections between disconnect switch supporting steelwork

and ground cables shall be provided, as shown on the plans. All paint, scale, rust, oxidation, or other foreign material shall be thoroughly removed from the points of contact on all metal surfaces before any ground connections are made.

2. Buried Ground Conductors:

a. The size and type of the buried ground conductor shall be as indicated on the plans.

b. Conductor connections shall be made as shown on the plans and as

necessary to suit the application. Finish welds shall be cleaned and coated with an approved cold applied bituminous resin compound. Primer shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer.

c. Aerial ground wires shall be interconnected to the new and existing aerial

grounding system as shown on the plans. T. Grounding and Bonding Systems Field Testing:

1. General

a. Testing shall be performed by the Contractor. b. Ground resistance tests shall be made with a James G. Biddle Company

Model 250220, Heavy-Duty, Megger Insulation Tester, or approved equal using the three-probe method described in IEEE Standard 81.

2. Field testing shall be thorough and fully documented, with the following as a

minimum:

48

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

a. Electrical resistance tests shall be made during installation, to verify continuity of the grounding systems, before and after connection to the existing railroad grounding system.

b. Measure, record and report the resistance to earth of each portion of the

grounding system as soon as possible after installation so that corrective measures, if required, may be made with minimum disruption of construction. The required ground resistance is 5 ohms or less. Corrective measures shall be taken by the Contractor to achieve the specified ground resistance.

c. Resistance-to-earth tests shall be coordinated with and witnessed by the

Engineer, and the written results of these tests shall be submitted to the Engineer for evaluation and instructions regarding any corrective action which may be deemed necessary.

U. Catenary Assemblies:

1. All supporting devices including steady arms, messenger supports, cross span and steady wire or wire pull-off registration assemblies shall be installed as indicated on the Contract Plans and as instructed by the manufacturer.

2. All connections, bolts, and nuts shall be properly tightened in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. 3. All items shall be inspected for fit, damaged coating or bent/kinked members.

Any piece found to be defective shall be rejected and a replacement shall be installed at the Contractor's expense.

4. Cantilevers and other assemblies shall be installed as indicated on the Contract

Plans and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall take field measurements immediately prior to cantilever fabrication, to determine the as-built cantilever reach from the elevated track centerline to face-of-pole at either contact wire height or messenger wire height. During cantilever fabrication due allowance shall be made for any dead load deflection of the pole.

5. The wire heights and stagger given on the Contract Plans are related to the track

high rail level and the projected track centerline. 6. For stability during stringing, cantilevers and other pivoted assemblies shall be

temporarily restrained to prevent collapse due to swinging, to be provided at the Contractor’s expense. The details of the restraint shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

49

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

7. Cotter Pins and nuts on each cantilever shall be located on the same side of the structure to assure uniformity along the line.

8. Assemblies fitted with pins, cutters, bolts and nuts shall be oriented where

possible in such a manner as to lock these components together by gravity if the pins or nuts should become detached under service conditions.

9. Components employing a hinge or swivel shall be greased with an approved

grease before assembly of the rubbing surfaces. 10. After installation of cantilevers and independent support and registration

assemblies and stringing of conductors, adjustment may be required to the stagger, heel setting, contact wire height and insulator or cantilever inclination, to be within the specified design tolerances.

11. Conductor interfaces of all clamps for feeder jumpers, full feeding jumpers, tap

wires, equalizing jumpers and in-span jumpers shall be coated with conductive grease.

12. Prior to installation of cross span and steady wire assemblies, the Contractor shall

record the following field details along the axis of the spans for review by the Engineer:

1. Pole to pole, track to track, and track to pole centerline dimensions. 2. Relative cross-track elevations of tops of foundations and tracks. 3. Track superelevations and directions facing towards higher station

numbers. 13. The Contractor shall review and note all field changes from the design, and

submit these changes together with his recommendations to the Engineer for approval.

14. Wire sizes, location of turnbuckles, insulators, suspension assemblies, and

hangers for the OCS shall be installed in accordance with the Contract Plans or as directed by the Engineer.

15. Field adjustments of hangers, contact and messenger wire heights shall be

performed by the Contractor. 16. Stagger, wire heights, and heel setting of the steady arm shall be in accordance

with the Contract Plans or as directed by the Engineer.

50

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

17. Attachment heights and loadings for cross spans and steady wire shall be fully developed in the Contractors calculations for each location in accordance with standards indicated on the Contract Plans.

Method of Measurement: A. Catenary Systems:

1. The quantity of catenary system to be measured for payment will be the length of each individual catenary system, including fabrication, supply, installation and adjustments of all new wires and conductors, hangers, insulated and non-insulated support and registration assemblies, termination/anchor assemblies, in-span assemblies, pull-off assemblies, jumpers and their connections, sectionalizing assemblies, crossing wire arrangements and all associated connectors, splices, in-span components, hardware and fittings and miscellaneous steel assemblies necessary to form the complete functioning catenary system.

2. Measurement will be made from anchor to anchor as shown on the plans. No

adjustment for additional lengths required for construction purposes. No separate extra measurements will be made for the interface with existing catenary.

3. The measurement of each catenary system shall also include the modifications

and adjustments to existing interconnected or otherwise interfacing catenary systems, and all else necessary to provide smooth pantograph operations between new catenaries and existing catenaries.

4. No separate measurement will be made of temporary material required to

accomplish the work through the various construction stages, the cost of which shall be included in the price bid for the item “Catenary Systems”, including but not limited to, temporary wires and conductors, insulated and non-insulated support assemblies, termination/anchor assemblies, in-span assemblies, sectionalizing assemblies, connectors, splices, hardware and fittings, temporary guying, damaged materials, or complete systems rejected for any reasons.

5. It may be necessary to add or to substitute assemblies called for on an erection

diagram bill of material in order to meet the requirement that the Contractor provides a complete functioning catenary system. No separate payment will be made for such changes but the cost thereof shall be included in the price bid for the item “Catenary Systems”.

B. Aerial Ground Wire Systems:

1. The quantity of Aerial Ground Wire Systems to be measured for payment will be the length of each individual Aerial Ground Wire System, including fabrication,

51

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090042A, #0090045A

supply, installation and adjustments of all new wires and conductors, insulated and non-insulated support assemblies, termination/anchor assemblies, in-span assemblies, sectionalizing assemblies and all associated connectors, splices, in-span components, hardware and fittings and miscellaneous steel assemblies necessary to form the complete functioning Aerial Ground Wire System.

2. Measurement will be made from anchor to anchor as shown on plan. 3. No separate measurement will be made of temporary material required to

accomplish the work through the various construction stages, the cost of which shall be included in the price bid for the item “Aerial Ground Wire Systems”, including but not limited to, temporary wires and conductors, support assemblies, termination/anchor assemblies, in-span assemblies, connectors, splices, hardware and fittings, temporary guying, damaged materials, or complete systems rejected for any reasons, the cost of which shall be included in the price for the applicable bid item.

4. Ground rods and their connections to the aerial ground wires and other work

associated with grounding of catenary structures (except grounding for switches) will not be paid for separately but their cost shall be covered as a part of the price for item “Aerial Ground Wire Systems”.

5. It may be necessary to add or to substitute assemblies called for on an erection

diagram bill of material in order to meet the requirement that the Contractor provides a complete functioning aerial ground wire system. No separate payment will be made for such changes but the cost thereof shall be included in the price bid for the item “Aerial Ground Wire Systems”.

Basis of Payment: A. The quantity of Catenary System supplied and installed, in accordance with these

specifications, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. B. The quantity of Aerial Grounding System supplied and installed, in accordance with

these specifications, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. Pay Item Pay Unit

Catenary Systems L.F. Aerial Ground Wire Systems L.F.

52

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090050A

ITEM #0090050A – HIGH SPEED SECTION INSULATORS

Description: Scope: A. Work under this Section consists of the manufacture, supply, installation and testing of

high speed section insulators for installation in the overhead catenary system. B. Section insulators are units in the overhead catenary system that achieve electrical

isolation while allowing physical continuity for the passage of a pantograph, and are used as shown on the plans.

C. Grounding and Bonding Systems:



to:

a. Bonding new and modified existing catenary steelwork to the aerial ground wire and/or ground wire as shown on the plans.

b. Bonding and grounding of personnel ground mats to earth, disconnect




Related Sections, Notices and References: A. Related Bid Item Sections:

1. Catenary Systems

2. Modifications and Additions to Existing Catenary Systems

53

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090050A

B. References:


Submittals: A. Manufacturer’s certification shall be provided showing compliance with the requirements

of the applicable standards, these Specifications and the plans. B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted prior to fabrication. Component,

small part steel, or assembly drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD. Included as a minimum shall be:

1. Insulators:

a. Electrical:

i. Creepage length (inches) ii. Insulation level (impulse withstand test voltage, kV)

b. Mechanical:

i. Attachment centers and overall length (inches) ii. Core diameters (inches) iii. Breakdown of weights, insulator and fittings (pounds) iv. Tensile withstand load (pounds) v. Recommended maximum torsion load (inch-pounds)

c. Material:

i. Manufacturer’s design safety factors. ii. Listing, description and drawings of components and hardware. iii. Drawings and specifications required for field forming and setting

of contact wire into items, including gliders. iv. For assemblies, list of values of BIL, ultimate tensile strengths,

ultimate torsion strength, weights (including weight of components), and electrical characteristics.

v. Calculations to indicate maximum design loading occurring at each insulator location.

54

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090050A

C. Instruction Manual:

1. Instruction manuals shall be furnished covering complete instructions for installation, maintenance and testing. Complete lists of replacement parts and special tools shall be included.

D. Certified Test Reports: Reports of the following tests shall be furnished:

1. Prototype tests 2. Production tests 3. Field tests

E. The Contractor shall submit full manufacturer’s information, with supporting

documentation, on the in-service history of the section insulators to be furnished in accordance with these specifications and plans. All test reports shall be submitted to the designer for approval prior to shipment of any components.

F. Grounding and Bonding Systems:

1. Reports of all field tests shall be submitted to the Engineer as required by these Specifications and IEEE 81 and 142.



indicate the intended application.

Materials: A. The section insulators shall be Kupler, Flury or approved equal. B. The section insulators will be positioned, in general, adjacent to a catenary support point,

but may also be positioned in-span provided the span lengths are suitable and heights between messenger and contact wire are sufficient to allow for the extra sag. The section insulator locations shall be as shown on the plans.

C. The section insulators shall be capable of continuously operating at the nominal catenary

voltage of 12.5 kV AC under all weather conditions in the project area. The section insulator shall be tested for dry flashover, wet flashover, low frequency dry and wet withstand, and impulse withstand tests. The tests shall be performed in accordance with applicable ANSI C29.1 and IEEE 81 and 142.

55

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090050A

D. Assembly and component parts shall be designed for ease of maintenance, replacement, assembly, and disassembly with a minimum of specialized tools. Component parts shall be identified for this purpose on shop drawings/manual.

E. To ensure continuous current collection during the passage of pantograph, there shall be

an overlap of the runners on bridging type assemblies. F. To restrict the rotational movement of the section insulator and to ensure correct

alignment of the runners with respect to the pantograph, stabilizing hangers (with suitable means of adjustment) shall be provided from the messenger wire.

G. The connection of the contact wire insulator to the runners shall be so designed as to

permit smooth running without pantograph carbon damage and transfer of the pantograph from one component to another. The mass of the connection and the skids shall be as small as possible. The skids shall be adjustable to achieve alignment with the pantograph and the catenary.

H. The spacing of the runners on the section insulator shall be such that both sides are

always in contact with the working portion of the pantograph. I. The insulators and their ends fittings shall be designed for the maximum working

tensions of the conductors as shown on the plans. A factor of safety of 2.5 minimum, shall be used for all components of the section insulator.

J. All components, particularly those associated with the contact wire, shall be as light as

possible. K. High-speed section insulators shall be capable of operating with multiple pantograph

passes at speeds from zero to 120 mph without damage or operational problems. L. All steel and malleable or ductile cast iron fittings shall be hot-dip galvanized in

accordance with ASTM Specification A-123, A-153 or A-386. Galvanizing shall be accomplished prior to assembly of the section insulator.

M. The insulators shall be unconditionally guaranteed in writing by the manufacturer and/or

supplier to be free from defects for a period not less than five (5) years. N. All tests shall be conducted by the manufacturer. The designer reserves the right to

attend the tests. The Contractor shall inform the designer not less than ten (10) days in advance of testing operations. The certified test report shall be supplied whether or not the designer attends the tests.

O. The Contractor shall provide test data or reference of suitable field experience for the

product in similar application for five years to show that the weather shed material is resistant to ultra-violet radiation and electrical tracking.

56

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090050A

P. The messenger insulators shall be tension-proof tested in accordance with the applicable

Section of the specification, and the dual contact wire insulators shall be tension-proof tested to 18,000 pounds.

Q. Grounding and Bonding Systems:

1. Conductors for grounding and bonding shall be ASTM B8, Class B stranded annealed copper, and sized as indicated on the plans. Grounding cable from aerial ground wire to ground rod shall be 4/0 copper, and fastened with straps (Ransom type or approved equal) to the pole.




protected from damage and exposure. B. The Contractor shall handle and otherwise use the components in accordance with the


C. Any damage to the components prior to acceptance by the Engineer shall be the

Contractor's responsibility. D. Replacement of rejected components shall be accomplished by the Contractor in


Construction Methods: A. All electrical connectors and clamps shall be prepared and protected externally and

internally in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Grounding and Bonding Systems:

1. General

a. The work shall be arranged in such a manner that each part of the grounding system which is laid below finished grade shall be completed, tested and inspected by the Engineer before backfilling is done. All precautions shall be taken to assure that no damage is done to the

57

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090050A

grounding and bonding conductors or connections during backfilling, compacting and concreting operations. Testing for ground resistance shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of this Specification before any finish surfacing is laid above the grounding and bonding conductors.








grounding system as shown on the plans. C. Grounding and Bonding Systems Field Testing:

1. General




minimum:



grounding system as soon as possible after installation so that corrective measures, if required, may be made with minimum disruption of construction. The required ground resistance is 5 ohms or less.

58

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090050A

Corrective measures shall be taken by the Contractor to achieve the specified ground resistance.



Method of Measurement: The work will be measured for payment based on the number of section insulators supplied and installed. The work will include messenger insulation, conductor end fittings, stability hangers and all adjustments necessary for the efficient operation of the unit. Basis of Payment: The quantity of section insulators supplied and installed shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the following pay item which price shall include all transportation, material and equipment, tools and labor incidental thereto:

Pay Item Pay Unit

High Speed Section Insulators EA.

59

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090070A

ITEM #0090070A - INSPECTION AND TESTING

Description: A. This Specification Section covers the design, development and production of testing

procedures, supply of equipment and testing of the catenary systems, traction power distribution systems and grounding and bonding systems, preparation of test reports, and retesting of items as necessary.

B. Initial testing shall be performed to verify, after completion of work in the individual

construction stages, that the new installations and interfacing modifications to existing systems, are collectively acceptable for placing into railroad operations, after the work periods in the individual stages. Final testing shall be performed after overall completion of the new installation and modification work in the final construction stage.

C. The Contractor is alerted to the necessity to accomplish initial testing and correction

work within the permitted line outages for each stage of the construction work and prior to the line being placed into revenue pantograph operation.

Related Sections, Notices and References A. Related Bid Item Sections

1. Catenary Systems 2. Aerial Ground Wire Systems 3. Disconnect Switch and Sectionalizing Feeder Taps

B. References The Contract Drawings and pertinent provisions of all applicable Codes and Standards, as

referenced in other Sections of the Specifications, shall apply to the work of this Section, and are hereby made a part of this Specification to the extent required.

Submittals A. Test Program Plan: The Contractor shall submit a Test Program Plan for approval within

60 days prior to commencing overhead catenary work. The purpose of this plan is to ensure that the Contractor has considered all of the testing requirements contained in this and other sections of the specifications, and has made adequate provisions for testing in his overall program plans and schedules, and to achieve an early mutual understanding between the Contractor and the Engineer on the range, depth and other aspects of tests to be conducted. The test program shall comply with pertinent provisions of the National Electric Safety Code (NESC). The Test Program Plan shall contain as a minimum the

60

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090070A

following data:

1. A flow diagram indicating the logical sequence of tests. 2. A list of test procedures (by test procedure number) to be submitted, preliminary

submittal schedule, a preliminary schedule of tests, and a brief description of each field test. The schedule portion of the program plan shall be a dynamic document to be updated as the program progresses.

3. An outline and format of the procedure and test data sheets for each type of test. 4. A schedule of tests to be witnessed by the designer or his designated

representative. 5. A description of the Contractor's in-plant and field test and inspection

organization. B. Inspection and Test Procedures: Detailed inspection and test procedure, covering the

following, shall be submitted to the designer for approval, at least 45 days in advance of the scheduled tests.

Acceptance Measurements Visual inspection of completed systems Clearance envelope tests for pantograph and vehicle Electrical tests Operational tests

The procedure shall include, as a minimum; objective and scope; set up; equipment to be used; personnel required; estimated duration; pass/fail criteria; and samples of data sheets to be used. All inspections and tests shall be performed in accordance with the approved procedures. Any deviation requires the approval of the designer.

C. Since the unaffected yard catenary systems are required to be operational, during and

after construction, essential inspection and testing shall be done as per the directives by the designer, for day-to-day work. Detailed and thorough inspection and testing shall, however, be undertaken after completion of the construction jointly with the Railroad.

D. Inspection and Measuring Equipment: All equipment to be used for testing shall be

submitted for designer’s review.

E. Inspection and Test Reports: Inspection and test reports shall be submitted for approval within 15 days after completion of inspection and tests. Reports must contain all the data obtained during inspection and tests, an analysis of data and conclusions relating to the pass/fail criteria outlined in the procedure. Inspection and test shall be repeated wherever any corrective action is taken to meet pass/fail criteria.

61

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090070A

Materials: The Contractor shall provide all the test equipment necessary to make the measurements. Construction Methods: A. The Contractor shall carry out all the inspections and tests as approved by the designer, in

the presence of the Engineer or his representative, and record the results as indicated herein. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for coordinating with the appropriate parties for execution of inspection, testing and returning, or otherwise placing into service, the various systems.

B. The designer will use the inspection and test reports to determine compliance with the

designs and will inform the Contractor of non-compliance measurements. C. The Contractor shall execute corrections at his own expense. D. After execution of corrections, the Contractor shall re-measure and record affected data

and submit the results to the designer. E. The work of this section will not be complete until corrections are performed and

approved by the designer. F. Inspection and test reports shall be completed and submitted to the designer. Method of Measurement: Inspection and testing will be measured for payment on a lump sum basis. Basis of Payment: Payment for Inspection and Testing will be made at the lump sum contract price bid as follows:

Pay Item Pay Unit

Inspection and Testing L.S.

62

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090075A

ITEM #0090075A - GUY ASSEMBLIES

Description:

Scope:

A. This Section specifies the description and performance of the Contractor requirements for the application design, supply fabrication and installation of guy assemblies as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein.

B. The Contractor is hereby made aware that this specification is supplemented by General Provisions which may specify design, manufacturing, fabrication, furnishing of materials, installing, and testing of components included within this item’s scope of work.

Related Sections, Notices and References:

A. Related Bid Item Sections:

Catenary Systems Aerial Ground Wire Systems Modifications and Additions to Existing Catenary Systems Electric Traction Steelwork

Submittals: A. Relevant Shop Drawings, catalog cuts and reports for each type of wire to be used and

the physical and mechanical properties of all components described in this Section shall be submitted. Include the following as a minimum:

Description Size Type Material Number of and diameter of individual wires Overall diameter Cross section area Weight per unit Rated breaking load/SWL Initial and final modulus of elasticity Coefficient of thermal expansion Yield stress Hardness value

63

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090075A

Materials:

A. All materials shall be new.

B. The stranded wires shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the applicable ASTM specifications.

C. The material and physical properties of the stranded wire and wire rope shall conform to the description in Table 1 of ASTM A475.

D. The weight of coating for zinc-coated steel wire shall not be less than that specified in Table 4, under Class C of ASTM A475.

E. Aluminum clad steel wire strand shall be “Alumoweld” or approved equal.

F. All fittings and hardware shall be the wire strand manufacturer’s recommended types and sizes for the wire strand. In addition, conform to the drawing requirements.

G. Other fittings shall conform to ASTM A668, “Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy for General Industrial Use,” Grade C., or ASTM A148, “Steel Castings, High Strength for Structural Purposes,” Grade 80-50.

H. All material shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.

Delivery, Storage and Handling

A. The Contractor shall ensure that all materials furnished are suitably packaged, stored and protected from damage during handling, shipping, storage, exposure, and installation.

B. Deliver the components to the site at intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of the work and to not impede the progress of staged construction.

C. All shipping boxes, bags, or crates shall be clearly and properly marked with strong waterproof tags securely fastened to the shipping vessel showing the contents of each. If different materials are packaged in a box, bag or crate, all items of kind shall be collectively boxed, bagged or crated in a properly marked or tagged prior to placement in the shipping vessel. The tags shall provide information including but not limited to the assembly or component name, number, or identification code.

D. The materials, when necessary to store on site, shall be stored in a manner to permit easy access for inspection and identification in areas as designated on the plans or as directed by Engineer which do not impeded the progress of staged construction.

E. The Contractor shall handle and otherwise use the components in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, so as to ensure that the products are not damaged or misused prior to or during installation.

64

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090075A

F. Any damage to the components prior to acceptance by the Engineer shall be the Contractor's responsibility.

G. Replacement of rejected components shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions at no cost to Connecticut Department of Transportation.


A. Guy strands shall be cut and installed using tools and methods specified by the manufacturer, and the down guy assemblies shall be assembled and installed as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Down guys shall be assembled and installed before the catenary wires are strung. They shall be pulled taut, and secured in place with provisions for future adjustment as required to hold the structure in proper alignment after wires are pulled to correct tension.

C. The Contractor shall make final adjustments to the down guys as required to compensate for initial stretch.

D. All down guys shall be encased in reflective sleeves for elevations less than 8 feet above the ground.

Delivery, Storage and Handling:

A. Materials shall be protected against damage in ordinary handling and shipping. Each reel shad have a strong, weatherproof tag securely fastened to it showing the physical and mechanical properties as well as the steel type designation, ASTM designation and the name and mark of the manufacturer.


A. The work will be measured for payment based on the individual guy assemblies furnished and installed complete in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. No separate measurement will be made of temporary material required to accomplish the work through the various construction stages, the cost of which shall be included in the price bid for the item “Guy Assemblies”, including but not limited to, temporary wires, hardware and fittings, temporary guying, damaged materials, or complete systems rejected for any reasons.

65

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090075A

Basis of Payment:

The guy assemblies supplied and installed shall be paid for at the contract unit price, which price shall include all transportation, material, equipment, tools and labor incidental thereto:

Pay Item Pay Unit

Guy Assemblies EA

66

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

ITEM #0090079A - MODIFICATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO EXISTING CATENARY SYSTEMS

Description: Scope: A. The work of this Section covers the temporary and permanent modifications and

additions to existing catenary systems necessary to accomplish the installation of new and replacement facilities.

B. The work includes, but is not limited to: 1. Reconstruction of existing catenary systems including lengthening or shortening

as may be required, reprofiling of existing catenary systems, transferring of existing catenary attachments from existing out-of-service insulated supporting and terminating assemblies to temporary or permanent supporting and terminating assemblies.

2. Temporary and permanent modifications and additions to catenary supporting structures.

3. Application design, furnishing and installing all insulated and non-insulated assemblies, not necessarily shown or specified in the Contract Documents yet required to affect the changes necessary to provide continued power supply, locate the modified existing and new catenary systems above the pantograph on temporary and permanent tracks, and provide acceptable riding between new and existing catenaries during the specified construction stages.

C. Insulators:

1. The design, manufacture, and supply of insulators for the catenary and traction power systems, including, but not limited to suspension, strain, and stand-off insulators, as shown on the Contract Plans and specified herein.

2. Insulators shall be incorporated into support, registration, termination and “in-span” and other assemblies comprising the Catenary and Traction Power Systems as shown on the plans and specified herein.

D. Grounding and Bonding Systems:


67

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

2. Grounding and bonding of electric traction facilities includes, but is not limited to:


b. Bonding and grounding of personnel ground mats to earth, disconnect switch operating rods and disconnect switch supporting steel at all disconnect switch locations as shown on the plans.

3. The work also includes the application design, furnishing, installing and testing of temporary grounding and bonding systems required to connect temporary supporting steelwork installed by the Contractor for his staging work.

E. Fittings and Hardware:

1. This Section covers the design, manufacture and supply of ferrous and non-ferrous metal material, hardware and fittings for use individually, and in the various assemblies comprising the catenary systems, traction power supply systems, aerial ground wire systems and grounding and bonding systems.

2. The Contractor is advised that high-strength alloy shackles and turnbuckles are specified and to be furnished on this Project. The Contractor is responsible for insuring that these high-strength alloy shackles and turnbuckles are furnished and installed in the Project work as per plans and specifications. The procurement and correct use of non-alloy turnbuckles and shackles shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3. The work includes but is not limited to the following:

Hanger assemblies Wire crossing assembly Clevis - tongue fittings Clevis-clevis fittings Parallel wire clamps Nuts, bolts, washers, keys and cotter pins Shackles Links and eyebolts Messenger, contact and span, wire terminations and turn buckles Double clevis end fittings Thimbles Wire sleeves Wire splices Messenger suspension clamps and span wire supports Span wire clamps Wire connectors

68

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

Full tension compression joint fittings Strain clamps Wire knuckles Anti-torsion pipe hangers

F. Catenary Assemblies:

1. Work under these items covers the manufacture, supply and installation of the following types of catenary support and registration assemblies.

a. Pull-off and push-off cantilevers - all types for one or more catenaries b. Two track cantilevers for one or more catenaries c. Multi-track cross-catenary and cross-span support and registration

assemblies d. Multi-track steady wire registration assemblies e. Cross-catenary assemblies f. Wire pull-off registration assemblies for one or more catenaries g. Termination assemblies

2. The Contractor shall design, manufacture, supply, fabricate and install all assemblies as indicated on the Contract Plans, as necessary to provide a complete, reliable and safe system.

G. Stainless Steel Wire Rope and Rods


a. Cantilever nose hangers

b. Stainless steel catenary hangers

c. Supporting rods for signage

H. Uninsulated Wires:

1. This Specification covers the supply of uninsulated wires as shown on the plans. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Messenger Wires

69

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

b. Contact Wires c. Catenary Jumper Wires d. Traction Power Aerial Feeder and Jumper Wires e. Aerial Ground Wires f. Cross Span Wires g. Pull-Off Wires h. Steady Wires

2. Supply all applicable bare conductors and wires for the new electric traction facilities in accordance with the requirements specified in the Contract Plans and these Technical Specifications.

Related Sections, Notices and References: A. Related Bid Item Sections

Catenary Systems High Speed Section Insulators Aerial Ground Wire Systems Disconnect Switch and Sectionalizing Jumper Taps Electric Traction Steel Work

B. References


A. If other types of materials are proposed, the Contractor shall, along with the product

description, submit the relevant standards and information on that material for approval of the Engineer.


requirements of Standard Specifications. B. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with the Engineer and with the work of other

Contractors to assure no interference to train operations, other than work planned.

C. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with MNR and affiliate rail operators within the New Haven Rail Yard to ensure impact to ongoing operations is minimized.

70

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

Submittals A. At least forty-five (45) days prior to commencing the installation work, the Contractor

shall submit for review, an Installation Plan. This plan shall indicate the sequence, methods, procedures and permanent and temporary materials and equipment proposed for construction and pre-revenue operation inspections of each element of the work. The plan shall contain sufficient detail to allow assessment by the designer.

B. The Installation Plan shall demonstrate maintenance of operations and compliance with

the railroad’s requirements for work over or adjacent to the railroad. C. Provide sufficient detail and clarity so that the work can be properly controlled and

interfaced, and the Engineer can readily monitor and follow progress for all portions of the work. The Contractor shall comply with the various limits imposed by the construction staging and by any contractually specified milestone and completion dates. Limit activity durations to achieve the milestones as agreed. The degree of detail shall be to the satisfaction of the designer.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe and successful construction of the work.

Construction Drawings requiring original design which is the responsibility of the Contractor, shall bear the seal of a professional engineer registered in the State of Connecticut who was in responsible charge of the design.

E. The Contractor shall prepare and submit completely detailed allocation drawings,

component shop drawings, assembly and sub-assembly drawings and required certification for all Contractor-furnished components for each system, based on designs shown in the Contract Drawings and MNR’s approved Standards for Electric Traction Facilities. Any deviation from these criteria, or supplements thereto, shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer. Fabrication of components shall not proceed until the shop drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer.

F. All submittals shall be made sufficiently in advance of the fabrication associated with the

temporary and permanent construction, to permit review by the designer. G. If drawings show variations from the Contract requirements for any reason, describe such

variations in the letter of transmittal. If acceptable, the designer may approve any or all such variations, subject to a proper adjustment in the Contract. If the Contractor fails to describe such variations he shall not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even though such drawings have been accepted. Drawings or schedules submitted showing minor departures from the Contract requirements which do not involve a change in the Contract price or time for performance may be accepted at the discretion of the designer.

H. All submittals shall be made sufficiently in advance of the fabrication associated with the

temporary and permanent construction, to permit review by the designer.

71

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

I. Insulators:

1. For Insulators, Manufacturer's certification shall be provided showing compliance with the applicable requirements of the referenced Standards, these Specifications and the Contract Plans, as follows:

a. Steel analysis b. Hot dip galvanizing c. Adhesive materials d. Insulator materials e. In-service record of proposed insulators f. Certified quality control procedures used in the manufacturing process.

2. Insulator Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall be submitted prior to procurement

and fabrication. Included, as a minimum, shall be:

a. Electrical: Creepage length (inches) Insulation level (impulse withstand test voltage, kV). Maximum working voltage (kV)

b. Mechanical:

Attachment centers or overall length (inches). Shed diameters (inches). Core diameters (inches). Breakdown of weights, insulator and fittings (pounds). Tensile withstand load (pounds). Tensioned strength (pounds). Cantilever withstand load (pound-inches). Recommended Maximum working tensile load (inch-pounds). Recommended Maximum working cantilever load (inch-pounds). Material (including end caps and touch-up insulator sealants).

c. Manufacturer's design mechanical and electrical safety factors. d. Drawings of hardware and components. e. Listing and description of components and hardware. f. Weights (including weight of components). g. Storage and handling instructions.

72

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

3. Factory Test Reports

J. Grounding and Bonding Systems:




indicate the intended application. K. Fittings and Hardware:

1. Submit shop drawings for all components for approval prior to ordering or fabrication showing details and dimensions, and giving designations of the materials comprising the various components together with technical, mechanical and electrical characteristics as appropriate. Include details of the manufacturing methods and quality assurance and inspection procedures.

2. Samples of certain components shall be submitted, including: hanger assemblies,

wire crossing assembly, clevis-tongue fittings, clevis-clevis fittings, parallel wire clamps, thimbles, wire splices, wire connectors and full tension compression joint fittings. Samples of other items shall be submitted as may be directed by the Engineer.

L. Catenary Assemblies:

1. Within forty days of notice to proceed, a complete package of application design calculations, installation sequence, field measurements of existing structures, and component shop drawings and catalog cuts shall be assembled by the Contractor, for each type of catenary assembly, supporting device and associated attachments. This package shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and acceptance.

2. Furnish a certification verifying that all material included in the assemblies has

been manufactured, inspected and tested in accordance with the referenced standards and these specifications.

3. The Engineer reserves the right to check and inspect the manufacture, testing and

quality control procedures at any time. 4. Furnish complete manufacturer’s data and drawings. Furnish calculations for the

design of each component to demonstrate adequate load capacity of each item in the configuration.

73

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

M. Stainless Steel Wire Ropes and Rods:

1. Certification: Furnish certification verifying that the stainless steel wire rope, and rod have been designed, manufactured, inspected and tested in accordance with the referenced standards and these Specifications.



drawings.

N. Uninsulated Wires:

1. Submit product data and relevant drawings for approval prior to wire manufacture. Included as a minimum shall be:

Physical Characteristics and Parameters: Size Type Material Number of and diameter of individual wires Overall diameter Cross section area Weight per foot Rated breaking load.

2. Electrical Characteristics:

Rated current carrying size (AWG/Kcmil) Resistance per unit length

3. Provide samples of conductors, as requested by the Engineer. 4. Furnish certification from the manufacturer verifying that the conductors have

been designed, manufactured, inspected and tested in accordance with applicable portions of the referenced standards, these Specifications, and the plans.

5. Provide certified copies of manufacturer's test reports for the specific conductors

furnished, which shall include but not limited to the following:

Initial and Final Modulus of Elasticity Coefficient of Thermal Expansion Yield stress

74

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

Hardness values Contact wire joint strength test.

Quality Assurance: A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, on request, evidence confirming the

qualifications of the person responsible for installation of the Catenary, Power Distribution and Grounding and Bonding Systems. Such confirmation shall indicate successful completion of at least three (3) similar transit overhead projects, and references shall be furnished.

B. Fittings and Hardware:

1. For tension tests, a minimum of three test bars shall be poured from each lot of metal.

2. For chemical analysis, each lot of castings shall be analyzed for conformance with

the chemical composition specified in the referenced ASTM Standards. 3. A lot shall consist of all castings produced from a furnace melt.

Materials: A. The Contractor shall furnish all conductors, insulators, spans, guys and all other

components, assemblies and materials necessary to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Engineer, in accordance with the Contract Drawings, this Specification and the agreed Construction Schedule.

B. Insulator Materials:

1. General:

a. Insulators shall have a minimum in-service life expectancy of 30 years under normal operating conditions.

b. The insulators shall be designed to suit the various assembly

arrangements, as shown on the plans. c. Insulators shall be unconditionally guaranteed by the manufacturer and/or

supplier to be free from defects for a period not less than 5 years. d. The mechanical strength of insulators shall meet or exceed the strength

indicated on the plans. Where the strength is not indicated, insulators shall exceed the ultimate strength of the conductor or guy to which it is attached.

75

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

e. Insulators for various uses shall have ratings not lower than the classes indicated on the plans.

f. Types and suggested electrical classes and minimum mechanical

characteristics for OCS insulators shall conform to the plans. The overall length of the insulators shall conform to the plans for standardization.

g. Each insulator shall bear the manufacturer’s name, mark number and year

of manufacture, clearly and permanently imprinted without affecting the appearance or the function of the item. The insulators shall be supplied complete with hardware, etc. as indicated on the plans.

h. The insulators shall be designed for the class of insulation specified on the

plans for the specific application and operating and environmental conditions.

i. The insulators shall have the following minimum classifications,

characteristics and ratings:

Characteristic Catenary System* Traction Power System* Pin Type Station Post Type Insulator Class 25kV 34.5kV 34.5kV Creepage Distance (minimum)

24" 21" 37"

Wet Flashover 60kV 80kV 80kV Impulse Withstand 150kV 200kV 200kV

*Catenary insulators include but are not limited to suspension, strain, and stand-off insulators. 2. Cantilevers:

a. Catenary cantilever pipe support insulators shall be made of the best commercial-grade wet-process porcelain, in accordance with ASTM D116.

b. The entire porcelain surface of the insulators that will be exposed after assembly

shall be glazed in No. 70 light gray color as specified in ASME B16.11. c. The surface shall be free of imperfections. Pieces with imperfections in the glaze

repaired by refloating and refiring, as well as those pieces repaired by re-touching with paint, will be rejected.

d. Cement used for assembling porcelain to metal shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C150 and C151.

3. Non-ceramic insulators shall be used for all other applications:

76

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

a. The non-ceramic insulator shall be a unit consisting of a rod, weathersheds as required, and end fittings. The rod shall be made of glass fiber or reinforced polymer (silicon, rubber, teflon, or cycloalipathic resin), with its fibers running longitudinally through the rod length. The rod may be attached to the end fittings or hardware by a compression sleeve, wedge or adhesive. If adhesive is used, the adhesive shall encapsulate the rod in the end-fitting cavity and shall form a compressive wedge upon loading. Weathersheds shall, for the expected life of the insulator, protect the rod from the elements and insure the necessary leakage distance.

b. The non-ceramic insulator shall be constructed so as to be a light-weight, compact unit with high-impact strength. Weathersheds shall be "self-cleaning" and weather resistant to reduce the possibility of ice-bridging between sheds. They shall be of a material that is vandal resistant insofar as being shatterproof, thereby reducing vandalism damage.

c. All non-ceramic material shall have a smooth, void-free finish. All adhesive coatings shall be sealed to the fittings to protect them against the ingress of moisture.

d. The design shall be such that stress due to temperature variation, and mechanical extension/contraction in any part of the insulator under load and normal handling, shall not lead to deterioration. The materials used shall not cause degradation by chemical interactions.

e. The end fittings attached to the insulator's fiberglass rod shall ensure exact alignment with the rod and correct assembly in respect to each other to avoid torsional stress when the insulator is installed.

f. The insulators shall be so designed that no sparking or arcing shall occur on the surface on the insulator when energized at the maximum design voltage under clean and dry conditions.

g. The contact wire non-riding insulators shall be used for the horizontal insulation of the grooved contact wire as cut-in tension member for insulated overlap spans. These shall be manufactured from the glass fiber reinforced resin without weather-sheds.

h. The metal parts of the insulators shall be made of malleable iron, Grade 35018, to conform with ASTM A47, or open-hearth or electric furnace steel. All ferrous metal parts shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. Insulator fittings shall provide for connections as shown on the plans.

i. To protect the galvanizing from harmful chemical action of the cement, the hardware which is in contact with cement shall be coated with a bituminous paint,

77

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

or shall be as recommended by the insulator manufacturer for use with his materials.

C. Grounding and Bonding Systems:


2. Connectors and Clamps: Bolts, washers and stop nuts shall be of high-copper alloy, Everdur, Durium, Duronze or silicone bronze. Ferrous hardware will not be acceptable.

D. Fittings and Hardware:

1. The identification mark of the manufacturer or foundry and the pattern numbers assigned by the supplier shall be cast into all castings. Marks and numbers shall be readable size, and in such a position that they will not affect the electrical or mechanical performance.

2. Material for hardware and fittings shall comply with the applicable referenced standards. Substitutions will be considered and approved if the requirements of the Contract Documents are satisfied. The Contractor shall be responsible for form and fit of all components and hardware, as necessary to meet the design intent and function required.

3. Malleable Iron: Fittings or components made of malleable iron shall be grade 32510 or better and shall conform to ASTM A47. All components and fittings shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.

4. Forged Steel: Material for forged steel shall comply with ASTM A711 or A668. All components and fittings shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.

5. Ductile Iron: Fittings, or components requiring high yield strength shall be of ductile iron, grade 60.40.18 or better and shall conform to ASTM A536. All fittings and components shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.

6. Stainless Steel: Stainless Steel hardware shall conform to ASTM A747.

7. Non-Ferrous Metals: Copper alloys for fittings and components shall conform with ASTM B30, B584 and B148.

8. Copper: All copper components shall conform to ASTM B248 or B249.

9. All cotter pins shall be made out of stainless steel.

78

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

10. The designated metals shall be produced by an approved method that will meet the requirements of the referenced Standards, these Specifications and the Contract Plans.

11. Castings shall be of uniform quality and shall be made in such a manner that the material of the casting conforms to the chemical and mechanical properties prescribed in the referenced ASTM Standards.

12. The castings shall be free of adhering sand, voids, cracks, surface porosity and non-uniform dimensions.

13. The Contractor shall be responsible for the dimensional accuracy of all fittings and hardware.

14. Repairs shall be permitted only to the extent allowed by the referenced ASTM Standards. If welding or repair of a greater magnitude is required, the Contractor shall obtain approval prior to processing.

15. All fittings and hardware used for catenary assemblies shall be selected and made such that they can be reused after removal.

16. All fittings and hardware shall be designed with maximum interchangeability and standardization for easy interface with the other components of the catenary system.

17. All fittings and hardware shall be designed and installed to provide a homogenous catenary hardware and assembly arrangement.

18. Components and assemblies shall be designed such that all fastenings and adjustments are accomplished with the same dimensional standards or tools.

E. Catenary Assemblies:

1. All materials used in the components or the support and registration assemblies shall be of sufficient strength and durability to withstand the loads as indicated on the Contract Plans, with the addition of a factor of safety of 2.5. Any substitution of materials shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

2. The material shall be light in weight and reliable to ensure a 30 year life period.

3. The assemblies shall be of a proven, tested and approved Metro North design, which shall have been used on previous Metro North overhead electrified railroad projects.

4. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, equipment, apparatus and facilities as required to perform manufacture, supply, and installation work as required.

79

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

5. Malleable Iron: Fittings or components made of malleable iron shall be grade 32510 or better and shall conform to ASTM A47. All components and fittings shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.

6. Structural Steel: Material for structural steel shall comply with ASTM A36 or A588. A36 material must be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.

7. Stainless Steel: Stainless Steel material shall conform to ASTM A484.

8. Aluminum components shall conform to ASTM B150.

9. All cotter pins shall be made out of stainless steel.

F. Stainless Steel Wire Ropes and Rods:

1. The wire rope shall be shipped on reels suitable for the weight carried.

2. High corrosion resistant austenitic grade stainless steel compatible with component items shall be used.

3. The component items shall be designed to carry maximum working loads with a factor of safety of 2.5 minimum.

4. Stainless Steel Wire Rope shall be extra flexible and manufactured, and tested and in conformance with requirements of ASTM A368, A492, A555 and A580.

5. Stainless Steel Rod shall be round and manufactured and tested and in conformance with requirements of ASTM A276.

G. Uninsulated Wires:

1. Conductor materials shall be of a composition, quality and purity such that the finished product shall have the physical, mechanical, electrical properties, characteristics and parameters conforming to this Specification and the plans.

2. The conductors shall have a minimum in-service life expectancy of 30 years under normal operating conditions.

3. The conductors shall be unconditionally guaranteed by the manufacturer and/or supplier to be free from defects for a period not less than five (5) years.

4. The Engineer reserves the right to witness the manufacture, testing and packing of all conductors. The manufacturer shall notify the Engineer not less than 10 days in advance of manufacturing and testing operations.

5. All conductors shall be subject to factory quality control tests as required in the applicable Standards. Tests shall be performed on each reel prior to shipment. A

80

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

certified copy of the test report for each reel shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment. A copy of the test report shall be packed with each reel.

6. Grooved contact wire shall be subject to the twist test in addition to other required tests required by the applicable ASTM. The twist test shall be performed as specified for round wire, except that 6 twists shall be required. Contact wire not meeting this test will be rejected.

7. Each reel shall consist of one continuous, unspliced conductor; and shall have the required length of conductor so that no splices are required in the tension sections as installed unless approved by the Engineer.

8. Contact wire shall be permanently identified at intervals of 300 feet along its length on the surface of the top lobe, showing the manufacturer's marks, material, size in AWG and year of manufacture.

9. Each reel shall have a strong, weatherproof tag or marker securely fastened to it, showing the size and type of conductor as well as the ASTM designation, name and mark of the manufacturer, total reel length, and weight and manufacturer's special instructions.

10. A stripe in any contrasting color approximately 1" wide shall be painted across the outermost layer on each reel. Any visible conductor shift at this line, upon receipt at the job site, will be treated as indicating a relative wire movement during shipment, and is cause for reel rejection.

11. Joints in contact wire shall be marked with paint or dye prior to wire drawing. The marks shall be readily distinguishable after the wire drawing process.

12. Any damage to the wire shall be the Contractor's responsibility and all repairs and replacements of the damaged wires shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

Testing: A. Insulators:

1. Insulators shall be tested in accordance with ANSI C29.1. 2. Factory tests shall be made as required by these specifications and the referenced

standards. Test reports shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer. 3. The Engineer reserves the right to witness the manufacture, testing and packing of

all insulators. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than ten days in advance of manufacturing and testing operations.

Delivery, Storage and Handling:

81

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

A. The Contractor shall ensure that all materials furnished are suitably packaged, stored and




D. The materials, when necessary to store on site, shall be stored in a manner to permit easy

access for inspection and identification in areas as designated on the plans or as directed by Engineer which do not impeded the progress of staged construction.






H. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. I. Fittings and hardware shall be packaged in a manner to allow stacking and outdoor

storage until installation with no harmful effects. J. Catenary Assemblies packing and/or packing methods of all assemblies or components

shall be approved by the Engineer. K. Stainless Steel Rope and Rods shall be shipped on reels suitable for the weight carried or

in straight lengths, securely bundled. Rods shipped on reels shall be straightened prior to use.

L. Stainless Steel Rope and Rods shall be protected against damage during handling and

shipping. Each reel or bundle shall have a strong, weatherproof tag securely fastened showing the physical and mechanical properties as well as type designation. ASTM

82

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

designation and the name and mark of the manufacturer, the total length and weight of the wire rope, strand or rod on each reel or bundle

M. Uninsulated Wire shall be shipped on wooden reels, suitable for the weight of the

conductors and shall be protected from damage. The diameter of the drum shall be sufficiently large so as to avoid difficulty with waves or kinks when the conductor is strung. The grooved contact wire shall be wound on the reel in such manner that the vertical axis of cross section shall be parallel to the axis of the reel.

Execution: A. Construction Staging:

1. The Contractor is alerted to the constraints imposed on installation work due to

the necessity for maintaining revenue electric train operations. Installation, adjustment and pre-revenue operation inspections of the longitudinal catenary wires shall be performed in discrete segments of the route as necessary to comply with these requirements.

2. Actual stringing, adjustment and pre-revenue testing of any specific system, or

segment thereof, must be accomplished within the agreed line outage.


A. Installation Tools:

1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain, subject to continual inspection by the Engineer, sufficient resources, including tools, mechanical equipment and apparatus necessary to complete the work in accordance with the Contract Drawings, this Specification and the agreed Systems Installation Plan. The equipment shall include all temporary materials, apparatus, consumable materials and any special tools recommended by the manufacturer for installing assemblies and arrangements. For dynamometers used, submit calibration certification certifying accuracy of the devices within the limits prescribed by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall be responsible to insure the continuing accuracy of these devices throughout the duration of their use.

B. All electrical connectors and clamps shall be prepared and protected externally and

internally in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Pre-installed Assemblies:

1. Prior to stringing wires for the individual systems to be constructed during any stage, all permanent supporting poles, trusses, insulated supporting devices, insulated termination assemblies, wire anchors and guy assemblies shall be

83

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

installed. The Contractor also shall install temporary guys where temporary dead-ending of wires will be necessary for construction staging and to avoid over stressing of structural elements during the stringing process. The Contractor shall review locations selected for such temporary guys with the Engineer.

D. Insulators:

1. All insulators shall be cleaned before and after installation. Only clean rags, free from any abrasive material shall be used for cleaning insulators. Wire brushes shall not be used for cleaning any parts, metal or otherwise. In the completed line, all insulator assemblies and hardware shall be clean, bright and free from nicks, chips or other marks.

E. Hardware:

1. All hardware shall be installed as indicated on the plans and as recommended by the manufacturer. Bolts and nuts shall be properly tightened in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All bolts shall be of sufficient length for a full thread beyond the nut and/or locknut, but shall not protrude beyond the nut and/or locknut more than ½ of an inch. Bolt ends shall not be cut off. Where locknuts are not used, lock washers shall be provided.

2. Hardware shall be installed using tools and methods specified by the

manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. 3. Hardware shall be inspected for cleanliness and damage. Any item that does not

fit, creates scraping of galvanizing during installation, or is found defective shall be rejected. Replacement, prior to acceptance by the Engineer, shall be at the Contractor's expense.

4. Cotter pins shall be installed with the open end toward the ground.

F. Connectors:

1. Current-carrying connectors, shall be as shown on the plans and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Connectors for copper or bronze wire shall be copper or bronze. Connectors for bi-metallic connections shall be tin plated.

2. Bolts in bolt-type connectors shall be lubricated as recommended by the

manufacturer and torqued to the manufacturer's recommendation, using a calibrated torque wrench.

3. Connectors shall preferably be factory-loaded with a corrosion inhibitor which is

made for the specific purpose.

84

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

4. Wire surfaces which are in contact with conducting surfaces of the connector shall be thoroughly wire brushed and an inhibitor applied. Where connectors are not factory-loaded with a corrosion inhibitor, the same inhibitor shall be applied in the field to the connector.

5. Corrosion inhibitors shall be stable over a wide temperature range, adhere to cold

metal surfaces, be water-repellent, weather resistant and inert to copper, aluminum, zinc, tin, cadmium, steel and neoprene rubber. Grit-bearing inhibitors shall be used except for flat lugs, sliding surfaces or where not recommended by the connector manufacturer. Grit shall be compatible with the connector and wire metal. Inhibitor for copper and bronze shall be T&B "Kopr Shiel", Fargo "Farpolene", Penn-Union "Cual-Aid", Burndy "Penetrox A", or approved equal.

6. One typical full-tension test of each type of splice for each type of conductor shall

be fabricated and tested by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer or by another means acceptable to the Engineer. The tensile strength and electrical conductivity of full-tension line splices shall be at least equal to the values specified in NEMA Standard CC3 for Class 1, Full-Tension connectors. Copper and bronze line splices shall conform to the specified standard of 95 percent tensile strength and 100 percent conductivity (minimums).

7. Supporting Devices and assemblies used for holding wires in the correct

horizontal and vertical position, shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. It is suggested that the Contractor take field measurements at the support location, immediately prior to the fabrication of such support assemblies, to determine the as-built conditions.

G. Conductors:

1. For each length of conductor installed, a record shall be kept by the Contractor of the reel number from which the conductor was used. Partly used reels shall be recorded as such.

2. All conductors shall be handled in accordance with good overhead line practice

and the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Conductors shall normally be ordered with one continuous length on one reel to

satisfy several runs. As the length required to install each run is removed, the length remaining on the reel shall be determined and recorded both on the reel and on substantiating documentation.

4. Care must be taken with handling reels so as not to prejudice the stringing

operation. Damaged reels shall be set aside for repair before use.

85

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

5. For tension conditions wire temperatures shall be measured by thermometer. The bulb of the thermometer shall be in intimate contact with the wire and shall be closely taped to the wire to prevent drafts around the bulb. The thermometer shall be read after 15 minutes of contact.

6. A record of wire temperature and the tension recorded at both ends of the tension

sections shall be kept for all conductors. A copy shall be given to the Engineer within 7 days of measurement.

H. Installation of Conductors:

1. Wires shall not be strung without the guy anchor assemblies being in place, ready to receive loads. Where necessary for staging of the work, the Contractor shall install temporary guy assemblies at locations agreed in conjunction with the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide any temporary anchors and down guys required to facilitate installation and construction staging at his own expense.

2. The Contractor’s sequence and methods of erecting the individual wires shall be

furnished for approval of the Engineer. 3. Care shall be taken to prevent kinks or other damage in the wires and cables. The

Engineer reserves the right to reject any wire in its entirety if it is judged that any damage will prejudice performance and/or service life. “Bird-caging” of stranded wire shall be cause for rejection.

4. The erection tension in any conductor shall be as shown on the plans with

tolerance of plus/minus 5 percent. 5. In general, one splice will be permitted in an entire length of conductor run.

Additional splices in any specific wire run shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

6. Splices will not be permitted within 5 feet of a support clamp. 7. Any damage to the conductors shall be immediately reported verbally to the

Engineer. Remedial action must be approved by the Engineer and will be performed as directed by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. Within 5 days of the verbal report and action determined, the Contractor shall submit a Conductor Damage Report describing the damage and remedial action, in writing, to the Engineer.

8. Roller-bearing sheaves of the closed type shall be used at all support points for

stringing. Sheaves shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the conductor without damage.

86

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

9. Dynamometers, or other tension measuring devices, shall be calibrated not more than one month prior to use on this Contract and shall be calibrated at monthly intervals, or as approved, during the Contract.

10. Stringing of the wires shall start from an anchor location. At splice locations, the

existing conductor shall be rigged to relieve tension, the wire cut and the splice between existing and new wire installed. After the initial termination is made, the conductor shall be pulled from the reel and lifted into the sheaves at each support. Sufficient tension must be maintained in the conductor during stringing to ensure that, under no circumstances, does the conductor touch the ground or the track between support points.

11. When the second anchor location is reached, a tensioning rig shall be erected on

the pole, anchoring point or on the existing conductor, as appropriate. The rig shall contain a dynamometer or other device for measuring tension. If the first termination point was a splice location, the tensioning rig at the cut conductor point shall be gradually eased as tension is applied at the second termination point. The changeover in tension from the existing conductor to the new conductor shall be coordinated carefully, preferably by radio, in order to avoid damage to the conductors at the initial splice location. After satisfactory transfer of tension, the wire shall be tensioned above the specified erection tension to minimize future creep. The required over-tensioning amount shall be established by the Contractor in conjunction with the wire manufacturer, bearing in mind the time constraints on construction. This tension shall then be slackened to the specified erection tension, and the dead-end assembly attached.

12. Erection tensions shall be governed by the plans, based on the equivalent span for

the tension length and temperature of the conductor. The Contractor shall submit his stringing procedure to the Engineer for approval.

13. During stringing of new conductors, proper vertical and horizontal electrical

clearances must be maintained away from existing conductors and structures. I. Catenary System:

1. Contact wires shall be erected in temporary wire loops attached to the messenger wire at appropriate intervals and lengths. "Figure Eight" loops made of No. 9 iron wire annealed, or other approved loops, may be used. In any case, the contact wire shall not be restrained from longitudinal movement during tensioning.

2. Contact wires shall be held in proper lateral position at the support, in relation to

the center line of elevated track, using temporary rollers to prevent kinking. 3. Similar preparations, as described for other wires, shall be employed at

commencement of stringing, and for tensioning of the contact wire.

87

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

4. Final adjustment of catenary messenger, aerial ground wire and traction power feeder to the specified stringing tension shall be made progressively, working any slack from the first anchor location toward the second anchor location at the other end of the run.

a. Final adjustment to the specified stringing tension shall be made progressively, working any slack from the first termination location toward the second anchor or splice location at the other end of the run.

b. The tension in the wire shall be adjusted so that it is within 5%, plus or

minus, of the erection tension derived from the charts. c. When the proper tension has been obtained, the conductor shall be secured

clamped in permanent position. d. Contact wires shall be tensioned in accordance with the tensions shown on

the plans for the appropriate equivalent span and temperature. The contact wire should be over tensioned by an amount necessary to minimize future elongation. The required over-tensioning amount shall be established by the Contractor in conjunction with the wire manufacturer, bearing in mind the time constraints on construction.

e. Turnbuckles and other adjustable fasteners shall have at least 60-percent

of their take-up adjustment remaining to provide for future maintenance. J. Hangers:

1. Hanger lengths for each installed span shall be determined by the Contractor based on the data given on the plans.

2. Hangers shall be fabricated to a tolerance of plus/minus 1/4 inch. 3. The along-track position of each hanger shall be within plus/minus 2 inches of the

design position. 4. As the hanger clips are fastened and steady arms attached, any twist in the contact

wire shall be removed by working from one anchor to the other. 5. As far as practicable, bolts shall be installed in the various clips so that the nuts

will be on the same side giving a uniform appearance. On curves, the nuts shall be placed on the inside of the curve to provide the best clearance to the pantograph.

6. Saddles for loop-type hangers shall clamp the messenger tightly. The loops shall

have a loose fit around the saddle, permitting free rise and fall without binding.

88

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

K. Wire pull-offs shall be installed as necessary and in locations as shown on the plans. The Contractor shall furnish and install such additional wire pull-offs as necessary to support and locate wires in the optimum position for operations during the staging work.

L. Crossed-contact wire assemblies shall be fitted at all in-running contact wire crossings as

necessary and as shown on the plans. M. Catenary jumpers shall be installed as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as directed

by the Engineer. N. Jumpers shall protrude through their clamps ½" maximum, and jumper ends shall be

wrapped. O. The configuration of jumpers shall make due allowance for the relative movement

between conductors for all temperatures. P. Final Adjustment:

1. Catenary System

a. After catenary tensioning has been completed, hangers and clips fastened, steady arms erected, and pull-offs installed, a check of the construction and adjustment to final position shall be made.

b. Any hangers with improper fit shall be replaced with hangers of proper

length. c. Height and lateral position of the contact wire shall be checked in

accordance with the plans and adjusted where necessary and is to be measured normal to the track along the elevated centerline. To accommodate construction staging, the Contractor may, subject to approval of the Engineer, leave final adjustment of partly constructed catenary systems to a later stage provided that the installation will not impact railroad operations.

d. The contact wire height given in the plans is the height at mean ambient

temperature (60F). e. Where the normal height of contact wire is 18'-0" and above, a tolerance

of plus 3" from the height shown on the plans will be permitted, except at the interface with existing system. The contact wire gradient between any two adjacent structures shall not exceed 1 in 100 relative to track, subject to maintaining safe pantograph operation.

89

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

f. Midspan heights must be at the average of the support heights at the structures at each end of the span.

g. The staggers of the contact wire shown on the plans are relative to the

inclined centerline of track which coincides with the nominal centerline of the static pantograph.

h. The lateral position of the contact wire will vary with the curvature and

span length. The stagger at each support shall be as shown on the plans. i. The installation tolerance for contact wire stagger shall be plus/minus 1

inch on the values specified on the plans. When required to achieve acceptable midspan offset, this tolerance may be increased with the approval of the Engineer.

j. The messenger wire generally shall be installed vertically above the final

staggered contact wire. An allowance of plus or minus 2 inches will be permitted on system heights 2 feet and above.

Q. Field Measurement and Clearance Check of Catenary System.

1. The following measurements shall be made and recorded with the catenary in its final position:

a. Messenger and contact wire heights above each track at each catenary support point and at midspan.

b. Wire temperature and air temperature including time of day. c. Contact wire stagger relative to design superelevated track centerline at

each registration point and at midspan. d. Track centerline to face of pole at rail level at each structure location,

actual track superelevation and pole deflection at contact wire level. e. A complete set of the final wire heights and stagger dimensions, as

accepted, shall be made available to the Engineer at the final inspection. f. The Contractor shall make a physical/mechanical clearance check, using a

pantograph height and stagger gauge fitted with removable clearance ears. If fouling occurs at any point, it shall be brought immediately to the attention of the Engineer.

g. The physical/mechanical clearance shall allow for 3" of uplift of the

contact wire with an additional allowance of 3" for mechanical clearance,

90

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

except at the steady arm where 1" minimum mechanical clearance shall be allowed.

R. Pantograph Running Tests:

1. After installation of the individual catenary systems and prior to acceptance of the line for normal electric operations, Metro North reserves the right to conduct pantograph tests on the catenary, using a vehicle with the pantograph in contact with the contact wire. These tests are to assure a smooth, shock-free passage of the pantograph with no interruption to current collection especially at turnouts, section insulators, and overlaps. Particular attention will be focused on wire takeover at overlaps, turnouts and crossovers, and the lack of arcing at all locations. The Contractor shall be responsible for all adjustments required as a result of these tests.


1. General








91

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

c. Aerial ground wires shall be interconnected to the new and existing aerial grounding system as shown on the plans.

T. Grounding and Bonding Systems Field Testing:

1. General




minimum:






Method of Measurement: A. Modifications and Additions to Catenary Systems will be measured for payment on a

lump sum basis and shall include fabrication, supply, installation and adjustments of all necessary conductors, wires, hangers, insulated support and registrations, termination/anchor assemblies, in-span assemblies, pull-off assemblies, jumpers and their connections, hardware, fittings, and all else necessary to reconstruct and return to service the modified catenary systems.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, temporary guying and anchoring, to accommodate the

modifications and additions work, will be considered incidental to the work and will not be measured separately.

92

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090079A

C. Unless otherwise indicated, temporary Modifications and Additions to Existing Aerial Ground Wire System will be considered incidental to the work and will not be measured separately.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, temporary Modifications and Additions to Existing

Supporting Structures will be considered incidental to the work and will not be measured separately.

Basis of Payment: The work of this section will be paid for at the contract unit prices for the following pay items which price shall include the work and all transportation, materials, equipment, tools and labor incidental thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit Modifications and Additions to Existing Catenary Systems LS

93

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090098A

ITEM #0090098A – SCREW ANCHORS, TYPE 1

Description:

Work under this item shall consist of the design, fabrication and installation of helical screw anchor assemblies. The work shall also consist of the removal of the screw anchors once it has been determined by the Engineer that the temporary anchors are no longer needed. Unless otherwise noted, the screw anchor Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment and materials necessary to accomplish the work. Materials:

Screw anchors shall be as manufactured by Hubbell/Chance or approved equal.

Screw anchor assemblies shall be capable of withstanding installation torque values and guy wire loadings consistent with Contractor’s screw anchor design. Submittals:

The installing Contractor and anchor designer shall submit the following for documentation for approval. Work shall not begin until all submittals have been received and approved by the Engineer.

A. Evidence of installing Contractor’s competence in the installation of helical anchors shall be provided to the owner’s satisfaction including a list of at least three projects completed within the previous three years wherein the installing Contractor installed similar helical anchors

B. Evidence of anchor designer’s competence: evidence of competence in the design of helical anchors shall be provided to the owner’s satisfaction and shall include:

1. Registration as a Professional Engineer in the State of Connecticut

2. A list of at least three projects completed within the previous three years wherein the anchor designer designed similar helical anchors

C. Product drawings, details, and all necessary technical data sufficient to qualify the proposed screw anchor product

D. Evidence of at least three years of production experience making helical anchors including a current ICC-ES product evaluation report or complete description of product testing and manufacturing quality assurance programs used to assess and maintain product quality.

94

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090098A

E. Shop Drawings and installation procedures for the screw anchor assemblies including details for a thimble eye adapter that are compatible with the details of the temporary guy wire assemblies to be used on the Project.

F. Sample installation record

G. Design calculations, stamped by a licensed PE in the State of Connecticut, demonstrating the required tensile capacity. Design calculations shall include:

1. Certification from the anchor designer that the proposed anchors meets the design requirements

2. Product designations for helix and extension sections and all ancillary products to be supplied at each helical anchor location

3. Manufacturer’s published allowable system capacities for the anchor assemblies, including load transfer devices

4. Calculated theoretical geotechnical capacity of anchors

5. Minimum torsional resistance criteria

6. Maximum allowable installation torque of anchor

7. Minimum embedment length and other site specific embedment depth requirements as may be appropriate for the site soil profiles

8. Inclination angle and location tolerance requirements

9. Copies of certified calibration reports for torque measuring equipment and load test measuring equipment to be used on the project. The calibrations shall have been performed within one year of the proposed starting date for the anchor installations.

Design and Performance:

A. Anchors shall be designed to support the nominal tension load of 20 kips as shown on the project plans. The overall length, helix configuration and minimum torsional resistance of the anchor shall be such that the required geotechnical capacity is developed by the helix plate(s) in appropriate bearing material. As shown on the project plans a minimum depth of 25 feet to the top of the anchor zone is required with additional depth potentially required as determined by the screw anchor designer.

B. All steel structure anchor components shall be designed within the limits provided by the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

95

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090098A

C. Except where noted otherwise on the project plans, all anchors shall be installed to provide a minimum factor of safety of 2.0 against ultimate pullout resistance and a maximum axial deflection of 1 inch at the nominal tension load.

D. The anchorage design shall account for anchor spacing, soil stratification and strain compatibility issues.

E. Required installation torque shall be as determined by the screw anchor Contractor.


A. Installation of the temporary guy anchors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and consistent with the Contractor’s design.

B. The Contractor shall ascertain that there are no buried cables or duct banks, water lines, sewers or other utilities prior to excavating by hand digging the first five feet.

Construction Tolerance:

Screw anchors shall be within the following tolerances unless specified otherwise on the plans:

A. Along the track ± 12” of dimension given on the plans.

B. Across the track ± 3” but not within 10 feet from centerline of track, unless otherwise directed by Engineer.

Anchor Termination and Acceptance:

The minimum overall length criteria and the minimum torsional resistance criteria as specified in the Contractor’s approved design submittal must be satisfied prior to termination and acceptance of the anchor installation. In the event any anchor fails to meet these production quality control criteria, the Contractor must submit a proposed remedy for approval unless pre-approved remedies have already been proposed and approved as part of the original design submittal.

Installation Records:

The Contractor shall provide copies of the individual anchor installation records within 24 hours after each installation is completed. Formal copies shall be submitted within 7 days after installation. The installation records shall include the following minimum information:

Date and time of installation Location of helical anchor Actual helical anchor type and configuration

96

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0090098A

Anchor reveal Total length of installed anchor Actual inclination of the anchor Actual torsional resistance Calculated geotechnical capacity based on actual torsional resistance Comments pertaining to interruptions, obstructions, or other relevant information


Screw anchors will be measured for payment based on the number of screw anchor assemblies successfully installed and subsequently removed.

Basis of Payment:

This work shall be paid for at the contract unit price each “Screw Anchor” complete and in place, which prices shall include all transportation, materials, installation, equipment, tools and labor incidental thereto:

Pay Item Pay Unit

Screw Anchor Each

97

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096017A

ITEM #0096017A – TRACTION POWER RETURN BONDING LAYOUTS

Description: Scope: A. The work to be performed according to the requirements of this specification consists of

furnishing all necessary material to bond the track rails for traction neutral return, yard leads, and all yard tracks to accomplish the following:

1. Prevent static charge accumulation, which could produce electromagnetic (EMI) interference or constitute a shock hazard to personnel.

2. Provide a homogeneous and stable ground plane. 3. Provide a fault current return path. 4. Prevent spurious development, rectification, and intermodulation of potentials

between hardware elements. B. The Contractor shall note the typical Plans for certain single-rail track circuits located

within the crossover areas of the interlockings and certain turnouts. C. The Contractor shall note that typical rail bonding details for rail joint, rail expansion

joint, frog and switch fouling connections, track cross bonding, and yard track bonding connections are shown on the Plans.

D. The Contractor shall provide the traction power return bonding layouts to be installed by

MNR as shown on the Plans and specified in the Contract Documents.

Submittals: A. The Contractor shall submit the following:

1. Material composition and electrical and mechanical characteristics for power bonds and track circuit connectors.

2. Field installation procedures for welded power bonds. 3. Field test procedures for welded power bonds. 4. All mechanical devices for securing and protecting rail bonding.

98

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096017A

5. Plans showing detailed final design for bonding of special track work, to provide that all pieces of the special track work are properly connected electrically.

6. Type of exothermic weld material, mold data and application procedure.

Materials: A. Power Bonds shall be in accordance with ASTM B173, Standard Specification for Rope-

Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors Having Concentric-Stranded Members, for Electrical Conductors and as follows:

1. All non-insulated joints in single- or double-rail track circuit areas including guardrail joints shall use 250 kcmil size, 13-inch long bonds, two for each joint.

2. Power bonds for frog and switch fouling connections and expansion joints shall

be two (2) 500 kcmil extra-flexible, as shown on the Plans. 3. The cable for frog and switch jumpers and end of storage track crossbonds shall

be 500 kcmil extra-flexible, as shown on the Plans. Shipping, Storage, and Handling: A. All traction power return bonding layouts for this contract shall remain the property and

responsibility of the manufacturer until it has been off-loaded at the designated storage facility in the presence of the Engineer, has been inspected by the Engineer, and has been approved in writing by the Engineer. Only after written approval by the Engineer will the traction power return bonding layouts become the property of MNR. MNR reserves the right to reject any materials that appear to have been damaged in transit. Damaged, defective, or missing parts will be replaced by the manufacturer at no additional cost to MNR.

Construction Methods: A. Power bonds will be installed by MNR forces, at locations shown on the Plans, and as

specified herein.

Method of Measurement: A. This item will be measured for payment on a per each basis for “Traction Power Return

Bonding Layouts,” ready for installation by MNR

99

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096017A

Basis of Payment: This work shall be paid for at the Contract unit bid price for "Traction Power Return Bonding Layouts," which shall include all transportation, material, equipment, tools, and labor incidental thereto. Installation will be paid for by a separate MNR Force Account.

Pay Item Pay Unit Traction Power Return Bonding Layouts EA.

100

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096018A

ITEM #0096018A – COPPER BUS BAR FOR NEUTRAL RETURN BONDINGS

Description: Scope: A. The work to be performed according to the requirements of this specification consists of

furnishing copper bus bars for neutral return bonding to be installed by MNR as shown on the Plans and specified in the Contract Documents.

Related Sections, Notices and References: A. Related Sections

1. Related requirements are included in, but not limited to, the following:

a. “600 V Copper Wire No. 500 kcmil” b. “600 V Copper Wire No. 250 kcmil” c. “600 V Copper Wire No. 4/0 AWG”

B. Quality Assurance

1. The Contractor shall supply the copper bus bars for neutral return bonding as shown on the Plans and in accordance with the requirements of this specification.

Submittals: A. The Contractor shall supply drawings of the copper bus bar for Designer approval prior to

manufacturing.

Materials: A. Copper Bus Bar

1. The copper bus bar shall be as shown on the Plans and meet the requirements of ASTM B187 – Standard Specification for Copper, Bus Bar, Rod and Shapes and General Purpose Rod, Bar and Shapes.

Shipping, Storage, and Handling: A. All copper bus bars for neutral return bonding for this contract shall remain the property

and responsibility of the manufacturer until it has been off-loaded at the designated

101

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096018A

storage facility in the presence of the Engineer, has been inspected by the Engineer, and has been approved in writing by the Engineer. Only after written approval by the Engineer will the copper bus bars for neutral return bonding become the property of MNR. MNR reserves the right to reject any materials that appear to have been damaged in transit. Damaged, defective, or missing parts will be replaced by the manufacturer at no additional cost to MNR.

Construction Methods: A. Installation of the copper bus bars for neutral return bonding will be performed by MNR

forces.

Method of Measurement: A. This item will be measured for payment on a per each basis for “Copper Bus Bar for

Neutral Return Bondings” tested and ready for installation by MNR.

Basis of Payment: This work shall be paid for at the Contract unit bid price for "Copper Bus Bar for Neutral Return Bondings" which shall include all transportation, material, equipment, tools, and labor required to perform this work. Installation will be paid for by a separate MNR Force Account.

Pay Item Pay Unit Copper Bus Bar for Neutral Return Bondings EA.

102

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096065A, #0096069A, #0096071A

ITEM #0096065A - REMOVAL OF CATENARY

ITEM #0096069A - REMOVAL OF CATENARY POLE STRUCTURE

ITEM #0096071A - REMOVAL OF GUY AND GUY ANCHOR RODS

Description: Scope: A. The work of this Section specifies the removal and disposal of out-of-service facilities. B. Removals of out-of-service facilities includes but is not necessarily limited to:

1. Catenary systems, including associated supporting and in-span assemblies. 2. Catenary supporting cross-spans, steel supporting brackets and insulated

assemblies. 3. Catenary pull-off assemblies. 4. Sectionalizing devices. 5. Steel supporting structures and parts of structures. 6. Pole and guy foundations. 7. Guys and guy anchors. 8. Grounding and bonding systems.

C. Removal work shall be performed within the limits of the project as specified on the

Contract Drawings and as necessary to permit installation and placing into service the new electric traction facilities in the interim and final stages.

D. Removal and disposal of all materials and appurtenant hardware shall be the

responsibility of the Contractor, who shall remove them from within the zone of train and Contractors work operations immediately prior to the end of each work period and entirely from the property prior to completion of the project.

E. All material to be removed but not specifically described, but required for proper

completion of the work, as determined by the Contractor shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.

103

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096065A, #0096069A, #0096071A

F. Burning of removals or otherwise demolished material or other debris shall not be

permitted. Coordination: A. The Contractor shall coordinate his removals work with the Engineer, the work of other

Contractors, and rail operators including but not limited to MNR & AMTRAK to assure no interference to train operations, other than work as planned.

Submittals: A. The Contractor shall submit his proposed method of removing out-of-service facilities to

demonstrate compliance with the railroad’s requirements for work over or adjacent to the railroad.


Removal Procedures:

A. Connecticut Department of Transportation and Metro North Railroad does not guarantee that the conditions and contents of the elements to be removed will be the same at the time of starting work as they are when prospective bidders inspect the site or prepare their bids, nor assumes any responsibility for destruction or loss due to fire, theft or vandalism that may occur prior to the time the Contractor takes possession of the elements for removal.

B. Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall arrange, with the Engineer and any affected Utilities, to inspect the site to assess the existing conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for organizing the inspection(s).

C. The Contractor shall remove all out-of-service facilities and any other associated items that interfere with installation of the new construction work, whether as shown on the drawings or not, and other items elsewhere on the site as indicated or directed by the Engineer, so that the new facilities can be properly installed along with all related new work.

D. As part of the work to be performed during the individual construction stages, existing power connections to the catenaries shall be modified and maintained as necessary during the removals work, to assure continued supply of traction power.

E. Out-of-service facilities, as designated, shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. Designated catenary structures shall be removed from their foundations. Foundations and guy anchor rods shall be removed to a depth of not less than 4 feet below ground level.

104

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096065A, #0096069A, #0096071A

F. Removals of dead-end guys and associated pole attachments shall not be performed until removal of all anchored wires has been accomplished.

G. Existing catenary supporting structures in the yard contract may be coated with paint containing lead and shall be identified by the Contractor in conjunction with the Engineer. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the “Lead Abatement” Specification.

H. The Contractor shall dispose of all removed structures and materials and shall backfill as necessary. The backfill material shall be a granular soil compacted to density equal to the surrounding soil.

I. The removal of catenaries, catenary structures, and foundations shall be in accordance with the suggested staging activities outlined in the Contract Documents. Removals shall be performed in such a manner that it causes no unsafe conditions, no unscheduled interruption of rail operations and no damage to existing facilities or work by others.

J. All removals work shall be conducted in a workmanlike manner in accordance with the requirements of this Contract and in conformance with applicable codes of the State of Connecticut.

K. All materials of any kind removed from within the limits of the project, as well as debris and rubbish, but excepting items of personal property belonging to Connecticut Department of Transportation and MNR employees shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the project site as it accumulates.

Safety Regulations:

A. The Contractor shall confine removals materials to the fullest extent possible within the suitable and acceptable limits of barricades and shall not deposit material, debris and rubbish in any area or perform any work that will be hazardous to railroad personnel, pedestrians, passengers, or other Contractor’s personnel.

B. Spillage of material carried by or dropped from any vehicle resulting from the Contractor’s hauling operations along the existing right-of-way or any public street shall be removed immediately by the Contractor.

C. The Contractor shall prevent or control, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, any dust which may result from any removal operation.

105

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096065A, #0096069A, #0096071A

Utilities:

A. The Contractor shall conduct removals and related operations in such a manner as to not interrupt utility service, including electric, gas, telephone, sewer, water, traction power, communication and signal cables and other utilities, or to any operating portions of Metro North RR lines beyond pre-arranged outages.

B. The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the Engineer, Metro North RR and applicable Utility Companies for any temporary or permanent disconnection or relocation of utilities in relation with the demolition and construction operations. The Contractor shall bear all costs and fees resulting from this work and shall furnish the Engineer with receipts showing proof of payment prior to the completion of all work under this section.

C. The Contractor shall coordinate with the designer in identifying existing facilities that are required to remain in service, yet which may require temporary removal and/or relocation during construction. Relocation of railroad facilities shall be performed as directed by the designer at the Contractor’s expense.

Salvaged Materials

A. No material removed in this project, shall be reused for new installation, whether permanent or temporary, without prior permission of the designer. Any such salvaged material that is accepted for re-installation shall be stored in areas that will not interfere with construction of the new facility or with the railroad’s daily operations. The location and organization of such storage areas shall be coordinated under the direction of the designer.


A. Removal of Catenary

1. The Catenary removals work to be measured under this section shall include removal of the existing contact wire conductors, messenger wires/cables, cross-catenary and cross-span wire assemblies, bridles, in-span insulators, hangers, termination assemblies, splices, hardware, fittings, jumpers, disconnect switches, miscellaneous steel attachments, and all else necessary to completely remove the designated out-of-service catenary system to accommodate installation and placing in service of the new catenary systems, as indicated in the Contract Plans and these Technical Specifications.

2. The quantity of catenary systems will be measured for payment by the actual linear foot of catenary contact wire removed measured from dead-end to dead-end or dead-end to splice. Measurement shall be performed jointly by the Contractor and the Engineer prior to the commencement of demolition activities.

106

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096065A, #0096069A, #0096071A

3. Unless otherwise indicated, no separate measurement will be made of any temporary material required to accomplish the removals work through the various construction stages, including but not limited to, temporary guying, temporary fittings, or other construction staging and removals materials, the cost of which shall be included in the price bid for the item “Removal of Catenary”.

B. Removal of Catenary Pole Structure

1. The Catenary Structures removals work to be measured under this section shall consist of removal of the entire structure including steel poles, beams, trusses, foundations, brackets, miscellaneous steel attachments, and all else necessary to completely remove the designated out-of-service structures.

2. The quantity of Catenary Structures will be measured for payment by the number of Catenary Structures completely removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3. Disposal and or backfilling will not be measured separately, the cost of which shall be included with the removal of Catenary Pole Structure.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, no separate measurement will be made of any temporary material required to accomplish the Catenary Structures removals work through the various construction stages, including but not limited to, temporary guying, temporary steel supporting structures, temporary fittings, or other construction staging and removals materials, the cost of which shall be included in the price bid for the item “Removal of Catenary Pole Structure”.

C. Removal of Guys and Guy Anchor Rods

1. The Guys and Guy Anchor Rods removals work to be measured under this section shall consist of removal of the pole guy attachments, guy assembly and anchor rod, and all else necessary to completely remove the designated out-of-service Guys and Guy Anchor Rods.

2. The quantity of Guys and Guy Anchor Rods will be measured for payment by the number of Guys and Guy Anchor Rods actually removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3. Disposal and or backfilling will not be measured separately, the cost of which shall be included with the removal of Guys and Guy Anchor Rods

4. Unless otherwise indicated, no separate measurement will be made of any temporary material required to accomplish the Guys and Guy Anchor Rods removals work through the various construction stages, including but not limited to, temporary guying, temporary fittings, or other construction staging and removals materials, the cost of which shall be included in the price bid for the item “Removal of Guys and Guy Anchor Rods”.

107

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096065A, #0096069A, #0096071A

Basis of Payment:

The quantity of Removal of Catenary, Removal of Catenary Pole Structure, and Removal of Guy and Guy Anchor Rods removed in accordance with these specifications, shall be paid for at the contract unit price in accordance with the following:

Pay Item Pay Unit

Removal of Catenary LF Removal of Catenary Pole Structure EA Removal of Guy and Guy Anchor Rods EA

108

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096106A

ITEM #0096106A – SNOW MELTER HEATER ELEMENTS

Description: Scope:

A. This specification subsection describes the functional and system requirements for Snow

Melter Heater Elements. The details for providing these Snow Melter Heater Element Cases shall be determined and guaranteed by the Contractor, subject to the written approval of the designer.

B. The work consists of furnishing, factory testing and inspection, training, documentation

and other services as required by the Contract Documents. Representatives of the MNR will place the apparatus into service. Acceptance will be in accordance with Contract Documents and subject to the approval of the Engineer, as described herein.

C. The Contractor shall supply and maintain a complete hardware list for the total duration

of the project. D. The Contractor shall provide submittals to the designer on all elements of the Snow

Melter Heater Elements to include but not limited to hardware, electrical, and testing. Each submittal shall be numbered sequentially and be approved prior to manufacturing or purchasing.

E. The Contractor shall provide a system that has a proven record in implementation and

operation within a 25 kV ac electrified rail environment. F. All aspects of the system material, installation, documentation, testing, and operation

shall conform to the following:

1. The Federal Railroad Administration's "Rules Standards and Instructions for Railroad Signal Systems.

2. The Association of American Railroads Practices. 3. The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 4. The Electronics Industries Association. 5. The National Electrical Code. 6. American Railway Engineering Association: Manual of Engineering,

Communication & Signals Manual. 7. MNR Standards. 8. Generally accepted North American Railroad signaling practice. In the event of a

conflict, the more restrictive standard shall apply unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

109

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096106A

Contractor Responsibilities:

A. The Contractor shall furnish material which has a proven reliable service in major railroad operations.

B. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with the Engineer in all possible ways including

adjustment of the delivery schedules.

C. Refer also to Sections A.1 to A.4 under Major Equipment and Services.

Plans:

A. The Plans included with this specification are intended to assist the Contractor in this work. The Plans are considered typical of the design required and are not complete in all details. The addition or deletion of apparatus shall be covered in the text of the technical specification or the requirements of the application.

Materials: General:

A. All apparatus furnished shall be suitable for operation without adjustment between the

temperature limits of -40 to +140 °F. No additional heating or cooling of the apparatus shall be required to meet this operating requirement unless approved by the designer.

B. The Contractor is responsible for furnishing all apparatus required for the proper

operation of the systems supplied except were explicitly indicated in these specifications. Requirements: A. The heater elements supplied shall be of a resistive type. The elements shall be supplied

with the heater core in place and tested. The tube diameter shall be 0.430 inches and be made of 321 Stainless Steel.

B. The Contractor shall furnish only new apparatus. The use of reconditioned or previously

used material is not permitted. C. The snow melter power shall be 480 Vac 60 Hz. All apparatus shall be rated at 600 V. Materials to be Furnished:

A. This specification subsection contains the requirements for the following Snow Melter

Heater formats:

110

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096106A

1. Tubular Rail Heater elements with hardware 2. Ballast Heater element assemblies.

B. Connecting leads are to be supplied by the Contractor, on each heater element as

specified in this specification. C. The Contractor shall use the following typical cable sizes (external to the pre-wired

cases): 1. Power Distribution: 4-500 kcmil and 1-#4/0 Ground 2. Heater Element: 2-#6 and 1-#6 Ground unless otherwise shown on the Plans. 3. Monitor Control: 6 conductor # 14 or 17 conductor composite (5 #9 - 12 # 14)

D. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer if the cable plant appears to be

inadequate for the circuits as designed.

Major Equipment and Services:

A. The Contractor shall furnish and perform the following major items of work in accordance with these specifications:

1. Furnish pre-wired Snow Melter Heater Elements and apparatus. 2. Furnish material for snow melter case modifications, as required to support new

heater installation. 3. Documentation. 4. Perform factory testing and inspection.

Heater Element Construction:

A. Each Heater element shall be supplied with a Quick Disconnect to facilitate quick

replacement. B. Each element shall be rated for 600 Vac operation. C. The Rail heaters shall be labeled in a permanent manner showing the “POINT” and

"HEEL" ends of the unit. D. The construction shall be compliant with all standards of the AREMA and National

Electric Code (NFPA 70).

111

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096106A


Shipping Requirements: A. The Contractor shall be responsible for packaging, shipping, and delivery to the field

sites. Packaging and method of delivery shall be submitted for Engineers approval prior to shipping.

Testing:

A. The Contractor shall perform tests to demonstrate that systems, subsystems, assemblies, sub-assemblies, and hardware supplied under this contract are in compliance with the specifications. A complete detailed plan of factory testing shall be submitted for approval.

Documentation Requirements:

A. The Contractor shall supply the latest revised versions of all documents including all wiring diagrams, plans, and manuals.

Quality Assurance:

A. These QC requirements define the characteristics of a quality control system which must be implemented by the Contractor during the course of equipment procurement, factory testing, installation, and acceptance testing.

B. The Contractor shall enforce the applicable portions of these QC system requirements on

its sub-suppliers. C. The basis for these system requirements is the American National Standards Institute

(ANSI) Standard C92-1987 entitled “Quality Systems-Model for Quality Assurance in Production and Installation.” Quality control systems based on other standards may also be acceptable provided they contain elements, which meet these requirements.

E. Definitions

1. For the purposes of these requirements, the definitions given in ANSI/ASQC A3,

"Quality System Terminology" applies. 2. For the purposes of these requirements, the term "product" is also used to denote

"service", as appropriate. 3. OEM - Original Equipment Manufacturer.

112

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096106A

Quality Policy:

A. The Contractor shall establish and document policies to implement quality control systematically in a manner that meets these QC system requirements. These policies shall be revised or amended until the Engineer accepts them.

Quality System:

A. The Contractor shall document and implement a quality control system consistent with

the policies accepted by the Engineer. The quality system shall include:

1. Written procedures and instructions governing the work covered by this contract. 2. Effective and verifiable implementation of these procedures and instructions.

B. Activities affecting quality shall be prescribed via documented instructions, procedures,

or Plans of a type appropriate to the circumstances and shall be accomplished in accordance with these instructions, procedures, or Plans.

C. Instructions, procedures, or Plans shall include appropriate measurable or otherwise verifiable criteria for determining that important activities have been satisfactorily accomplished.

Organization:

A. The Contractor shall appoint a senior management representative who, irrespective of

other responsibilities, shall have defined authority and responsibility for ensuring that its QC system requirements are implemented.

B. The Contractor shall identify the elements of its organization involved with this Contract,

including subcontractors and Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEM), and the scope of responsibility and authority of these parties.

C. Interfaces with OEMs, subcontractors, and MNR shall be identified and the scope of each

group's responsibilities described. D. The responsibility, authority, and the interrelation of personnel who manage, supervise,

perform, and verify work affecting the quality of items intended for MNR shall be defined, particularly for personnel who must exercise authority to:

1. Initiate, recommend, or provide solutions through designated channels to

eliminate identified noncompliance or non-conformance. 2. Control further processing, delivery, or installation of items until the

noncompliance or non-conformance has been corrected. 3. Initiate action to prevent the occurrence of noncompliance or non-conformance.

113

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096106A

E. Inspection and testing functions shall have sufficient resources and organizational independence to perform their responsibilities. Except for in-process monitoring, they shall not report to the same management as those who performed the work nor have had the input as to how work was accomplished or accepted.

Control of System Design:

A. The Contractor shall establish and implement measures to ensure that specified functional, safety, and quality requirements are met.

B. The Contractor shall establish and implement measures to identify, control, and assess the

impact of proposed design changes (including those from the OEMs) on specified functional, safety, and quality requirements. Added cost and schedule changes shall be identified and justified.

C. Design changes shall be reviewed, verified, and subjected to the approval of the designer. D. The Contractor shall obtain the designer's approval of proposed changes prior to

implementing these changes.

Document Control:

A. The Contractor shall establish and implement measures to control reports, procedures, OEM and subcontractor technical submittals, and other records and information it generates or receives that relate to equipment performance characteristics, qualification testing, factory testing, installation, inspection, and acceptance testing. This control shall ensure that: 1. The latest approved versions of documents or information described above are

available where affected Contractor's activities are performed. 2. Revised documents are redistributed to those who received the previous issue. 3. Superseded or obsolete documents are promptly removed from areas of work and

stations where controlled documents must be distributed. 4. Changes are reviewed and approved by the same functions or organizations that

performed the original review and approval or their designated successors. 5. A means (such as a list or computerized database) to identify the current revision

of instructions, procedures, Plans, specifications, or calculations is available. 6. Communications (memoranda of meetings, requests for clarification, etc.) and

reports are issued or responded to in a timely manner.

B. The Contractor shall establish and implement measures to revise and maintain procedures and other records that relate to the performance characteristics, installation, inspection, and testing of components, equipment, or systems in an updated condition. Current as-built condition of equipment shall be retained on file.

114

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096106A

Procurement Control:

A. The Contractor shall establish and implement measures for obtaining items and services from suppliers or subcontractors that conform to specified requirements: 1. The Contractor shall select its OEMs, subcontractors, and other sub-suppliers on

the basis of their ability to meet specified requirements. 2. Any procurement requirement which differs from those in the selected OEM,

subcontractor, or other sub-supplier's proposal or offer is resolved and the resolution incorporated into the purchase order or contract.

3. Records are maintained to show acceptability of the selected OEM, subcontractor, or other sub-supplier (where available, records of previously demonstrated capability and performance should be provided to show acceptability of the selected supplier).

Verification of Purchased Items:

A. The Contractor shall monitor and evaluate the quality of items furnished by its OEMs and

sub-suppliers to ensure that these items conform to the requirements of this Contract; the Contractor shall verify that OEMs and sub-suppliers are performing effective quality control. The Contractor upon delivery for conformance with purchase order requirements shall inspect items.

B. The Contractor shall establish measures to verify, as a minimum, that the correct items

and quantities have been shipped, that the items shipped are properly identified and packaged, and that the accompanying documentation is complete. Non-conformance shall be immediately identified.

C. Records of these procurement controls shall be maintained. Identification and Traceability of Items:

A. Contractor shall establish and implement measures to identify and maintain the identity

of materials, components, or equipment received and stored. B. The method of identification shall relate the item to its specification or applicable Plans.

This identification shall be recorded and documented. C. The means for identification may be by using markings, authorized stamps, tags, labels,

routing cards, but shall be such that the surface of the item is not damaged nor its use impaired.

115

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096106A

Process Control:

A. The Contractor shall establish and implement measures to plan factory testing and inspection to ensure that these processes are carried out under controlled conditions. Controlled conditions shall include the following:

1. Making available written instructions, procedures, or Plans detailing the manner

of installation. (These instructions, procedures, or Plans shall identify any required special process equipment, jigs and fixtures, instrumentation, and measuring and test equipment to be used, working environment, and criteria for determining acceptability of the product or process).

2. Providing, where appropriate, in-process monitoring and controls. 3. Using, when available, pre-approved or pre-qualified processes and equipment.

B. Witness points may be established at any point during factory testing. The affected process shall temporarily stop at witness points. Witness points and time duration shall be identified on process control documents or field instructions.

Inspection and Testing:

A. The Contractor shall establish and implement measures to perform and document all

required factory inspection and factory testing in accordance with documented industry standards, written procedures, inspection plans, and checklists.

B. The factory inspection and testing shall be performed by qualified personnel, methods,

and calibrated equipment; where required by the applicable code or standard, inspection and test personnel shall also be certified.

C. The Contractor shall maintain records which give evidence that equipment or systems

have passed factory inspection or testing within the defined acceptance criteria and shall provide these to the Engineer.

D. Non-conformance shall be immediately identified. E. Inspection and test records shall describe the scope of the inspection or test, identify the

system, equipment, or component inspected or tested, and identify the persons who conducted the inspection or test.

Measuring and Test Equipment:

A. The Contractor shall establish and implement measures for the selection, calibration, and

control of measuring and test equipment (M&TE) used to determine conformance. B. M&TE of a range, accuracy, and sensitivity conforming to measurement tolerances

specified within this contract shall be selected and used.

116

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096106A

C. Calibration procedures shall require M&TE identification and establish frequency of

calibration, calibration method, acceptance criteria, records to be generated, and the action to be taken when results are unsatisfactory.

D. M&TE shall be periodically calibrated using certified references traceable to the National

Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), to other nationally recognized standards when no such NIST standards exist, or to a documented standard acceptable to the Engineer when none of the preceding standards exist.

E. The calibration of M&TE shall be checked at prescribed intervals if testing or inspection

will continue over an extended period.

Factory Inspection and Test Status:

A. The Contractor shall establish and implement measures to identify and maintain the inspection and test status of systems, equipment or components until these are accepted by the Engineer, to ensure that only purchased items that have passed the required inspection and test have been used.

B. The means for status identification shall be such that the surface of the item is not

damaged nor its use impaired. Status identification may also be via inspection records, test software, physical location, or other suitable means, which indicate the conformance or non-conformance of these items with regard to inspection and tests performed.

Control of Non-conformance:

A. The Contractor shall establish and implement measures to prevent the inadvertent

furnishing of nonconforming items to MNR.

B. Procedures shall provide for identification, segregation, documentation, evaluation, and disposition of nonconforming items, and shall define the responsibility and authority for the disposition of nonconforming items.

C. Nonconforming items shall be positively identified and the matter brought to the attention

of Contractor's management representative, the Engineer, and the appropriate OEM, subcontractor, or sub-supplier.

D. The Contractor shall hold the nonconforming item from further work and, where

possible, shall be physically segregated in an area clearly marked, until the responsible parties have provided for the disposition of the item. The disposition of a nonconforming item may be: 1. Reworked (to meet original requirements) 2. Accepted as-is

117

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096106A

3. Repaired (to meet an alternative criteria) 4. Regarded (for alternative use) 5. Rejected, returned to vendor, or scrapped

E. The Contractor shall obtain written approval from the Engineer prior to furnishing to

MNR a nonconforming item as-is or repairing it to be acceptable to a standard different from the original standard.

F. Nonconforming items which have been repaired or reworked shall be re-inspected or

retested by the party responsible for the original inspection or test in accordance with approved acceptance standards before being declared acceptable.

G. The technical details of nonconformity that have been accepted "as-is" and of any repairs

made shall be documented. H. Items for return to vendor shall be removed from the area of work and controls placed to

prevent the re-furnishing to MNR the item or any part of it. I. Rejected or scrapped items shall be removed from the area of work and rendered

unusable in a manner which prevents their inadvertent furnishing to MNR.

Corrective Action:

A. The Contractor shall establish and implement measures to:

1. Investigate the cause(s) of noncompliance and nonconformance, and identify action(s) to prevent recurrence.

2. Implement corrective action to minimize or eliminate noncompliance or nonconformance.

3. Apply controls over the implementation of corrective action. 4. Incorporate the preventive action into procedures.

Packaging, Storage, and Handling: A. The Contractor shall establish and implement measures for maintaining the integrity,

security, and acceptability of items during receiving, handling, storage or movement of items.

B. The Contractor shall maintain packing and preservation of items to the extent necessary

to ensure conformance with this Contract until these items are furnished to MNR. The packaging of items inspected at the receiving point shall be resealed upon completion of the inspection.

C. The Contractor shall provide secure storage areas to prevent loss of, damage to, or

deterioration of items pending their furnishing to MNR.

118

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096106A

D. Items of different types shall be segregated while in storage. E. Measures shall ensure that the shelf life of items which deteriorate over time are reported

and that those with expired shelf life are scrapped; Special environment, maintenance (when items are stored for long period), and stacking limits required by the manufacturer shall be observed.

F. In order to detect deterioration, the condition of items in storage, prior to their furnishing

to MNR, shall be checked and assessed at appropriate intervals. G. Appropriate methods shall be established for authorizing receipt or release of items at

these storage areas. H. The Contractor shall employ qualified personnel, methods, and equipment to prevent

damage during handling.

Quality Control Records:

A. Quality control records shall be available at designated, controlled, but accessible areas at work locations. Procedures shall identify the responsible custodians for these records.

B. Quality control records shall be stored and maintained in such a way that they are readily

retrievable and provided with a suitable environment which minimizes deterioration or damage and prevents unauthorized alteration or loss.

C. Quality control records shall be legible, reproducible, identifiable with the item involved,

and contain the date of origination and identity of the originator, verifier, and/or responsible supervisor.

D. Quality control records shall be made available to MNR or its representative throughout the retention period.

Quality Audits:

A. By Metro-North:

1. MNR or its representatives may conduct quality audits. Direct access to

Contractor personnel, original records, items in process, and facilities where work is performed shall be provided by the Contractor. Contractor shall ensure via procurement documents that such access is also provided by their subcontractors and suppliers.

2. The Contractor shall provide a written response within 15 days after receipt of the

audit report, fully describing the methods and timetable by which compliance will

119

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096106A

be achieved. Deficiencies shall be corrected within 30 days after receipt or the audit report. a. Any survey, audit, or inspection performed by MNR or its representatives

shall not relieve the Contractor of any of the responsibilities under this contract.

B. By the Contractor:

1. The Contractor shall carry out a comprehensive system of planned and

documented audits to verify whether activities within its scope of responsibility are performed in compliance with applicable portions of the Quality Control system requirements and to determine the effectiveness of quality control.

2. Audits and follow-up actions shall be carried out in accordance with documented

procedures and by qualified personnel. Audit schedules shall be established to ensure coverage of the scope of the quality control system at least once in the life of this Contract.

3. Results of the audits shall be documented and brought to the attention of the

personnel having responsibility in the area audited. Management responsible for the area shall take timely corrective action on the deficiencies found by the audit.

Training and Personnel Qualification:

A. The Contractor shall ensure that the Quality Policy is understood and implemented by all elements of its organization that affect the quality of the items or services provided to MNR.

B. When qualified personnel are required by this Contract, personnel qualification shall be

based on an appropriate combination of education, training, and experience. Where required by the applicable code or standard, personnel qualification shall also be certified. Appropriate records of qualification, training, and certification shall be maintained as quality records.

Statistical Techniques:

A. The Contractor shall identify any statistical technique to be used for sampling inspections

or testing. Acceptance by means of representative sampling shall be in accordance with generally accepted statistical methods.

120

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096106A

Method of Measurement: Furnishing of “Snow Melter Heater Elements” will be measured on a “per each” basis, factory tested and inspected, documented, and ready for installation by MNR.

Basis of Payment: Furnishing of all “Snow Melter Heater Elements” will be paid for at the Contract unit price bid. This price shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, and tools required to perform this work. Installation of all “Snow Melter Heater Elements” will be paid for by a separate MNR Force Account.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Snow Melter Heater Elements EA.

121

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096108A

ITEM #0096108A – DISCONNECT SWITCH AND SECTIONALIZING JUMPER TAPS

Description:

Scope:

A. This specification describes the functional and system requirements for Disconnect Switch and Sectionalizing Jumper Taps. The disconnect switches will be manually operated and control power provided by the Catenary Feeding Jumpers. Details are specified in the Plans. The associated components include, but are not limited to, mounting steelwork, hardware, locking devices, grounding and bonding systems, fuses, conduits, cable terminators, supports, power cables and necessary jumpers between feeder cables, switches and the catenary system.

B. Grounding and Bonding Systems:


2. Grounding and bonding of electric traction facilities includes, but is not limited to:


b. Bonding and grounding of personnel ground mats to earth, disconnect switch operating rods and disconnect switch supporting steel at all disconnect switch locations as shown on the plans.

3. The work also includes the application design, furnishing, installing and testing of temporary grounding and bonding systems required to connect temporary supporting steelwork installed by the Contractor for his staging work.


A. References The Contract Drawings and pertinent provisions of all applicable Codes and Standards, as referenced in other Sections of the Specifications, shall apply to the work of this Section, and are hereby made a part of this Specification to the extent required.

122

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096108A

Submittals:

A. The Contractor shall prepare detailed designs for each of the required assemblies based on the information specified on the Contract Documents, including details for mounting switches, operating mechanisms and other related assemblies on the structure, including necessary catenary feeding/sectionalizing jumpers, showing details and dimensions of the parts and their relationship to each other, and describing the material composing the various parts, together with technical, mechanical and electrical characteristics

B. Manufacturer's descriptive literature, catalog data including model numbers and other pertinent information sufficient to clearly demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents.

C. Manufacturer's arrangement drawings and installation instructions.

D. Submit details of tests proposed and the procedures and forms to be used during tests and inspection.

E. Operation and Maintenance manual with a list of recommended spare parts.

F. Specific spare parts list and manuals with the details of their warrantees and guarantees.

G. Grounding and Bonding Systems:


2. The Contractor shall submit product data including test results and relevant drawings for all components proposed for use in the work of this Section.

3. Submit samples of mechanical and compression grounding connectors and indicate the intended application.

Materials: A. Materials shall comply with UL testing and product requirements. B. Disconnect switches shall meet or exceed the requirements of IEEE C37.30 and shall be

tested in accordance with IEEE C37.34. Disconnect switch insulators shall be station post type and shall meet or exceed the electrical and mechanical-strength requirements established in ANSI/NEMA C29.9 and shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/NEMA C29.1 or approved equal. The disconnect switch and its insulators shall be rated as follows:

1. Voltage class – 34.5 kV

123

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096108A

2. Rated current, continuous – 1,200 A 3. Rated current, momentary – 61,000 A 4. Rated frequency – 60 Hz 5. BIL – 150 kV

C. The disconnect switches shall be used as a means of connection/disconnecting the

positive feeders and for electrically isolating sections of the catenary at section insulator locations. During the interim and final stage, the switches shall normally be in the position indicated on the Plans.

D. Disconnect switches shall be for outdoor service and of the standard design used by MNR

for manually operated catenary sectionalizing and traction power feeder disconnects as specified in the Plans. The catenary disconnect switches shall be “grounding types” at locations shown on the plans.

E. Disconnect switches shall be assembled on galvanized steel channel bases with standard

NEMA mounting holes and arranged in coordination with the supporting members necessary to attach to and support on the catenary structures. Galvanized steel shall conform to ASTM A123.

F. Current-carrying parts shall be of hard-drawn copper. Contacts shall be high pressure,

silver-to-silver, self cleaning by wiping action, self aligning, and shall be capable of breaking system charging currents.

G. Disconnect switches shall utilize the ice-breaking feature of the switchblade revolving

inside the contact surfaces. The blade shall enter the contact and then turn. In opening the circuit, the blade shall first turn thus relieving the pressure before the blade is withdrawn from switch contacts. The total pressure shall be sufficient to ensure maximum security under short-circuit conditions.

H. The switch blade is controlled by a manual operating rod which is grounded by a ground

strap that is held to the rod with a pipe clamp as indicated on the Plans. I. High strength, high conductivity metals shall be used for all live parts. These metals shall

not be subject to deterioration due to weather conditions and shall be non-ferrous. J. Solderless, clamp-type terminal pads of a compatible design suitable for the application

shall be provided.

124

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096108A

K. Hinge contacts shall be silver-to-silver and shall be weather-sealed to protect the contacts from dust, dirt and moisture. Flexible leads or shunts at the switch hinge are not acceptable.

L. Springs, pivots, bearing and ferrous material shall not be part of a current carrying circuit. M. The disconnect switches shall be furnished with mounting bolts, nuts, washers, lock

washers, grounding stud and all other parts and materials necessary for complete mounting of the switch and its attachment to the supporting members.

N. Terminal connectors shall be of clamp-type hot-dip tinned bronze. Ground terminal of

grounding-type disconnect switches shall be connected to the structure. O. The switches shall be designed and constructed to assure satisfactory operation under all

weather conditions, including snow, sleet and ice, independent of lubrication. Cotter pins shall not be used to transmit stresses. All current carrying parts of the switch as well as contacts shall be designed to operate with minimum maintenance and shall maintain electrical clearance to all non-electrified parts.

P. Disconnect switches shall be permanently identified using numbers, as indicated in the

Plans. Identification may be high-visibility industrial grade self-adhering decals or stenciled with a durable white paint on the mechanism of each switch. Characters shall be no less than one and one half inches (1 ½") high. The Contractor shall submit a sample of the identification sign for approval prior to fabrication, or installation.

Q. After installation of a switch and prior to energization of the catenary system, the

Contractor shall verify correct operation of the disconnect switch installed under this Contract, and shall demonstrate such operation to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

R. All wiring shall be provided as required. Conductor sizes, composition and insulation

shall be as indicated on the Plans. All necessary additional hardware such as bushings, connectors, and all basic electrical materials needed for the installation of the equipment and accessories shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor.

S. The installation shall conform to National Electrical Code (NEC). T. Grounding and Bonding Systems:


125

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096108A



protected from damage and exposure. B. The Contractor shall handle and otherwise use the components in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions, to ensure that the products are not damaged or misused prior to or during installation.




Manually Operated Disconnect Switches: A. Each switch and operating mechanism shall be designed to prevent accidental or

unauthorized operation and each operating mechanism shall be arranged for padlocking. Each position shall be clearly identified on a plate at the operating handle location. Identify “OPEN”, and “CLOSED” positions and, where applicable, “GROUND”. Should the locking mechanism include any removable parts, such parts shall be fastened by a chain to prevent loss.

B. Each disconnect switch operating handle shall be provided with an outdoor-type, heavy

duty, keyed padlock having a hasp diameter of ½-inch minimum. All padlocks shall be keyed alike. Two keys shall be provided for each padlock.

C. Each switch shall be provided with a suitable manual operating mechanism mounted on

the side or back of the pole at a height suitable for manual operation. The operating mechanism shall be complete and shall include all necessary shafts, interconnecting and interlocking rods, offset link, vertical operating pipe, splice and guide plates, outboard bearings and operating handles with removable extensions and locking plates. All cams, gears, cranks and other mechanism when attached to the shaft shall be keyed to the shaft. Braided copper jumpers shall be provided for grounding the operating shafts to the grounding cable.

126

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096108A

Construction Methods: A. The disconnect switch assembly and feeder jumper catenary taps shall be correctly

installed with all of its components as shown on the Plans and supplemental drawings, furnished by the Contractor, and approved by the Engineer. This shall comply with the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer.

B. The catenary feeding jumper will connect to the disconnect switch assembly. The

disconnect switch will be linked to the manual operating handle which will control the conductive status of the switch blade.

C. The disconnect switch shall be designed and installed so that the base will not be stressed

unequally or distorted when bolted to its supporting members or during operation. D. Operating linkages and mechanisms shall be fully assembled and tested for ease of

operation and proper alignment for makeup of the contacts. E. The Contractor shall develop the operating rod mechanism design on site specific basis. F. All insulators associated with the disconnect switch installation shall be wiped clean after

the installation is complete. Disconnect switches with broken insulators will not be accepted.

G. Grounding and Bonding Systems:

1. General




127

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096108A






grounding system as shown on the plans. H. Grounding and Bonding Systems Field Testing:

1. General




minimum:






128

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0096108A

Method of Measurement: A. Disconnect Switch and Sectionalizing Jumper Taps will be measured on a “per each” basis,

completely installed, tested, and ready for use. Each assembly includes, but is not limited to fuses, terminators, conduits, cable terminator, supports, and power cables.

B. No direct payment will be made for personnel ground mats or associated grounding and bonding work, but the cost thereof shall be included in the unit prices for Disconnect Switches.

Basis of Payment: Disconnect Switch and Sectionalizing Jumper Taps will be paid for at the Contract unit price bid. This price shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, and tools required to perform this work.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Disconnect Switch and Sectionalizing Jumper Taps EA.

129

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100079A

ITEM #0100079A - ELECTRIC TRACTION STEEL WORK

Description:

Scope:

A. The work of this Section consists of furnishing, fabricating, galvanizing, shop assembling, shipping, offloading, storage and erection of structural and miscellaneous steel including, but not limited to poles, cross-beams, trusses, brackets, supporting attachments, drop-tube supports for catenary assemblies, and other various items comprising Electric Traction Steel Work, for the new supporting structures, as shown in the Contract Drawings and specified herein.

B. The work also includes developing, furnishing, fabrication of miscellaneous steel details required to accommodate the modifications and additions to existing steel supporting structures as necessary to accomplish the work of this contract.

C. The work also includes the application design necessary to develop the fabrication and assembly details on the basis of the details and data shown in the Contract Drawings and as outlined in the Technical Specifications.

D. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer to obtain such site-specific information as is necessary to prepare accurate shop drawings for the fabrication of structures, components and other items comprising the Electric Traction Steel Work.


A. Related Bid Item Sections:

Catenary Systems Aerial Ground Wire Systems Guy Assemblies Disconnect Switch and Sectionalizing Jumper Taps Signs

B. References:


130

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100079A

Submittals:

A. Mill certificates for structural and miscellaneous steel and proof of U.S.A. origin.

B. Certification for high strength bolts (see Section M.06 in Special Conditions).

C. Shop drawings for structural and miscellaneous steel, prior to the performance of any fabrication work.

D. Shop drawings shall give complete information necessary for the fabrication, galvanizing, assembly and erection of the members and components of the structures and items associated with supporting the electric traction facilities such as drop-tubes, brackets, pole extensions and cross-arms, including material specifications and the location, type and sizes of all related items, bolts and welds. For the purposes of verification of material to be furnished, and for planning of erection, the Contractor shall also compute the weight of all members and include summaries identifying and combining the weights of all individual items comprising the complete structure or assembly.

E. The drawings shall clearly distinguish between all shop and field bolts.

F. All shipping assemblies shall be noted and given mark numbers on the erection drawings.

G. Review of shop drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for errors in fabrication. The Contractor shall be responsible for fabrication design, dimensions, details, and for the correct fit of structural members.

H. Grounding and Bonding Systems:


2. The Contractor shall submit product data including test results and relevant drawings for all components proposed for use in the work of this Section.

3. Submit samples of mechanical and compression grounding connectors and indicate the intended application.

Materials:

A. All material shall be new.

B. Structural shapes, plates and rods shall conform to the Standard Specifications, Section M.06.02. The material shall be ASTM A36 except as noted.

131

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100079A

C. The Contractor shall complete the fabrication design of connections for the loads shown on the drawings, or where such loads are not indicated, a minimum load equivalent to the capacity of two (2) 7/8" diameter A-325 bolts. All bolt design shall be bearing type with threads excluded in the plane of shear.

D. High strength bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the Standard Specifications, Section M.06.02 and shall meet ASTM F3125, A325 Type 1. Other connectors shall be ASTM A307.

E. All material provided under this section shall be galvanized in conformance with the Standard Specifications, Section M.06.03. Zinc for galvanizing shall conform with ASTM B6, as specified in ASTM A123, and ASTM 153.

F. Fabricated structural assemblies and products shall be geometrically and chemically suitable for galvanizing.

G. Welding electrodes shall conform to the requirements of the AWS Structural Welding Code D1.1, for Series E 70xx.

H. Filler material for welding shall conform to the Standard Specifications, Section M.06.04.

I. Shims shall be of galvanized or stainless steel.

J. Provide galvanized touch-up material, which shall be "Z.R.C." brand cold galvanizing compound by Z.R.C. Products Company. Other brands may be submitted to the Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer’s opinion, these products are equivalent in performance and quality to the preferred product, an approved substitution may be granted.

K. Grounding and Bonding Systems:



Delivery, Storage & Handling:

A. Preassemble work at the shop to the greatest extent possible, including complete structures, clamped attachment assemblies and bolted attachment assemblies, to minimize field assembly at the worksite. Disassemble units only to the extent necessary to comply with shipping limitations. Mark all members and assemblies clearly for proper worksite reassembly and installation.

132

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100079A

B. Delivery locations, dates, and items to be delivered, shall be coordinated with the Engineer.

C. Electric Traction Steel Work shall be properly protected from damage, deterioration and loss during loading and transit to the Project site.

D. The various items comprising Electric Traction Steel Work shall be individually properly marked and/or tagged with high visibility member markings in agreement with the approved shop (erection) drawings.

E. Loose material, including bolts, nuts, washers, and clips shall be tagged and packaged to prevent loss and to assure ready identification at the site.

F. The Contractor shall handle and otherwise use the components in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, so as to ensure that the products are not damaged or misused prior to or during installation.

G. Any damage to the components prior to acceptance by the Engineer shall be the Contractor's responsibility.

H. Replacement of rejected components shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions at no cost to Connecticut Department of Transportation.


A. The Electric Traction Steel Work furnished by the Contractor shall be erected under railroad operations. It is vital, so as to avoid any negative impact on these revenue operations, that the structures be erected within scheduled track outages. To that end, the Contractor shall obtain precise details of the foundation installation progress and specific details as they affect the steelwork design. The Contractor shall verify actual anchor bolt sizes and patterns and, for structures with cross-beams and trusses, requiring attachment to separate poles, the actual distance between anchor bolt placements at each foundation.

B. All applicable portions of the Standard Specifications, Section 6.03 shall apply.

C. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer to obtain such site-specific information as is necessary to prepare accurate shop drawings for the fabrication of structures, components and other items comprising the Electric Traction Steel Work. The Contractor shall make a diligent effort to discover and eliminate related structural or safety problems prior to fabrication of the steelwork.

D. Prior to installation of catenary pole foundations, fabricate and furnish, within such time as shall be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer, templates conforming to the base plate size and anchor bolt hole pattern, for each and every supporting structure pole to be furnished. The templates shall be constructed of durable material and shall be

133

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100079A

marked for high visibility with the designated structure number. The templates shall be used by the Contractor during foundation installation to stabilize the anchor bolts and maintain anchor bolt spacing. For structures with more than one pole, use suffixes (N), (S), and (I) to identify respectively, the north, south and intermediate pole template. Alternate designation by the Contractor shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer.

E. The plumbness tolerance of dead loaded catenary poles shall be ± ½" at a point 18' above rail.

F. Poles shall be set not earlier than (7) seven days after foundation concrete has been poured or until foundation concrete has reached a minimum of 75% of design strength, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Poles shall not be loaded earlier than 28 days after foundation concrete has been poured or until foundation concrete has reached the applicable design strength, as indicated in the Contract Documents.

G. The Contractor shall not fabricate any cross-beams or trusses until he has verified, in the field, the distance between foundations or anchor bolts for the respective structures.

H. The Contractor shall not erect cross-beams or trusses until he has verified in the field that there will be adequate clearance between the cross-beams or trusses and existing catenary messenger(s) or other conductors passing beneath.

I. A minimum of 25% of bolts in a bolt group (but not less than 2 bolts) connecting both ends of a cross-beam or truss to the poles must be in place before the end of the track outage arranged for this purpose.

J. Subject to the Engineer’s approval, the Contractor may modify cross-beam and truss splice details or splice locations to suit his fabrication and erection procedure and equipment. All splices shall be full strength bolted splices as defined in AISC Manual of Steel Construction.

K. Field welding of galvanized members will not be permitted.

L. Voids in the base plate anchor bolt holes shall be completely filled with polyurethane sealant.

M. As soon as structural steel has been set in place and before the Contractor requests inspection of the work by the Engineer prior to restoration of power, the Contractor shall connect the steel work to the existing aerial ground wire system. The Contractor shall coordinate this work with the Engineer.

N. Temporary grounds shall be at least equal to one 4/0 cable placed in a position protected from damage and vandalism. Permanent grounding (aerial and ground rod) shall be scheduled by the Contractor for connections as soon as possible following steel erection.

O. Before erecting a catenary pole, cross-beam, truss, pole or independent steel extension or stringing a ground or feeder wire the Contractor shall ascertain that no energized wires

134

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100079A

will come into contact with, or encroach within 3 feet of the items(s) to be installed. Should existing or new energized feeders or catenaries be within 3 feet of a structure or ground wire, then the Contractor shall consult the Engineer about protective measures before proceeding with the work.

P. Grounding and Bonding Systems:

1. General


b. Ground tap connections between disconnect switch supporting steelwork and ground cables shall be provided, as shown on the plans. All paint, scale, rust, oxidation, or other foreign material shall be thoroughly removed from the points of contact on all metal surfaces before any ground connections are made.



b. Conductor connections shall be made as shown on the plans and as necessary to suit the application. Finish welds shall be cleaned and coated with an approved cold applied bituminous resin compound. Primer shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer.

c. Aerial ground wires shall be interconnected to the new and existing aerial grounding system as shown on the plans.

Q. Grounding and Bonding Systems Field Testing:

1. General

a. Testing shall be performed by the Contractor.

b. Ground resistance tests shall be made with a James G. Biddle Company Model 250220, Heavy-Duty, Megger Insulation Tester, or approved equal using the three-probe method described in IEEE Standard 81.

135

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100079A

2. Field testing shall be thorough and fully documented, with the following as a minimum:


b. Measure, record and report the resistance to earth of each portion of the grounding system as soon as possible after installation so that corrective measures, if required, may be made with minimum disruption of construction. The required ground resistance is 5 ohms or less. Corrective measures shall be taken by the Contractor to achieve the specified ground resistance.

c. Resistance-to-earth tests shall be coordinated with and witnessed by the Engineer, and the written results of these tests shall be submitted to the Engineer for evaluation and instructions regarding any corrective action which may be deemed necessary.

Approximate Quantities:

A. The estimated quantity of the Electric Traction Steel Work to be furnished pursuant to this Contract, for which a unit bid price is required in the Bidders Proposal is approximate, and the actual quantity may be greater or less. The estimated quantity has been given only for the purpose of awarding the Contract by comparing on a uniform basis the bids offered for the work. Bidders shall make their own estimates of the Electric Traction Steel Work to be furnished and all other contingencies attending the execution of the proposed Contract.


A. Structural and miscellaneous steel will be measured for payment based on its weight to be calculated by the Contractor in accordance with the Standard Specifications, Section 6.03.04-1. The Contractor shall compute the weights of all steel to be delivered from his approved shop drawings and shall submit this information to the Engineer in suitable form for verification. The weights shall be suitably classified, with respect to all items applicable to the bid item “Electric Traction Steel Work”.

B. Alterations made to existing catenary support structures or portions thereof, including cutting of existing structural steel, furnishing and application of zinc paint, drilling of holes, installation of new steel supporting attachments, and removal and disposal of surplus material there from, will not be measured for payment, but the cost thereof will be included in the unit price for “Electric Traction Steel Work”.

136

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100079A

C. No direct payment will be made for galvanizing, but the cost thereof shall be included in the unit price for “Electric Traction Steel Work”.

Basis of Payment:

Payment for Electric Traction Steel Work as above described will be made for the quantity as above determined, measured at the unit price per one hundred pound weight (CWT), which price shall include the cost of all equipment, tools, handling, transportation, labor, temporary and permanent materials, and all else necessary for the complete fabrication, galvanizing and proper completion of the work, and all other work in connection therewith and incidental thereto, and will include also the furnishing of such drawings, diagrams, calculations, weights, statements, certificates, analyses, and facilities as described herein, for the item:

Pay Item Pay Unit

Electric Traction Steel Work CWT.

137

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100244A

ITEM #0100244A - SIGNS

Description: Scope A. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installation of catenary related signs,

including pole identification signs and miscellaneous warning signs. B. "Danger High Voltage" sign (Type D) shall be placed on all catenary poles, on both

sides, two signs per pole. C. "Electric Train Stop" signs shall be placed on the catenary at the “Dead-Ends” of

catenary systems equipping yard tracks. D. Stainless Steel Wire Rope and Rods:


Supporting rods for signage

Submittals: A. Signs Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall be submitted prior to procurement,

fabrication, and installation. Shop drawings shall be composed of: plan layout, attachment method, signage layout with font size & orientation, samples. The Engineer reserves the right during the period of submittals, to select alternate colors to those indicated herein.

B. Stainless Steel Rods:

1. Certification: Furnish certification verifying that the stainless steel rod have been designed, manufactured, inspected and tested in accordance with the referenced standards and these Specifications.



drawings.

138

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100244A

Materials: A. "Danger High Voltage" sign (Type D):

1. For pole placement shall be high visibility industrial grade self adhering decals. 2. For other surfaces such as walls, shall be made with a 0.040 inch minimum thick

rigid aluminum backing plate and shall be permanently attached with power driven nails capable of holding signs and anchoring into the backing or base material.

3. All sharp edges shall be rounded and deburred.

B. "Electric Train Stop" signs:

1. The signs shall be made with a 0.125 inch minimum thick rigid aluminum backing plate. All sharp edges shall be rounded and deburred.

2. Attachment hardware shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements

specified for the fittings and hardware of the overhead catenary system. C. Pole Identification (Number) Signs shall be made using letters and numbers, 1½ inches

high minimum, on a vinyl self-adhering backing sheet. The completed signs shall be capable of being permanently placed on the catenary poles.

1. All letters and numbers shall be on the front of the sign only. 2. Signs shall be manufactured in a dry, temperature controlled area. 3. All painted and adhering surfaces shall be prepared and made free from dirt, oil,

and grease or other substances that prevent bonding. 4. All painting shall be in accordance with the sign manufacturer's standard practice

and recommendations, and as approved by the Engineer. D. “Danger Live Wire” signs shall be painted, silk-screened, or be an industrial grade self-

adhering vinyl decal. The signs shall be high in visibility white, red and black. E. “Danger High Voltage” signs for poles shall be industrial grade self-adhering vinyl

decals. For mounting on surfaces other than poles, signs may, if acceptable to the Engineer, be made using a rigid backing plate.

F. "Electric Train Stop" letters shall be a high-visibility white or silver paint, or an industrial

grade self-adhering vinyl decal on a black non-reflecting background. In addition, the back of the sign shall be painted black.

139

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100244A

G. Pole Identification Signs shall consist of 1½ inch high black characters on a separate self-adhering reflective yellow backing sheet, sized to suit the characters and pole.

I. Stainless Steel Rods:

1. Stainless Steel Rod shall be round and manufactured and tested and in conformance with requirements of ASTM A276.





D. The materials, when necessary to store on site, shall be stored in a manner to permit easy

access for inspection and identification in areas as designated on the plans or as directed by Engineer which do not impeded the progress of staged construction.


manufacturer’s instructions, to ensure that the products are not damaged or misused prior to or during installation.




H. Protect signage and packaged materials from damage and deterioration. I. Stainless Steel Rods shall be shipped on reels suitable for the weight carried or in straight

lengths, securely bundled. Rods shipped on reels shall be straightened prior to use.

140

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100244A

J. Stainless Steel Rods shall be protected against damage during handling and shipping. Each reel or bundle shall have a strong, weatherproof tag securely fastened showing the physical and mechanical properties as well as type designation. ASTM designation and the name and mark of the manufacturer, the total length and weight of the wire rope, strand or rod on each reel or bundle

Construction Methods: A. Preparation

1. Surfaces to which signs shall be attached shall be free of ice, dirt or foreign objects.

B. Installation, Application and Erection

1. "Danger Live Wire" signs shall be attached to the walls of buildings. Signs shall be fixed permanently to the side walls and end walls, at each end and in the middle of the buildings, with one sign positioned directly above each catenary where it enters the building.

2. "Danger High Voltage" sign (Type D) shall be attached to the catenary poles at a

nominal height of 6'-0" above high rail level. Two signs per pole. 3. "Electric Train Stop" signs shall be placed between the contact and messenger

wires on storage yard tracks and other tracks at the limit of electric operation. Location of “Electric Train Stop” signs as shown on plans.

Warranty: All signs shall be manufactured for outdoor use. The Contractor shall demonstrate that no appreciable discoloration, cracking, blistering or dimensional change will occur for a period of not less than 15 years. Method of Measurement: Signs, hardware, rods, and accessories will be measured for payment based on each sign being furnished, fabricated supplied and installed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

141

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100244A

Basis of Payment: The quantity of Signs supplied and installed in accordance with these specifications, will be paid for at the contract unit price in accordance with the following:

Pay Item Pay Unit

Signs EA.

142

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100500A

ITEM #0100500A - CONSTRUCTION COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT (ESTIMATED COST)

Description: Under this item, the Contractor shall provide: A. Communication equipment for use by the inspection personnel. This item shall include all

necessary equipment, accessories, material and labor to put the system into operation. Provisions shall also be made to maintain all provided communication equipment and any additional communication equipment assigned to the project, as directed by the Engineer.

B. A toll-free, reservation-less telephone conference call account for the use of the Engineer. Materials: The equipment for this item shall conform to the following: A hand held cellular phone. This item shall include all necessary equipment, accessories (including but not limited to car charger and holster), materials, labor and maintenance to make the system operational. In addition, the phones shall have voice mail, caller ID and call waiting.

Construction Methods: A. Communication Equipment: The Contractor shall submit three (3) proposals for both the

communication equipment described herein and forward to the Engineer for approval. The Department will provide the Contractor with the estimated quantity of phones required for inspection personnel. The three proposals may be for either rental or purchase of equipment that is new or of like-new condition and meeting the specification requirements. Also, the three proposals must indicate the minimum and maximum number of phones that will be allotted. The Engineer will have ten (10) days from receipt of the proposals to inform the Contractor of its selection. Once approved, the contractor shall order the equipment, and have it installed and operating within fifteen (15) working days. The Contractor will furnish to the State, a copy of the monthly call record for each phone when submitting the billing invoices for the communication equipment. All equipment and associated materials will remain the property of the Contractor upon completion of the project unless otherwise specified by the Engineer in writing.

143

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0100500A

B. Telephone Conference Call Account: The Contractor shall submit three (3) proposals for the telephone conference call account described herein and forward to the Engineer for approval. The Engineer will have ten (10) days from receipt of the proposals to inform the Contractor of its selection. Once approved, the contractor shall activate the account within five (5) working days. Once activated, the Engineer will act as the “moderator” and control all associated PIN numbers. The Contractor will furnish to the State, a copy of the detailed monthly account history when submitting the billing invoices for the telephone conference call account.


The item, Construction Communication Equipment, will be measured for payment based on actual detailed monthly invoices.

Basis of Payment:

The sum of money shown on the Estimate and in the itemized proposal as “Estimated Cost” for this work will be considered the bid price even though payment will be made as described below. The estimated cost figure is not to be altered in any manner by the bidder. Should the bidder alter the amount shown, the altered figures will be disregarded and the original price will be used to determine the total amount for the contract. The item, “Construction Communication Equipment”, will be paid for at the actual detailed monthly account history for services approved by the Engineer, plus a 5% markup. Payment will include all materials, equipment, labor and maintenance associated with this item.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Construction Communication Equipment (Estimated Cost) Est.

144

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0104057A

ITEM #0104057A – POLE FOUNDATIONS, TYPE A

Description: Scope: A. Work under these items consists of the fabrication and construction of foundations for

catenary structures. B. Grounding and Bonding Systems:



to:


b. Bonding and grounding of personnel ground mats to earth, disconnect




Related Sections, Notices and References: A. Related Bid Item Sections:

Guy Assemblies” Electric Traction Steel Work”


requirements of Standard Specifications. B. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with the Engineer, the work of other

Contractors, and rail operators including but not limited to MNR & AMTRAK to assure no interference to train operations, other than work planned.

145

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0104057A

Submittals:

A. The Contractor shall submit the following:

1. Certified mill certificates for reinforcing steel. 2. Shop drawings for structural steel conforming to the requirements of the Standard

Specifications. 3. Shop drawings for reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with Standard

Specifications, Article 6.02.03. 4. Mill certificates for structural steel and proof of U.S. origin. 5. Proposed concrete mix. 6. Certified concrete cylinder test results. 7. Procedure for installing foundations and guy anchors including proposed

equipment for driving the steel shells. 8. Notarized laboratory qualifications for welded studs in accordance with Standard

Specifications, Section 5.08.03. B. Grounding and Bonding Systems:




indicate the intended application. Materials: A. Standard Specifications, Section 12.02 - Overhead Sign Support Foundation shall apply

except as noted hereafter. B. No previously used materials shall be used for construction under this contract unless

otherwise specified by the Engineer.

146

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0104057A

C. Concrete shall conform to Standard Specifications, Section M.03.01, Class “F” concrete. No retarding admixture shall be used except with the approval of the Engineer. Air entrainment shall conform to Standard Specifications, Section M.03.01.5(a).

D. Reinforcing steel shall be Grade 60 as specified in Standard Specifications, Section

M.06.01. The minimum cover shall be as called for in the plans. E. Structural steel shall be as specified in item “Electric Traction Steel Work”. F. Permanent steel shells for Type A and high mast foundations shall be commercially

available welded steel pipe conforming to ASTM A252, Grade 2 with a minimum 1/2” wall thickness and inside diameter as shown on the plans.

G. Nuts and bolts for Type A and high mast steel shell foundations to be used as shear studs

shall be as specified in Standard Specifications, Section M.06.04 H. Anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A449 and nuts to ASTM A563 if not otherwise

specified on the plans. Both shall be galvanized in conformance with Standard Specifications, Section M.06.03.

I. Grout shall be of non-shrink type and shall be per Standard Specifications, Section

M.03.05. J. Ground wire shall be as specified in the item “Aerial Ground Wire Systems”. K. Bitumen coating shall be an asphalt type bitumen conforming to ASTM D946, with a

minimum penetration grade 80 (ASTM D5) at the time of steel shell installation. Bitumen coating shall be applied uniformly over an asphalt primer. The asphalt primer shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 41.

L. Grounding and Bonding Systems:




Delivery, Storage and Handling A. The Contractor shall ensure that all materials furnished are suitably packaged, stored and

protected from damage and exposure.

147

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0104057A

B. The Contractor shall handle and otherwise use the components in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, to ensure that the products are not damaged or misused prior to or during installation.




Construction Methods: A. All applicable portions of Standard Specifications, Sections 5.09.03 and 12.02.03, shall

apply except as noted hereafter. B. Type A foundations shall consist of steel shells, driven in sections below the specified

minimum depth until firm soil is encountered as directed and determined by the Engineer. The foundations shall be excavated to the depth shown on the plans to allow the placement of concrete.

C. In case the required side bearing depth is not obtained, the Contractor, after authorization

by the Engineer, shall remove the obstruction of auguring within the caisson. Such work will be paid for as “extra work” in accordance with Standard Specifications, Sections 1.20-1.04.05 and 1.20-1.09.04.

D. The Contractor shall ascertain that there are no buried cables or duct banks, water lines,

sewers or other utilities prior to excavating by hand digging the first five feet. E. The Contractor shall demolish any buried foundations that may be encountered when

excavating for foundations. F. Foundation excavation shall be carried out so that the stability of the railroad

embankment is not endangered including consideration for the effect of passing trains. The live load influence line is defined as a line originating at the bottom edge of tie and extending downward at a slope of 1 (vertical) on 1½ (horizontal). Open excavations must be designed to withstand, in addition to all common loads such as soil pressure and hydrostatic pressure, a railroad live load of Cooper E-80 or other loading magnitudes as may be directed by the Engineer.

G. Steel shells, used for foundations, shall be painted on the exterior to show their lengths.

The method of paint marking shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer.

148

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0104057A

H. Standard Specifications, Section 7.02.03.5 shall apply except as noted hereafter. Vibratory pile hammers shall not be allowed except with the Engineer’s approval.

I. Hex nuts shall be welded to the steel shell as shown on the plans. The bolts shall be

screwed into the nuts and this system shall be used as shear studs. J. The excavation within the steel casing and the first five feet of hand digging shall be paid

as “Structure Excavation – Earth (Complete)”. K. The Contractor shall reroute or restore ditching at new structures where they otherwise

would impede the established drainage course. L. Should ground water be encountered, the Engineer may require a tremmie seal of one

foot minimum depth to be placed prior to reinforcing steel and the balance of the concrete. The surface of the tremmie concrete shall be cleaned dry and to sound concrete before concrete placement is resumed. Disposal of ground water pumped from the caisson shall be as described in section “Dewatering”.

M. Standard Specifications, Section 6.01.03.5 is amended by the requirement that the

Contractor casts, cures and tests concrete cylinders for compressive strength at no additional cost to the State.

N. The void between the top of the Type A foundation and the underside of the base plate

shall be completely filled with grout after the anchor bolt nuts have been tightened and the structure loaded. The grout shall be mixed and placed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.

O. All catenary structures shall be grounded through their foundations as shown on the

plans. P. Blasting will not be permitted except with the Engineer’s approval and the obtaining of

proper State and local permits. Q. Open excavations shall be covered at the end of each shift. R. For the bitumen coatings of the steel shells:

1. All surfaces to be coated with bitumen shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned of dust and loose materials. No primer or bitumen shall be applied in wet weather, or when the temperature is below 65 degrees F.

2. The primer shall be applied to the surfaces and allowed to completely dry before

the bitumen is applied. Primer shall be applied uniformly at the quantity of one gallon per 100 square feet.

149

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0104057A

3. Bitumen shall be applied uniformly at a temperature of not less than 300 degrees F, nor more than 350 degrees F, and shall be applied either by mopping, brushing, or spraying. The bitumen shall be applied to a minimum dry thickness of 1/16 inch, but in no case shall the quantity of application be less than 8 gallons per 100 square feet.

4. Bitumen coated shells shall be stored before driving and protected from sunlight

and heat. Coatings shall not be exposed to damage during storage, hauling or handling. The Contractor shall take appropriate measures to preserve and maintain the bitumen coating. At the time of installation, the bitumen coating shall have a minimum dry thickness of 1/16 inch and a minimum penetration value of at least 80 (ASTM D5). If necessary, the Trade Contractor shall recoat the shells, at Trade Contractor’s expense, to comply with these requirements.


1. General









grounding system as shown on the plans.

150

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0104057A

T. Grounding and Bonding Systems Field Testing:

1. General




minimum:






Construction Tolerance:

A. The tolerance for placing Type A foundations is 1½”+ anchor bolt tolerance. B. The deviation from plumb shall be not more than 1%. C. The tolerances for placement of anchor bolts for portal and pole Type A structures shall

be:

1. Horizontally, in the direction of the track, ± 6” but opposing portal structure anchor bolts must be within 1” of a perpendicular line across the tracks.

151

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0104057A

2. Horizontally in the direction of the track between multiple foundations for the same structure 1/8”.

3. Horizontally perpendicular to the track -0” + 1”. Vertically ±1/2”.

Method of Measurement: Type A Pole Foundations will be measured for payment based on the linear feet of foundation installed and will be measured as the length of foundation from top of foundation to bottom of steel shell. There will be no separate payment for fence removal and restoration, ditching or grading, form work, steel shells, welding of shell sections, disposal of cut-off sections, regular or tremmie concrete, grouting, reinforcing steel, anchor bolts, nuts and bolts, welding of nuts and grounding and bonding but the costs thereof shall be included in the unit price for the foundations, except as noted below. Excavation and dewatering will not be measured for payment under this item but will be paid for separately under other sections.

Basis of Payment: This work will be paid for at the Contract unit prices per linear feet, which prices will include all transportation, materials, equipment, tools and labor incidental thereto. Excavation shall be paid under “Structure Excavation – Earth (Complete)”. Dewatering shall be paid under “Dewatering”.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Pole Foundations, Type A L.F.

152

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0201001A

ITEM #0201001A – CLEARING AND GRUBBING

Section 2.01 is supplemented and amended as follows:

Article 2.01.01 - Description: Add the following: The work under this item shall also include the removal of existing concrete blocks, concrete barriers, concrete posts, wheel stops, stockpiled concrete manholes, bollards, trees, bushes, stumps, fallen timber, logs, roots, refuse, trash and debris, including industrial and household items, and all other miscellaneous items not covered elsewhere in the Specifications. This item shall include all work within the project limits as shown on the plans. The Department reserves the right to identify and salvage specific elements as directed by Engineer. Salvage elements shall be transported to a designated location within the NHRY as directed by the Engineer. Article 2.01.03 – Construction Methods: Add the following: Concrete barriers and wheel stops identified on the plans to be removed shall be either relocated and used during stage construction or moved to a storage area designated by the Engineer located within the New Haven Rail Yard. Concrete barriers and wheel stops shall remain the property of the owner unless otherwise specifically released to the Contractor. Concrete barriers specifically released to the Contractor shall be removed from the site and properly disposed of. Add the following to the end of the eighth paragraph: Disposal of all such trees, stumps, brush, etc., shall be managed for beneficial reuse in accordance with the DEEP Brush & Stump Management Guidelines by companies registered under the DEEP recycling General Permit.

153

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0202000A

ITEM #0202000A - EARTH EXCAVATION


Articles 2.02.01 – Description:

Add the following:

The New Haven Rail Yard is considered an area of environmental concern. For additional information refer to “Dewatering”, “Controlled Materials Handling”, and “Disposal of Controlled Materials” Specifications.

The Contractor shall be aware that there are designated archaeological sites within the New Haven Rail Yard. Excavations shall follow the requirements of Article 1.20-1.10.06 of the Standard Specification and NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR – ARCHEOLOGICAL MONITORING included in the contract documents for this project.

Article 2.02.04 – Method of Measurement:

Add the following:

Excavations beyond the payment limits will be considered “Unauthorized Excavation” and will not be paid for. Any soil generated by unauthorized excavations will be stockpiled separately and the Contractor shall assume the additional costs of environmental testing, stockpiling, off-site disposal of controlled and/or clean soils, and placement and compaction of suitable backfill.

Article 2.02.05 – Basis of Payment:

Add the following:

The cost for handling and disposal of contaminated excavated material will not be paid for under this Section, but will be paid for under the items, “Controlled Materials Handling” and “Disposal of Controlled Materials”. Dewatering excavations will not be paid for under this Section but will be paid for under the Item “Dewatering”.

154

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0202482A

ITEM #0202482A – REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF CONCRETE SLABS


Articles 2.02.04 – Method of Measurement:

Add the following after the first paragraph:

Concrete slabs shall be measured for payment by the area in square yards, in place, before removal. Payment lines shall be the area designated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

Articles 2.02.05 – Basis of Pavement:


The removal of and incidental cost of disposal of concrete slabs will be paid for at the contract unit price per square yard for “Removal and Disposal of Concrete Slabs”.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Removal and Disposal of Concrete Slabs SY

155

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0202522A

ITEM #0202522A – REMOVAL OF BITUMINOUS TYPE PAVEMENT


Articles 2.02.04 – Method of Measurement:


Bituminous concrete pavement shall be measured for payment by the area in square yards, in place, before removal. Payment lines shall be the area designated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

Articles 2.02.05 – Basis of Pavement:


The removal of and incidental cost of disposal of bituminous type pavement will be paid for at the contract unit price per square yard for “Removal of Bituminous Type Pavement”.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Removal of Bituminous Type Pavement SY

156

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0202528A

ITEM #0202528A – REMOVAL OF RAILROAD TRACKS

Description:

Work for this item shall include removing turnouts, rail, ties, rail guard rail, and all appurtenances beyond installation limits and new work limits shown on the Contract Drawings in order to meet minimum rail length requirements for both track and turnouts, and all other track materials and appurtenances; all power and signal materials and appurtenances, (cable, wire, conduit, trunking, track connections, rail bonding, and other appurtenances secured to the ties or rails) that are in the trackway which will be required to be removed in order to provide for the changes in the tracks within the limits shown on the Contract Drawings and as determined by the Engineer; also all cleaning up, including the removal and disposal of all debris and incidental work. Ballast and railroad ties shall be removed under the Earth Excavation item. Concrete shall be removed under the Rock Excavation item. Contaminated railroad ties shall be disposed under the Disposal of Contaminated Railroad Ties item.

Materials:

The Contractor shall comply with provisions of Codes, Specifications, Standards and recommended practices of the most recent edition and addenda thereto of:

A. AREMA Manual: American Railway Engineering and Maintenance–Of-Way Association, Manual for Railway Engineering.

B. MNR: Metro North Railroad


The Contractor’s attention is called to the fact that the tracks to be removed are now under operations. The Contractor shall remove tracks at such time and under such conditions as has been approved by the Engineer prior to the start of such work.

Rails shall be cut at the limit of removal using a rail saw and not with a torch. Demolition and removal of work shall be carried out in a systematic manner, with the least possible disturbance to existing traffic on adjacent tracks. Trackwork removal shall include all rails, ties, concrete and hardware.

The Contractor shall remove and collect certain track materials not required for reinstallation, from existing track shown on the Contract Drawings. These Materials shall remain the property of CTDOT and the Contractor shall deliver these materials to the CTDOT material storage yard as directed by the Engineer.

157

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0202528A

Except where otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings or directed by the Engineer, materials to be removed and collected by the Contractor for return to the Department shall include:

A. All in-service rails, frogs, switch points and stock rails in good condition as determined by the Engineer.

B. All hand thrown switch stands.

All cross ties and switch ties to be removed by the Contractor shall be transported to the waste stockpile area for environmental testing by others. Disposal of the tested ties determined to be contaminated shall not be covered under this item but shall be covered under the item Disposal of Contaminated Railroad Ties. Railroad ties determined not to be contaminated shall be disposed of under the item Earth Excavation.


This item shall be measured for payment by the actual number of linear feet of railroad tracks removed and measured along the centerline of tracks, including disposal of all trackwork materials.

Basis of Payment:

This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot for “Removal of Railroad Tracks”, which price shall include the removal of track and hardware, disposal of materials, and for all labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

Railroad Tie and Ballast removal shall be paid as Earth Excavation.

Concrete Excavation shall be paid as Rock Excavation.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Removal of Railroad Tracks LF

158

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0203000A

ITEM #0203000A – STRUCTURE EXCAVATION – EARTH (COMPLETE)


Article 2.03.01 – Description:

Replace the first paragraph with the following:

With the exceptions noted below, structure excavation shall include the removal of all material of whatever nature, the removal of which is necessary for the construction of foundations of buildings, oil water separators, holding and storage tanks, retaining walls outside the earth excavation payment limits, catenary structures, poles, and other structures shown on the plans; the placing of all necessary fill; and the wasting of excavated material which is not required for backfilling or embankment, or which is unsuitable for that purpose.

Replace the second paragraph with the following:

This item shall not include dewatering; the design and construction of cofferdams and related environmental controls used in dewatering operations required for the execution of the work; the repair, reconstruction and removal of cofferdams and related environmental controls used in dewatering operations; or the removal of all obstructions necessary for the construction of cofferdams.

Add the following:


The Contractor shall be aware that there are designated archaeological sites within the yard. Excavations shall follow the requirements of Article 1.20-1.10.06 of the Standard Specification and NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR – ARCHEOLOGICAL MONITORING included in the contract documents for this project.

Article 2.03.04 – Method of Measurement:

Add the following:

Excavations beyond the payment limits will be considered “Unauthorized Excavation” and will not be paid for. Any soil generated by unauthorized excavations will be stockpiled separately and the contractor shall assume the additional costs of environmental testing, stockpiling, off-site disposal of controlled and/or clean soils, and placement and compaction of suitable backfill.

159

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0203000A


Replace paragraph (a) with the following:

(a) Structure Excavation—Earth (complete), in whole or in part, which price shall include all materials, tools, and equipment; all labor necessary to complete the excavation in conformity with the requirements of the plans or as ordered by the Engineer; the preparation of foundations as described under Article 2.03.03; all necessary filling, except as otherwise provided in the Contract; and the removal of all surplus or unsuitable material resulting from the excavations.

Add the following:

The cost for handling and disposal of contaminated excavated material will not be paid for under this item, but will be paid for under the items “Controlled Materials Handling” and “Disposal of Controlled Materials”.

Dewatering of structure excavations shall be paid for under the item “Dewatering”.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Structure Excavation – Earth (Complete) CY

160

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0204503A

ITEM #0204503A – DEWATERING

Description:

Work under this item shall consist of the construction of flow diversions, barriers or other such protective facilities and methods as are necessary to prevent intrusion of water (surface and subsurface) into excavated areas located within the limits of the project. Such work shall be understood to mean any temporary type of protective facility which the Contractor elects to build or use to ensure that the temporary and permanent structures or utilities will be in the dry, excluding sheet piling material left in place. The handling of flood flows and the protection of existing structures, and any or all finished construction during high water, are included in the scope of work under this item.

Special Note: During the East End Connection (EEC) project, an existing off-site ground water treatment system will be in operation for the EEC and other CTDOT projects to use. The ground water treatment system is expected to have sufficient capacity to treat up to 300 gallons per minute of dewatering fluid from the EEC project. The design, construction, operation, and maintenance of the treatment system from the project will remain the responsibility of the Department or their designee. The Contractor will be responsible for collection, temporary containment, and transportation of dewatering effluent from the EEC project to the Department’s off-site treatment plant.

This item does not apply to the possible diversion of existing storm water flow around the construction site during Project activities. Diversion of existing storm water or surface flows shall be completed in accordance with the Contract and all applicable permits.

This item also includes management, transportation, and disposal of contaminated groundwater that may be generated during dewatering operations associated with Project work. The Contractor shall furnish temporary containment of contaminated groundwater encountered during construction operations (i.e., free draining liquid from excavated Controlled Materials and water from dewatering activities during construction). After temporary containment, the Contractor shall transport the contaminated groundwater offsite to be disposed of at a permitted disposal facility.

The Contractor shall be responsible for designing, procuring, installing, operating, cleaning, decontaminating, and dismantling the temporary groundwater containment and transportation system, and for securing all necessary authorizations for the transportation and disposal of the contaminated groundwater.

161

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0204503A

Submittals:

The Contractor shall submit details of the proposed dewatering system to the Engineer for approval. The submittal shall include: the flow rate for the system, wellpoint location and/or pump locations, installation procedures, depth of wellpoints and pumping wells and other data as required to completely detail the dewatering system, and shall be stamped by a Connecticut Licensed P.E.

Temporary Containment Tank and Transport Plan: The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's review and approval, the proposed temporary groundwater containment system. Such system shall not release contaminated groundwater into the environment.

This submittal shall include schematics of proposed pump set-ups in excavations, sedimentation controls, probable location of temporary containment tanks, schematics of proposed method to transfer liquids from temporary containment tanks to transport vehicles, and the schematic of proposed method to off-load liquids at the offsite disposal facility. All transport vehicles shall provide documentation that they hold a current "Waste Transportation Permit" per Connecticut General Statutes (CGS) 22a-454. No claim for delay or request for additional time will be considered based upon the Contractor's failure to design a system to meet this performance specification.

Materials:

The Contractor shall use wellpoints, high speed pumps, and other equipment customarily used for utility excavations, etc.

Any and all materials utilized in conjunction with this section shall be non-reactive with the chemical constituents present in the groundwater at the project site.

The Contractor shall provide leak-free containment tanks (e.g. Baker Tanks, Highland Tanks, or Manufacturing brand tanks), for temporary containment of contaminated groundwater and he shall also provide and operate pumps, hoses, transport vehicles (e.g. vac trucks) and safety equipment to transfer liquids from the temporary containment tanks to the offsite disposal facility. The proposed temporary groundwater containment system shall be grounded in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code and Metro-North Railroad requirements.

Construction Methods: The Contractor shall maintain a groundwater level of at least six inches below the bottom of the excavation until the pipes or structures have been installed. At demolition and removal operations the groundwater shall be maintained at the bottom of the excavation. Allowing water to seep into the bottom of the excavation will not be permitted. Dewatering effluent shall be discharged to containment tanks specified herein.

162

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0204503A

The Contractor shall be aware that the project area is in a tidal area and the groundwater elevations may fluctuate due to the tidal influences and storm events. Dewatering shall be performed by pumps, pumping wells, wellpoints and/or well point systems including all miscellaneous work required. The method used shall be the Contractor's responsibility. The Contractor shall provide, operate and maintain at all times the proper machinery of sufficient capacity to meet the requirements for removal of subsurface and surface water which may be encountered in the excavation, and shall keep on hand additional pumps of sufficient capacity to provide reasonable backup for any breakdown. The dewatering method shall preserve the strength of the foundation soils, prevent loss of fines from foundation and adjacent soils, cause no damage to existing or proposed structures, stabilize foundation and adjacent soils and trench bottoms, and control groundwater to permit proper excavation of the work. Wellpoints shall be located close to the excavation area and shall surround the excavation. Direct pumping from trenches is not acceptable. The method used shall minimize suspended sediment in the effluent. In the event of failure or shutdown of the dewatering pumps, the Contractor shall take all necessary measures to prevent any newly installed concrete, structures or pipes from damage or becoming buoyant. Unless otherwise provided or directed, all such temporary protective work shall be removed and disposed of in an approved manner in accordance with local, state and federal regulations when no longer required. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling of work under this item so as not to interfere with any sequence of operations developed for this project. Delays as a result of work required under this item shall not constitute a claim for extension of contract time or an increase in monetary compensation. All discharge permit requirements will be addressed under existing discharge permit established for the dewatering water treatment facility. However, at a minimum, the Contractor will be required to coordinate delivery of effluent to be treated with the treatment facility operator to ensure the maximum permitted flow rates are not exceeded. In addition, the Contractor will be required to work cooperatively to address any permit exceedance events. The Contractor shall operate the dewatering equipment at a rate that removes the groundwater that naturally infiltrates the excavation. The Contractor shall not cause a hydraulic gradient that draws groundwater into the excavation at an excessive rate. Further, the Contractor will be required to coordinate with the treatment facility operator to ensure the maximum established project flow rates are not exceeded.

163

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0204503A

Equipment Decontamination:

All equipment shall be provided to the worksite free of gross contamination. The Engineer may prohibit from the project site any equipment that has in his opinion has not been thoroughly decontaminated prior to arrival. Any decontamination of the Contractor’s equipment prior to arrival at the site shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor is prohibited from decontaminating equipment on the Project that has not been decontaminated prior to arrival. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment for decontamination of all equipment and supplies that are used to handle contaminated groundwater. Decontamination shall be conducted at an area designated by the Engineer and shall be required prior to equipment and supplies leaving the Project area. The Contractor shall be responsible for the collection and disposal of any liquid wastes that may be generated by its decontamination activities in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations. Contaminated ground water dewatered from excavations shall be conveyed at the point of dewatering to temporary above-ground containment tank(s) for the purpose of initial settlement of suspended solids from the dewatering fluids. The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of containment tanks required to ensure that the dewatering fluids being conveyed to the Central Groundwater Treatment facility is less than 200 mg/L of settleable solids (or as approved by the Engineer). The Contractor shall discontinue filling any temporary containment tank when it reaches 90 percent of its capacity. When the sediment level in a temporary containment tank exceeds 500 mm (20 inches), the tank shall be cleaned. The sediments shall be brought to the Primary Waste Stockpile Area (WSA) for testing and characterization by others. Solidification of sediments shall be completed as required and as directed by the Engineer prior to being transported to the WSA. Transport and Disposal of Contaminated Groundwater:

The contaminated groundwater encountered within the Project area during the construction operations shall be temporarily containerized. The containerized contaminated groundwater shall then be transported offsite and disposed of at the disposal facility. All manifests or bills of lading utilized to accompany the transportation of the contaminated groundwater shall be prepared by the Contractor and signed by an authorized Department representative, as Generator, for each truck load of contaminated groundwater that leaves the site. The Contractor shall forward the appropriate original copies of all manifests or bills of lading to the Engineer the same day the contaminated groundwater leaves the Project Site. A load-specific certificate of disposal, signed by the authorized agent representing the disposal facility, shall be obtained by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Engineer for each load.

164

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0204503A

It is anticipated that this work may involve specialty services and/or proprietary products. As specified above, the temporary containment shall be leak-free containment tanks (e.g. Baker Tanks, Highland Tanks, or Manufacturing brand tanks). Such tanks shall be emptied when the tank is two thirds full. The Contractor must use the following Department and CTDEEP-approved treatment facilities for State-regulated liquid disposal:

STATE OF CONNECTICUT DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION CENTRAL GROUNDWATER TREATMENT FACILITY 333 WATERFRONT STREET, NEW HAVEN

All transport vehicles shall provide documentation that they hold a current "Waste Transportation Permit" per Connecticut General Statutes (CGS) 22a-454. If the sediment level in any tank or other containment vessel used to contain dewatering fluids exceeds 20 inches, the tank or containment vessel shall be cleaned. The Contractor shall bring such sediments to the WSA for characterization by the Engineer. Method of Measurement: This work shall include all the work as described above which may be necessary to properly complete the project. Dewatering will not be paid on a "daily" basis, nor will it be paid on a "per gallon" basis. Conveying dewatering fluid from the dewatering point to the groundwater treatment facility is included in this Item. Basis of Payment: Payment for this work shall be at the contract lump sum for "Dewatering" and shall include: all materials, equipment, electric power, lighting, labor and work incidental to the construction; pumping of existing structures to remove standing water; any reconstruction if required; dewatering; sand bags for water/debris containment enclosures; the removal and disposal of all protective works or facilities; damages incurred by the Contractor and any damages to existing facilities. Also included shall be all equipment, materials, tools and labor incidental to conveyance of contaminated groundwater to the temporary containment tanks, the initial equipment design, transport and disposal of contaminated groundwater as well as equipment decontamination and removal.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Dewatering LS

165

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0205003A

ITEM #0205003A - TRENCH EXCAVATION 0’ - 10’ DEEP


Article 2.05.01 Description:

Add the following:

4) The construction of concrete duct banks.


The Contractor shall be aware that there are designated archaeological sites within the New Haven Rail Yard. Excavations shall follow the requirements of Article 1.20-1.10.06 of the Standard Specification and NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR – ARCHAEOLGICAL MONITORING included in the contract documents for this project.

Article 2.05.03 – Construction Methods:

Add the following:

Test pits shall be dug at the locations shown on the plans or as ordered by the Engineer. If called for, the existing surface shall be restored and paid under the appropriate items.

Article 2.05.04 Method of Measurements:

Add the following:

For the installation of concrete duct banks horizontal payment lines shall be vertical and shall be the width to which the material is actually removed, except that in no case, even though the actual excavation is wider, shall the width between payment lines be more than as shown on Contract Drawings. If no limits are shown on the drawings, the following are the payment limits:

2 feet greater than the outside width of the duct bank for duct banks with widths less than 30 inches.

3 feet greater than the outside width of the duct bank for duct banks with widths that are 30 inches or greater.

Vertical payment limits shall be similar to as described for pipe installations.

Excavations beyond the payment limits will be considered “Unauthorized Excavation” and will not be paid for. Any soil generated by unauthorized excavations will be stockpiled separately

166

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0205003A

and the Contractor shall assume the additional costs of environmental testing, stockpiling, off-site disposal of controlled and/or clean soils, and placement and compaction of suitable backfill.

Test pit excavation:

Horizontal: Excavation shall be measured 2’ outside the neat lines of the object to be found. For pipe it shall be measured transversely 2’ plus the outside diameter of the pipe and longitudinally along the pipe it shall be measured 5 times the outside diameter of the pipe.

Vertically: It shall be measured from ground surface to 1’ below the object to be located.

Article 2.05.05 Basis of Payment:

Delete the last sentence of the 7th paragraph and replace it with the following:

When it becomes necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to install temporary earth retaining system for the support of existing facilities, pavement, utilities, or for other constraints, such installation shall be paid for under item “Temporary Earth Retaining System”.

Add the following:

The disposal of materials excavated under this item determined to be non-contaminated shall be included in the Trench Excavation item.

The cost for handling and disposal of contaminated excavated material will not be paid for under this Section, but will be paid for under the items, “Controlled Materials Handling” and “Disposal of Controlled Materials” Specifications. Dewatering excavations will not be paid for under this Section but will be paid for under the Item “Dewatering”.

Included in the contract unit price for Trench Excavation shall be the excavation for test pits.

Backfilling of the Trench shall be paid under the appropriate items “Compacted Granular Fill”, and “Granular Fill”.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Trench Excavation 0’ – 10’ Deep CY

167

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0211000A

ITEM #0211000A – ANTI-TRACKING PAD

Description:

Under this item, the Contractor shall be responsible for installing and maintaining anti-tracking pads at locations indicated on the Contract Drawings or other locations as directed by the Engineer. It shall also include the removal of the Anti-Tracking Pad when the work is complete. Each Anti-Tracking Pad shall consist of crushed stone placed to the limits and for the depth shown on the plans or described herein onto filter fabric, or as directed by the Engineer.

Materials:

The material for this work shall consist of the following:

1. Filter fabric (geotextile) shall conform to the requirements of M.08.01-19, including all materials incidental to and necessary for the installation of the geotextile.

2. Crushed stone conforming to the requirements of Article M.01.01 for 2 inch (No. 3) coarse aggregate.


The filter fabric (geotextile) shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific use or purpose intended, or as otherwise directed by the Engineer.

The crushed stone shall be spread by any suitable means to a minimum depth of 8 inches and shall be shaped to a smooth uniform finished grade. The minimum length and width requirements for all Anti-Tracking Pads shall be 50 feet by 25 feet respectively.

The tracking pad shall be maintained in an acceptable condition at all times. Should the stone surface become saturated and ineffective as determined by the Engineer, it shall be removed and replaced with new, clean stone.

There will be no additional payment for maintaining, replacing or repairing the tracking pads. The tracking pads shall be removed at the completion of construction or as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall account for such work in the bid price.


This work will be measured for payment by the actual number of square yards installed, to limits as indicated on the plans or authorized by the Engineer.

168

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0211000A

Basis of Payment:

This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per square yard of “Anti-Tracking Pad”, complete in place, which price shall include crushed stone, filter fabric, all materials, labor, tools, and equipment incidental and necessary for the installation, maintenance and removal.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Anti-Tracking Pad SY

169

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0213902A

ITEM #0213902A - SUBBALLAST

Description:

This item includes furnishing and installing subballast for track construction. This item also includes furnishing and installing miscellaneous subballast at grade crossings and other locations and as directed by the Engineer.

Materials:

A. Subballast material shall consist of Type "B" crushed stone or gravel, free from lumps of clay, shale, vegetable matter and other deleterious substances. Aggregate for use as subballast shall consist of material of which 90 percent by weight shall be durable crushed particles. Composition of subballast in percentage by weight shall conform to the following gradation when tested in accordance with ASTM C136 (Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates) and ASTM C117 (Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-μm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing):

Sieve Size Percent Passing Designation By Weight 2" 100% 1" 85 - 95% 3/8" 50 - 75% No. 4 35 - 65% No. 10 25 - 50% No. 40 15 - 25% No. 200 0 - 5% The fraction passing the No. 200 sieve shall not exceed two-thirds of the fraction passing

the No. 40 sieve.

B. Soundness: Material shall have no more than 15% weighted average loss after 5 cycles of Magnesium Sulfate Soundness Loss Test performed in accordance with the ASTM C88 (Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate).

C. Plasticity Index: The Plasticity Index of the material passing the No. 4 mesh sieve shall not exceed 5.0 when determined in accordance with ASTM D4318 (Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils).

D. Clay lumps and friable particles: Shall not exceed 0.5 percent maximum as determined by ASTM C142 (Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates).

170

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0213902A

E. Wear: Shall not exceed 40 percent as determined by ASTM C131 (Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine)

F. Water absorption: Shall not exceed 0.5 percent as determined by ASTM C127 (Standard Test Method for Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate).

Quality Assurance:

A. The Contractor shall comply with provisions of codes, specifications, standards and recommended practices of the most recent edition and addenda thereto of:

1. AREMA American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association, Manual for Railway Engineering, Chapter 1, Part 2, Section 2.11.

2. ASTM International (formerly American Society for Testing and Materials).

3. CTDOT Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges, Facilities and Incidental Construction, Form 817.

B. Material not meeting the specifications shall not be used in the work.

C. Use only one material and do not change source of supply unless approved by the Engineer.

Testing:

A. The quality of stone for subballast from any quarry or new strata opened up, including its soundness, resistance to abrasion, chemical composition, absorption, impedance, hardness and weight per cubic foot, shall be determined prior to its acceptance, at a testing laboratory selected by the Contractor. Each stratum or portion of quarry containing a variation of quality of stone shall be tested separately and not averaged. Quality tests and gradation tests shall subsequently be made from time to time as deemed necessary by the Contractor to control the quality and size of subballast furnished by the producer.

B. Sufficient visual observations, determinations of deleterious substances and analyses of gradation shall be made by the producer prior to shipment to assure compliance with these specifications.

C. Provide certified results of test required by this Specification. The Engineer reserves the right to witness the performance of tests.

Submittals:

Submittals shall be made in accordance with Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.05.02 and NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR - SUBMITTALS.

171

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0213902A

A. Submit certification by producer that materials are in compliance with these Specifications.

B. Certify that subballast delivered for this project is typical of that upon which specified tests have been made.

C. Submit name, location and qualifications of proposed testing laboratory service. If the Contractor desires to use its own testing facilities to make the aforementioned tests, the Engineer's concurrence shall be received.

D. Where specific tests are cited, the producer's certification shall include certified copies of test results obtained by a qualified testing laboratory, approved by the Engineer, indicating compliance with cited tests.


Subballast shall be handled during all stages of production and supplied in a manner that will provide a uniform product and will avoid contamination and segregation.

When necessary, to satisfy the requirements of the type of materials specified, the subballast shall be screened, crushed and otherwise processed with approved equipment that is of adequate capacity and capable of consistently yielding a uniform and acceptable product.

Subballast material shall be hauled and transported at all times in a manner and with equipment that will avoid segregation and contamination by mud or other deleterious material and placed by trucks or earthmoving equipment in such a way that rutting or disturbance of the completed subgrade is completely avoided. Disturbed or rutted subgrade materials shall, at the direction of the Engineer, be removed from the subgrade, disposed of in an approved manner and replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Immediately prior to spreading of the subballast, the subgrade or subbase shall conform to the compaction and elevation tolerances specified and indicated for the material involved and shall be free of snow, ice, standing water and loose or extraneous material.

Before placing subballast, subgrade shall be proof-rolled using pneumatic-tired equipment heavily-loaded or, on granular subgrades, by vibratory roller. If softening of the subballast surface takes place under construction traffic, the soft areas shall be dug out to a suitable depth of no less than 6 inches and backfilled with subballast material in compacted layers as specified above. The cost of all such corrective work shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Department.

Subballast material shall be placed to the cross sections shown on the Plans. Placement shall be in layers not exceeding 8 inches in uncompacted thickness. Water may be uniformly added to facilitate compaction. Each layer shall be uniformly distributed and evenly compacted to at least 95% of the maximum density, as determined per ASTM D1557 (Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) The in-place density of the subbase material shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D1556

172

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0213902A

(Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand Cone Method) or D6938 (Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)).

Each layer shall be fully compacted using pneumatic-tired equipment heavily-loaded or, on granular subgrades, by vibratory roller or other equipment approved by the Engineer and tested before the next layer is placed. Small vibrators or pneumatic tampers may be used at places of work where heavy compactors cannot work.

The surface tolerance for the top of finished subballast shall be + 0.1 feet from the design grades.


The quantity of subballast for new track construction and miscellaneous construction shall be measured for payment in cubic yards and shall include subballast placed as directed by the Engineer in the field. The quantity of subballast placed shall be computed by in-place volume from limits indicated on the plans or as otherwise directed by the Engineer in the field.

Basis of Payment:

This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic yard for "Subballast," complete in place. The price for “Subballast” shall constitute full compensation for all material, labor, equipment and incidentals thereto, necessary to furnish and place subballast as directed by the Engineer including but not limited to costs of hauling, stockpiling, placing, spreading, compacting and all incidentals necessary to perform the work in accordance with the specifications and directions of the Engineer.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Subballast CY

173

Rev. Date 2/20/09

0301-0182 ITEM #0216012A

ITEM #216012A - CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL

Description:

Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) is a self consolidating, rigid setting material to be used in backfills, fills, structural fills and elsewhere as indicated on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer. The flow and set time characteristics of CLSM shall be designed to meet the specific job conditions. All CLSM material covered by this specification shall be designed to be hand excavatable at any time after placement. It shall be composed of a mixture of portland cement, aggregate, and water with the option of using fly ash, slag cement, air-entraining agents, and other approved admixtures.

Materials:

All materials utilized in the CLSM mix design shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Article M.03.01

Composition:

The composition of the CLSM shall be in accordance with the requirements set forth in Article M.03.01-General Composition of Concrete Mixes, as well as the applicable sections of ACI 229R. The Contractor shall submit each proposed mix design, with all supporting data, to the Engineer for review and approval at least two weeks prior to its use.

The setting time of CLSM materials shall be designed to achieve the strength necessary to comply with the time constraints called for under the Maintenance and Protection of Traffic requirements of the project specifications. The use of chloride accelerators is not permitted.

The minimum compressive strength of the CLSM material shall be 30 pounds per square inch (psi) and the maximum compressive strength of the CLSM shall be 150 pounds per square inch (psi) when tested in accordance with ASTM D4832 after 56 days.

The CLSM mix design shall utilize a nominal maximum size of No. 8 aggregate as specified in M.01.01.

CLSM mixes shall have a minimum of 20% entrained air when tested in accordance with AASHTO T152.

174

Rev. Date 2/20/09

0301-0182 ITEM #0216012A

Construction Methods: CLSM shall only be placed when the ambient temperature is at least 32° F and rising. CLSM material shall be deposited within 2 hours of initial mixing.

CLSM may be placed by chutes, conveyors, buckets or pumps depending upon the application and accessibility of the site. Should voids or cavities remain after the placement of the CLSM, the Contractor shall modify the placement method or flow characteristics of the CLSM. Voids or cavities which have not been filled properly shall be corrected as directed by the Engineer and at the Contractor's expense.


This work will be measured for payment by the actual number of cubic yards of "Controlled Low Strength Material installed and accepted within the pay limits shown on the contract plans or as directed by the Engineer.

Basis of Payment:

This work will be paid at the contract unit price per cubic yard “Controlled Low Strength Material,” which price shall include all materials, equipment, tools and labor incidental thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Controlled Low Strength Material CY

175

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0219011A

ITEM #0219011A – SEDIMENT CONTROL SYSTEM AT CATCH BASIN

All of the provisions of Section 2.19 of the Standard Specifications shall apply, except as amended and/or supplemented herein:

Article 2.19.01 - Description:

Add the following:

Maintaining shall include the proper disposal of accumulated sediment.

Article 2.19.02 - Materials:

Add the following:

Inlet protection shall be Siltsack® manufactured by Terrafix Geosynthetics Inc. or approved equal.

Article 2.19.04 – Method of measurement:

Replace with the following:

This work will be measured for payment per each sediment control system at catch basin installed and accepted. Replacement systems will not be measured for payment.

Article 2.19.05 - Basis of Payment:

Replace with the following:

The cost for this work shall be paid for at the contract unit price per each “Sediment Control System at Catch Basin”, complete in place, which price shall include all materials, equipment, tools and labor incidental to the installation, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of accumulated sediment, and removal and disposal of the system when the project is nearing completion or as directed by the Engineer. No payment shall be made for the clean out of accumulated sediment or for the replacement of inlet protection as the work progresses.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Sediment Control System at Catch Basin EA.

176

Rev. Date 07/18/16

0301-0182 ITEM #0406999A

ITEM #0406999A - ASPHALT ADJUSTMENT COST Description: The Asphalt Adjustment Cost will be based on the variance in price for the performance-graded binder component of hot mix asphalt (HMA), Polymer Modified Asphalt (PMA), and Ultra-Thin Bonded Hot-Mix Asphalt mixtures completed and accepted during the Contract. The Asphalt Price is available on the Department of Transportation website at:

http://www.ct.gov/dot/asphaltadjustment Construction Methods: An asphalt adjustment will be applied only if all of the following conditions are met: I. For HMA and PMA mixtures:

a. The HMA or PMA mixture for which the adjustment would be applied is listed as a Contract item with a pay unit of tons.

b. The total quantity for all HMA and PMA mixtures in the Contract or individual purchase order (Department of Administrative Service contract awards) exceeds 1000 tons or the Project duration is greater than 6 months.

c. The difference between the posted Asphalt Base Price and Asphalt Period Price varies by more than $5.00 per ton.

II. For Ultra-Thin Bonded HMA mixtures: a. The Ultra-Thin Bonded HMA mixture for which the adjustment would be applied is

listed as a Contract item. b. The total quantity for Ultra-Thin Bonded HMA mixture in the Contract exceeds:

i. 800 tons if the Ultra-Thin Bonded HMA item has a pay unit of tons. ii. 30,000 square yards if the Ultra-Thin Bonded HMA item has a pay unit of square

yards. Note: The quantity of Ultra-Thin Bonded HMA measured in tons shall be

determined from the material documentation requirements set forth in the Ultra-Thin Bonded HMA item Special Provision.

c. The difference between the posted Asphalt Base Price and Asphalt Period Price varies by more than $5.00 per ton.

d. No Asphalt Adjustment Cost will be applied to the liquid emulsion that is specified as part of the Ultra-Thin Bonded HMA mixture system.

III. Regardless of the binder used in all HMA or PMA mixtures, the Asphalt Adjustment Cost will be based on PG 64-22.

The Connecticut Department of Transportation (CTDOT) will post on its website, the average per ton selling price (asphalt price) of the performance-graded binder. The average is based on the high and low selling price published in the most recent available issue of the Asphalt Weekly Monitor® furnished by Poten & Partners, Inc. under the “East Coast Market – New England, New Haven, Connecticut area,” F.O.B. manufacturer’s terminal.

177

Rev. Date 07/18/16

0301-0182 ITEM #0406999A

The selling price furnished from the Asphalt Weekly Monitor ® is based on United States dollars per standard ton (US$/ST). Method of Measurement:

where HMA:

1. For HMA, PMA, and Ultra-Thin Bonded HMA mixtures with pay units of tons: The quantity in tons of accepted HMA, PMA, or Ultra-Thin Bonded HMA mixture measured and accepted for payment.

2. For Ultra-Thin Bonded HMA mixtures with pay units of square yards: The quantity of Ultra-Thin Bonded HMA mixture delivered, placed, and accepted for payment, calculated in tons as documented according to the Material Documentation provision (Construction Methods, paragraph G) of the Ultra-Thin Bonded HMA Special Provision.

Asphalt Base Price: The asphalt price posted on the CTDOT website 28 days before the actual bid opening posted.

Asphalt Period Price: The asphalt price posted on the CTDOT website during the period the HMA or PMA mixture was placed.

PG%: Performance-Graded Binder percentage 1. For HMA or PMA mixes: PG% = 4.5 for HMA S1 and PMA S1 PG% = 5.0 for HMA S0.5 and PMA S0.5 PG% = 6.0 for HMA S0.375, PMA S0.375, HMA S0.25 and PMA S0.25

2. For Ultra-Thin Bonded HMA mixes: PG% = Design % PGB (Performance Graded Binder) in the approved job mix formula, expressed as a percentage to the tenth place (e.g. 5.1%)

The asphalt adjustment cost shall not be considered as a changed condition in the Contract as result of this provision since all bidders are notified before submission of bids. Basis of Payment: The "Asphalt Adjustment Cost" will be calculated using the formula indicated above. A payment will be made for an increase in costs. A deduction from monies due the Contractor will be made for a decrease in costs. The sum of money shown on the Estimate and in the itemized proposal as "Estimated Cost" for this item will be considered the bid price although the adjustment will be made as described above. The estimated cost figure is not to be altered in any manner by the bidder. If the bidder should alter the amount shown, the altered figure will be disregarded and the original cost figure will be used to determine the amount of the bid for the Contract.

Pay Item Pay Unit Asphalt Adjustment Cost est.

Formula: HMA X [PG%/100] x [(Period Price - Base Price)] = $ ____

178

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0502182A

ITEM #0502182A – RUBBER GRADE CROSSING

Description:

This item shall consist of furnishing and installing new rubber rail grade crossing panels and hardware at roads and paths crossing railroad tracks at the locations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Rubber rail crossing panels shall be compatible with the rail sections existing or proposed at the locations shown on the Drawings.

Materials:

Rubber material shall meet or exceed the following requirements:

Elastomer Classification ASTM D 2000 (Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications)

Line Callout ASTM D 2000, M2 AA 710 C12 F17 Hardness ASTM D 2240 (Standard Test Method for Rubber

Property—Durometer Hardness), 65 ± 5 Shore A

Tensile Strength ASTM D 412 (Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers—Tension), > 12 MPa

Ultimate Elongation ASTM D 412, > 350% Density ASTM D 297 (Standard Test Methods for Rubber

Products—Chemical Analysis), 1.18 ± 0.02g/cm3 Abrasion Resistance DIN 53516 (Testing of Rubber and Elastomers;

Determination of Abrasion Resistance), < 150 mm3 Skid Resistance ASTM E 303 (Standard Test Method for Measuring

Surface Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester), > 65 BPN

Resistance to Ozone ASTM D 1171 (Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration—Surface Ozone Cracking Outdoors (Triangular Specimens)), C12

Accelerated Aging ASTM D 573 (Standard Test Method for Rubber—Deterioration in an Air Oven), A13

Compression Set (22h, 70°C) ASTM D 395 (Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property—Compression Set), < 20%

Volume Resistivity ASTM D 257 (Standard Test Methods for DC Resistance or Conductance of Insulating Materials), 1.3 x 107 ohms/cm

Low Temperature Brittleness ASTM D 2137 (Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property - Brittleness Point of Flexible Polymers and Coated Fabrics), -105°F = -40°C F17

179

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0502182A

Additionally, the rubber material shall be resistant to ammonia, ASTM Oil No. 1, brake fluids, n-butanol diethylene glycol, ethanol, ethylene glycol, fatty acids, glycerol, hydrochloric acid, methanol, n-propanol, sodium base 50%, sulfuric acid 25%; distilled, sea and waste water. The surface coating shall be ozone and crack resistant.

Crossing panels shall be provided complete with all incidental materials and any special tools which may be necessary to install the crossing system in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed installation documentation.

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, installation instructions and other manufacturer’s information for new rubber rail grade crossing panels and hardware for approval. Information shall be provided in a timely manner so that any requirements which the rubber material may place on the track construction (e.g. crosstie spacing or length) may be accounted for during the initial construction of the track by the Contractor, or in advance of the crossing installation in the case of existing track.


The Contractor shall install rubber grade crossing panels in locations shown on the Drawings in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Bolted rail joints are not allowed within the grade crossing panels. If bolted joints are present at the proposed grade crossing locations, the Contractor shall change the configuration of the rails as directed by the Engineer. Track outage for installation of rubber grade crossings on existing tracks shall be scheduled a minimum of two weeks in advance with the Engineer.


Rubber Grade Crossing will be measured for payment per linear foot along the centerline of the track, installed and accepted. Measurement shall be to the nearest foot.

Basis of Payment:

This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot for “Rubber Grade Crossing” complete in place which price shall include the furnishing and installation of new rubber rail grade crossing panels and all material, tools, equipment and labor incidental thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Rubber Grade Crossing LF

180

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0502234A

ITEM #0502234A – TEMPORARY GRADE CROSSING Description: This item shall consist of furnishing new rubber flangeway-filler sections and hardware to MNR at roads crossing railroad tracks at the locations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. The rubber rail flangeway-filler sections and hardware, including hold down spikes and rail seal, will be installed by MNR. The Contractor shall coordinate his work with MNR track construction. Materials: Rubber material must meet or exceed the following requirements: Tensile Strength ASTM D412, 1,000 PSI Elongation % Min. ASTM D412, 15% with grain; 45% across grain Hardness ASTM D2240, 70-80 Shore A Pts. Tear Min. ASTM D624, 400 PI Heat Aging ASTM D573 70 hrs @70°C Change in: Tensile +25% Max. Elongation +25% Max. Hardness +10 Shore A Max. Ozone Resistance-Tear Strength ASTM D518, 300 PI 80 PPHM 50 Hrs.@100°F Oil Swell-Volume Increase ASTM D471, 120% Max. Compression- 10,000 PSI Max. Initial Cracking 40% The Contractor is cautioned that temporary grade crossings may be constructed with one of five different rail sections, which may have 5-1/2” or 6” wide rail bases. Flangeway fillers shall be of the proper section recommended by the manufacturer for the rail section and type of rail fastening installed. The Contractor shall verify in field the existing rail sections and rail fastenings where flangeway-fillers are to be installed before supplying flangeway-fillers to ensure the flangeway-filler fits the rail sections used. Rail flangeway-filler sections shall be provided complete with all incidental materials and any special tools which may be necessary to install the crossing system in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed installation documentation. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, installation instructions and other manufacturer’s information for new rubber rail guards and hardware to MNR for approval. Information shall be provided in a timely manner so that any requirements which the rubber material may place on the track construction (e.g. crosstie spacing or length, and rail fastenings) may be accounted for during the initial construction of the track by MNR forces.

181

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0502234A

Construction Methods: Coordinate paving work with MNR’s track and rubber rail flangeway-filler installation. Contractor shall develop a schedule for delivering crossing materials and installing pavement that is consistent with MNR’s track installation schedule. HMA shall be placed before any traffic will be allowed over grade crossing. Install and compact HMA adjacent to flangeway filler in multiple lifts in accordance with the Contract Drawings. Compact or roll HMA in the direction of the rails only. The roller shall enter the grade crossing from either end. Special care shall be taken that roller or other construction equipment does not touch the rubber rail flangeway-fillers until the asphalt is up to grade and stabilized. Do not open the crossing to traffic until asphalt has fully hardened. Method of Measurement: This work shall be measured for payment by the actual linear foot length of temporary grade crossing where new Contractor supplied rubber rail flangeway-filler sections and hardware is installed by MNR. The item shall be measured to the nearest foot, along the centerline of the track, as computed from the limits shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. The contractor will not be compensated for flangeway-filler sections supplied, but cannot be installed by MNR due to a different sized rail section. Crossings constructed with materials furnished by MNR will not be measured for payment. Basis of Payment: This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot for “Temporary Grade Crossing”, which price shall include the furnishing of new rubber rail flangeway-filler sections and all hardware necessary for the installation of the flangeway-fillers, including hold down spikes and rail seal. The rubber rail flangeway-fillers are to be installed by MNR. Paving work shall be paid for under the respective HMA contract item.

Pay Item Pay Unit Temporary Grade Crossing L.F.

182

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0503004A, #0503471A, #0504010A

ITEM #0503004A - LIFT AND LINE EXISTING TRACK

ITEM#0503471A - TURNOUT INSTALLATION

ITEM #0504010A - RAILROAD TRACK WORK

Description:

This work shall consist of installing timber ties, rail, turnouts, tie plates, Pandrol clips or spikes and rail anchors, removals and relocations of track bumpers, and all other materials necessary to construct the railroad tracks to the lines and grades as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Materials not furnished by MNR shall be provided by the Contractor.

Materials:

All materials necessary to construct the track structure shall conform to the American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association’s (AREMA) Manual for Railway Engineering and the Metro-North Railroad Recommended Practice for the Inspection, Maintenance, and Construction of Track (MW-4).

A. Owner-Furnished Materials – 136 RE Head Hardened Rail and Turnouts will be furnished by MNR for installation by the Contractor. MNR will deliver rail to CP271 Interlocking in 1,500 foot long strings, cut the rail as required by the Contractor and move the rail to the Contractor’s work location. The Contractor shall move the rail within the work site to the final installation location. Turnouts will be furnished with all steelwork including switch point rails, stock rails, frog, guard rails, other turnout rails, standard and special work plates, housetop assemblies, joint bar assemblies, fastenings, OTM, and switch ties shown in the Contract Drawings. The switch portion of the turnout will be furnished panelized as shown in the Drawings and with all other materials packaged. Turnouts will be stockpiled within the rail yard and shall be relocated to the installation site by the Contractor. Solar-Powered Switch Machines will be furnished and installed by MNR.

B. Contractor Furnished Materials - Per AREMA and MNR MW4 and the following:

1. Crossties: New 7” x 9” x 8’-6” treated hardwood crossties per AREMA, MNR MW-4 and Metro-North Commuter Railroad Specifications for Cross Ties & Bracket Ties, latest revision.

2. Switch Timbers: New 7” x 9” in lengths of 10’, 10-6”, 11’, 11’-6”, 12’, 12’-6”, 13’, 13’-6”, 14’, 14’-6”, 15’, 15’-6” and 16’ per AREMA and MNR MW-4 as required for turnouts shown in the Drawings. New 8” x 10” x 13’ long ties as required for turnouts shown in the Drawings.

183

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0503004A, #0503471A, #0504010A

3. Tie Plates: Canted double shoulder for 6-inch base rail, new or relay, not less than 14-3/4-inches in length per AREMA. For use in existing track only.

4. Spikes: New, 5/8” x 6” high carbon steel track cut spikes per AREMA. For use in existing track only.

5. Joint Bars: New or fit, produced in matched pairs, standard six hole punching per AREMA Chapter 4, Part 3 Specifications for Quenched Carbon-Steel Joint Bars, Microalloyed Joint Bars and Forged Compromise Joint Bars, compatible with the rail provided by MNR and the existing rail at the connection points. Permanent bolted joints shall use new joint bars.

6. Compromise Joints: New or fit, six hole forged steel compromise joints per AREMA. Permanent compromise joints shall use new joint bars.

7. Bolt Assemblies: New, proper size for the rail and joint bars provided, per AREMA, SAE and ASTM standards. Standard joint bar bolts and nuts shall be heat treated carbon steel as per AREMA, with sulfur composition not exceeding 0.05%. Spring washers shall be in accordance with AREMA and ASTM F-436 (Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers Inch and Metric Dimensions).

8. Rail Anchors: New or fit re-formed per AREMA. For use in existing track only.

9. Elastic Rail Fastening Assemblies - All newly constructed track shall use elastic rail fastening assemblies as follows:

a. Tie Plates – New 1:40 canted double shoulder design, not less than 16 inches in length, for new or fit second hand six-inch base rail with round holes for screw spikes. Plates can be rolled, punched, machined or forged. Plates shall be in accordance with AREMA and ASTM A67 (Standard Specification for Steel Tie Plates, Low-Carbon and High-Carbon-Hot-Worked).

b. Elastic rail clips – New, Pandrol model “e”-2055 or US manufactured accepted equal. For joint bars furnish either Pandrol “J” model clips or the Pandrol “C” clip assembly or approved alternative.

c. Screw Spikes / Coach Screws - 15/16” diameter by 6” length per AREMA and ASTM A66 (Standard Specification for Steel Screw Spikes).

10. Thermite Weld Kits: Furnish welding kits and all necessary tools and accessories to field weld all new rail joints and connections to existing rail from Orgo-Thermit, Inc., Railtech Boutet, Inc. or approved equal. Kits for compromise welds may be needed to connect to existing rails.

184

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0503004A, #0503471A, #0504010A


Track installation shall comply with provisions of Specifications, Standards, and recommended practices of the most recent edition, and addenda thereto, of the AREMA Manual and the Metro-North MW-4.

The existing grade shall be leveled and compacted following the clearing and grubbing operation. Subballast and ballast shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the specifications and as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

MNR will deliver rail to the rail yard and turnouts will be stockpiled within the rail yard ready for relocation, assembly and installation by the Contractor. Installation of ties, rail and turnouts shall proceed in a sequence approved by the Engineer to yield as little impact as possible upon yard operations.

Following final surfacing, all rail will be set to the neutral temperature specified in the MNR MW-4.

Installation and adjustment of switch machines will be performed by MNR forces.

Track Criteria:

A. Gauge: Standard gauge of track shall be 4 feet 8-1/2 inches.

1. Gauge shall be measured with a standard track gauge. It shall be measured at right angles to rails between points 5/8 inch below top of rails. The Contractor’s track gauges shall be checked at frequent intervals for accuracy.

2. Gauge shall be widened to 4 feet 9 inches at locations shown on the Drawings. Transition from 4 feet 9 inch gauge to 4 feet 8-1/2 inch gauge shall occur over a distance of 62 feet at a rate not exceeding ¼ inch in 31 feet.

B. Alignment, Grade, Super Elevation, Track Centers and Cross Level:

Definitions are as follows:

1. Alignment: Horizontal location of track as described by curves and tangents. (Alignment shall be as established on the Drawings.)

2. Grade: Ratio of rise, or fall, of the grade line to its length. (Grade shall be as established by the profiles shown on the Drawings.)

3. Track centers: The distance between center lines of adjacent tracks, measured in a horizontal plane and at right angles to one of the tracks.

4. Cross Level: The difference in elevation of the tops of opposing rails of a track measured in a horizontal plane at right angles to the alignment.

185

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0503004A, #0503471A, #0504010A

C. Tolerances: Deviation from established gauge, cross level, profile grade and horizontal alignment shall not exceed the criteria specified.

TRACK SURFACE AND ALIGNMENT TOLERANCES

1. Deviation from a true gauge of 4 feet – 8 ½ inches, measured at a plane 5/8 inch below top of rail on the inside face shall not exceed

1/8”

2. Gauge variation within 31 feet of track shall not exceed 1/8”

3. Total deviation from design horizontal alignment shall not exceed

1/2"

4. Deviation from alignment on either rail at the midordinate of a 62 foot chord shall not exceed

1/4”

5. Total deviation from design profile shall not exceed 1/2"

6. Deviation from uniform profile on either rail at the midordinate of a 62 foot chord may not exceed

1/4”

7. Deviation from zero cross level shall not exceed 1/8"

8. Cross level variation within 31 feet of track shall not exceed

1/8"

9. Deviation from zero cross level at any two points less than 62 feet apart on tangents or curves may not exceed

1/4”

General Track Installation Procedures:

A. Ballast which is located more than 4 inches below the final bottom of crosstie elevation will be known as “bottom ballast” and shall be placed and compacted prior to the construction of track. Ballast above that elevation shall be placed subsequent to the construction of skeleton track on the prepared bottom ballast.

B. Distribute and compact subballast and bottom ballast uniformly in layers not exceeding a compacted depth of 4 inches for each lift as per the cross sections in the Contract Drawings.

C. Thoroughly compact subballast and ballast until the stones are firmly interlocked and the surface is true and unyielding. Compact each lift with not less than four passes of a roller or a vibratory compactor subject to the following requirements:

1. Compact by rolling using a self-propelled roller of such weight that will provide compression of not less than 350 lb per linear inch of tread or roller.

186

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0503004A, #0503471A, #0504010A

2. Compact by vibration using vibration compactors of either the roller or pad type. Dynamic force for either type shall be not less than 20,000 lb and the frequency range shall be 1100 to 1500 vpm.

3. The compacting equipment selected by the Contractor shall be approved in advance by the Engineer.

D. Place timber ties normal to the centerline of track spaced at nineteen and one half inches on center so that the heartwood of the ties is down and the bottom surface of the ties have uniform bearing against the ballast. The ends of 8’-6” ties shall be brought to a uniform line, 18 ½” from the edge of the base of rail on the line side. The line side shall be the northern side of the track in tangent and curved track and the straight side of each turnout. When placing ties care shall be taken not to damage ties with picks and spiking hammers. Tie tongs, lining bars, or other suitable tools or tie spacing equipment shall be used.

E. Install tie plates on the longitudinal centerline of each tie and place square to the centerline of the rail so that the outside shoulder of the plate bears fully against the rail base. Place plate with the downward cant toward the center of the track. Where using conventional tie plates and spikes, (in existing track only) rail shall be spiked with a minimum of two rail holding spikes and one plate holding spike (two spikes for curves and within turnouts) per tie plate. Where using Pandrol plates, (to be used in construction of all new track) place one screw spike on the gauge side of the rail and one screw spike on the field side (place two screw spikes on both the gauge and field sides of the rail for curves and turnouts). Holes shall be pre-bored in the ties for the screw spikes.

F. Where existing track is to be re-gauged, Contractor shall remove existing spikes along inner rail, plug existing holes with Spikefast as manufactured by Willamette Valley Company, adze ties, and re-plate ties with spikes in correct position.

G. Crosstie Replacement: Replace defective crossties in existing tracks on approaches to new track work as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer will designate a maximum of 200 ties to be replaced concurrent with track installation.

H. Rail and Joint Bars:

1. Rail joints shall be staggered by a minimum of 36” and configured as suspended joints so as to facilitate thermite welding. When drilling bolt holes in the rail end, omit the end hole on each rail end and bolt-up six hole bars using only four bolt assemblies, leaving the joint in a condition suitable for thermite welding. Permanent bolted joints at the ends of CWR strings shall have all six holes drilled and bolted.

2. Outside of turnouts, the minimum length of rail allowed is 20 feet.

187

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0503004A, #0503471A, #0504010A

3. Compromise joint bars shall be fabricated and installed in such a manner that any horizontal mismatch of rail ends is less than 1/16” and a vertical mismatch that is no greater than 1/16”. The rail on existing Track 38 at the interface with new track and turnout installation shall be investigated by the Contractor in advance of ordering compromise bars. The new rail to be supplied by MNR will be 136 RE.

4. If CWR strings are installed when the rail temperature is below 95 degrees Fahrenheit, rail neutral temperature shall be adjusted in accordance with procedures in the AREMA Manual and Metro-North’s MW-4.

5. When cutting rails, cuts must be clean and square using a rail saw or abrasive cutting disc only. Bolt holes shall be drilled. Hole locations shall be determined using a template or measured and marked to ensure correct hole location. Do not cut rails with a torch.

6. All joints assembled by the Contractor shall be welded including connections to existing rails. Field welds shall be located at least 14' away from a field weld in the same rail, at least 4' from a plant weld in the same rail and at least 9-1/2” from a bolt hole. Field welding shall be completed as soon as track has been surfaced and aligned.

7. The Contractor’s methods shall minimize the number of rail cuts, shorter rail lengths and welds necessary to complete the work.

I. Rail Anchoring:

1. Anchoring shall not proceed until the track has been sufficiently ballasted to prevent tie or track movement due to thermal expansion or contraction and until the track has been initially raised, tamped and aligned. Anchoring shall not proceed if the ambient temperature is less than 20 degree F. Anchors shall be applied flush to the side of the tie, on each rail with every other tie fully box-anchored. Anchors shall be omitted from at all locations where it is not possible to install anchors on each rail such as joint bars. Drive-on type anchors shall be applied to switch stock rails, applied from the field side of the track. Care shall be taken in application of anchors so as not to interfere with switch rods. For strings of welded rail, every tie within 200 feet on each side of the rail joint at the end of the string shall be fully box-anchored and every tie within 200 feet of special trackwork and grade crossings shall be fully box-anchored.

2. Omit rail anchors on tracks and turnouts constructed with Pandrol elastic rail fastenings.

J. Surface and align track by methods which will prevent undue bending of the rail, straining of joints or damaging rail fastening assemblies, and only after the cribs have been filled with ballast. No surfacing or aligning work shall be performed on track when the ambient rail temperature is greater than the temperature of the rail at the time it was

188

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0503004A, #0503471A, #0504010A

anchored, nor less than 20 degrees Fahrenheit. Rail temperature shall be measured using a rail thermometer as specified in the current AREMA Manual, Chapter 5 by placing the rail thermometer on the shaded side of the rail base and leaving it in place for a minimum of five minutes or until there is no change in its reading.

K. When tamping ties, the ballast shall be thoroughly compacted under both sides of the tie from a point 15 inches inside of the rails to the ends of the tie. Do not tamp at the center of the tie outside of the limits indicated.

L. Final surfacing and aligning of the track and turnouts shall be in accordance with the geometries listed in the Contract Drawings. The final raise shall consist of a lift of no greater than 2 inches to bring the track surface to the final grade indicated on the Contract Drawings. Where tracks constructed by this contract connect to existing tracks, run out the surfacing into the adjoining tracks a distance as indicated by MNR’s MW-4.

M. After the final surfacing and aligning of the track and turnouts, ballast shall be adjusted so that all cribs, excepting those beneath switch rails, are full. Leave the cribs open beneath switch rails and switch rods so that there is a minimum of 5 inches of clear space beneath them. Dress the ballast shoulder so that it extends beyond the ends of the ties of at least one foot horizontally in the plane of the top of tie at which point the shoulder may drop at a maximum rate of 2 horizontal to 1 vertical. Excess ballast shall not be left on top of the ties or timbers and shall not be allowed in flangeways or between stock rails and switch points. Final surfacing and alignment shall be within the tolerances listed in this specification.

N. Turnouts shall be installed in the same general manner as listed above in accordance with the geometric criteria in the Contract Documents. Survey is required to layout the Point of Switch, PITO and Point of Frog prior to installation and to be confirmed after completion of turnout installation. MNR will furnish and install switch machines and make final switch adjustments.

O. Where existing track is to be lowered, remove existing rail, ties, and OTM and store in a pre-determined location for reinstallation. Storage and handling shall be such to prevent damage to track materials. At the Contractor’s option, the track can be removed, stored and reinstalled as panels. Any track material not fit for reuse shall be replaced. The Contractor shall excavate the ballast to meet the required profiles shown in the Drawing plus an additional 4 inches. Following excavation, the ballast shall be compacted, track re-laid, raised and aligned as described herein.

P. In order to determine the acceptability of the completed track and turnouts, the Engineer will verify that the track structure was constructed according to the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall submit appropriate scale reproducible final As built survey drawings of the trackwork for this verification. The As Built survey drawings shall indicate points on each rail at 50 foot stations as well as all points of curvature including tangent to curve, compound curve, curve to tangent points, points of vertical curves and tangents, start and end points, and all points of switch, PITO’s and frog points. Drawings shall

189

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0503004A, #0503471A, #0504010A

conform to the Connecticut General Statues, Section 20-300b with a Horizontal Accuracy of A-1 and a Vertical Accuracy of V-2. Once verified, the Engineer will schedule MNR to make a final inspection to establish that the track and turnout construction is within the tolerances specified herein. The Contractor shall correct track deviations, as disclosed by the inspection, which exceed tolerances specified herein at no additional cost. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer two weeks in advance of the anticipated date(s) when the track will be ready for MNR inspections.

Rail Welding:

A. Welding shall be done in accordance with AREMA MRE Chapter 4, Part 3, Specification for the Quality Assurance of Thermite Welding of Rail and Specification for Fabrication of Continuous Welded Rail and MNR’s MW-4, except as modified in these Specifications.

B. Preparation of Rail Ends: Rail ends shall be either saw-cut or ground at right angles to the rail to provide a smooth and clean surface. The surface of the rails for a length of approximately 6-inches from the end of the rails shall be cleaned by grinding to remove all grease, dirt, loose oxide, oxidized metal, scale, and moisture. All burrs and lipped metal that would interfere with the fit of the mold shall be removed.

C. Weld Gap: At the time of field thermite welding the rails shall have the rail gap recommended by the manufacturer of the weld kit and the approved welding procedures.

D. Weld Alignment: Rail head shall be aligned to produce a weld which, with respect to alignment, shall comply with AREMA MRE and the following:

1. The ends of the rails to be welded shall be properly gapped and aligned to produce a weld that shall conform to the alignment tolerances below. Alignment of rail shall be done on the head of the rail. The rail gap and alignment shall be held without change during the complete welding cycle.

2. Vertical alignment shall provide for a flat running surface. Any difference of height of the rails shall be in the base.

3. Horizontal alignment shall be done in such a manner that any difference in the width of heads of rails shall occur on the field side. Horizontal offsets shall not exceed 0.04-inch in the head and/or 0.12-inch in the base. If welding rails of a different section, a mold shall be used that is custom-made for the rail sections to be joined.

G. Surface Misalignment Tolerance: Combined vertical offset and crown camber shall not exceed 0.04-inch per foot at 600-degrees Fahrenheit or less. Combined vertical offset and dip camber shall not exceed 0.01-inch per foot at 600-degrees Fahrenheit or less.

H. Gauge Misalignment Tolerance: Combined horizontal offset and horizontal kink camber shall not exceed 0.04-inch per foot at 600-degrees Fahrenheit or less.

190

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0503004A, #0503471A, #0504010A

I. Thermite Weld Preheating: The rail ends shall be pre-heated prior to welding to a sufficient temperature and for sufficient time as indicated in the approved welding procedure to ensure full fusion of the weld metal to the rail ends without cracking of the rail or weld.

J. Thermite Weld Cooling: The molds shall be left in place after tapping for sufficient time to permit complete solidification of the molten metal and proper cooling to prevent cracking and provide a complete weld with proper hardness and ductility.

K. Weld Finish: Welded joints in the finished track shall be brought to a true surface and alignment by means of a proper grinding or planing machine (shear). Finish grinding shall be performed with an approved grinder operated by a skilled worker grinding evenly and leaving the joints in a smooth and satisfactory condition. The completed weld shall be finished by mechanically controlled grinding in conformance with the following requirements:

1. The top and gauge side of the weld at the rail head shall be finished to within plus or minus 0.010-inch of the parent section. The bottom and sides of the rail base shall be finished to within 0.010-inch of the lowest rail.

2. The remainder of the rail weld shall be finished to within plus 1/8-inch or minus 0.020-inch of the parent section. Finishing shall eliminate cracks visible to the unaided eye.

3. Notches created by offset conditions shall be eliminated by grinding to blend variations. Protrusions and gouges in the welded area shall be removed, and the weld area shall be blended into the rail contour by grinding in a manner that will eliminate fatigue crack origins. Defects visible to the unaided eye shall be removed by grinding, except that if removal by grinding cannot be accomplished without damaging the rail, the weld shall be removed. Grinding pressure that would overheat the rail surface shall not be permitted.

4. Heavy grinding or shearing of weld-up set metal shall be completed while the weld is still hot from welding.

5. Welds produced by welding kits which are specially designed to produce reinforced welds need not be ground in the finishing area except as necessary to remove fins, burrs, cracks, etc.

L. Weld Quality: Each completed weld shall have full penetration and complete fusion and be entirely free of cracks or fissures. Welds shall meet the acceptance criteria given in American Welding Society D1.1 (Structural Welding Code-Steel). All welds shall be visually inspected at the time of welding. Inspect all thermite welds ultrasonically and as otherwise required by AREMA MRE.

191

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0503004A, #0503471A, #0504010A

M. Weld Numbering: Semi-permanently mark a sequential weld number on the rail immediately adjacent to the weld using a quality lead paint marker at the time the weld is made. Welds shall be numbered sequentially in the order in which they are made. The Engineer will provide Contractor with the initial weld number. Defective welds that are replaced shall be assigned a new sequential number by adding a letter to the defective weld number (i.e. defective weld 347 would be replaced by 347A).

N. Weld Recording: Record pertinent data on each field weld using the Record of Field Welds at the end of this Section or a similar form. Records of field welds shall be submitted to the Engineer on a weekly basis.

Production Testing of Thermite Welds:

A. All production thermite welds shall be visually and ultrasonically tested in the field for defects. Testing shall be performed before the final track inspection. The testing shall be performed by a technician certified to have met American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT) TC-1A (Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing), Level II or III qualifications. Ultrasonic inspection of welds shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E 164 (Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments). Magnetic particle testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E 709 (Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing). Visual testing will be in accordance with AREMA MRE.

B. Ultrasonic Testing. Prior to testing of welds, the technician proposed for testing of thermite rail welds shall be certified in accordance with ASNT TC-1A, Level II or III and shall have at least one year’s experience in testing for defects in rail.

C. The following equipment shall be used for ultrasonic testing:

1. Ultrasonic, pulsed echo, instrument normally used for inspection of rails with calibrated decibel gain control of minimum 2-decibel increments, operating in the range 1-5-MHz, with CRT screen and scale. Equipment shall be capable of detecting a 3/64-inch discontinuity 6-1/2-inches below top of rail.

2. Calibrated paper tape recording attachments to record accurately the CRT screen indications when a non-complying weld is located.

3. 2.25 MHz angle beam transducers 1/2-inch by 1-inch at 70-degrees and 45-degrees.

4. Suitable high viscosity couplants of good wetting characteristics.

5. Standard IIW calibration blocks of rail steel for primary reference response and to construct distance-amplitude correction curve, and DSC blocks of rail steel for calibration checks.

192

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0503004A, #0503471A, #0504010A

6 A "calibration rail" 18-inches long with a 3/64-inch diameter round bottom hole 6-1/2-inches below top of rail and in which other 1/8-inch diameter flat bottom hole patterns have been drilled as provided by Contractor.

D. Incorporate the following in the test procedure:

1. Scanning level shall be plus 20-decibels minimum.

2. Scan the rail in a zigzag pattern twisting probe, on one side of the weld only at a rate not exceeding 6-inches per second, so that the full weld is scanned. Each pass will overlap a minimum 10 percent and the scanning is carried out longitudinally to the rail.

3. Calibrate the equipment at the start and end of each day’s work, and at least every four hours during examination, and hourly checks with DSC blocks. If any point on the distance-amplitude curve has been changed by more than 20-percent, all results since last calibration check shall be void and all welds re-examined. If the curve has moved on the sweep line by more than five percent, all non-complying welds since last calibration check shall be re-examined.

4. When a reflection of greater amplitude than the acceptance criteria is found, scan around the full perimeter of the weld from both sides, to ensure full weld coverage and determination of size, type, and location of discontinuity.

5. Make permanent trace recording of discontinuity indications.

6. Paint the rail web on both sides, across the weld, to denote weld not conforming to acceptance criteria.

E. All welds shall be free from defect or flaw giving a reflected display of greater than 20-percent of distance-amplitude correction curve at calibration level, or will be as listed in Table 1.

193

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0503004A, #0503471A, #0504010A

TABLE 1 - MINIMUM ACCEPTANCE LEVELS (DECIBELS)

WELD THICKNESS (in.)

5/16 - 3/4 3/4 - 1-1/2 1/2 - 2-1/2 1/2 – 4) 4 - 6)

TRANSDUCER ANGLE

70o 70o 70o 45o 70o 45o 70o 45o

REFLECTOR SEVERITY

Large Reflectors

+8 +3 -1 +4 -4 +1 -7 -2

Small Reflectors

+9 +4 +1 +6 -2 +3 -5 0

Minor Reflectors

+10 +5 +3 +8 0 +5 -3 +2

F. All welds shall also be visually inspected for surface cracks. Any welds with surface cracks shall be rejected.

G. Use an ultrasonic test results reporting form that includes the location of the weld in track, the results of the ultrasonic inspection including size of defects found in the head, web or base of rail, shape identity and location of all reflections, trace record, the results of the visual inspection, name of inspector, and other information as needed.


Turnouts will be measured for payment by the count of turnouts installed. One turnout includes switch ties, head block timbers, frog, switch points and stock rails, closure rails, and all throw rods. Each turnout unit shall be considered as beginning at the Number Zero tie ahead of the point of switch and extending to the Last Long Timber beyond the frog. Other track outside of that zone will be measured by the linear foot as indicated above.

Railroad Track Work will be measured for payment by the actual number of lineal feet measured along the centerline of track, installed and accepted. One track consists of two rails, connecting ties, bumping post and all appurtenances. Where rail ends are staggered, the average of the two rail ends shall be used as the point of measurement.

Lifting and Lining will be measured for payment by the linear footage of existing track brought to final alignment. The allotment of 200 ties to be installed as directed by the Engineer concurrent with track installation shall not be measured for payment, but shall be considered as incidental to the Lift and Line Existing Track item.

194

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0503004A, #0503471A, #0504010A

Basis of Payment:

This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per “Each” for Turnout Installation, “Lineal Feet” for Railroad Track Work and “Lineal Feet” for Lift and Line Existing Track, complete in place, which price shall include all material, equipment, tools, and labor incidental thereto.

The cost for excavation below the finished grade of the track, backfilling, subballast, ballast and disposal of surplus material will not be paid under this section, but will be paid for under their respective contract items.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Lift and Line Existing Track LF Turnout Installation EA Railroad Track Work LF

195

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0507105A

ITEM #0507105A - CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE AND/OR CATCH BASIN

Description:

The work under this item shall consist of connecting new pipe to existing storm drainage and sanitary sewer manholes and/or catch basins, trench drains or other structures at the locations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer using a cored hole and manhole boot. Included in this item is coring the existing structure, installing boot, any modifications to the existing shaped invert and plugging existing pipes.

Materials:

Mortar shall conform to Article M.ll.04.

Concrete shall be Class "A" and conform to Articles M.03.01 and M.03.02.

Manhole Boot: Kor-N-Tee type manhole boot with stainless steel clamps or approved equal.

Cement masonry shall conform to Article M.08.02.


Contractor shall machine core a hole in the existing structure at the correct elevation. Install manhole boot and new pipe. Modify existing shaped invert, if needed, by removing portions of the existing brick and mortar or concrete and shape the new invert with mortar. Fill in any section of the existing shaped invert not needed and plug all not needed pipes using cement masonry.

All storm drainage and sanitary sewer connections to existing structures shall employ a manhole boot. No other types of connections will be permitted. The one exception is the connection of new storm drainage pipes to trench drains. Manhole boots are not required in this case.


This work will be measured for payment by the actual number of connections made and accepted.

196

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0507105A

Basis of Payment:

This work shall be paid for at the contract unit price for "Connection to Existing Manhole and/or Catch Basin" complete in place which shall include all material, tools, equipment and labor incidental thereto.

Payment for excavation shall be included in respective Trench Excavation item for the new pipe to be connected.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Connection to Existing Manhole and/or Catch Basin EA.

197

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0507484A, #0507601A

ITEM # 0507484A - TYPE "C-L" CATCH BASIN, DOUBLE GRATE TYPE II (4’ SUMP)

ITEM # 0507601A – MANHOLE

All the above items shall conform to the requirements of Article 5.07 of the Standard Specifications supplemented as follows:

Article 5.07.01 – Description:

Add the following:

Catch basins and manholes shall be precast and watertight. Manholes and catch basins shall have pipe connectors. All joints shall have a watertight sealant. Manholes and catch basins shall be visually inspected for leakage. Manholes and catch basins shall receive a factory-applied waterproofing coating as specified herein.

Article 5.07.02 – Materials:

Add the following:

Compacted granular fill: shall conform to the requirements of Section 2.14.

Concrete for anti-flotation purposes shall be Class "A" and conform to the requirements of Section M.03.02.

Frame and Cover: The cover shall have lettering "STORM SEWER" cast into it.

Pipe Connectors with Flexible Annular Space Filler:

A. Conform to ASTM C923.

B. Cast in place with stainless steel bands.

C. Band and clamp non-magnetic Series 304 stainless steel.

D. Nitrile and PVC cavity O-ring.

E. Do not furnish connectors using castings and bolts with non-resilient bearings.

Waterproof Coating System: The outside surface of all catch basins and manholes shall be coated with a waterproof protective elastomeric membrane. Elastomeric membrane for catch basins and manholes shall be hydrocarbon resistant, rubber reinforced asphalt which forms a highly elastomeric waterproof coating, as manufactured by Karnak Corporation “229AR Elastomeric”

198

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0507484A, #0507601A

or approved equal. Membrane material shall be a single component rubber reinforced asphalt which forms a highly elastomeric waterproofing coating. Membrane shall be applied to precast concrete using a smooth edge trowel at the rate of 4 gallons per 100 square feet to achieve a dry film thickness of 40 mils. Joints and cracks shall be filled and reinforced per manufacturer’s recommendations.

Joints: Joints between catch basins and manhole sections shall have hydrocarbon resistant rubber gaskets in compliance with ASTM C443 or receive a 1/2-inch minimum bead of hydrocarbon resistant single component elastic sealant, as manufactured by Adeka Corporation “Ultraseal P-201” or approved equal.

Submittals:

Provide submittals in accordance with Standard Specifications section 1.20-1.05.02 for each precast catch basins and manholes clearly indicating each penetration location and angle including all materials intended for use (waterproofing, sealant, boots, frames & covers, etc). All precast catch basins and manholes shall be designed for Cooper E-80 loadings. All structures shall be designed to accommodate loading applied at a distance of 4’-3” from the centerline of track and hydrostatic loading applied up to plan indicated top of frame (for anti-flotation collar sizing). Structures shall be designed by a Connecticut Licensed Professional Engineer. Contractor shall submit stamped shop drawings and calculations to the Engineer for approval.

Article 5.07.03 – Construction Methods:

Add the following:

Install manholes and catch basins on a 12 inch thick layer of No 6 Crushed Stone base.

Sealant and pipe connectors shall be installed per manufacturer's instructions to assure a watertight seal.

All exterior surfaces of the precast manholes and catch basins (excluding tops of catch basins) shall be given an application of waterproofing at the factory. Apply per manufacturer’s recommendation or minimally as specified herein. Additional waterproofing material shall be supplied to the site to be used as touch up as directed by the Engineer.

Place precast concrete sections in compliance with ASTM C891. Provide either ASTM C443 rubber joints gaskets or hydrophilic sealant at joints between sections.

Manhole and catch basins shall be visually inspected for leakage. All leaks shall be sealed.

Backfill around catch basins and manholes shall not be pervious structure material, but shall be suitable backfill, reusable controlled material or as called for on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

199

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0507484A, #0507601A


Add the following:

Included in the unit price shall be the No 6 Crushed Stone bedding material, pipe connectors, joint sealants, rubber gaskets, water-proofing (including additional material), and anti-flotation collar. Also included in the unit price shall be testing of the manholes and catch basins, installation and material costs for the anti-flotation concrete.

200

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0507495A

ITEM #0507495A – MODIFY EXISTING CATCH BASIN


Article 5.07.01 - Description: Add the following: The work under this item shall also include the replacement of existing catch basin covers / gratings as indicated on the Contract Drawings with grates with reduced bar spacing for improved pedestrian traffic safety. Article 5.07.02 – Materials: Replace the first paragraph with the following: The materials to be used in the construction shall be those indicated on the plans or ordered by the Engineer and shall meet the requirements of M.08.02 with the exception of catch basin grates which shall be galvanized “Wheels n Heels Metro Grating” as manufactured by Ohio Gratings, Inc. or approved equal.

201

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0507781A

ITEM #0507781A – RESET MANHOLE Section 5.07 is supplemented and amended as follows:

Article 5.07.01 Description: Add the following: The resetting of existing manholes as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer shall include but not be limited to storm drainage, sanitary sewer, electric, communications, illumination and any other manhole impacted by construction activities.

202

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0601211A

ITEM #0601211A – CLASS “F” CONCRETE (SPECIAL)

Description:

Work under this item shall consist of furnishing and installing precast and cast-in-place concrete utility protection slabs over new utilities prior to installation of proposed tracks as indicated on the plans.

Materials:

Precast concrete shall conform to the requirements of Article 8.21.02, 8.21.03-1 and 8.21.03-5.

Cast-in-place concrete shall conform to the requirements of Article M.03.01 for Class "F" Concrete.

Reinforcement shall conform to requirements of Article M.06.01.

Submittals:

The Contractor shall submit the following:

A. Manufacturer’s Product Data

B. Rebar Shop Drawings: Rebar Shop drawings shall be submitted for installation of cast-in-place elements. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and schedules of all work under this Section for approval prior to fabrication of any material. Shop drawings shall include sufficient plans, sections and detail drawings to suitable scale to permit the erection of the reinforcing steel. Reinforcement: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". Shop Drawings shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Bar reinforcement shop drawings shall include setting plans, elevations, bending diagrams, cutting lists and other information so as to completely define and establish the location, spacing, size, length, bending, shape, splicing and keying at construction joints and all other pertinent information as required. Drawings shall show grades of reinforcing steel. Opposite hand reinforcing shall be detailed separately. Wall reinforcing shall be detailed on wall elevations and sections.

2. Type, size and location of all accessories required for proper assembling, placing and support of the reinforcement.

C. Working Drawings: Working drawings shall be submitted for installation of precast elements. Drawings shall include crane size and location, lifting points and devices,

203

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0601211A

sequence of installation and any other pertinent information. All calculations and drawings shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Connecticut.

D. Design Calculations: All precast elements which require calculations shall have calculations submitted which have been stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Connecticut.

Testing:

The Contractor is responsible for all testing to ensure all components are in conformance with the specifications.


A. Precast Concrete Utility Protection Slabs:

1. Installation: Utility protection slabs shall be installed at the locations shown on the plans immediately prior to the installation of proposed track. Contractor shall coordinate installation of track and protection slab to minimize track outage. Contractor is required to submit work plan for installation to MNR for review and acceptance prior to beginning installation.

2. Reinforcement: The provisions of Article 6.02.03 pertaining to reinforcing shall apply.

3. Preparation: Prior to fabrication of any elements the Contractor shall furnish shop drawings for all elements included in this specification and indicated in the plans including precast elements, reinforcement, and associated hardware.

4. Transport: Lifting and handling of precast panels shall be designed by the Contractor including but not limited to erection stresses and lifting/inserts. Details shown in the plans for lifting lugs are for general information only.

5. Excavation: Excavation shall be made to the required depths as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

B. Cast-in-Place Utility Protection Slabs:

1. Excavation: Excavation shall be made to the required depths as shown on the plans

or as directed by the Engineer. 2. Forms: Forms shall be of metal or wood, straight, free from warp and of sufficient

strength to resist springing from the pressure of the concrete. If made of wood, they

204

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0601211A

shall be of 2-inch surfaced plank except that at sharp curves thinner material may be used. If made of metal, they shall be of approved section and shall have a flat surface on the top. Forms shall be of a depth equal to the depth of the protective concrete. Forms shall be securely staked, braced and held firmly to the required line and grade and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. All forms shall be cleaned and oiled or wetted before concrete is placed against them.

3. Forms are not required when encasing utility piping with concrete. The Contractor

shall use any means deemed acceptable by the Engineer to construct the concrete encasement to the dimensions and grades as shown on the plans. Trench forming will be considered an acceptable method.

4. Concrete: The concrete shall be proportioned, mixed, placed, etc., in accordance

with the provisions of Section 6.01 for Class "F" Concrete. 5. Reinforcement: The provisions of Article 6.02.03 pertaining to reinforcing shall

apply.


This work will be measured for payment as follows:

A. Class “F” Concrete (Special): This work will be measured by the actual volume of cubic yards of completed and accepted Class “F” Concrete (Special).

B. Excavation: Excavation will be measured for payment under the respective Trench Excavation item.

C. Reinforcement: This work will not be measured for payment, but the cost shall be considered as included in the price bid for Class “F” Concrete (Special).

Basis of Payment:

This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic yard for "Class “F” Concrete (Special)," complete in place, which price shall include both precast & cast in place concrete, reinforcement, equipment, tools, materials and labor incidental thereto.

Trench Excavation, Controlled Materials Handling, Disposal of Controlled Materials, Dewatering excavations will be paid for under their respective contract items.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Class “F” Concrete (Special) CY

205

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0601365A

ITEM #0601365A – CONCRETE PAD

Description:

This item shall consist of a furnishing and installing a structural concrete pad and support pedestals for the relocated propane gas tanks. Concrete pad shall be constructed on a gravel base course in the locations and to the dimensions and details shown on the plans or as ordered and in accordance with these specifications.

Materials:

Materials for this work shall conform to the requirements of Article M.03.01 for Class "F" Concrete.

Air-entraining Portland cement and air-entraining admixtures shall conform to Article M.03.01.

Gravel base shall be No. 6 Crushed Stone.

Reinforcement shall conform to requirements of Article M.06.01.


A. Excavation: Excavation shall be made to the required depths below the finished grade, as shown on the plans or as directed. All soft and yielding material shall be removed and replaced with suitable material.

B. Forms: Forms shall be of metal or wood, straight, free from warp and of sufficient strength to resist springing from the pressure of the concrete. If made of wood, they shall be of 2-inch surfaced plank except that at sharp curves thinner material may be used. If made of metal, they shall be of approved section and shall have a flat surface on the top. Forms shall be of a depth equal to the depth of the pad. Forms shall be securely staked, braced and held firmly to the required line and grade and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. All forms shall be cleaned and oiled or wetted before concrete is placed against them.

C. Concrete: The concrete shall be proportioned, mixed, placed, etc., in accordance with the provisions of Section 6.01 for Class "F" Concrete.

D. Finishing: The surface of the concrete shall be finished with a wood float or by other approved means. The outside edges of the slab and all joints shall be edged with a 1/4-inch radius edging tool. Each slab shall be divided into sections as shown on the plans by forming dummy joints with a jointing tool as directed.

206

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0601365A

E. Backfilling and Removal of Surplus Material: The sides of the pad shall be backfilled with material as shown on the plans. All surplus material shall be removed and the site left in a neat and presentable condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

1. Reinforcement: The provisions of Article 6.02.03 pertaining to reinforcing shall apply.


This work will be measured for payment as follows:

A. Concrete Pad: This work will be measured by the actual volume of cubic yards of completed and accepted concrete pad.

B. Excavation: Excavation below the finished grade of the pad, backfilling, and disposal of surplus material will not be measured for payment, but the cost shall be included in the price bid for the pad. Excavation above the finished grade of the pad will be measured and paid for in accordance with Section 2.02.

C. Gravel Base: This work shall be paid under the applicable item.

D. Reinforcement: This work will not be measured for payment, but the cost shall be considered as included in the price bid for the concrete pad.

Basis of Payment:

This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic yard for "Concrete Pad," complete in place, which price shall include all excavation as specified above, backfill, disposal of surplus material, reinforcement, equipment, tools, materials and labor incidental thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Concrete Pad CY

207

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

ITEM #0603169A - PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

General:

Scope:

A. Under this item, the Contractor shall engage a qualified commercial photographer to take comprehensive construction documentation. The photographer shall be a firm or an individual of established reputation for not less than 5 years and as further defined within.

Comprehensive documentation includes: 1. Digital photographic documentation of the construction process progressively and

at selected milestones; 2. High definition video documentation of selected dynamic events; 3. Live, streaming fixed view and/or adjustable view camera footage via webcam of

selected areas of the construction site, including still image captures and time lapse video capabilities;

4. Native mobile application for Apple iOS and Android OS devices to provide

direct mobile access to online Contractor documentation and mobile application-supported software features.

5. Mobile website that auto-detects mobile web-browsers for Apple iOS, Android

OS and Blackberry OS devices to provide optimized mobile web-browser viewing of online Contractor documentation;

6. Documentation inclusive of electronic indexing, navigation, cloud-based hosting,

storage and remote access, as applicable, throughout construction; 7. Contractor support, security of information and technological requirements

related to the documentation;

B. Rights to all photos taken, paid for, and uploaded (submitted) by/to the Department shall be the departments property. Once uploaded by Photographer, neither the Contractor nor Photography may claim no rights to the photo documentation.

208

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

Contractor Qualifications: A. Demonstrable minimum experience of five (5) years in operation providing expert and

independent third party digital photography construction documentation using advanced indexing/navigation systems.

B. Proficiency in the execution of digital photography, videography and web camera systems’

configuration, including use and knowledge of associated equipment.

C. Representative portfolio of completed construction projects of similar type, size, duration and complexity as the Project.

D. In-house programming division for customizable documentation solutions required.

E. At least three (3) references may be required.

F. Contractor must have a local office and be able to respond to site visit requests with qualified

personnel within twenty four (24) hours of notice

Documentation Platform and Delivery Method A. Photographic Documentation:

1. Documentation indexing and navigation system will utilize actual construction drawings (project plans) or equivalent as the basis for an interactive online interface.

2. For all photographic documentation referenced herein, indexing and navigation must be

organized by both time (date-stamped) and location throughout the Project.

3. Access interface will include multiple active projects per user, if applicable.

4. Access interface will provide recent documentation activity summaries per project. Direct access to project plans and shoots will be possible from summary display.

5. Access interface will provide a map view that pinpoints the physical location of each

project accessible by the user. Direct access to project plans and shoots will be possible from the map view.

6. Documentation activity can be queried by date range via activity searches.

7. Documentation will combine indexing and navigation system with inspection-grade high-

resolution digital photography performed by Contractor, designed to capture actual conditions throughout construction and at critical milestones.

209

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

8. Contractor documentation will be accessible online within 24 hours after each shoot, through the use of an Internet connection.

9. Documentation will allow for multiple-user access, simultaneously, online.

10. Access shall adhere to industry standards for information security and protection of data.

11. Multi-tiered access levels shall be achievable through use of individual passwords. Users

of a sufficient tier will be able to identify other authorized users on each project.

12. Online interface will provide a summary view of the documentation within a project by project plan and by shoot. Direct access to project plans and shoots will be possible from each project summary view.

13. Online interface will allow users to upload Client’s own digital photographic images to

the documentation indexing and navigation system.

a. Users will be able to link images to the project floor plans for customized location-based indexing.

b. The acting user will be able define permissions and access to uploaded images.

Access, per image, can be set to (1) the acting user only, (2) all project users or a (3) subset of project users.

14. Online interface will allow users to upload files to the documentation indexing and

navigation system. Supported file formats will include, at minimum, PDF, Microsoft Word documents, and Microsoft Excel spreadsheets, Microsoft PowerPoint presentations, JPEG, PNG. GIF, MPEG and Folders.

a. Users will be able to link files to the project floor plans for customized location-based

indexing.

b. The acting user will be able define permissions and access to uploaded files. Access, per file, can be set to (1) the acting user only, (2) all project users or a (3) subset of project users.

15. Online interface will provide a repository where users can upload and store digital

photographic images and other files for the Project, separate from the construction drawings.

16. Online interface will allow users to comment (privately or publicly) on images, shoots

and projects.

210

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

a. Through integrated reporting functionality, users can generate custom reports per image or on a collection of images (“image reports”), including their associated comments. Image reports are exportable in PDF format or as a standalone hyperlink.

b. All image reports will identify the time, date and location of each image, and will

include associated comments that can be archived indefinitely.

c. The administrator user will be able to restrict commenting functions. Commenting permissions, per user, can be set to (1) read/write, (2) read only or (3) no read/no write permissions.

17. Online interface will allow users to create customizable tags that can be utilized with the

integrated reporting functionality to generate issue-specific image reports.

a. These reports must be made available through PDF export and a standalone link.

b. All image reports will identify the time, date and location of each image, and will include associated comments that can be archived indefinitely.

18. Online interface will allow users to mark-up images using integrated annotation

functionality.

19. Online interface will allow users to sort specific sets of images into custom albums.

a. Users will be able to select one or more images to create new custom albums.

b. Users will be able to add images to their existing custom albums.

c. Custom albums can contain a combination of Contractor and Client images.

20. Online interface will support batch actions by allowing users to multi-select images and other files for viewing, exporting and saving.

a. When files are batch exported or saved, the quality of the images shall be of original

quality, but not to exceed 5MB in size per photo.

21. Online interface will allow users to tag images as “Favorites”. Users will be able to view all of their “Favorite” images from a centralized location.

B. Video Documentation:

1. Video documentation must be recorded in no less that 1920 x 1080p HD video format with 16:9 Aspect Ratio. Documentation will be delivered as a Permanent Record in the format(s) described in “Contractor Support; Hosting; Client Access; Client Usage Rights; and Contractor Deliverables” article F of this specification.

211

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

2. Documentation will be integrated with the Permanent Record of the digital photographic

documentation for the Project, if applicable. C. Web Camera Documentation:

1. Contractor must provide and support both fixed view and adjustable view (Pan-Tilt-Zoom) web cameras capable of wired ethernet, wireless ethernet and cellular modem web camera connections.

2. Web camera service must include delivery of cameras and all related equipment to the

Client:

a. For all web cameras:

i. Power supply (Power Over Ethernet [POE] module);

ii. Wall bracket;

iii. Enclosure;

iv. A pendant, for all fixed web cameras;

v. A wireless component, for all wireless connection web cameras;

(a) For all cellular connection web cameras:

(i) Modem;

(ii) Modem bracket;

(iii)Antenna;

vi. Additional/Optional equipment or components as required and expressly agreed.

3. Web camera service includes positioning and manual focus adjustment as required for all web cameras, optimization of camera setup for available bandwidth and lighting at the Internet connection source and camera location(s) and configuration of pre-sets and bounds for Pan-Tilt-Zoom web cameras.

4. Web camera service includes automated remote monitoring of web camera functionality,

notification of lost connectivity and follow-up by network technicians.

5. Web camera streams and associated still images and time lapse records will be accessible on-line through the use of an Internet connection.

212

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

6. Documentation will allow for multiple-user access, simultaneously, on-line and be

capable of stream re-broadcasting for unlimited concurrent users, under most usage conditions.

7. Access shall adhere to industry standards for information security and protection of data.

8. Access interface will include multiple active projects per user, if applicable.

9. Centralized access to all web cameras’ live image streams will be provided for projects

with multiple cameras.

10. Multi-tiered access levels shall be achievable through use of individual passwords, if applicable. Users of a sufficient tier will be able to identify other authorized users on each project.

11. Web camera streams and associated still images and time lapse records will be accessible

via the same location as digital photographic documentation for the Project, if applicable.

12. Online interface will allow users to comment (privately or publicly) on projects and static images captured from web camera live image streams.

a. Through integrated reporting functionality, users can generate custom reports per

image or on a collection of images (“image reports”), including their associated comments. Image reports are exportable in PDF format or as a standalone hyperlink.

b. All image reports will identify the time and date of each image and will include

associated comments that can be archived indefinitely.

c. The administrator can restrict commenting functions. Commenting permissions, per user, can be set to (1) read/write, (2) read only or (3) no read/no write permissions at the option of the Administrator.

13. Online interface will allow users to create customizable tags that can be utilized with the

integrated reporting functionality to generate issue-specific image reports.

a. These reports must be made available through PDF export and a standalone link.

b. All image reports will identify the time and date of each image, and will include associated comments that can be archived indefinitely.

D. Mobile App: All documentation that is accessible online through an Internet connection will

be accessible via a native mobile application (“mobile app”). The operation of supported features on the mobile app may vary from the online interface (standard/desktop web-browser interface) to accommodate the mobile application environment and improve the

213

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

mobile experience. Mobile app will be supported for Apple iOS and Android OS devices, and will be available for download via the Apple App Store and Google Play Store.

1. Mobile app will utilize the same user credentials as the online access interface. User

access levels and permissions will be inherited from each project.

2. Mobile app will use geolocation to identify the project located nearest to the user.

3. Users will be able to select any active project to which they have access to view its photographic and web camera documentation.

4. Users will be able access photographic documentation by selecting photo sets (shoots and

albums) or by navigating the project plans to the desired locations of photographs.

5. Mobile app will support date and location indexing for all Contractor photographic documentation. Users will be able to switch between the two indexing options, either viewing all dated images associated with a single, selected location or viewing the entire project on a single, selected date.

6. Users will be able to upload their own (Client) photographic images to any project to

which they have sufficient access.

a. If using a camera-enabled mobile device, users will be able to take a new photo to upload from within the mobile app.

b. Users will be able to select from existing photos that are accessible from their mobile

devices. Single and batch upload operations will be supported for existing photos.

c. Prior to uploading, the acting user will be able to do the following:

i. Select an existing custom album for the project to which the uploaded photo/batch will be added;

ii. Add a comment to accompany the photo/batch;

iii. Specify a date on which the photo/batch was taken;

iv. Define permissions and access to the uploaded photo/batch. Access can be set to

(1) the acting user only, (2) all project users or a (3) subset of project users.

7. Users will be able to view the following details for each image within the mobile app:

a. The date on which the photo was taken;

214

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

b. The title of the shoot for which the photo was taken (if captured as part of Contractor documentation);

c. The photo number corresponding to the project plan to which the photo is attached (if

captured as part of Contractor documentation);

d. The title of the album in which the photo is contained (if any).

8. Users will be able to open web camera documentation by camera location. Centralized access to all web cameras will be provided for projects with multiple cameras.

a. Users will be able to access web cameras’ live streams.

b. Users will be able to view still images captured from web cameras’ live streams.

c. Users will be able to view web cameras’ time lapse records.

9. Mobile app will support zoom functionality on photographic and web camera

documentation. Zooming in and out will be possible via double-tap and pinch-/stretch-to-zoom gestures.

10. Mobile app will provide inline Help to assist users with navigation and functionality of

the mobile app. E. Mobile Web-Browser Access to Documentation: All documentation that is accessible online

through an Internet connection will be accessible via mobile devices, such as tablets and smart phones, in a format optimized for mobile-browser viewing and navigation. It is acknowledged that not all software features will be available in the mobile-browser version and functionality may vary from the “full site” version to optimize the mobile experience. Mobile access must be supported for at least the following mobile operating systems: Apple iOS, Android OS.

Documentation Elements: A. Photographic Documentation:

1. Prior to mobilization, all existing conditions of streets, roadways, tracks, railroad

crossings, parkways, driveways, curbs, sidewalks, landscaping, surrounding structures, and building site will be documented using overlapping photographic techniques. This documentation may be required at multiple intervals prior to commencing vertical construction. Indexing and navigation shall be accomplished through interactive site civil / structural / architectural drawings. Integrated commenting and tagging will allow for indication and isolation of issues on the interactive plan and for report generation including, per report, issue image, index number, date and depiction of issue location on

215

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

the floor plan or site plan.

2. Construction progress for all trades will be tracked at pre-determined intervals, but not less than once every thirty (30) calendar days (“Progressions”). Progression documentation will comprehensively track both the exterior and interior construction of the building. Exterior Progressions will track 360 degrees around the site and each building. Indexing and navigation accomplished through interactive site civil / structural / architectural drawings. Integrated commenting and tagging will allow for indication and isolation of issues on the interactive plan and for report generation including, per report, issue image, index number, date and depiction of issue location on the floor plan or site plan.

3. As-built condition of pre-slab utilities and site utilities will be documented prior to pouring slabs, placing concrete and/or backfilling. This process will include all underground and in-slab utilities within the site limits between structures. Overlapping photographic techniques will be used to insure maximum coverage. Indexing and navigation accomplished through interactive site utility plans. Integrated commenting and tagging will allow for indication and isolation of issues on the interactive plan and for report generation including, per report, issue image, index number, date and depiction of issue location on the floor plan or site plan.

4. Miscellaneous events that occur during any Contractor site visit, or events captured by the Client independently, will be dated, labeled and inserted into a Section in the navigation structure entitled “Slideshows,” allowing this information to be stored in the same “place” as the formal scope.

5. Customizable project-specific digital photographic documentation of other details or milestones. Indexing and navigation accomplished through interactive architectural plans.

B. Video Documentation:

1. Facilities management, operations and maintenance video documentation capturing visual and auditory aspects of presentations/demonstrations of key equipment and systems. High definition recording equipment will be used to ensure optimal video and sound quality.

2. Training video documentation for any project-related subject matter capturing visual and

auditory aspects of presentations/demonstrations. High definition recording equipment will be used to ensure optimal video and sound quality.

216

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

3. Dynamic construction event video documentation capturing visual and auditory aspects of the event. High definition recording equipment will be used to ensure optimal video and sound quality.

4. Inspection video documentation capturing visual and auditory aspects of inspection and

related events. High definition recording equipment will be used to ensure optimal video and sound quality.

5. Customizable project-specific video documentation of any project-related event or

milestone capturing visual and auditory aspects of the event. High definition recording equipment will be used to ensure optimal video and sound quality.

6. For all video documentation, editing and post-production services consisting of (1) client branding/watermarking, (2) segment/chapter creation, including chapter headings, title pages and relevant information on title pages (i.e., equipment or event specification, model numbers, dates, etc.), (3) video rendering, (4) video and audio optimization and resizing for client-server streaming upon request.

7. Integration and insertion into the navigation structure of the Permanent Record (archived version) of the digital photographic documentation for the Project, allowing this documentation to be permanently stored in the same “place” as photographic documentation, if applicable.

C. Web Camera Documentation:

1. Fixed web cameras manually aimed at the location of interest at the time of setup. Fixed

camera settings and zoom capabilities will be set at installation.

2. Adjustable, or Pan-Tilt-Zoom, web cameras will be set up to provide: a. Three hundred and sixty degree (360º) horizontal panning;

b. Approximately two hundred and twenty degree (220º) vertical tilting;

c. Twenty times (20 x) magnification optical zoom capabilities.

3. Web camera Internet connections properly configured and verified at set up of each web

camera:

217

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

a. A dedicated, wired DSL or cable Internet connection with a Client-procured Static, Public IP address will be configured and verified for all web cameras using a wired Internet connection;

b. A wireless router will be added to a wired Internet connection setup for all web

cameras using a wireless Internet connection. Any wireless antennas required to transmit an optimal image stream will be incorporated into the connection setup. Once fully configured, the connection will be verified;

c. A standalone cellular modem with a Contractor-provided cellular service connection

will be configured and verified for all web cameras using a cellular Internet connection.

4. Live image streams from each configured web camera will be hosted and accessible

twenty-four (24) hour per day, seven (7) day per week at the specifications of: a. Image stream resolution of up to1280 x 960 (Fixed) or 1280 x 720 (PTZ);

b. Streamed at speeds of fifteen (15) to six (6) frames per second via direct/wired or

wireless DSL or cable connection, dependent on available on-site bandwidth;

c. Streamed at speeds of six (6) frames per second to four (4) frames per minute via cellular connection, dependent on available cellular bandwidth.

5. A hosted, publicly viewable, restricted functionality display page will be provided for the

live image stream of each web camera. Web camera service includes provisions for embedding into the Client’s website the live image stream of each web camera.

6. Web camera service includes access to all web cameras’ live image streams and static

images via mobile device, with optimization for small screen, touch-enabled devices (such as smart phones and tablets).

7. Static images captured and archived from each web camera’s live image stream at fifteen

(15) minute intervals between 6:00am and 6:00pm local time (time zone in which Project site is located). Integrated commenting and tagging of static images will allow for isolation of issues for report generation.

8. Time lapse videos created and archived from the images captured by each web camera’s

live image stream beginning at the sixtieth (60th) day of active hosting for the web camera’s image stream. Time lapse videos will be updated on a weekly basis.

218

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

9. Integration and insertion into the navigation structure of online digital photographic

documentation for the Project, allowing the live image streams and documentation to be accessed and stored in the same “place,” if applicable.

Contractor Support; Hosting; Client Access; Client Usage Rights; and Contractor Deliverables: A. The photographer contracted shall grant for any photographic documentation completed

under this construction contract to the publisher, the Department, and successors in interest, a non-exclusive, no fee copyright license to reproduce, publish, and display in any media.

B. Field personnel to undertake the documentation provided exclusively by the Contractor. Field personnel shall be OSHA certified, if applicable, per the Project-specific safety programs. Coordination with project teams will be accomplished through a designated representative on-site at the Project, typically a Superintendent or Project Manager. Contractor will also attend OAC or construction team meetings as necessary. Contractor’s operations team will provide regular updates regarding the status of the documentation, including completed elements of the documentation, the availability of recent documentation on-line and anticipated future shoot dates.

C. All on-line domain/web hosting, industry standard security measures and redundant server

back-up of the documentation are furnished by Contractor for the duration of the contract.

D. Any software required for all indexing, navigation, hosting and remote access furnished by Contractor (excepting web-browsers), including user license.

E. Contractor furnishes technical support related to using the system or service, including site

visits when required and/or requested.

F. Contractor must be able to create off-line or stand-alone (on-site) version of documentation platform required by this specification, if applicable, for high security or sensitive facilities. All off-line or stand-alone versions shall be of original, full quality documentation.

G. Upon completion of the Project, final copies of the documentation (the “Permanent Record”)

will be provided in a digital media format. On-line access terminates upon delivery of the Permanent Record or as agreed between Contractor and Client. Intellectual property rights associated with the digital media prepared in direct service of the Project shall transfer, along with the media itself, to the Client.

1. Photographic Documentation: The Permanent Record will be uploaded into Project Wise

“0.1.0 – Projects-Active” under the subfolder “151_Project Photos” under the project number main folder. The specific work flow to do so will be distributed at the preconstruction meeting. The Department reserves the right to request a permanent record with the underlying housing software, indexing and navigation system, typically as a

219

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

DVD or external hard-drive. One multiple-user license for use of the underlying housing software, indexing and navigation is included for accessing the digital media. Contractor will resize the Permanent Record for video documentation for Client-server streaming upon request.

2. Video Documentation: The Permanent Record will be uploaded into Project Wise “0.1.0

– Projects-Active” under the subfolder “151_Project Photos” under the project number main folder. The specific work flow to do so will be distributed at the preconstruction meeting. The Department reserves the right to request a permanent record in flash drive, thumb drive or hard drive format. The Permanent Record of all video documentation for the Project will be integrated into the Permanent Record of photographic documentation for the Project, if applicable. Contractor will resize the Permanent Record for video documentation for Client-server streaming upon request.

3. Web Camera Documentation: The Permanent Record, which includes all static image captures and time lapse videos, will be uploaded into Project Wise “0.1.0 – Projects-Active” under the subfolder “151_Project Photos” under the project number main folder. The specific work flow to do so will be distributed at the preconstruction meeting. The Department reserves the right to request a permanent record provided, typically as a flash drive or hard drive. The Permanent Record of all web camera documentation will be integrated into the Permanent Record of photographic documentation and/or video documentation for the Project, if applicable. Contractor will resize the Permanent Record for video documentation for Client-server streaming upon request.

Construction Methods: A. General: Take photographs with maximum depth of field and in focus.

a. Maintain internet based interactive key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location and orientation.

B. Web Camera session of construction progress: At commencement of project work, two

cameras shall be mounted in coordination with the Engineer at an elevation to capture the majority of the project limits.

C. Preconstruction Photographs session: Before commencement of project work, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by the Engineer.

a. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. b. Take photographs to show existing conditions before starting the work. The Engineer

will inform photographer of desired vantage points.

220

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

c. Take photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work.

d. Take photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately

record physical conditions at start of construction. e. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent

structures, pavements, and improvements.

D. Periodic Construction Photographs sessions: Take photographs monthly coinciding as closely as possible with the completion of a major construction phase. In coordination with the Engineer, select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. Prior to taking any photographs review the proposed vantage points with the Engineer.

a. Photographs are for a record of the progress of work. Therefore, they shall be taken

at a maximum interval of one month, whether or not they show any completion of work performed during the preceding month.

E. Utility Construction Sessions: As-built condition of pre-slab utilities and site utilities will be

documented prior to pouring slabs, placing concrete and/or backfilling. These sessions are included in the overall cost of the work. In coordination with the Engineer, select vantage points will be determined to show location and orientation of utilities.

F. Final Completion Construction Photographs session: Take photographs after the date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. The Engineer will inform photographer of desired vantage points.

G. Additional Photographic documentation and/or Video documentation: The Engineer may

request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional documentation will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum.

a. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible.

b. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. c. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited

to, the following: Special events / scheduled milestone events planned at Project site. d. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. e. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These

photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances.

f. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work.

221

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0603169A

g. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. h. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.


This work will be measured for payment by itemized photographic sessions outlined within as submitted to the Engineer. Photographic sessions are priced at a unit costs for each session regardless the final sum of photos taken and submitted.

Basis of Payment:

This work will be paid for at the Contract unit price each for "Progress Photographs" which price shall include all material, equipment, and labor incidental thereto. Where any submission's image files do not conform to the requirements herein, the Contractor shall not receive any payment for the item.

Pay item Pay Unit

Progress Photographs EA.

222

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0651757A

ITEM # 0651757A - 18" POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE

These items shall conform to the requirements of Article 6.51 of the Standard Specifications supplemented and amended as follows:


Add the following:

This item shall also consist of furnishing and installing storm drain pipes of various sizes, types and slopes at the locations and to the grades or general requirements shown on the contract drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

This work shall also include the satisfactory testing of the gravity pipe.

Included in this item shall be the air testing of pipe.

Article 6.51.02 Materials:

Add the following:

Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) and fittings shall conform to one of the following:

1. ASTM D3034: sizes up to 15 inches diameter

2. ASTM F679 – Pipe shall be solid wall pipe with a minimum stiffness of 46 lbf/in: sizes 18 to 36 inches diameter

3. ASTM F949 for corrugated PVC, smooth interior: sizes up to 36 inches diameter

4. AWWA C905: sizes up to 48 inches diameter

5. ASTM F1803 – Pipe shall be closed profile pipe with a minimum stiffness of 46 lbf/in: sizes 18 to 60 inches diameter. Closed profile pipe shall have a minimum stiffness of 46 psi for 18 inch to 27 inch diameter PVC pipe and minimum stiffness of 50 psi for 30 inch to 60 inch diameter PVC pipe.

The pipe shall have pipe diameter to wall thickness ratio (SDR) of a maximum of 35.

Pipe joints shall be sealed by high quality factory installed nitrile O-ring gaskets and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477.

Joints shall be the bell and spigot type subject to the approval of the Engineer. Joints shall be sealed with a nitrile "0" ring gasket, approved by the Engineer, and shall be of a composition and texture which is resistant to industrial wastes including oils and ground water, and which

223

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0651757A

will endure permanently under the conditions likely to be imposed by this use. The joints shall conform to ASTM D3212.

The tensile strength shall be at least 1300 psi. The elongation at rupture shall be such that 2 inch gauge marks shall stretch to not less than 10 inch. Hardness shall be between 40 and 50, as measured with a Shore Durometer. The compression set (constant deflection) shall not exceed 25 percent of the original deflection.

The tensile strength after accelerated aging shall be not less than 80 percent of the original strength. The joint, when assembled, must be able to withstand a hydraulic pressure internally of at least 25 psi.

Fittings: Wyes, Tees, Bends and adapters, and any other fittings required by the Engineer shall be provided. Plans for such fittings showing cross sectional views with dimensions shall be provided, and the Engineer prior to their use shall approve such plans and fittings. The materials used in the manufacture of fittings shall conform with the requirements for the Pipe with which they shall be used and any variation of such requirements shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.

Testing: Pipe shall be tested when requested by the Engineer, and all sizes of pipe so designated shall be tested as follows:

Pipe shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D-2412 Standard Method of Test for External Loading Properties of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading.

Marking: Pipe shall be marked along the outside of the barrel in bold style type and shall indicate the manufacturer's name, pipe size, PVC compound used, i.e., PVC Type 1 Grade 1 and the ASTM material specification for the PVC compound used, i.e., ASTM D3034.

Workmanship: The pipe and fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions or other injurious defects. The pipe shall be as uniform as commercially practical in color, opacity, density and other physical properties.

Waterstops: The manufacturer shall provide waterstops, acceptable to the Engineer, which shall be applied to the outside of plastic pipe when the pipe is to be enclosed in any structure where concrete or mortar is used which will prevent leakage along the outer wall of the barrel of the pipe.

Waterstops within each trench greater than 100’ in length between structures are required and shall be Concrete Class “C” with no reinforcing.

Flexible Couplings: As required shall be manufactured by Fernco, Inc. Davison, Michigan or approved equal.

224

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0651757A

Article 6.51.03 Construction Methods:

Add the following:

Pipe Installation: Storm drain pipe shall be of the sizes, type, materials, etc., indicated by contract documents; all pipes shall be laid, supported, jointed, tested and backfilled as indicated or required for the particular job, location, or condition by drawings or other contract documents. All pipes when in place shall be precisely true to the line and grade indicated therefore by the Engineer, sound, well laid, jointed and bedded and free from defects. Any pipe discovered to be defective after having been laid shall be removed and replaced by a sound and satisfactory piece. All pipes shall be installed with a laser to assure close conformance to required grades.

All pipe shall be stored at the site until installation in a manner acceptable to the Engineer which will keep the pipe at ambient outdoor temperatures. Temporary shading shall be provided as required to meet this requirement. Simply covering the pipe or structures that allow temperature build up when exposed to direct sunlight will not be permitted.

Installation of PVC Pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM Specification D2321 and the following.

All pipes shall be installed per manufacturer’s installation instructions.

Geotextile: The Contractor shall furnish and install Geotextile as called for in the contract drawings and in accordance with Article 7.55.03.

Bedding: Pipes shall be bedded in No. 6 Crushed Stone or as otherwise directed by the Engineer in accordance with the contract drawings and as described in of these specifications. Suitable bell holes shall be provided, so that after placement, only the barrel of the pipe receives bearing pressure from the supporting material.

All pipe and fittings shall be cleared of all debris, dirt, etc., before being installed and shall be kept clean until accepted in the completed work.

Pipe Straightness: No single piece of pipe shall be installed unless it is found to be generally straight. Such pipe shall have a maximum ordinate as measured from the concave side of the pipe not to exceed 1/16 inches per foot of length. If the deviation from straightness exceeds this requirement then the particular piece of pipe shall be rejected for use until it can comply with this provision.

Before any joint is made, the previously installed unit shall be checked to assure that a close joint with the adjoining unit has been maintained and that the inverts are matched and conform to the required grade. The pipe shall not be driven down to the required grade by striking it with a shovel handle, timber or other unyielding object.

225

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0651757A

All joint surfaces shall be cleaned. Immediately before jointing the pipe, the bell or groove shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. Each pipe unit shall then be carefully pushed into place without damage to pipe or gasket. Suitable devices shall be used to force the pipe units together so that they will fit with a minimum open recess inside and outside and have tightly sealed joints. Care shall be taken not to use such force as to wedge apart and split the bell or groove ends.

Details of gasket installation and joint assembly shall follow the directions of the manufacturers of the joint material and of the pipe, all subject to review by the Engineer. The resulting joints shall be watertight and flexible.

Open ends of pipe and branches shall be closed with polyvinyl chloride stoppers secured in place in an acceptable manner.

After each pipe has been properly bedded, enough bedding material shall be placed between the pipe and the sides of the trench, and thoroughly compacted, to hold the pipe in correct alignment. Bell holes, provided for jointing, shall be filled with bedding material and compacted. Bedding above the spring line of the pipe (see Drawings for material) shall be placed and compacted to complete the pipe bedding.

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent flotation of the pipe in the trench. At all times pipe installation is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed with temporary watertight plugs, or by other acceptable means.

If water is in the trench when work is to be resumed, the plug shall not be removed until suitable provisions have been made to prevent water, earth, or other substances from entering the pipe.

Pipelines shall not be used as conductors for trench drainage during construction.

Low Pressure Air Testing: Upon completion of installation, the Contractor shall provide certified air tests, as directed by the Engineer, on all pipes installed under this Contract.

Air testing will be conducted between structures. The pipe under test shall be plugged at both ends. An air hose shall be connected to a tapped plug to be used for air inlet to the line. The hose will be connected to portable air control equipment, which must include a shutoff valve, pressure regulating valve, pressure reduction valve and a monitoring pressure gauge with range from 0 to 5 psi.

Air shall be introduced from the air source through the control equipment to the pipeline.

A. Introduce low pressure air into the sealed pipeline until the air pressure reaches 4 psi gauge greater than the average groundwater pressure.

B. Allow a minimum of 2 minutes for the air pressure to stabilize to a minimum of 3.5 psi gauge greater than the groundwater pressure. Groundwater is assumed to be at ground surface unless the Contractor can prove by otherwise by test pitting.

226

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0651757A

C. After the stabilization period, disconnect the air hose from the control panel to the air supply.

D. The pipeline will be acceptable if the pressure decrease is not greater than 0.5 psi gauge in the time stated in the following table for the length of pipe being tested:

Time (Min.) for Length of Pipe Pipe

Diameter 0-99’ 99-200’ 200-300’ 300-400’

4” 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 6” 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 8” 4.0 4.0 4.0 5.0

10” 5.0 5.0 6.0 8.0 12” 5.5 5.5 8.5 11.5

15” 7.0 8.5 13.0 17.0 18” 8.5 12.0 19.0 25.0

21” 10.0 17.5 26.0 35.0 24” 11.5 23.0 34.0 45.5

27” and larger 14.5 29 43.0 58.0

Test Results:

A. If the installation fails the low pressure air test, determine the source of leakage.

B. Repair or replace all defective materials and/or workmanship and repeat low-pressure air test

at no additional cost.

Allowable Pipe Deflection: Plastic pipe provided under this specification shall be so installed in the ground that a deflection of no more than 5 percent can be anticipated. Such deflection shall be computed by dividing the amount of deflection (nominal diameter less minimum diameter when measured) by the nominal diameter of the pipe. However, between any two adjacent drainage structures, the average deflection shall not exceed 6 percent and no deflection at any point in the pipe shall exceed 7 percent, computed in the manner described herein.

Place Concrete Waterstops full width of trench from bottom of trench to 12” above pipe at the midpoint of each run that is greater than 100’ between structures or as directed by the Engineer. Forms are not required however the Contractor may utilize them to restrain the width of the stop.

227

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0651757A

A minimum width of 6” is required for each stop. Waterstops are not required for runs less than 100’ between structures. Detectable Warning Tape: Warning tape shall meet the requirement set forth in Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.05.15 – Facilities Construction – Markings for Underground Facilities and comply with APWA color code requirements. Colored marking tape shall be labeled “Caution Buried Storm Drain Line Below”.

The warning tape shall be acid and alkali-resistant with a minimum tape thickness of 5.0 mils. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 5,800 psi, and a maximum 80 percent elongation.

Article 6.51.04 Method of Measurement:

Add the following:

No. 6 Crushed Stone, Geotextile and Temporary Earth Retaining System shall be measured for payment as specified elsewhere.

Waterstops shall not be measured for payment.


Add the following:

Included in the unit price of the pipe shall be the cost of testing.

Included in the unit price of the pipe shall be all gaskets and waterstops.

PVC Pipe shall be paid for as “(Size) Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe".

Pay Item Pay Unit 18" Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe LF

228

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0728020A

ITEM #0728020A - STONE BALLAST

Description:

This item includes furnishing and installing miscellaneous ballast as shown on the plans and as directed by the Engineer.

Materials:

Submittals:

Submit the following in accordance with Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.05.02 and NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR - SUBMITTALS.

Compliance: Supplier's certification that the material delivered to the site is in compliance with the Specifications.

Samples: Submit as one representative sample and one sample of each new source of supply as requested by Engineer. Samples of not less then 150 lbs should be submitted. Field samples shall be secured in accordance with ASTM D75-(Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates).

Test reports for testing specified herein.

Ballast Requirements:

Testing and inspection shall conform to the provisions as delineated in the American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA), Manual for Railway Engineering, Chapter 1, Part 2. Submit a quality control plan that addresses all requirements of this specification, including requirements and testing called out in referenced documents.

Submit qualifications of testing laboratory to perform required testing. Provide certified results of tests required by specifications. The Engineer reserves the right to witness the performance of tests.

Material not meeting the Specifications shall not be used in the work.

Furnish prepared ballast that is of crushed rock, hard, strong, angular, durable particles, containing no carbonates or slag, free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances.

Ballast shall have a minimum sand equivalent of 50 when measured by California Department of Transportation California Test 217 (Method of Test for Sand Equivalent) available at the CalDOT website: http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/esc/ctms/pdf/CT_217Jun2011.pdf.

Determination of weight per cubic yard shall be in accordance with ASTM C29 (Standard Test Method for Bulk Density (“Unit Weight”) and Voids in Aggregate).

229

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0728020A

All particles of the ballast shall have been broken by the crusher and have at least two broken surfaces.

All boulders which will pass through a 5-inch circular opening before crushing shall be rejected.

Type A ballast shall be crushed trap rock or granite. It shall: a) be composed of angular fragments which are clear and free from deleterious substance; b) have proper gradation; and c) meet all requirements of this specification. Additionally, ballast shall be in conformance with AREMA Chapter 1, Part 2 except as otherwise specified herein.

Ballast shall conform to the following scale when tested with laboratory sieves having square openings. (Sieves must conform to ASTM E11 (Standard Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test Sieves)) Amounts Finer Than Each Sieve Size Ballast Nominal Size (Sq. Opening Laboratory Sieve- Pct. by Wgt) No. Type Sq. Openings 2” 1½” 1” 3/4” ½” 3/8” No.4 4 A 1½” - 3/4” 100 90-100 20-55 0-15 0-5 5 A 1” - 3/8” 100 90-100 40-75 15-35 0-15 0-5

Deleterious substances in ballast shall not be present in excess of the following amounts: Description: Percent by Weight: Method of Test:

Material finer than No. 200 Sieve 0.5 percent ASTM C117 (Standard Test Method

for Materials Finer than 75-μm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing)

Clay lumps 0.5 percent ASTM C142 (Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates)

Soft and friable pieces 3.0 percent ASTM C142

Hardness shall be between 5.5 and 7.0 as measured on Moh Hardness scale.

Water absorption shall not exceed 1.2% when tested in accordance with ASTM C127- (Standard Test Method for Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate).

Resistance to degradation shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C131 (Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine) or ASTM C535 (Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine). Materials having gradations containing particles retained on the 1 inch sieve shall be tested by ASTM C535.

230

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0728020A

Materials having gradations with 100 percent passing the 1 inch sieve shall be tested by ASTM C131.

The Sieve Analysis shall be made in accordance with the ASTM C136 (Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates).

Soundness shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C88 (Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate). Average weighted loss shall not exceed 1.5 percent.

The percent of flat or elongated particles shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D4791 (Standard Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate). The dimension ratio shall be 1:3. Maximum allowable is 5 percent.

Be responsible for assuring ballast cleanliness. A suitable washing facility shall be provided at the quarry for this purpose. This facility shall consist of a high pressure spray over the ballast as it passes on the belt or other measures acceptable to the Engineer. Include washing procedures in the project quality control plan.

Prepared ballast shall be handled in such a manner that it is kept clean and free from segregation. It shall be only loaded into cars or trucks which are in good order, tight enough to prevent leakage and waste of material, and clean and free from rubbish or any substance which would foul the ballast.

The quality of stone for ballast from any quarry or new strata opened up, including its soundness, resistance to abrasion, chemical composition, absorption, impedance, hardness and weight per cubic foot, shall be determined prior to its acceptance at a testing laboratory selected by the purchaser. Each stratum or portion of quarry containing a variation of quality of stone shall be tested separately and not averaged. Quality tests and gradation tests shall subsequently be made from time to time as deemed necessary by the purchaser to control the quality and size of ballast furnished by the producer.

Sufficient visual observations, determinations of deleterious substances and analyses of gradation shall be made by the producer prior to shipment to assure compliance with these specifications.

Certify that ballast delivered to the Railroad is typical of that upon which specified tests have been made.

The selection of samples is as important as the laboratory testing; care shall be taken that the samples obtained show the true nature and conditions of the material to be examined.

Samples of all ballast and samples of stone at quarries for test to determine the acceptability of the source, as well as samples for quality control, shall be in accordance with ASTM D75 and C702 (Standard Practice for Reducing Samples of Aggregate to Testing Size). Method of sampling shall be submitted. Sampling may be performed by the Engineer at his discretion. The quarry or producer may select samples for inspection or preliminary testing if such action is approved by the Engineer.

231

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0728020A

Samples of the finished product for gradation and other required tests shall be taken from each 1,000 tons of prepared ballast unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer. Samples shall be representative and shall weigh not less than 100 pounds. Where the acceptability of stone from a quarry is to be determined, a 150 pound sample consisting of pieces of approximately 6 by 6 by 4 inches should also be furnished.

No ballast shall be unloaded unless it has been accepted by the Engineer.

If material prior to, during or after being loaded, does not conform to specifications, stop operations until all faults have been corrected. Should ballast that does not meet specifications be unloaded, then payment will not be made to Contractor. Disposal and/or removal of defective material shall be done without any additional cost to the Department.

As it is impractical to inspect all ballast at quarry, the Engineer reserves the right to reject any car or truck load of ballast (whether previously inspected or not) that does not conform to specifications upon arrival at unloading site.

Handle prepared ballast at the production plant, during shipment, and at the work site so that it is kept clean and free of segregation.


Do not place ballast until the Engineer has approved the subgrade upon which the ballast is to be placed.

Place stone ballast to the limits and depths, and to the grade, shown on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer.

The ballast layer shall be thoroughly compacted until the surface is true and unyielding, displaying no deformation or movement under the compaction equipment. Compact ballast to 100-percent maximum density by vibratory compaction equipment specifically manufactured for compaction purposes, or self-propelled pneumatic-tired roller. Self-propelled, pneumatic-tired roller shall have a gross weight of 10- to 15-tons. Vibratory compactor shall have a weight of not less than 10-tons and be capable of applying a dynamic load of not less than 18,000-pounds at 1,300- to 1,500-cpm.

Tolerances: Leave top of ballast bed flat and level to within plus or minus 1-inch of the prescribed finished elevation across a 12-foot wide platform centered on the track centerline.

After installation of ballast layer, refrain from driving vehicles on the ballast layer that would foul or rut the ballast thereby potentially causing center-binding of ties. Replace any ballast that has become fouled by mud or fine materials at no cost to the Owner.

Determination of Thickness: The thickness shall be as indicated on the plans, or as ordered by the Engineer and within specified tolerances.

232

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0728020A

Measurements to determine the thickness will be taken by the Engineer at intervals of 500 feet or less, and shall be considered representative of the lane.

If a thickness measurement is taken and found deficient, the Engineer will take such additional measurements as he considers necessary to determine the longitudinal limits of the deficiency.

The Engineer may waive an occasional measurement outside the tolerances if in his judgment it is not representative of true conditions and providing that:

A. Other thickness measurements taken nearby for the course are within acceptable limits;

B. proper controls have been exercised by the Contractor; and

C. if there would be no impairment to the serviceability of the complete construction.


All aggregate required for this work shall be weighed on scale furnished by and at the expense of the Contractor, except as otherwise permitted herein. The scales shall be of a type satisfactory to the Engineer and shall be calibrated and sealed, at the expense of the Contractor, as often as the Engineer may require.

Adjustments to compensation shall be made for deficiencies in plan depth and cross section as specified herein.

Provide certified scale tickets for each load of ballast delivered. Cars or trucks shall be weighed and such weights shall be forwarded with car/truck numbers to the Engineer.

Measurements shall be subject to the following provisions:

No adjustment of the quantity accepted for payment will be made where the thickness is within the allowable plus or minus tolerances.

Where the thickness exceeds that indicated on the plans by more than the prescribed tolerance, that material which is in excess of the total planned depth, plus the tolerance, will not be included for payment.

Areas represented by measurements deficient in thickness in excess of the allowable minus deviation shall be corrected at the Contractor’s expense, or with written permission of the Engineer, the deficient areas may remain, and payment will be made at an equitable adjusted price based on weight per cubic yard. An adjustment in quantity will be made in the materials placed beyond the horizontal limits indicated on the plans by deducting the computed weight of that material extending more than three inches beyond the horizontal plan dimensions.

233

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0728020A

Basis of Payment:

This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per ton for “Stone Ballast”, complete in place, which price shall include all materials, tools, equipment and work incidental thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Stone Ballast TON

234

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0728032A

ITEM #0728032A – NO. 6 CRUSHED STONE

Description:

This item shall consist of crushed stone placed to a uniform depth to the limits and for the depth shown on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer.

Materials:

The material for this work shall conform to the requirements of Article M.01 for No. 6 Crushed Stone.


The Contractor shall place crushed stone to the limits and depths, and to the grade, shown on the Plans, or as directed by the Engineer.

The crushed stone shall be thoroughly compacted until the surface is true and unyielding, displaying no deformation or movement under the compaction equipment. Compact crushed stone by vibratory compaction equipment specifically manufactured for compaction purposes.


This work will be measured for payment by the actual number of cubic yards of No. 6 Crushed Stone completed, accepted and measured in place after compaction.

Basis of Payment:

This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic yard for “No. 6 Crushed Stone”, complete in place, which price shall include all materials, tools, equipment and work incidental thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit

No. 6 Crushed Stone CY

235

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0751711A

ITEM #0751711A - 6" UNDERDRAIN

Description:

This item shall consist of furnishing and installing perforated 6-inch diameter underdrain pipe complete with crushed stone wrapped in filter fabric, cleanouts, and connections to drainage structures in conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions and details shown on the plans, or as ordered, and in accordance with the provisions of the standard specifications for the various materials and work which constitute the completed underdrains.

Materials:

Submittals:

Submit product data on pipe, and frame and cover for cleanouts for approval.

Materials shall conform to the applicable requirements of Article 7.51.02, unless otherwise specified below.

Pipe: One of the following:

1. Perforated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC): Subarticle M.08.01-20.

2. Perforated Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe: Subarticle M.08.01-18.

Geotextile (Filter Fabric): Subarticle M.08.01-19.

Cleanouts: Fabricate cleanouts using wyes and bends of the same pipe material as the underdrain itself. Use solid wall pipe for vertical pipe and fittings. Furnish heavy duty frames and covers for cleanouts as indicted on the plans.

Construction Methods: Install in accordance with subsection 7.51.03 and the following:

1. Excavation and backfill shall conform to Section 2.05.

2. Install cleanouts as detailed on the plans.

236

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0751711A

Method of Measurement: 6” Underdrain will be measured per linear foot installed in place.

Basis of Payment:

Underdrains will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot for “6” Underdrain”, which price shall include furnishing and installing pipe, crushed stone, filter fabric, cleanouts, cleanout frames and covers adjusted to grade, concrete encasement, concrete cradle, backfill, and all equipment, tools and labor incidental thereto.

Excavation shall be paid separately under the applicable item.

Pay Item Pay Unit

6” Underdrain LF

237

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0901003A

ITEM #0901003A – STEEL BOLLARD

Description:

The work under this item shall consist of the installation of steel bollards with plastic covers at the locations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

Materials:

Steel Pipe: Schedule 40, galvanized sized as shown on the plans.

Concrete: Class “C” conforming to Article M.03.

Compacted Granular Fill shall conform to Section 2.14.


Steel Bollards shall be constructed as shown on the plans. Concrete shall be placed per Article 6.01.03. Bollards shall have Plastic Bollard Covers installed per manufacturer requirements. The Plastic Bollard Covers shall be constructed of Polyethylene Thermo Plastic (LDPE) tubes with ultra-violet resistance and anti-static properties, nominal thickness 0.25 inches, sized for the steel pipe diameter with two reflective bands. Cover color shall be OSHA yellow. The Plastic Bollard Covers shall be manufactured by Ideal Shield from Detroit, MI or approved equal.

Excavation shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 2.02.

Spare Parts: The contractor shall provide 10% spare bollard covers with a minimum spare quantity of two (2).


A. This work shall be measured for payment by the actual number of steel bollards installed and accepted.

B. Excavation: Excavation, backfilling, and disposal of surplus material will not be measured for payment, but the cost shall be included in the price bid for the bollard.

C. Compacted Granular Fill: This work will not be measured for payment, but the cost shall be included in the price bid for the bollard.

238

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0901003A

Basis of Payment:

This work shall be paid for at the contract unit price each "Steel Bollard" complete and in place, which price shall include all excavation as specified, backfill, disposal of surplus material, gravel base, galvanized steel pipe, plastic bollard covers, concrete, and all material, equipment, tools and labor incidental thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Steel Bollard EA

239

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0913000A

ITEM # 0913000A – REMOVE CHAIN LINK FENCE

Section 9.13 is supplemented as follows: Article 9.13.01 Description:

Add the following:

Under this item the Contractor shall remove existing chain link fence and gate where shown on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer. If the fence being removed is located in pavement or concrete the Contractor shall cut and grind post smooth at grade and fill all holes created by the removal with non-shrink grout unless otherwise directed by engineer. Article 9.13.04 Method of Measurement:

Add the following:

Removal work will be measured for payment by the number of linear feet of chain link fence and gate removed, including intermediate posts measured from outside to outside of terminal posts. Proper disposal and the filling of all holes shall be included in the cost of removal. Article 9.13.05 Basis of Payment:

Add the following:

This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot for “Remove Chain Link Fence”. This price shall include removal of posts and fence fabric, gates, grounding, cutting & grinding fence posts, filling of holes, equipment, tools and labor incidental thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Remove Chain Link Fence LF

240

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0913041A, #0913046A, #0913351A

ITEM #0913041A - 8’ CHAIN LINK FENCE

ITEM #0913046A - 10’ CHAIN LINK FENCE WITH BARBED WIRE

ITEM #0913351A - 4’ CHAIN LINK GATE 8’ HIGH

Section 9.13 is supplemented as follows:


Add the following:

This item shall also include furnishing and installing a grounding system for the fence or gate type as indicated on the plans.


Add the following:

Materials for the grounding system shall be as indicated on the plans.


Add the following:

For chain link fencing with barbed wire on top, this work will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot for “Chain Link Fence with Barbed Wire” of the height specified, complete in place, which price shall include all materials, grounding systems, equipment, tools, excavation, backfill, disposal of surplus material and labor incidental thereto. Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Pay Unit

8’ Chain Link Fence L.F. 10’ Chain Link Fence with Barbed Wire L.F. 4’ Chain Link Gate 8’ High EA.

241

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0913835A

ITEM # 0913835A – REMOVE AND RESET CHAIN LINK FENCE

Section 9.13 is supplemented as follows: Article 9.13.01 Description:

Add the following:

Under this item the Contractor shall remove and reset existing chain link fence with barbed wire where shown on the Plans, or as directed by the Engineer. This Item shall also include disconnection of the existing fence grounding system attached to the fence and reattachment upon resetting of the fence.


The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to all equipment and material incurred during removal and hauling to the specified area. All repairs or replacements due to damage or loss by the Contractor shall be made at the Contractor’s expense.

Any components designed for one-time use, including corner and line posts, barbed wire, grounding connectors, wire, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to replace. All items replaced shall be an approved equal. Article 9.13.04 Method of Measurement:

Add the following:

The work will be measured for payment by the number of Linear Feet of reset fence completed and accepted measured from outside to outside of terminal posts. Article 9.13.05 Basis of Payment:

Add the following:

This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot for “Remove and Reset Chain Link Fence with Barbed Wire”, complete in place which price shall include removal, storage and resetting of the existing fence, disconnection and reconnection of the existing grounding system, and all material, grounding connections, barbed wire, equipment, tools, excavation, backfill labor incidental thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Remove and Reset Chain Link Fence with Barbed Wire LF

242

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0921001A, #0921007A

ITEM #0921001A – CONCRETE SIDEWALK

ITEM #0921007A – SPECIAL CONCRETE SIDEWALK



Add the following:

This work shall include the construction of all concrete sidewalks and concrete sidewalks with curbing which is monolithically attached to the sidewalk. In addition, the work shall include the furnishing and installation of preformed expansion joint filler and joint sealant, reinforcement steel and broom finish as indicated on the plans.


Delete the entire Section and replace with the following:

Materials for this work shall conform to the requirements of Article M.03.01 for Class "F" Concrete.

Air-entraining Portland cement and air-entraining admixtures shall conform to Article M.03.01.

Reinforcement steel shall conform to the requirements of Article M.06.01.

Preformed Expansion Joint Filler shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M153, Type II.

Joint Sealant shall be for heavy duty use under vehicular traffic and should be resistant to continuous exposure to hydrocarbons.

Gravel base shall be compacted granular fill and conform to the requirements of Article 2.14

Detectable warning strips shall be prefabricated detectable warning tile chosen from the Department’s Qualified Products List for retrofit or cast in place applications. Color shall be brick red.

243

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0921001A, #0921007A


Add the following:

8. Curbing: Where indicated on the plans, concrete curbing shall be monolithically cast with the sidewalk.

Article 9.21.04 Method of Measurement: Add the following after the first sentence of Item 1. Concrete Sidewalk or Sidewalk Ramp: The cost of the preformed expansion joint filler, joint sealant, reinforcement steel and broom finish will not be measured for separate payment. Concrete sidewalks with monolithically cast curbing shall be measured and paid for under “Special Concrete Sidewalk” and will measured by the actual number of square feet completed and accepted in place.



Price of the Concrete Sidewalk shall also include the cost of the preformed expansion joint filler, joint sealant, reinforcement steel and broom finish and all other work required to complete the sidewalk as indicated on the plans.

Price of the Special Concrete Sidewalk shall also include the cost of the monolithically cast curbing, preformed expansion joint filler, joint sealant, reinforcement steel and broom finish and all other work required to complete the sidewalk as indicated on the plans.

Add the following:

The square foot price for “Concrete Sidewalk” and “Special Concrete Sidewalk” shall also include the preformed expansion joint filler, joint sealant, reinforcing steel and broom finish.

244

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

ITEM #0969000A - PROJECT COORDINATOR Description: Under this item the Contractor shall furnish the services of one of his administrative employees, entitled the Project Coordinator for the EEC project who will coordinate and expedite all phases of the work required for the project to ensure that the construction schedule is maintained. The Project Coordinator shall be designated by name, in writing with a resume of his qualifications, submitted within the requirements of Article 1.03 – Award and Execution of the Contract and shall not be changed without prior written notice to the Department. The Project Coordinator qualifications must include having completed Primavera Training Course Nos. 102 (Project Management Module – Basic Course) and 106 (Project Management Module – Advanced Course). If, in the judgment of the Engineer, the Project Coordinator is not sufficiently experienced and versatile in the preparation, interpretation and modification of the construction schedules, the Contractor shall engage the services of a Consultant, subject to the approval of the Engineer, for the scheduling work required. If a Consultant is engaged, the Consultant shall be present at the first meeting, along with the Project Coordinator, prepared to discuss, in detail, the proposed methods and techniques to be used. Thereafter, the Project Coordinator or the Consultant responsible for updating the CPM (Critical Path Method) Schedule shall attend all meetings between the Contractor, their Subcontractors, and any other meetings, which may affect the CPM schedule. The Project Coordinator shall be knowledgeable of the status of all aspects of the work throughout the length of the Contract. The Contractor shall prepare and maintain CPM Schedules utilizing the latest version of Primavera Engineering and Construction software (P6). The minimum lump sum bid for this item shall be $375,000 (three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars). Failure of the Contractor to bid at least the minimum amount will result in the Department adjusting the Contractor’s bid to include the minimum bid amount for this item.

Schedule Requirements: The Contractor shall prepare a CPM Schedule in accordance with the pertinent provisions of "Section 1.03 - Award and Execution of Contract," "Section 1.05 - Control of the Work," and "Section 1.08 - Prosecution of Progress" of the Standard Specifications. The schedules shall incorporate the Stages and Sequence of Construction as outlined on the Plans and in the Specifications. All other limiting factors that affect construction shall also be incorporated into the Schedules. All milestones or constrained dates within the schedule shall be clearly indicated. All physical interface handoffs to other contracts shall be modeled as interface milestone activities. The critical path shall be defined as the “longest path” and be clearly identifiable. Changes that do not affect the controlling operation on the critical path will not be considered as the basis for a time extension. The schedule shall indicate the logic of the work for the major elements and components of work under the Contract (on a structure by structure or system by system basis where applicable), such as the planned mobilization of equipment, sequences of operations or assembly, procurement of materials and equipment, duration of activities, type of relationship, lag time (if any), and such other information as it is necessary to present a clear statement of the intended activities. The Project Coordinator shall develop a CPM breakdown structure integrated with all contract pay items and the MLSI Schedule of Values (SOV). The Contractor shall cost load the CPM Schedule

245

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

consistent with the pay items and submitted MLSI SOV. The Coordinator shall submit a report which shows the apportionment of pay items and SOV items to each activity. With the exception of procurement activities, all activities will be broken down such that their total value is less than $50,000. In order to retain the ability to roll up and summarize data into higher levels and to allow for easier management of the major portions of the work, the CPM Schedule shall be organized utilizing an Enterprise Project Structure (EPS) and separated into subprojects as specified in the tables below. EPS ID EPS Name Level NHRY-PROG

New Haven Rail Yard Improvement Program

1

PROJECT ID PROJECT Name Level 301-0182 EEC Contract Project All milestones and level of effort activities shall be incorporated at the Project Level. All major and long lead procurement items shall be identified in the schedule. All major elements of the work shall be shown, and also be broken out further into their minor components and sequence of assembly. For this project, the elements that are to be included, but are not limited to the following items:

Notice to Proceed Mobilization Field Office Permit Acquisition Environmental submittals (HASP, Waste Disposal Sites, etc.) Schedule of Submittals Submittals required by permit or project spec. Shop & Working Drawings Submittals for third party approval (railroad, utilities, CT Department of Environmental

Protection, etc.) Long lead contractor procurement First 180 Day Completion Under Floor Wheel Lathe (UFWL) and ancillary support systems installation (by others) Identification of each and every utility relocation and interface as a separate activity,

including activity description and responsibility coding that identifies the type of utility and the name of the utility company involved

Utility work (Break down into site power, traction power, catenary power, gas, water, sanitary, signals, communications, etc)

Yard Track Construction (Breakdown into Remove Existing Track, Excavation, Fill, subgrade utility work, sub-ballast, Metro North related work, oil pan collection system, etc.)

246

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

Identification of any manpower, material, or equipment restrictions, as well as any activity requiring unusual shift work, such as double shifts, 6-day weeks, specified overtime, or work at times other than regular days or hours

Required system outages (e.g. power, communications, life safety, track) and new system tie-ins to existing site systems/networks.

Start and Finish Milestones for: - The overall project - Each stage and/or phase of construction - Major structures, building components, systems - Activities with required start or finish dates - Work associated with the Liquidated Damages Provisions - System outages and shop shutdowns

Identification of interfaces and dependencies with preceding, concurrent, and follow-on contractors, ConnDOT, railroads, and utilities as shown on the plans or specified in the specifications including:

o MNR furnished material o MNR activities o Adjacent work by Others (work under a separate contract or by Others that

requires interface, space sharing, or facilitates work to be done by the EEC contractor)

o ConnDOT activities (any ConnDOT activity that must occur to facilitate the EEC contractor’s work)

o ConnDOT Special Inspections o Contractor off-site staging

Crews and specialized equipment shall be differentiated by individual resource codes Environmental Controls (reuse/waste stockpile area, erosion and sedimentation controls,

etc.) Construction Staking Site Preparation Fencing Concrete Work (Breakdown into Footings, slabs, walls, etc.; each broken down into

form, reinforcing and place) Finish Milestones for:

-Complete Track Demolition -Complete Site Preparation -Complete Excavation -Complete Foundations -Complete Sitework -Complete Trackwork -Complete Catenary

Substantial Completion Clean-up (as-builts, delivery of spare parts) Project Completion

247

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

In the event of a conflict between the requirements of the contract documents and the information provided or shown on an accepted schedule, the requirements of the contract documents shall take precedence. The Contractor shall prepare and maintain CPM Schedules utilizing the latest version of Primavera Engineering and Construction software (P6). The development of the Baseline Schedule will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Although the Contractor shall be the sole entity allowed to modify schedule data, formatting the project schedule within the Primavera Engineering and Construction software is of critical importance to ensure consistency between different projects within the NHRY Facilities Improvements Program and to allow efficient updates to the Program Master Schedule. For that reason, the Department may request that the Contractor incorporate layouts, filters, custom data items, milestones, level of effort activities, reports, and calendar ID’s (although not the calendar itself), etc that do not affect the established activity dates or schedule logic. All documents, which require review and approval by the Department, shall be coded to be clearly identified within the schedule. Review and response times to be allocated to the Department and other agencies for various types of submittals are referenced in the specification for Item #0969050A – “Document Control Specialist”. Submittal review time shall commence upon receipt by the Engineer of all pertinent documents and data required to perform the review. All submittals designated by the Department as “Revise and Resubmit” shall require that the Contractor insert new submittal and review activities with appropriate logic and review/response times into the schedule. The Department shall not be held responsible for any delay associated with the approval or rejection of any substitution or other revisions proposed by the Contractor. The schedules shall consist of a network technique of planning, scheduling and control; be a clear statement of the logical sequence of work to be done; and be prepared in such a manner that the Contractor's work sequence is optimized between early start and late start constraints. All schedule activities shall have at least one predecessor and one successor activity, except for the project start and finish milestones. The work shall be broken out into sufficient detail such that no activity has duration greater than thirty (30) calendar days, unless approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall utilize the same criteria in a consistent manner throughout the term of the project. If, at any time, the Contractor alters his logic, original durations, descriptions, adds activities or activity codes, or in any way modifies the Baseline Schedule, he must notify the Engineer of the change(s), in writing, presenting the reason(s) for the change(s) in detail. The Engineer reserves the right to accept or reject any such change(s). All task activities of the project and each subproject shall be supplemented with crew allocation information. The crew allocations shall be shown to a level of detail that facilitates report generation based on various crew classes for the Contractor and subcontractors. The Contractor shall use average composite crews to display the labor loading of onsite construction activities of the project and each subproject. The Contractor shall optimize and level labor to reflect a reasonable plan for accomplishing the work and to assure that crew allocations are not duplicated in concurrent activities. The Engineer may review the baseline schedule crew allocations using

248

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

Means Productivity Standards or other recognized industry standard(s) to determine if the schedule is practicable. The Contractor shall not: arrange the critical path through activities more susceptible to State-caused delay sequester float through strategies including, but not limited to:

o falsely extending activity duration estimates o use of preferential logic (creating logic between activities for the purpose of

suppressing float and/or manipulating the critical path; sequencing of schedule activities in a way other than in the manner the work is physically and logically required to be built)

o use of extensive or insufficient resource loading o use of float suppression techniques o use of special lead/lag logic restraints, o use of zero total float or free float constraints o imposing constraint dates other than as required by the contract

The use of one or more of these manipulations shall be cause for rejection of the project schedule or its updates. Resource constraints may not be established through the use of activity logic. If the Contractor deems it necessary to enter resource (labor or equipment) constraints in the schedule, these constraints shall be established through the use of resource loading and leveling of the schedule. Float available in the schedule, at any time shall not be considered for the exclusive use of either the State or the Contractor. During the course of contract execution, any float generated due to the efficiencies of either party is not for the sole use of the party generating the float; rather it is a shared commodity to be reasonably used by either party. Project Float will be a resource available to both the State and the Contractor. Lags will not be used when the creation of an activity will perform the same function. Lag durations contained in the schedule shall not have a negative value. The Contractor shall identify any lag proposed and provide an explanation for the purpose of the lag in the narrative report. The use of Mandatory Start or Finish Constraints is prohibited, excluding the use of one Mandatory Start date for Contract Award. All other constraints shall be of the type “On or Before”. The use of Activity Steps (breaking activities down into smaller units within an activity) is prohibited. The schedule will be developed according to the following format: Activity ID

249

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

Activity ID numbers shall strictly adhere to the following format. The first four digits shall designate the Contract Number followed by a period. The following two digits of the activity ID number shall be utilized to designate the type of the work being performed (i.e. system, CSI breakdown, such as foundation, excavation, steel, siding, masonry, etc.) followed by a period. Use the appropriate CSI MF04 Divisions 01 through 48. The next four digits of the activity ID number shall be utilized to designate the location of the work being performed (i.e. structure, portion of a building or area within a building, etc) followed by a period. The remaining three digits may be used to provide unique, orderly, and sequential ID numbers for each activity. The following is an example Activity ID format to be used where 0139 represents the EEC Shop Improvements Contract, “03” designates concrete for structures, “IWSW” represents EEC Facility South Wall, and “010” is the activity number.

The items listed below shall have specific numbering for the “type of work” digits as follows:

Milestone Activities 00 Submittal Activities 99 Level of Effort Activities 88 Extra Work Activities 77

“Location of Work” coding shall be formatted to start with the general location designation as the first character as follows:

Track Number TR Site East SE Site West SW

Activity Description Each Activity shall have a narrative description consisting of a verb or work function (e.g. form, pour, excavate, etc), an object (i.e. slab, footing, wall, etc), and a location (e.g.. track number, catenary structure number, building, area within building, etc).

Activity Codes Activity Codes shall conform to the following table and must be entered exactly as shown (spelling, letter case, etc.). No additional activity codes will be allowed without the approval of the Engineer. Each activity in all project schedules shall be assigned specific values for the following ten (10) Activity Codes:

0182. 03. IWSW.010Contract LetterDesignation

Type of Work Location of Work

Activity Number

250

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

Activity Code Name

Activity Code Type

Max Length

Use

PHASE GLOBAL 3 Assign appropriate Program Phase = 1A, 1B or 2

STAGE PROJECT 2 Assign the appropriate stage of construction RESP TYPE PROJECT 8 Assign the type of party ultimately

responsible for the activity (i.e. OWNER, RAILROAD, GC, or UTILITY)

RESP PARTY PROJECT 4 Assign by company name the party responsible for the activity; activities shall not belong to more than one responsible party; responsible parties include, but are not limited to, the prime contractor, subcontractors, state or government agencies, suppliers, railroad, and utilities

ADMIN GLOBAL 3 Designate whether the activity is a submittal (SUB), review & approval process (RA), material fabrication (FAB), delivery process (DEL), or a Construction Activity (CON).

AREA PROJECT 2 Assign the general location within the project LOCATION PROJECT 4 Assign a more specific location within the

project (i.e. 1st Floor, Rm No. 101, Roof, etc) STRUCTURE PROJECT 5 Assign a structure name or number as

applicable STR SUBSET PROJECT 5 Assign structure components as applicable

WBS Project 7 Assign Work Breakdown Structure based on Schedule of Values and Pay Item numbers from the Contract

Notebooks Activities that are modified or added by construction order shall be identified in the activity notebook. The construction order number, as issued by the Engineer, and the date the activity was modified or added shall be clearly recorded. Calendars Calendars shall conform to the following table and must be entered exactly as shown (spelling, letter case, type, etc.). No additional calendars will be allowed without the approval of the Engineer. Project Calendars shall inherit holidays and exceptions from the “0139- Global” Calendar as needed. All Calendars must strictly adhere to Section 1.08.04, Limitations of Operations, and the Standard Specifications as applicable.

251

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

Calendar Name Calendar Type Calendar Description

NHRY – Contractor Holidays

Global Includes all Contract Holidays

0139 – 4 Day Work Week Project 4 Day Work Week 0139 - 5 Day Work Week Project 5 Day Work Week 0139 - 6 Day Work Week Project 6 Day Work Week 0139 - 7 Day Work Week Project 7 Day Work Week 0139 - Railroad Restrictions

Project Includes imposed restrictions or restricted work periods in the vicinity of the railroad or within the yard or ROW.

Submittals: The Contractor shall submit to the Department notification that the project schedule is available for review by the Department. Notification shall be via Primavera Contract Manager software (PCM, formerly known as Primavera Expedition) submittal/transmittal and shall have the following electronic requirements attached: a XER backup of the entire schedule; Gantt charts in Adobe Acrobat PDF file format, formatted to fit ANSI Size D paper

(24 inches x 36 inches), and showing the Activity ID, Activity Description, Original Duration, Remaining Duration, Total Float, Early Start and Finish Dates, and Calendar ID. Types of Gantt Charts to be included are:

o The project critical (longest) path; o The project near critical path (excluding critical path activities); o All uncompleted work activities as of the data date;

Reports in Adobe Acrobat PDF file format, formatted to fit letter sized paper (8.5 inches x 11 inches), to include:

o Schedule/Leveling Report which includes the scheduling/leveling settings, statistics, errors, warnings, results, and exceptions

o A listing of all activities, by activity code, with early & late starts and total float

o A Claim Digger Report that details changes between the current schedule submittal and the previous month’s update submittal (ConnDOT shall provide parameters for the types of changes to be detailed in the report)

o Detailed Predecessor/Successor Report which includes a listing of all activities that immediately precede and immediately succeed that activity in the schedule logic.

o A Monthly Resources Loading Summary Report (tabular) indicating the peak number of resources required for each activity.

o Cost/Cash Flow Summary

The Contractor shall submit a hardcopy version of the aforementioned submittal requirements as follows:

252

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

Three (3) compact discs that each include; the XER backup file and all Adobe Acrobat PDF Gantt Charts and reports specified above;

Three (3) paper copies of each Gantt chart and report on the paper size specified above

Schedule submittals will only be considered complete when all documents and data have been provided as described below. The Project Coordinator shall be required to prepare and submit the following documents:

1) Initial Baseline Schedule Within twenty (twenty (20) calendar days after contract award, the Contractor shall prepare, in accordance with all requirements of this specification, and submit for review and acceptance a detailed Project CPM Schedule for all work contemplated for the first one hundred and eighty (180) calendar days. All work contemplated beyond the first one hundred and eighty (180) calendar days shall be shown in sufficient detail such that the Critical Path may be identified and shall incorporate all contract milestones. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to whether the schedule is sufficiently detailed. The Contractor will provide a narrative to accompany the initial baseline schedule. The narrative shall include:

a) The Contractor’s transmittal letter b) Identification of unusual conditions or restrictions regarding labor, equipment, or

material; including multiple shifts, 6-day work weeks, specified overtime or work at times other than regular days or hours.

c) Description of the critical path d) Description of the near critical path, defined as those activities not on the critical

path with total float less than fifteen (15) calendar days. e) Reasons for an early or late scheduled completion date in comparison to the

contract completion date The schedule shall have a data date of the first working day of the contract, shall not include any completed work to date, and shall not attribute negative float or negative lag to any activity. The Project ID shall be “0139IB-1” (“0139IB-2” if a second submission is required, etc).

Upon acceptance of this schedule, it shall be designated the "Initial Baseline Schedule". The acceptance of the Initial Baseline Schedule shall in no way waive the requirements of the contract nor shall it excuse the Contractor from any obligations under the contract. Baseline Schedule Within ninety (90) calendar days after contract award, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for review and acceptance, a detailed Project CPM Schedule for all contract work. This schedule shall be prepared in accordance with all requirements of this specification. As a guide, 40 to 50 activities should be provided per $1 million of contract work. Construction

253

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

work activities, excluding the preparation, submission, review and approval of submittals shall represent 75% of the minimum required activities. The Contractor shall require each major subcontractor and major supplier to submit in writing a statement certifying that the major subcontractor or major supplier has concurred with the Contractor’s CPM Schedule, including major updates, and that the major subcontractor’s or major supplier’s related schedule has been incorporated accurately, including the duration of activities, crew allocations (note, certification of crew allocations for any subcontractor is required if their work activities are on the project or subproject Critical Path; certification for major supplier activities on the project or subproject Critical Path will require a detailed production schedule for the materials to be supplied that can be physically inspected and verified by the Engineer). The definition of a “major subcontractor” is one that provides services valued in excess of five percent (5%) of the contract value. The definition of “major supplier” is one that provides material(s) or services valued in excess of one (1%) of the contract value. Failure of the contractor to provide the required information will delay the approval of the baseline schedule. The Contractor will provide a narrative to accompany the baseline schedule. The narrative shall include:

a) The Contractor’s transmittal letter b) Identification of unusual conditions or restrictions regarding labor, equipment, or


c) Description of the critical path d) Description of the near critical path, defined as those activities not on the critical

path with total float less than fifteen (15) calendar days. e) Reasons for an early or late scheduled completion date in comparison to the

contract completion date Should the Baseline Schedule, submitted for acceptance, show variances from the requirements of the contract, the Contractor shall make specific mention of the variations in the letter of transmittal, in order that, if accepted, proper adjustments to the project schedule can be made. The baseline shall be numbered with the Contract designation + BASE 1, BASE 2 if a second submission is required, etc. An Example of the Project ID baseline schedule numbering is: “0139BASE-1”, “0139BASE-2”, “0139BASE-3”, etc. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to whether the schedule is sufficiently detailed. Upon acceptance of this schedule, it shall be designated the "Baseline Schedule". The acceptance of a Baseline Schedule shall in no way waive the requirements of the contract nor shall it excuse the Contractor from any obligations under the contract.

254

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

In no instance will the Contractor be permitted to commence work on any significant portion of the work for which a Baseline Schedule has not been accepted. If the Contractor fails to submit a Baseline Schedule acceptable to the Department for any portion of the work, the Contractor may be found in violation of Article 1.02.02 of the Standard Specifications "for having failed to prosecute work continuously, diligently and cooperatively in an orderly sequence."

2) Revised Baseline Schedule

If, in the opinion of the Engineer, there have been significant changes to a previously approved baseline schedule or revised baseline schedule, the Engineer may direct the Contractor to prepare a "Revised Baseline Schedule" which fully recognizes and accounts for all major changes to the project. The Revised Baseline Schedule shall be submitted for review and acceptance within twenty (20) calendar days of the Engineer’s request. Revised Baseline Schedules shall be prepared in compliance with this specification in all other respects. The Contractor will provide a narrative to accompany the revised baseline schedule. The narrative shall include:

a) The Contractor’s transmittal letter b) A listing of all changes made to the schedule since the revised baseline schedule c) Identification of unusual conditions or restrictions regarding labor, equipment, or


d) Description of the current critical path e) Changes to the critical path, intermediate and completion milestones f) Description of the near critical path, defined as those activities not on the critical

path with total float less than fifteen (15) calendar days. g) Current or anticipated delays

i Cause of delay ii Impact of delay on other activities, milestones, and completion dates iii Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay

h) Reasons for an early or late scheduled completion date in comparison to the contract completion date

The acceptance of a Revised Baseline Schedule shall in no way waive the requirements of the contract nor shall it excuse the Contractor from any obligations under the contract.

3) Monthly Updates The Contractor shall update and progress the CPM schedule through the last day of each month (the Data Date is the 1st day of the month). Updating and progressing the CPM schedule shall be completed and submitted by the fifth (5th) business day each month. Except as otherwise authorized by the Engineer, monthly submissions received after the due date are considered late.

255

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

The Project ID shall be “0139-YYMMDD”, where YY is the two digit year, MM is the two digit month, and DD is the two digit day, and where the date represents the Data Date (example – Data Date is July 16, 2011, therefore Project ID is 0139-110716). The Contractor shall create a copy of the previous monthly update schedule for the purpose of updating and progressing it. The schedule shall be updated to show the work actually accomplished during the preceding month, the actual time consumed for each activity, and the estimated time remaining for any activity that has been started but not completed. The updating of the percent complete and the remaining duration of any activity shall be independent functions; program features that calculate one of these parameters from the other shall be disabled. Out of sequence progress (if applicable) shall be scheduled utilizing Retained Logic, not Progress Override or Actual Dates. All “Out of Sequence” activities shall be corrected to reflect the current construction operations. All project & subproject activities shall be supplemented with crew allocation information as previously described herein. The monthly update shall include revisions to the schedule based on review comments by the Engineer or as necessitated by revisions to the project, which have been directed by the Engineer during the month preceding the update. Similarly, any changes to the schedule due to Contractor influences shall also be included within the schedule. All changes (i.e. duration changes, logic changes, new logic, new or modified activities, changes in work sequence, etc) shall be recorded and a note added to the activity notebook. The record shall include at a minimum, the date and reason for the change, and description of the change. The Engineer reserves the right to accept or reject any such changes. The Contractor will provide a narrative to accompany the monthly update. The narrative shall include:

a) The Contractor’s transmittal letter b) A discussion of work completed during the period c) A listing of all changes made to the schedule since the prior monthly update d) Identification of unusual conditions or restrictions regarding labor, equipment, or


e) Description of the current critical path f) Changes to the critical path, intermediate and completion milestones g) Description of the near critical path, defined as those activities not on the critical

path with total float less than fifteen (15) calendar days. h) Description of problem areas i) Current or anticipated delays

i Cause of delay ii Impact of delay on other activities, milestones, and completion dates iii Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay

j) Pending items and status thereof: i Permits ii Time adjustments iii Non-compliance notices

256

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

k) Reasons for an early or late scheduled completion date in comparison to the contract completion date

4) Two Week Look Ahead Schedules

The Contractor shall be required to produce and submit to the Engineer a biweekly schedule, to be updated and submitted the first business day of each week. Except as otherwise authorized by the Engineer, submissions received after the due date are considered late. This short-term schedule must be submitted in electronic format (i.e. .pdf, .xls, .doc, etc.) and shall clearly indicate all work planned for the two-week period. The short-term schedule should be of sufficient detail to identify specific work crew activities by location. Gantt Charts, reports, and the XER backup file are not required for the Two Week Look Ahead submission.

5) Time Impact Analysis The Contractor shall submit a written time impact analysis (TIA) to the Engineer when the Contractor or Engineer considers that a major change may impact the critical path or contract progress. A change may be considered of major nature if the estimated time required or actually used for an activity or the network logic is varied from the Baseline Schedule to a degree that there is a reasonable doubt as to the effect on the contract completion date, intermediate milestone dates, or stage completion dates. Changes that affect activities with adequate float time shall be considered a major change when their cumulative effect could extend the contract completion date. The TIA shall illustrate the impact of each change on the current scheduled stage or project completion date or other internal milestone, as appropriate. The analysis shall use the schedule update that has a data date closest to and prior to the event. If the Engineer determines that the schedule update used does not appropriately represent the conditions prior to the event, the schedule shall be progressed to the day before the event being analyzed. The TIA shall include an impact schedule developed from incorporating the event into the schedule by adding or deleting activities, or by changing durations or logic of existing activities. Each TIA shall include a Fragmentary Network (fragnet) demonstrating how the Contractor proposes to incorporate the impact into the project schedule. A fragnet is defined as the sequence of new activities and/or activity revisions, logic or resource changes that are proposed to be added to the existing schedule to demonstrate the influence of impacts to the schedule. The fragnet shall identify the predecessors to the new activities and demonstrate the impacts to successor activities. The TIA shall include a narrative report describing the effects of the new activities and relationships to interim and contract completion dates. The Contractor shall submit a TIA within fifteen (15) working days of receiving a written request for a TIA from the Engineer. The Engineer will withhold remaining payment on the Project Coordinator Item if a TIA is requested by the Engineer and not submitted by the Contractor within fifteen (15) working days. The Project Coordinator Item payment will resume on the next estimate after the requested TIA is submitted. The Contractor shall allow the Engineer thirty (30) calendar days after receipt to approve or reject the submitted TIA.

257

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

All approved TIA schedule changes shall be incorporated on the next monthly schedule update and shall be submitted for approval as a Revised Baseline Schedule. If the TIA submitted by the Contractor is rejected, the Contractor shall meet with the Engineer to discuss and resolve issues related to the TIA. If an agreement is not reached, the Contractor shall not show unapproved changes related to the TIA in subsequent schedule updates. Compensation for the submission of any TIA is included in the per month cost for the services of the Project Coordinator.

6) Recovery Schedules If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Monthly Update indicates that the Contractor has fallen behind schedule, or that a revision in sequence of operations may be necessary for any other reason, the Contractor shall within five (5) business days of receiving a written request to perform “Recovery” from the Engineer, immediately institute all necessary steps to improve his progress and shall submit such revised network diagrams, tabulations, operational plans and any supplementary information, as may be deemed necessary by the Engineer, to demonstrate the manner in which an acceptable rate of progress will be regained.

Should the Contractor’s “Recovery” efforts not demonstrate an ability to regain an acceptable rate of progress, the Engineer shall require the development of a “Recovery Schedule”. The Recovery Schedule is to be supplemented with resource allocations for every task activity and include time-scaled resource histograms. The resource allocations shall be shown to a level of detail that facilitates report generation based on labor crafts and equipment classes for the Contractor and subcontractors. The Contractor shall use average composite crews to display the labor loading of onsite construction activities. The Contractor shall optimize and level labor to reflect a reasonable plan for accomplishing the work of the contract and to assure that resources are not over allocated in multiple concurrent activities. The time-scaled resource histograms shall show labor crafts and equipment classes to be utilized on the contract. The Contractor shall submit a Recovery Schedule within fifteen (15) business days of receiving a written request for the Recovery Schedule from the Engineer. In addition to required submittals the “Recovery Schedule” submission will also include a narrative meeting the requirements of the monthly update, a time-scaled resource histogram and a Monthly Resources Loading Summary Report (tabular) indicating the peak number of resources required for each activity. The Engineer may review the recovery schedule resource allocations using Means Productivity Standards or equivalent to determine if the schedule is practicable. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to whether the Recovery Schedule is sufficiently detailed. Upon acceptance of this Recovery Schedule, it shall be designated a "Revised Baseline Schedule".

258

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

Compensation for the submission of any Recovery Schedule is included in the per month cost for the services of the Project Coordinator. No additional compensation will be allowed for resource loading the schedule.

7) As-Built Schedule (Final) Within thirty (30) calendar days of completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit an "As-Built Schedule" showing the actual progress of all work. The Contractor shall provide a written certificate with this submittal signed by the Contractor’s Project Manager and an officer of the company stating, “To my knowledge and belief, the enclosed final update schedule reflects the actual start and finish dates of the actual activities for the project contained herein.” An officer of the company may delegate in writing the authority to sign the certificate to a responsible manager.

Schedule Review and Evaluation Meetings: The Contractor, represented by the Project Coordinator and/or the Consultant, shall participate with the Engineer, at the Engineer’s request, in the review and evaluation of the Initial Baseline Schedule, Baseline Schedule, Revised Baseline Schedule, and Recovery Schedule submittals. Any and all revisions made necessary as a result of this review shall be made by the Contractor and a revised Initial Baseline Schedule, Baseline Schedule, Revised Baseline Schedule, or Recovery Schedule submitted within ten (10) business days of the date of the meeting. Any further revisions required thereafter shall also be submitted for acceptance within (10) business days of the request for revisions by the Engineer. The Contractor, represented by the Project Coordinator and/or the Consultant, shall participate with the Engineer, at the Engineer’s request, in the review and evaluation of each Monthly CPM Schedule Update. Items of discussion will include, but are not limited to, near term schedule activities, long-term schedule issues, and any relevant technical issues that are schedule related. Computer Hardware: The Contractor shall provide the following equipment with all the required maintenance, repairs (to include labor and parts), and supplies (paper and toner cartridges) throughout the contract life. The Engineer reserves the right to expand or relax the specification to adapt the hardware limitations and availability. The Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer and the following hardware, including all instructions and manuals: HP Business LaserJet 5550n Printer (Minimum or equivalent)

Resolution – 600x600 DPI Media Sizes: from 3x5 to 12.05x18.5 Printer cable – 10 ft

All repairs must be performed within 24 hours. If the repairs require more than 24 hours then a replacement must be provided. Method of Measurement: Within ten (10) calendar days of the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a cost breakdown of his lump sum bid price. The submission must include substantiation showing that the costs breakdown submitted are

259

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

reasonable based on the Contractor's lump sum bid. The cost breakdown shall be in accordance with the following payment schedule: 1) The development cost to prepare the Baseline Schedule in accordance with these

specifications. Development costs shall not exceed 20% of the total cost of the item and shall include costs to maintain and submit all monthly updates prior to acceptance of the Baseline Schedule and to furnish and install all specified hardware.

2) The submission and certification of the As-Built Schedule in accordance with these

specifications. The submission and certification costs shall be no less than 2% of the total cost of the item.

3) The cost to provide the services of the Project Coordinator, including costs to prepare and

submit the Monthly Updates; furnish and submit any Revised Baseline or Recovery Schedules; furnish and submit Two Week Look Ahead Schedules and maintenance of and supplies for the specified hardware noted above. A per month cost will be derived by taking this cost divided by the number of contract months remaining from the date of acceptance of the Baseline Schedule.

Upon approval of the payment schedule by the Engineer, payments for work performed will be made as follows: 1) Upon acceptance of the Baseline Schedule by the Engineer, the lump sum development cost

from the payment schedule will be certified for payment.

2) Upon receipt of each Monthly CPM Schedule Update, 100% of the per month cost for the

services of the Project Coordinator will be certified for payment. 3) Upon receipt of the As-Built Schedule (Final), the lump sum development cost from the

payment schedule will be certified for payment. Basis of Payment: This service will be paid for at the contract lump sum price for "Project Coordinator" complete, which price shall include the preparation and submission of all schedules, updates, and submittals, and the furnishing, maintenance, and supply costs for all required hardware as noted above. The lump sum price will be certified for payment as described in "Method of Measurement" subject to the following conditions: 1) Any month where the Monthly CPM Schedule Update is submitted late, without

authorization from the Engineer, will result in the following actions:

a) 2.5% of the monthly payment estimate for the contract or $25,000, whichever is greater, shall be retained until such time as the Contractor submits all required schedules and reports.

b) The payment, as described in “Method of Measurement”, shall be reduced by 6.5% per

calendar day for each day the schedule has been submitted late.

260

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969000A

2) Any week where the Two Week Look Ahead Schedule is submitted late, without authorization from the Engineer, will result in a 2% per day reduction of the entire monthly project coordinator payment for each day the schedule has been submitted late, up to a maximum of five (5) days (or 10%) per Two Week Look Ahead Schedule.

3) Failure of the Contractor to submit a Baseline Schedule or Revised Baseline Schedule for any

portion of the work in accordance with this specification may result in the withholding of all contract payments until the schedule is submitted to, and accepted by, the Engineer.

4) In the event the project extends beyond the original completion date by more than thirty (30)

calendar days, and a time extension is granted to the Contractor, the Department may require additional CPM updates which will be paid at the per month cost for the services of the Project Coordinator.

Pay Item Pay Unit Project Coordinator L.S.

261

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969050A

ITEM #0969050A – DOCUMENT CONTROL SPECIALIST

Description: Under this item the Contractor shall furnish the services of one of his administrative employees, entitled Document Control Specialist who will ensure that the Contractor and all other parties as designated by the Engineer will prepare, status, electronically file and send all project correspondence and drawings utilizing a document control system as established and maintained by the Department. The primary function of the document control system is to ensure timely processing of all contract documentation in coordination with the project schedule. This document control system will also provide uniform project information and reporting. The Document Control Specialist shall be designated by name, in writing with a resume of their qualifications, within five (5) calendar days of the award of the Contract and shall not be changed without prior written notice to the Department.

The Document Control Specialist shall be knowledgeable of the status of all contract documentation aspects of the work throughout the length of the Contract. The Contractor shall prepare and maintain the contract documentation utilizing an Extranet Site furnished by the Department. The document control system will be physically located in a secure location designated by the Department. The Contractor will directly access the document control system via the internet. The Department will provide the Contractor access to the Extranet Site and a common file server. All references to the use of the Extranet Site and the common file server below shall refer to the Department’s shared document control system as described above. All information that resides on the shared document control system shall become the sole property of the Department. The minimum lump sum bid for this item shall be $90,000 (ninety thousand dollars). Failure of the Contractor to bid at least the minimum amount will result in the Department adjusting the Contractor’s bid to include the minimum bid amount for this item.

Documentation Requirements: All correspondence for the project, with the exception of letters, shall be distributed, and controlled via e-mail and the use of the Extranet Site including, but not limited to: transmittals, meeting minutes, requests for information (RFI’s), requests for change (RFC’s), submittals, answers, reports, agendas, field memos, notices, and punch lists. All common correspondence files shall be stored within the Extranet Site/common file server, including any and all file attachments. Submittals, including shop drawings, working drawings, catalog cuts, material certifications, and all documentation required by contract, shall be submitted electronically via e-mail and uploaded to the Extranet Site. The Contractor is responsible to coordinate the overall creation and submission of all project documentation to meet the requirements of the project schedule and specifications. The Contractor is required to be able to make electronic submittals as well as accept and work with electronic submittals marked “Conforms” or “Conforms as Noted”. The Contractor is encouraged to supply the Department with corporate logos, formats, Sybase Infomaker files, etc. to facilitate the creation and utilization of custom forms and reports.

262

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969050A

The named Document Control Specialist shall be designated as the Submittal Coordinator and will be responsible for maintaining information related to the responsibility, status, elapsed time since submission, held time, start/finish times, and a history of all submittal revisions. A submittal log must be maintained to indicate the latest construction submittals sent and received and the distribution of these drawings to the Department. Each submittal (shop drawing, working drawing, product data, samples, etc) must be individually entered, tracked, and the status maintained, including all revisions. The Contractor is responsible to utilize the latest drawings marked “Conforms” or “Conforms as Noted” as identified in the control system. All revisions are to be logged into the control system, describing each change. All meeting minutes shall be logged into the control system. The Contractor is responsible to utilize meeting minutes and respond (electronically) to meeting minute items assigned to the Contractor. Documents (letters, logs, shop or working drawings, sketches, payrolls, etc) to be transmitted to the Department by the Contractor, for which the Contractor does not have an electronic version, shall be scanned, converted into an Adobe Acrobat PDF format, and uploaded accordingly to the Extranet Site. The document control system shall be available for Contractor use at all times unless system maintenance (i.e. backups, upgrades, etc) is being performed. System maintenance will generally be limited to 10 PM – 6AM, Monday - Friday and at various times on weekends. In the event a Contractor’s authorized user cannot access the control system, the Contractor shall notify the Department’s control system representative. In the event the control system becomes unavailable during normal business hours for an extended period of time, the Contractor may issue correspondence requiring immediate attention by the Department in hard copy format. The hard copy correspondence must be entered into the control system immediately upon becoming available again. Inability by the Contractor to gain access to the document control system for any reason shall not be grounds for claim. The use of the database is not required for proprietary cost and contract information.

The Department shall be allocated a minimum of ten (10) calendar days (using a 7-day calendar, exclusive of holidays) for review and response to each RFI submitted. RFI’s requiring information from outside agencies shall be allocated twenty-one (21) days (using a 7-day calendar, exclusive of holidays). The Department shall be allocated a minimum of thirty (30) calendar days (using a 7-day calendar, exclusive of holidays) for review and response to each RFC submitted. RFC’s requiring information from outside agencies shall be allocated sixty (60) days (using a 7-day calendar, exclusive of holidays). The Department reserves the right to reject any RFC submitted in the form of an RFI for the purpose of reducing the Department’s review and response time. Such documents will not be considered for review by the Department and will be returned to the Contractor for resubmission.

263

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969050A

Review and response time for such document will commence upon resubmission in the correct format. The Department shall be allocated a minimum of twenty-one (21) calendar days (using a 7-day calendar, exclusive of holidays) for review and approval of each submittal, unless specified otherwise within the contract documents. Any submittals requiring approval by an outside Agency (ConnDEP, Metro-North Railroad (MNR), etc.) shall be allocated a minimum of sixty (60) calendar days (using a 7-day calendar, exclusive of holidays). Any submittals requiring approval by FM Global or the Commissioning Agent shall be allocated a minimum of twenty-eight (28) calendar days (using a 7-day calendar, exclusive of holidays). (Refer to “NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR – METRO-NORTH RAILROAD SUBMITTALS”, for Contractor submittals required by this agency.) A schedule of submittals shall be submitted to The Department for review prior to the start of construction. These durations are a MINIMUM, and will likely increase with the number of outstanding submittals in The Department’s possession. Therefore, whenever multiple Contractor submittals are under review by the Department, the Contractor shall prioritize the submittals and notify the Department thereof. The submittal schedule must be submitted early for review as a subset of the baseline schedule. The Department shall not be held responsible for any delay associated with the approval or rejection of any substitution or other revisions proposed by the Contractor. Submittal and review activities are required in the Project Schedule per Item No. 0969000A, Project Coordinator. Submittal activities must be coordinated between the Project Coordinator and Document Control Specialist such that submittal information common to both the project schedule and the document control system (required and actual dates, sequence of submission, resubmissions if required) correspond with one another. All resubmissions shall be numbered with the original submittal number but designated a new revision number. All resubmissions shall be logged into the control system to properly calculate the entire duration required for the submittal process from the original submission date to final approval to indicate total days to process the submittal through all review cycles. Coordination of submittals is required for same work and interfacing work so that one submittal will not delay another. Refer to the following Notices to Contractor for additional submittal requirements: • Early Submittals • Submittals • Metro-North Railroad Submittals • Closeout Documents The submittal log will be developed according to the following format: Submittal Package The Package name shall be the seven digit Item Number. The Package Title shall be the corresponding Item Name. Instances where contract items require an extensive number of submittals (i.e. rebar, structural steel, etc), packages shall be further separated by structure components or location. For example:

264

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969050A

Package Title 0602006-01 Deformed Steel Bars – Epoxy Coated / Abutment 2 0602006-02 Deformed Steel Bars – Epoxy Coated / PN-13 0602006-03 Deformed Steel Bars – Epoxy Coated / PN-14 Instances where a submittal requires review by more then one department or agency (e.g. requiring both ConnDOT and MNR reviews), the multiple reviewers option must be checked so that the individual reviewers can be designated, with each receiving a copy of the submittal for review. The Package status shall initially be “Unsubmitted”. Upon submission of any submittal within the package, the status should be changed to “Open”. Upon receipt of all final review comments for all package submittals, the status should be changed to “Closed”. Submittal Item All submittal items, as required by contract, must be individually entered, including shop & working drawings, product data, samples, etc. All submittals shall be associated with and generated within a specific package. The submittal number shall be the package name followed by a three digit incremental number (i.e. 1205201-01-001, 0602006-03-001). The Title shall be a clear description of the submittal item. In the case of a drawing submittal, the title shall be the exact name of the drawing and the drawing number shall be entered in the Details section. The appropriate Category and Type shall then be selected. The Contractor shall examine and check each submittal for accuracy, completeness, coordination with related submittals and compliance with the Contract before it is transmitted to the Designer for review. The Contractor shall sign and submit the Submittal Register Form (sample attached to this section and available electronically on the Extranet Site) with each submittal which includes the following statement: “Having reviewed this submittal, I certify that it is complete, accurate, coordinated in all aspects of the item being submitted and conforms to the requirements of the Contract in all respects, including all Federal requirements such as “Buy America”, except as otherwise noted.” By reviewing and certifying each submittal, the Contractor represents that he has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, and has checked and coordinated information contained within such submittals with requirements of the Work and the Contract. Shop drawings submitted without this signed statement will be rejected immediately and returned to the Contractor. Shop drawings shall be submitted in Adobe Acrobat PDF Package format. Each drawing will be included as a separate file within the package and named in kind with the drawing number. The PDF package shall be listed and uploaded to the Extranet Site to the first submittal. The drawings shall be listed individually thereafter. Working drawings shall be submitted in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. The PDF package shall be listed and uploaded to the Extranet Site to the first submittal. The drawings shall be listed individually thereafter.

265

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969050A

Electronic submittal attachments shall be named in kind with the submittal to which they are attached and include the revision number (ie. Submittal 0602006-03-001 would have a PDF attachment named 0602006-03-001-1.pdf). Submittal of samples for review and approval by the Designer shall be submitted using an e-mail transmittal. The Contractor shall ship the quantity of physical samples required by the contract to the Designer with the hard copy of the transmittal. The Designer shall generate the return e-mail transmittal (indicating the sample’s review status as to Conforms, Conforms as Noted, Revise and Resubmit, Rejected, or No Action Required) and transmit it to the Contractor. The Designer shall retain one set of samples marked “Conforms” or “Conforms as Noted”, transmit one set of same to the Engineer, and transmit the remaining sets of same to the Contractor. Submittals requiring a signature by a licensed engineer or other party shall be digitally signed utilizing a digital ID obtained from an Adobe partner Certified Document Service (CDS) provider (see adobe.com for the list of CDS providers). Required Start & Expected Finish shall represent the date range for the review process. Required Start shall be the date the submittal is issued by the Contractor for review. Expected Finish shall be the completion date for the review cycle (either 21 or 60 days later, as appropriate). Workflow must be completed for each submittal. Received From shall be the party from which the submittal originated (prime contractor, subcontractor, fabricator, vendor, etc). Sent To and Returned By shall be the primary reviewer as designated by the contract documents. Forwarded To shall be the Contractor’s designated submittal coordinator. Review cycles will be numbered 001, 002, 003, etc. according to the number of resubmissions. Distributions (submittal recipients) must be listed on the transmittal. Hard copies of all submittals marked “Conforms” or “Conforms as Noted” shall be transmitted within 5 working days as follows:

# of Copies Send To: 3 ConnDOT District Office 3 Metro North Railroad 1 Commissioning Agent (if reviewed) 1 State Building Official (if needed)

The Contractor shall submit hard copies of all letters signed in ink with any attachments to the addressee (original) and the ConnDOT District Office (copies) for their records. Scans of signed letters and their attachments shall be stored on the Extranet by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit wet stamped hard copies of all conformed shop drawings requiring the signature of a professional engineer (eg, steel bar joists, etc.) to the Department to transmit to the State Building Officials for their records. Scanned copies of these conformed shop submittals or other

266

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969050A

electronic copies will be stored by the Contractor on the Extranet Site. The Contractor shall submit hard copies and electronic copies of Maintenance Manuals and Warranties. Submittal Forecast In order to facilitate the Department’s review of the large number of submittals anticipated for this project, the Contractor is to provide a submittal schedule. The submittal schedule will be created and maintained on the Extranet Site as follows: A submittal package must be created for each contract item requiring a submittal (note that large submittal items must be broken out as prescribed above). Within each package, a single submittal, numbered 001, will be generated from the submittal package which will be utilized to approximate when submittals for that package will be submitted for review. At a minimum, the submittal Number, Title, Status, Required Start, and Required Finish must be entered, where the Status is “Unsubmitted” and the Required Start and Required Finish represents the review period for all submittals within this package. The Required Start and Required Finish dates must be coordinated with the project CPM schedule. Notification Requirements: E-mail copies of transmittals for all project related documents (including, but not limited to submittals, working drawings, samples, letters, RFIs, RFCs, and responses to said items) shall also be delivered to the Department, the Metro North Railroad, the Engineer, the Commissioning Agent (if reviewed), United Illuminating (if reviewed), the State Building Official (if required) and Shaw E&I. Updates to the submittal log (prepared by the Contractor) shall be distributed to the Department, the Metro North Railroad, the Engineer, and Shaw E&I on a daily basis. Documentation Control System Access Requirements: Within five (5) days of Contract Award, the Contractor shall designate, in writing, up to five (5) named Contractor personnel, to be approved and authorized by the Engineer to access the document control system. The Contractor shall designate one of the five authorized personnel to be the Document Control Specialist and act as the document control system contact person for the Contractor. That person shall be experienced and trained in the use of the Extranet Site. Upon receipt of the request and approval thereof, the Department will issue a username and password to each of the authorized Contractor personnel. The Contractor will ensure that only authorized Contractor personnel access and utilize the control system in a responsible, non-destructive manner. The Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to prevent the disclosure of access information for unauthorized use of the control system. The Department, at its discretion, may revoke access authorization from any user if it is determined that the user: a) has used the control system for any other reason then is intended by this specification; b) is no longer in the Contractor’s employ or associated with the project or c) has disclosed their access authorization for use by another person or party for any reason. The Contractor is responsible to ensure their authorized users have access to the public internet from a computer system running any currently supported Microsoft Windows Operating System and Microsoft Internet Explorer Web Browser with a minimum Cipher Strength of 128 bit, version 5.5, 6.0, or 7.0. Minimum modem speed shall be 56K. The Contractor is responsible to ensure that anti-virus software is installed and maintained on any computer accessing the Department’s document control system. Additionally, it is the

267

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969050A

Contractor’s sole responsibility to maintain a compatible software system. Compatibility is defined as the ability to send and receive documents in a format viewable by the Department. The Contractor must provide valid individual email addresses for each authorized user to the Department based upon a MAPI compliant email system, such as Microsoft Outlook or Exchange. Access Request Requirements: Contractor personnel accessing the document control system shall provide the following information for approval and access to the Extranet Site:

Company Name Title E-mail Address Contact Phone Number

Submittals: Within thirty (30) calendar days after award, the Submittal Coordinator shall prepare, in accordance with all requirements of this specification, and submit for review and acceptance, a Submittal Forecast and shall have the following requirements attached:

Submittal Packages Summary Report Submittal Bar Chart Report

Method of Measurement: Within ten (10) calendar days of the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a cost breakdown of his lump sum bid price. The submission must include substantiation showing that the costs breakdown submitted are reasonable based on the Contractor's lump sum bid. The cost breakdown shall be in accordance with the following payment schedule: 1) The cost to successfully complete all preparation and training to utilize the document control

system in accordance with these specifications. The preparation and training costs shall not exceed 5% of the total cost of the item and shall include costs to establish customized forms or reports, back enter and scan all contract documentation prior to the access authorization, and to furnish and install all specified hardware.

2) The development cost to prepare the Submittal Forecast in accordance with these

specifications shall not exceed 5% of the total cost of the item. Payment for this work will be made upon acceptance of the Submittal Forecast by the Engineer.

The cost to provide services of the Document Control Specialist, including costs to maintain the Submittal Forecast; Coordinating the Document Control System submittal information with the CPM Schedule submissions; preparing, submitting, utilizing, maintaining, coordinating and updating document control system items as required by all Contractor personnel with access rights to the system Shall be paid as a per month cost and shall be derived by taking this cost divided by the number of contract months.

268

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969050A

Basis of Payment: This service shall be paid for at the contract lump sum price for "Document Control Specialist" complete, which price shall include the training, preparation, statusing, electronically scanning, filing, and sending all project correspondence, and the furnishing, maintenance, and supply costs for all required hardware, software, and services as noted above in the utilization of the document control system as established and maintained by the Department. The lump sum price will be certified for payment as described in "Method of Measurement" subject to the following conditions: 1) Failure by the Contractor to utilize and regularly update the Extranet Site database in a

manner acceptable to the Department or failure to utilize the common file server for the storage of all project related files may result in the withholding of all contract payments until such time as all specification requirements have been satisfied. Failure by the designated Document Control Specialist to update submittal statuses on a regular basis shall result in the replacement of the Document Control Special at the Engineer’s request. Additionally, the Contractor may be found in violation of Article 1.02.02 of the Standard Specifications "for having failed to prosecute work continuously, diligently and cooperatively in an orderly sequence".

2) In the event the project extends beyond the original completion date by more than thirty (30) calendar days, and a time extension is granted to the Contractor, the Department may require the continued utilization of the Document Control System which shall be paid at the per month cost for the services of the Document Control Specialist.

Pay Item Pay Unit Document Control Specialist L.S.

269

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969050A

SUBMITTAL REGISTER FORM

The use of this Submittal Register Form is required for all submittals Project Name: NEW HAVEN RAIL YARD – EAST END CONNECTOR State Project No. 301-0182 Connecticut Department of Transportation Design Engineer: PB Americas Contractor: ________________________________________________________________________

Address: _________________________________________________________________________

Telephone No.: ___________________________________________________________________

Subcontractor: ______________________________________________________________________

Address: _________________________________________________________________________

Telephone No.: ___________________________________________________________________

Submittal Number: _________________________________________________________________ Submittal Title: ____________________________________________________________________ Specification Section and Paragraph Number: ____________________________________________ Contract Drawing and Detail Reference: ________________________________________________ Date of Initial Submittal: ____________________________________________________________ Date of this Submittal: ______________________________________________________________ CPM Activity Number: ______________________________________________________________ This Submittal Prepared By: __________________________________________________________ Having reviewed this submittal, I certify that it is complete, accurate, coordinated in all aspects of the item being submitted and conforms to the requirements of the Contract in all respects, including all Federal requirements such as “Buy America” except as otherwise noted.

By: __________________________________ Signature

__________________________________ Printed or Typed Name

__________________________________ Title

__________________________________ Date

270

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969051A

ITEM #0969051A - CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM Description: Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish the services of one of its management staff to serve as Quality Control Manager (QCM) for the project. The Contractor shall also establish, maintain, and implement a written Quality Control Program tailored to the complexity and scope of the work. The program shall cover, as a minimum, the following elements: Organization, Document Control, Design Control, Procurement Control, Control of Subcontractors, Special Process Control, Inspection, Non-Conforming Items, and Records. The Quality Control Program shall identify and list critical, major, and minor items, which shall be used to differentiate the level of reporting, inspection, and attention throughout the process. The Quality Control Program and the resume of the Quality Control Manager shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval of the Department prior to commencement of activities. The Program shall be designed to monitor and document the quality of the Contractor’s services, with particular emphasis on the following basic principles:

- Satisfaction of contractual requirements - Construction conformance with design

The Contractor must document its method of minimizing and reducing errors in the work, and include a formalized identification and resolution of those errors which do occur. Contractor personnel performing Quality Control Program activities shall be experienced and qualified and adhere to the details of the Program. The Engineer reserves the right to audit this Program on behalf of the Department. The additional Contractor Quality Control requirements described in this section are to be used in conjunction with the Department’s Standard Specifications Form 816 “Division I General Provisions.” The Quality Control Program is neither intended to relieve the Contractor from its responsibility under the Contract, nor to replace the external inspections of the work carried out by, or on behalf of, the Engineer. The minimum lump sum bid for this item shall be $610,000 (six hundred ten thousand dollars). Failure of the Contractor to bid at least the minimum amount will result in the Department adjusting the Contractor’s bid to the minimum bid amount for this item. Construction Methods: 1. Organization This section shall describe the Contractor’s organization, including reporting relationships within and external to the Contractor’s organization. Duties and responsibilities within the said organization shall be stated. The name of the QCM shall be clearly stated and this individual shall report directly to upper management, independent of manufacturing/construction. The

271

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969051A

QCM must be an individual with demonstrated experience implementing a QC program and supervising inspectors. This experience shall include at least 7 years of Quality Control (QC) background in any combination of the following areas:

Field inspection experience Construction phase experience relevant to the type of work and the scope

of the project Previous experience as a Quality Control Professional Substitutions allowed – 4 years for Bachelors Degree in CE, CE Tech.,

Construction Management, or Construction Engineering; (2 years for Associates Degree in a related field); 4 years for NICET IV certification; (2 years for a NICET III certification)

In addition, the QCM shall have the following special experience:

Prior supervisory experience Documented training in quality control principles

The Contractor shall submit the resume of their proposed QCM for acceptance by the Engineer. If, for any reason, the QCM is replaced, the resume of the proposed replacement QCM shall be submitted and accepted by the Engineer prior to the replacement taking effect. An organizational chart shall be prepared to graphically depict the Contractor’s organizational structure and major reporting lines and relationships. 2. Document Control This section shall describe the methods used by the Contractor and the QCM to control the use of the various design documents, shop drawings, procedures, etc. to assure that only the latest reviewed documents are used and are distributed to the individuals performing the Work. Recall of documents which have been superseded or revised shall be implemented. The Contractor shall describe the process used to determine what submittals are required by the Contract and the system used to track these submittals and their current status. 3. Design Control This section shall describe how the Contractor and the QCM controls any Design process (i.e. working and shop drawings), for which it is responsible. This should include the selection of design input data; checking for correctness, completeness, compatibility and format, reviewing and approving design output documents. 4. Procurement Control This section shall describe the methods used by the Contractor and the QCM to assure that all materials/equipment purchased for the work are as specified. Included shall be provisions for the

272

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969051A

review of purchase documents to assure that correct details have been specified, including specification, grade, type, color, country of origin or other aspects as required by specifications and drawings. The Contractor shall describe receiving inspection activities performed, to determine that the correct material/equipment has been delivered. This activity should be documented on the attached “Material Receiving Inspection Report” and include documentation of inspections performed and review of material test reports, certificates of conformance or other documentation required by the Contractor. A list of items requiring a Materials Certificate and/or Material Certified Test Report will be developed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The “Material Receiving Inspection Report” will include the Materials Certificate and/or Material Certified Test Report for all these items. As a minimum, receiving inspections will be performed on the following materials:

Materials requiring a Certificate of Compliance Source Controlled Material not inspected at the manufacturer Job Controlled Materials (other than concrete, bituminous and soils) which

require tracking for testing or payment purposes Equipment

After completion of receiving inspection activities, the form, along with associated documents, should be submitted to the Engineer. 5. Control of Subcontractors, Fabricators and Suppliers This section shall describe the methods used by the Contractor and the QCM to assure that all the applicable requirements of the Contract are passed on to the subcontractor. Included in this section will be the methods used by the Contractor and the QCM to monitor and control the quality of the work performed by subcontractors and obtain the required quality records. For fabrication under the terms of the Contract, the Contractor must notify the Engineer as to the source of supply and place of fabrication, including component parts. In order to assign inspection personnel, it will be necessary that the notification include the date of beginning of fabrication and the date the material is to be delivered to the project. Properly documented mill test reports must be furnished by suppliers. The Contractor must be aware that the governing specifications prohibit the start of fabrication prior to the submission and review of shop drawings. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to notify all subcontractors, fabricators, suppliers, and lower tier subcontractors of the specification requirements of the various Contract Documents and that they must also have a Quality Control Program which complies with this specification. Any material requiring inspection which is fabricated without notification or approval shall not be incorporated into the work.

273

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969051A

6. Inspection This section shall describe how the Contractor and the QCM will assure that the specified quality of materials and workmanship has been achieved. The Contractor’s program is not related to any inspection carried out by the Engineer on behalf of the Department. Inspection will include the identification and tracking of the quality characteristics (metrics) used to ascertain the level of quality of materials and workmanship. The Contractor is to describe the system used to assure that the necessary quality is achieved by a system of checks, inspections, or surveillances, or a combination of such methods, to assure that departures from requirements will be prevented or detected in a timely manner. The Contractor shall have QC Inspectors that document compliance with contractual requirements. The inspection forms provided by the QCM shall be used and the signature of the QCM will be obtained when noted on the forms. The Contractor shall describe the methods used to document this activity. In addition to providing inspection forms, the contractor will make inspection results available electronically to the Engineer within 48 hours of an inspection. The electronic format shall be relational database, the structure of which shall provide, at all times, for ready access to any and all inspection results for the duration of the entire project, and shall be modified only with the approval of the Engineer. The relational database shall be used to generate control charts and detailed and summary reports for each quality characteristic used to establish the quality of critical and major items, and summary reports for minor items, and shall include fields that allow for the identification of project, date, lot, and disposition of the material or activity. The Quality Control Program will identify and submit the reporting requirements for each item based on its criticality, and these reporting requirements will be approved by the Engineer. For items where control charts are used, the Contractor will include and apply conformance limits and document action items undertaken to correct out-of-conformance processes identified in the control charts. These items shall be summarized and reported along with the charts to the Engineer monthly as part of the reporting element requirements of the approved Quality Control Program. 7. Special Process Control This section shall describe the measures used to assure that any special process such as but not limited to: welding, high strength bolting, nondestructive examination, critical coatings, surveys, control of critical tolerances, etc., are controlled by procedures and the results are properly documented. In addition, where required by specification, the process, personnel, and equipment shall be qualified prior to the work activity; the Contractor shall describe the method used to verify, document and track these requirements. 8. Non-Conforming Items This section shall describe the methods to be employed when any work is found not to meet specifications, and the means to be implemented to document the items and provide resolution, such as rework, repair, or use as-is. The provisions for Department or Engineer participation in

274

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969051A

such resolution when disposition decisions are beyond the competence or authority of the Contractor shall be included. 9. Records This section shall describe how various records generated by the Contractor are originated and maintained, received, filed, protected, and authenticated. Quality Records required for submittal to the Engineer shall be described. Record retention of 5 years after acceptance of the Contract shall be documented. 10. Reporting Each month on a date agreeable to the Engineer, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a summary report of the Quality Control activities for the prior month. The report shall include a narrative discussion for the major quality control elements described above as well as an evaluation of the overall quality program for the project. Method of Measurement: Within forty (40) calendar days of the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a cost breakdown of his lump sum bid price. The submission must include substantiation showing that the cost breakdowns submitted are reasonable based on the Contractor’s lump sum bid. The cost breakdown shall be in accordance with the following payment schedule:

1. The development costs to prepare the Quality Control Program shall not exceed 20% of the total cost of the item.

2. The cost to provide the services of the Quality Control Manager and implement the

Quality Control Program, including costs for all inspections, monitoring, inventory, daily logs, reports, meetings, record keeping databases, and all materials, equipment, labor and work incidental of this service shall be paid as a per month cost and shall be derived by taking this cost divided by the number of contract months.

Upon approval of the payment schedule by the Engineer, payments for work performed will be made as follows:

1. Upon receipt of the monthly report of the Quality Control activities, the per-month cost for “Contractor Quality Control Program” will be certified for payment.

2. Upon acceptance of the Quality Control Program, the lump sum development cost

from the payment schedule will be certified for payment.

275

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969051A

Basis of Payment:

This service shall be paid for at the contract lump sum price for “Contractor Quality Control Program” complete, which price shall include all inspections, monitoring, inventory, daily logs, reports, meetings, record keeping, and all materials, equipment, labor and work incidental of this service. The lump sum price will be certified for payment as described in “Method of Measurement” subject to the following conditions:

1. Failure of the Contractor to provide a Quality Control Manager or Quality Control Program as required by this specification will result in a Five (5) percent reduction to the monthly payment for each work shift that is not covered as required by this specification. A work shift is defined as any eight (8) hour period, or any portion thereof. The total deduct for any calendar month may exceed the monthly payment for the item if the Contractor fails to provide the required services.

2. Failure by the Contractor to comply with the requirements of this specification shall result in the replacement of the Quality Control Manager at the Engineer’s request. Additionally, the Contractor may be found in violation of Article 1.02.02 of the Standard Specifications “for having failed to prosecute work continuously, diligently and cooperatively in an orderly sequence”.

3. Only one monthly payment will be made for each calendar month regardless of the number of personnel required to complete the specified work.

4. In the event the project extends beyond the original completion date by more than thirty (30) calendar days, and a time extension is granted to the Contractor, the Department may require the continuation of the “Contractor Quality Control Program” which shall be paid at the per-month cost for “Contractor Quality Control Program”.

Pay Item Pay Unit Contractor Quality Control Program L.S.

276

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0969051A

MATERIAL RECEIVING INSPECTION REPORT

CONTRACT NO: CONTRACTOR: DATE: REPORT NO:

MATERIAL RECEIVED:

DESCRIPTION:

QUANTITY:

SUBMITTAL NO:

ACTIVITY NO:

MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER:

RECEIVING INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS

REQUIREMENTS REQ’D REC’D SAT UNSAT REQUIREMENTS SAT UNSAT N/A

MATERIAL CERTS.

PHYSICAL CONDITION

CERT. OF COMPLIANCE

PACKAGING

SPECIAL TEST REPORTS

CLEANLINESS

MANUALS

IDENT./MARKING

OWNER RELEASE FORMS

STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE

MATERIAL COMPLIES WITH CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS? YES NO

COMMENTS:

CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIVE: DATE:

ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE: DATE:

277

Rev. Date 09/14/2016

0301-0182 ITEM #0969064A

ITEM #0969064A - CONSTRUCTION FIELD OFFICE, LARGE

Description:

Under the item included in the bid document, adequate weatherproof office quarters with related furnishings, materials, equipment and other services, shall be provided by the Contractor for the duration of the work, and if necessary, for a close-out period determined by the Engineer. The office, furnishings, materials, equipment, and services are for the exclusive use of CTDOT forces and others who may be engaged to augment CTDOT forces with relation to the Contract. The office quarters shall be located convenient to the work site and installed in accordance with Article 1.08.02. This office shall be separated from any office occupied by the Contractor. Ownership and liability of the office quarters shall remain with the Contractor.

Furnishings/Materials/Supplies/Equipment:

All furnishings, materials, equipment and supplies shall be in like new condition for the purpose intended and require approval of the Engineer.

Office Requirements:

The Contractor shall furnish the office quarters and equipment as described below:

Description \ Office Size Small Med. Large Extra Large

Minimum Sq. Ft. of floor space with a minimum ceiling height of 7 ft.

400 400 1000 2000

Minimum number of exterior entrances. 2 2 2 2 Minimum number of parking spaces. 7 7 10 15

Office Layout:

The office shall have a minimum square footage as indicated in the table above, and shall be partitioned as shown on the building floor plan as provided by the Engineer.

Tie-downs and Skirting:

Modular offices shall be tied-down and fully skirted to ground level.

Lavatory Facilities:

For field offices sizes Small and Medium the Contractor shall furnish a toilet facility at a location convenient to the field office for use by CTDOT personnel and such assistants as they may engage; and for field offices sizes Large and Extra Large the Contractor shall furnish two (2) separate lavatories with toilet (men and women), in separately enclosed rooms that are properly ventilated

278

Rev. Date 09/14/2016

0301-0182 ITEM #0969064A

and comply with applicable sanitary codes. Each lavatory shall have hot and cold running water and flush-type toilets. For all facilities the Contractor shall supply lavatory and sanitary supplies as required.

Windows and Entrances:

The windows shall be of a type that will open and close conveniently, shall be sufficient in number and size to provide adequate light and ventilation, and shall be fitted with locking devices, blinds and screens. The entrances shall be secure, screened, and fitted with a lock for which four keys shall be furnished. All keys to the construction field office shall be furnished to the CTDOT and will be kept in their possession while State personnel are using the office. Any access to the entrance ways shall meet applicable building codes, with appropriate handrails. Stairways shall be ADA/ABA compliant and have non-skid tread surfaces. An ADA/ABA compliant ramp with non-skid surface shall be provided with the Extra-Large field office.

Lighting:

The Contractor shall equip the office interior with electric lighting that provides a minimum illumination level of 100 foot-candles at desk level height, and electric outlets for each desk and drafting table. The Contractor shall also provide exterior lighting that provides a minimum illumination level of 2 foot-candles throughout the parking area and for a minimum distance of 10 ft. on each side of the field office.

Parking Facility:

The Contractor shall provide a parking area, adjacent to the field office, of sufficient size to accommodate the number of vehicles indicated in the table above. If a paved parking area is not readily available, the Contractor shall construct a parking area and driveway consisting of a minimum of 6 inches of processed aggregate base graded to drain. The base material will be extended to the office entrance.

Field Office Security:

Physical Barrier Devices - This shall consist of physical means to prevent entry, such as: 1) All windows shall be barred or security screens installed; 2) All field office doors shall be equipped with dead bolt locks and regular day operated door locks; and 3) Other devices as directed by the Engineer to suit existing conditions.

Electric Service:

The field office shall be equipped with an electric service panel, wiring, outlets, etc., to serve the electrical requirements of the field office, including: lighting, general outlets, computer outlets, calculators etc., and meet the following minimum specifications:

A. 120/240 volt, 1 phase, 3 wire

279

Rev. Date 09/14/2016

0301-0182 ITEM #0969064A

B. Ampacity necessary to serve all equipment. Service shall be a minimum 100 amp dedicated to the construction field office.

C. The electrical panel shall include a main circuit breaker and branch circuit breakers of the size and quantity required.

D. Additional 120 volt, single phase, 20 amp, isolated ground dedicated power circuit with dual NEMA 5-20 receptacles will be installed at each desk and personal computer table (workstation) location.

E. Additional 120 volt, single phase, 20 amp, isolated ground dedicated power circuit with dual NEMA 5-20 receptacles will be installed, for use by the Telephone Company.

F. Additional 120-volt circuits and duplex outlets as required meeting National Electric Code requirements.

G. One exterior (outside) wall mounted GFI receptacle, duplex, isolated ground, 120 volt, straight blade.

H. After work is complete and prior to energizing, the State’s CTDOT electrical inspector, must be contacted at 860-594-2240. (Do Not Call Local Town Officials)

I. Prior to field office removal, the CTDOT Office of Information Systems (CTDOT OIS) must be notified to deactivate the communications equipment.

Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC):

The field office shall be equipped with sufficient heating, air conditioning and ventilation equipment to maintain a temperature range of 68o-80o Fahrenheit within the field office.

Telephone Service:

The Contractor shall provide telephone service with unlimited nation-wide calling plan. For a Small, Medium and Large field office this shall consist of the installation of two (2) telephone lines: one (1) line for phone/voice service and one (1) line dedicated for the facsimile machine. For an Extra-Large field office this shall consist of four (4) telephone lines: three (3) lines for phone/voice service and one (1) line dedicated for facsimile machine. The Contractor shall pay all charges.

Data Communications Facility Wiring:

Contractor shall install a Category 6 568B patch panel in a central wiring location and Cat 6 cable from the patch panel to each PC station, Smart Board location, Multifunction Laser Printer/Copier/Scanner/Fax, terminating in a (Category 6 568B) wall or surface mount data jack. The central wiring location shall also house either the data circuit with appropriate power requirements or a category 5 cable run to the location of the installed data circuit. The central wiring

280

Rev. Date 09/14/2016

0301-0182 ITEM #0969064A

location will be determined by the CTDOT OIS staff in coordination with the designated field office personnel as soon as the facility is in place.

For Small, Medium and Large field offices the Contractor shall run a CAT 6 LAN cable a minimum length of 25 feet for each CTDOT networked device (including but not limited to: smartboards and Multi‐Function Laser Printer/Copier/Scanner/Fax) to LAN switch area leaving an additional 10 feet of cable length on each side with terminated RJ45 connectors. For an Extra-Large field office the Contractor shall run CAT 6 LAN cables from workstations, install patch panel in data circuit demark area and terminate runs with RJ45 jacks at each device location. Terminate runs to patch panel in LAN switch area. Each run / jack shall be clearly labeled with an identifying Jack Number.

The Contractor shall supply cables to connect the Wi-Fi printer to the Contractor supplied internet router and to workstations/devices as needed. These cables shall be separate from the LAN cables and data Jacks detailed above for the CTDOT network.

The number of networked devices anticipated shall be at least equal to the number of personal computer tables, Multi‐Function Laser Printer/Copier/Scanner/Fax, and smartboards listed below.

The installation of a data communication circuit between the field office and the CTDOT OIS in Newington will be coordinated between the CTDOT District staff, CTDOT OIS staff and the local utility company once the Contractor supplies the field office phone numbers and anticipated installation date. The Contractor shall provide the field office telephone number(s) to the CTDOT Project Engineer within 10 calendar days after the signing of the Contract as required by Article 1.08.02. This is required to facilitate data line and computer installations.

Additional Equipment, Facilities and Services:

The Contractor shall provide at the field Office at least the following to the satisfaction of the Engineer:

Furnishing Description

Office Size

Small Med. Large Extra Large

Quantity

Office desk (2.5 ft. x 5 ft.) with drawers, locks, and matching desk chair that have pneumatic seat height adjustment and dual wheel casters on the base.

1 3 5 8

Standard secretarial type desk and matching desk chair that has pneumatic seat height adjustment and dual wheel casters on the base.

‐ ‐ ‐ 1

Personal computer tables (4 ft. x 2.5 ft.). 2 3 5 8

Drafting type tables (3 ft. x 6 ft.) and supported by wall brackets and legs; and matching drafters stool that have pneumatic seat

1 1 1 2

281

Rev. Date 09/14/2016

0301-0182 ITEM #0969064A

height adjustment, seat back and dual wheel casters on the base.

Conference table, 3 ft. x 12 ft. ‐ ‐ ‐ 1

Table – 3 ft. x 6 ft. ‐ ‐ ‐ 1

Office Chairs. 2 4 8 20

Mail slot bin – legal size. ‐ ‐ 1 1

Non‐fire resistant cabinet. ‐ ‐ 2 4

Fire resistant cabinet (legal size/4 drawer), locking. 1 1 2 3

Storage racks to hold 3 ft. x 5 ft. display charts. ‐ ‐ 1 2

Vertical plan racks for 2 sets of 2 ft. x 3 ft. plans for each rack. 1 1 2 2

Double door supply cabinet with 4 shelves and a lock – 6 ft. x 4 ft.

‐ ‐ 1 2

Case of cardboard banker boxes (Min 10 boxes/case) 1 1 2 3

Open bookcase – 3 shelves – 3 ft. long. ‐ ‐ 2 2

White Dry‐Erase Board, 36” x 48”min. with markers and eraser. 1 1 1 1

Interior partitions – 6 ft. x 6 ft., soundproof type, portable and freestanding.

‐ ‐ 6 6

Coat rack with 20 coat capacity. ‐ ‐ ‐ 1

Wastebaskets ‐ 30 gal., including plastic waste bags. 1 1 1 2

Wastebaskets ‐ 5 gal., including plastic waste bags. 1 3 6 10

Electric wall clock. ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

Telephone. 1 1 1 ‐

Full size stapler 20 (sheet capacity, with staples) 1 2 5 8

Desktop tape dispensers (with Tape) 1 2 5 8

8 Outlet Power Strip with Surge Protection 3 4 6 9

Rain Gauge 1 1 1 1

Business telephone system for three lines with ten handsets, intercom capability, and one speaker phone for conference table.

‐ ‐ ‐ 1

Mini refrigerator ‐ 3.2 c.f. min. 1 1 1 1

Hot and cold water dispensing unit. Disposable cups and bottled water shall be supplied by the Contractor for the duration of the project.

1 1 1 1

Microwave, 1.2 c.f. , 1000W min. 1 1 1 1

Fire extinguishers ‐ provide and install type and *number to meet applicable State and local codes for size of office indicated, including a fire extinguisher suitable for use on a computer terminal fire.

* * * *

Electric pencil sharpeners. 1 2 2 2

Electronic office type printing calculators capable of addition, 1 1 2 4

282

Rev. Date 09/14/2016

0301-0182 ITEM #0969064A

subtraction, multiplication and division with memory and a supply of printing paper.

Small Multi‐Function Laser Printer/Copier/Scanner/Fax combination unit, network capable, as specified below under Computer Related Hardware and Software.

1 1

Large Multi‐Function Laser Printer/Copier/Scanner/Fax combination unit, network capable, as specified below under Computer Related Hardware and Software.

1 1

Field Office Wi‐Fi Connection as specified below under Computer Related Hardware and Software

1 1 1 1

Wi‐Fi Printer as specified below under Computer Related Hardware and Software.

1 1 1 1

Digital Camera as specified below under Computer Related Hardware and Software.

1 1 3 3

Video Projector as specified below under Computer Related Hardware and Software.

‐ ‐ ‐ 1

Smart Board as specified below under Computer Related Hardware and Software.

‐ ‐ ‐ 1

Infrared Thermometer, including annual third party certified calibration, case, and cleaning wipes.

1 1 1 2

Concrete Curing Box as specified below under Concrete Testing Equipment.

1 1 1 1

Concrete Air Meter and accessories as specified below under Concrete Testing Equipment as specified below. Contractor shall provide third party calibration on a quarterly basis.

1 1 1 1

Concrete Slump Cone and accessories as specified below under Concrete Testing Equipment.

1 1 1 1

First Aid Kit 1 1 1 1

Flip Phones as specified under Computer Related Hardware and Software.

‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

Smart Phones as specified under Computer Related Hardware and Software.

‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

The furnishings and equipment required herein shall remain the property of the Contractor. Any supplies required to maintain or operate the above listed equipment or furnishings shall be provided by the Contractor for the duration of the project. Computer Related Hardware and Software: The CTDOT will supply by its own means the actual Personal Computers for the CTDOT representatives. The Contractor shall supply the Field Office Wi-Fi Connection, Wi-Fi Printer,

283

Rev. Date 09/14/2016

0301-0182 ITEM #0969064A

Digital Camera(s), Flip Phones, Smart Phones, Multifunction Laser Printer/Copier/Scanner/Fax, Video Projectors, and Smart Board(s) as well as associated hardware and software, must meet the requirements of this specification as well as the latest minimum specifications posted, as of the project advertising date, at CTDOTs web site: http://www.ct.gov/dot/cwp/view.asp?a=1410&q=563904

Within 10 calendar days after the signing of the Contract but before ordering/purchasing the Wi-Fi Printer (separate from the Multifunction Laser Printer/Copier/Scanner/Fax), Field Office Wi-Fi, Digital Camera(s), Flip Phones, Smart Phones, Multifunction Laser Printer/Copier/Scanner/Fax, Video Projector(s) and Smart Board(s) as well as associated hardware, the Contractor must submit a copy of their proposed order(s) with catalog cuts and specifications to the Administering CTDOT District for review and approval. The Wi-Fi Printer, Wi-Fi Router, Flip Phones, Smart Phones, digital cameras, Projector(s) and Smart Board(s) will be reviewed by CTDOT District personnel. The Multifunction Laser Printer/Copier/Scanner/Fax will be reviewed by the CTDOT OIS. The Contractor shall not purchase the hardware, software, or services until the Administering CTDOT District informs them that the proposed equipment, software, and services are approved. The Contractor will be solely responsible for the costs of any hardware, software, or services purchased without approval.

The Contractor and/or their internet service provider shall be responsible for the installation and setup of the field office Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi printer, and the configuration of the wireless router as directed by the CTDOT. Installation will be coordinated with CTDOT District and Project personnel.

After the approval of the hardware and software, the Contractor shall contact the designated representatives of the CTDOT administering District, a minimum of 2 working days in advance of the proposed delivery or installation of the Field Office Wi-Fi Connection, Wi-Fi Printer, Digital Camera(s), Flip Phones, Smart Phones, Multifunction Laser Printer/Copier/Scanner/Fax, Video Projectors and Smart Board(s), as well as associated hardware, software, supplies, and support documentation.

The Contractor shall provide all supplies, paper, maintenance, service and repairs (including labor and parts) for the Wi-Fi printers, copiers, field office Wi-Fi, fax machines and other equipment and facilities required by this specification for the duration of the Contract. All repairs must be performed with-in 48 hours. If the repairs require more than a 48 hours then an equal or better replacement must be provided.

Once the Contract has been completed, the hardware and software will remain the property of the Contractor.

First Aid Kit:

The Contractor shall supply a first aid kit adequate for the number of personnel expected based on the size of the field office specified and shall keep the first aid kit stocked for the duration that the field office is in service.

284

Rev. Date 09/14/2016

0301-0182 ITEM #0969064A

Rain Gauge:

The Contractor shall supply install and maintain a rain gauge for the duration of the project, meeting these minimum requirements. The rain gauge shall be installed on the top of a post such that the opening of the rain gauge is above the top of the post an adequate distance to avoid splashing of rain water from the top of the post into the rain gauge. The Location of the rain gauge and post shall be approved by the Engineer. The rain gauge shall be made of a durable material and have graduations of 0.1 inches or less with a minimum total column height of 5 inches. If the rain gauge is damaged the Contractor shall replace it prior to the next forecasted storm event at no additional cost.

Concrete Testing Equipment:

If the Contract includes items that require compressive strength cylinders for concrete, in accordance with the Schedule of Minimum Testing Requirements for Sampling Materials for Test, the Contractor shall provide the following equipment.

A) Concrete Cylinder Curing Box – meeting the requirements of Section 6.12 of the Standard Specifications.

B) Air Meter – The air meter provided shall be in good working order and meet the requirements of AASHTO T 152.

C) Slump Cone Mold – Slump cone, base plate, and tamping rod shall be provided in like-new condition and meet the requirements of AASHTO T119, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.

All testing equipment will remain the property of the Contractor at the completion of the project.

Insurance Policy:

The Contractor shall provide a separate insurance policy, with no deductible, in the minimum amount of five thousand dollars ($5,000) in order to insure all State-owned data equipment and supplies used in the office against all losses. The Contractor shall be named insured on that policy, and the CTDOT shall be an additional named insured on the policy. These losses shall include, but not be limited to: theft, fire, and physical damage. The CTDOT will be responsible for all maintenance costs of CTDOT owned computer hardware. In the event of loss, the Contractor shall provide replacement equipment in accordance with current CTDOT equipment specifications, within seven days of notice of the loss. If the Contractor is unable to provide the required replacement equipment within seven days, the CTDOT may provide replacement equipment and deduct the cost of the equipment from monies due or which may become due the Contractor under the Contract or under any other contract. The Contractor's financial liability under this paragraph shall be limited to the amount of the insurance coverage required by this paragraph. If the cost of equipment replacement required by this paragraph should exceed the required amount of the

285

Rev. Date 09/14/2016

0301-0182 ITEM #0969064A

insurance coverage, the CTDOT will reimburse the Contractor for replacement costs exceeding the amount of the required coverage. Maintenance: During the occupancy by the CTDOT, the Contractor shall maintain all facilities and furnishings provided under the above requirements, and shall maintain and keep the office quarters clean through the use of weekly professional cleaning to include, but not limited to, washing & waxing floors, cleaning restrooms, removal of trash, etc. Exterior areas shall be mowed and clean of debris. A trash receptacle (dumpster) with weekly pickup (trash removal) shall be provided. Snow removal, sanding and salting of all parking, walkway, and entrance ways areas shall be accomplished during a storm if on a workday during work hours, immediately after a storm and prior to the start of a workday. If snow removal, salting and sanding are not completed by the specified time, the State will provide the service and all costs incurred will be deducted from the next payment estimate.

Method of Measurement: The furnishing and maintenance of the construction field office will be measured for payment by the number of calendar months that the office is in place and in operation, rounded up to the nearest month.

There will not be any price adjustment due to any change in the minimum computer related hardware and software requirements.

Basis of Payment:

The furnishing and maintenance of the Construction Field Office will be paid for at the Contract unit price per month for “Construction Field Office, (Type),” which price shall include all material, equipment, labor, service contracts, licenses, software, repair or replacement of hardware and software, related supplies, utility services, parking area, external illumination, trash removal, snow and ice removal, and work incidental thereto, as well as any other costs to provide requirements of this specified this specification.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Construction Field Office (Large) Month

286

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0971001A

ITEM #0971001A – MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC

Work shall conform to Section 9.71 of the Standard Specifications, supplemented as follows:


The reconstruction of a portion of Long Wharf Street will require closure of portions of the street. In no cases may traffic be completely obstructed.

The Contractor shall maintain and protect traffic as noted in this Section.

At no time, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, shall the Contractor close or cause to be closed any portion of roadways beyond what is stipulated herein, or on the plans, as necessary to perform the work. The Contractor’s work operations shall be performed in the protected construction zones as shown on the Construction Traffic Control Plans and shall not encroach upon, nor be performed from the maintained vehicular travel paths.

Outside the rail yard fencing, all open excavations shall be covered with steel plates during non-working hours. Steel plates shall be of a thickness to accommodate an AASHTO HS-20 vehicle loading when spanning the full width of the excavation.

Outside the rail yard fencing, the Contractor shall use precast concrete barriers to separate open excavations from travel lanes. Where precast concrete barrier curb is installed for the protection of traffic from a work area, the terminal end shall be protected by Sand Inertial Barrier or Impact Attenuator if directed so by the Engineer. Payment for the precast concrete barrier and Sand Inertial Barrier or Impact Attenuator shall be included in the lump sum price for Maintenance and Protection of Traffic.

Work on adjacent projects may be going on at the same time as this project. Coordination between projects is mandatory so that proper traffic flow can be maintained at all times.

The Contractor shall provide suitable lighted barriers or barricades erected and maintained at all times, around open trenches or excavations, or other work potentially dangerous to pedestrians and vehicular traffic. Payment shall be included in the lump sum price for Maintenance and Protection of Traffic

Should the Contractor or the Contractor’s employees neglect to place and maintain barricades or lights, as required, the Engineer immediately, and without notice, may furnish, install and maintain barricades or lights. The cost thereof shall be borne by the Contractor and may be deducted from any amount due to become due to the Contractor under this Contract.

The reconstruction on Long Wharf Street may affect the United States Post Office access driveway which must remain open at all times. The Contractor must schedule this work four weeks in advance with the Engineer and provide a plan indicating signage, barricades, street

287

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0971001A

plates and other measures necessary to ensure the continuity of vehicular traffic in and out of the yard.

The Contractor shall stage and schedule this work so that the operation of the Post Office driveway is not compromised.

In addition, the Contractor must maintain the secure perimeter fence for the railyard throughout construction.

288

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0971001A

289

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0971001A

290

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0971001A

291

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0971001A

292

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0980101A

ITEM #0980101A – CONSTRUCTION STAKING (SITE 1)

Description:

Under this item, the Contractor shall perform, including related administrative and procedural requirements, the following: construction layout and staking, field engineering and surveying, utility locations, resetting duct bank markers and benchmarks disturbed by construction and general support services related to proposed construction methodology involving structural integrity or personnel safety, and civil engineering services.

Submit a certificate signed by the Contractor and co-signed by a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer certifying that the location and elevation of improvements comply with the Contract.

Submit a record of Project work performed and project data as required under provisions of the Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.08.14.

Engage a Land Surveyor licensed in the State of Connecticut who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

Engage a Professional Engineer of the discipline required, licensed in the State of Connecticut, to perform engineering services of the kind indicated.

Materials:

Project Record Drawings: Appropriate scale reproducible final drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer. Drawings shall conform to the Connecticut General Statues, Section 20-300b with a Horizontal Accuracy of A-1 and a Vertical Accuracy of V-2.


The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the work. Various markers indicating the presence of subsurface duct banks and utilities are present and may be disrupted by construction activities. Furnish location data for Project work that must be performed by public utilities serving the Project Site.

Furnish information that is necessary to adjust, move or relocate existing structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. In cases where these markers are affected by construction, the markers must be replaced or reset in the positions and configurations as existing before construction at final grade after grading is completed. Where construction makes it impossible

293

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0980101A

to replace duct bank markers, suitable alternative marker may be substituted as directed by the Engineer.

The existing benchmarks, control points and property corners are shown on the plans.

Verify layout information shown on the plans, in relation to the control points and existing benchmarks before proceeding to layout the Project work. Notify the Engineer if discrepancies are discovered. Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning Project work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without the Engineer’s prior written approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed control points, or the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points because of necessary changes in grades or locations. Promptly replace lost or destroyed benchmarks and control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

Establish and maintain a minimum of (2) permanent benchmarks on the Project Site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. Record benchmark locations with horizontal and vertical data on Project Record Documents. Provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the work where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

Construction methodology shall be the Contractor's sole responsibility including the cost of using engineering services and recommendations as necessary. Inform the Engineer of any anticipated or encountered problems in construction methodology. Proceed with work only when such problems are fully resolved by the Contractor, using such engineering support services as required.

Work from lines and levels established by the control survey. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each area of construction as needed to locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale plans to determine dimensions. Advise entities engaged in construction activities, of marked lines and levels provided for their use. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level and plumb.

Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes and invert elevations by instrumentation and similar appropriate means. The Contractor shall identify and document by survey the extent, elevation, and location of all foundations and capped utilities to be left in place and backfilled. Appropriate scaled marked up drawings shall be furnished to the Engineer PRIOR to backfilling.

Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from (2) or more locations.

294

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0980101A

Locate and lay out lines and grades for the construction of trackwork. Track centerline stakes shall be set at 50 foot stations along each track centerline. Additional stakes shall be set at all points of curvature including tangent to curve, compound curve, curve to tangent points, points of vertical curves and tangents, start and end points, and at all points of switch, PITO’s, and frog points. Cut and fill information shall be provided at all staked locations. An offset baseline shall be provided approximately 20’ off the centerline of track, or as directed by the Engineer.

Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey work. Make this log available to the Engineer for reference. Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Engineer when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted by the Engineer and not corrected. Record the location of utilities at the time of installation in the log as well as on as-built plans for permanent record. The recording Land Surveyor shall place its registration seal and accuracy statement regarding location of exterior underground utility lines on the utility plans of As-Built tracings.


This item will be paid for at the contract lump sum price for “Construction Staking (Site 1)” complete.

Basis of Payment:

This item will be paid for at the contract lump sum price for “Construction Staking (Site 1)”, which price shall include all administrative and procedural requirements, material, equipment, labor, and work incidental thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Construction Staking (Site 1) LS

295

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0992033A

ITEM #0992033A –ELECTRICAL WORK

General:

Scope:

A. The work of this Section includes the furnishing, fabricating, shop assembling, shipping, offloading, storage and installation of all items specified herein this section and other related sections under this contract, unless otherwise indicated.

B. The work of this Section includes the furnishing and installing low voltage cables from an existing pad mounted electrical panel to three (3) track switches in the yard. New branch circuit breakers shall be provided in the existing panel. The Contractor shall provide pulling of the new cable from the panel to each handhole adjacent to each of the three (3) switches. Contractor shall coil up the wire in the handhole for MNR connection to the switches.

C. The work of this Section includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to provide cables, connections, circuit breakers, and other items as required to provide power to the track switches and to disconnect buildings prior to disposal.

References:

A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be in accordance with the latest applicable standards of the IEEE, ANSI, NFPA, NEMA, ASTM, UL, and National Electrical Code with regard to material, design, construction and testing.

Submittals:

A. Product Data: Provide data for each type of panelboard, accessory and components specified. Include the following:

1. Manufacturer’s descriptive literature, catalog data and other pertinent information sufficient to clearly demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents.

2. Complete description of all protective devices, including coordination curves, setting procedures and instruction manuals

B. Shop Drawings: Show major features, voltage rating and short circuit current rating

1. Certified design test reports or test certificates

2. Method of field assembly, location and size of each field connection, including the following:

296

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0992033A

i. Bill of Material: Tabulation of installed devices with quantity, item description, manufacturer, catalog number, rating and location.

ii. Cable schedule showing the size and type of cables as well as termination points;

C. Source quality-control test reports;

D. Field test reports: Indicated and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

E. Maintenance Data: For panelboard components, include manufacturer’s written instruction for testing circuit breakers.

F. As-Built drawings shall be submitted prior to the close out of the project in a format meeting MNR’s most recent AutoCAD requirements, or as directed by Engineer.

G. Panelboard Schedules: Submit final versions after connecting loads.

Materials:

Overcurrent Protective Devices:

A. All material shall be new.

B. Circuit breakers shall be molded-case, UL 489, with lockable handle.

1. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated and interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.

2. Current-Limiting Trips: Where indicated, let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, Class RK-5.

3. Current Limiters: Where indicated, integral fuse listed for circuit breaker.

4. Lugs: Mechanical lugs and power-distribution connectors for number, size, and material of conductors indicated.

5. Shunt Trip: Where indicated.


General Construction:

A. Install panelboard accessory items according to NEMA PB 1.1.

297

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0992033A

B. Circuit Directory: Type directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing.

C. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

D. Cable Terminations

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer’s published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A- UL 486B.

E. Grounding

1. Making equipment grounding connectors for panelboards as indicated.

2. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus as indicated.

F. Set field adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

G. All circuits abandoned with breakers in good condition shall have the conductors removed, remain in place, and be labeled spare.

H. Cleaning:

1. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboard. Remove spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

Details of Manufacturers Warranties and Guarantees:

A. The manufacturer shall guarantee that the equipment furnished shall be new and shall be suitable for the service described in this specification.

B. The manufacturer shall agree to repair or replace at their own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, any part of the equipment which is found to be defective, due to faulty design, workmanship or material for a minimum period of eighteen months after shipment or one year after energizing whichever occurs first. If it is necessary to return the equipment for warranty repairs, the manufacturer will bear the cost of transportation in both directions and shall be responsible for loss and damage to the equipment during shipment and while in his possession.

C. The manufacturer shall clearly state any exceptions to the above warranty with the proposals.

D. The manufacturer shall supply all data and prices of any extended warranties.

298

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0992033A


All work shall be included in the Lump Sum price for “Electrical Work.”

Basis of Payment:

Electrical Work will be paid for at the Contract unit price bid. This price shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, and tools required to perform this work.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Electrical Work LS

299

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0999002A

ITEM NO. 0999002A – DISPOSAL OF BUILDINGS

This item shall conform to the requirements of Section 9.99 of the Standard Specifications, supplemental and amended as follows:

Article 9.99.01 - Description:

Delete and replace with the following:

Work under this item shall include all activities related to the complete demolition and disposal of the existing Long Wharf Street guard booth located within the New Haven Railyard as identified on the Plans and/or Specifications. The Contractor shall not rent or otherwise use such structures. All items shall remain the property of the Owner unless otherwise specifically released to the Contractor. Items specifically released to the Contractor shall be removed from the site and disposed of properly. Items not specifically released to the Contractor shall be moved to a storage area designated by the Engineer located within the New Haven Rail Yard. Coordinate with Owner prior to demolition to determine if any items are to be retained by the Owner. All items specifically released to the Contractor shall be removed from the site and disposed of properly.

The work shall also include the complete demolition of all site elements such as signs, bollards, and any other appurtenance associated with the existing guard booth.

The Contractor must obtain a Municipal Demolition Permit from the City of New Haven for all demolition work associated with this project. The work shall be performed by an experienced firm that has successfully completed demolition work similar to that indicated herein. Such firm shall be Registered for Demolition Business by the Department of Public Safety (CTDPS) in accordance with CGS 29-402, and shall perform work under the supervision of a competent person as defined under OSHA 29 CFR 1926.850-Demolition. In addition, employees performing on-site demolition related activity shall have attended an OSHA 10-hour Occupational Safety and Health Training Course in Construction Safety & Health, or equivalent.

Anywhere “Buildings” is mentioned in this Specification, it shall mean the removal and disposal of the existing Long Wharf guard booth and associated appurtenances.

Guard booth removal shall not begin until completion and acceptance of the new CCO Brewery Street guard booth and all utilities have been disconnected from the Long Wharf guard booth. Contractor shall request a pre-demolition coordination meeting with the Engineer, the Department, and MNR to schedule work, determine limits of operations and determine the salvage and delivery of any elements minimally 3 weeks prior to work commencement.

The Contractor shall not perform any demolition work until such time that all applicable hazardous material abatement has been completed. Refer to Environmental Specifications.

300

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0999002A

Article 9.99.03 - Construction Methods:

Add the following:

(1) Pre-demolition Submittals and Permits:

A. The Contractor shall, in accordance with CGS 29-406, apply for and obtain from the local building department, demolition permits for each structure to be demolished/disposed of. The Contractor shall pay all associated fees. The Contractor is also hereby notified that the local authority may impose a waiting period of up to ninety (90) days before granting any demolition permit. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to schedule activities to accommodate for such waiting periods and these waiting periods will not be allowed as the basis of delay claims by the Contractor.

B. For each structure to be demolished, if an Asbestos Abatement Notification Form was not submitted to the CTDPH, the Contractor shall submit the Demolition/Notification Form to the CTDPH not less than 10 working days prior to the commencement of demolition activities in accordance with CTDPH 19a-332a-3. The Contractor shall pay all associated fees.

C. In accordance with CGS 29-407, prior to commencing demolition activity, Contractor shall notify each adjoining property owner by certified mail that such demolition operations are planned.

D. At least fifteen (15) working days prior to the start of any demolition work, the Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer for review and approval:

1. A copy of the Contractors CTDPS Registration for Demolition Business. 2. A copy of the approved demolition permit(s) 3. A copy of the CTDPH Demolition/Notification Form(s) (as applicable) 4. A copy of the letters to adjoining property owners 5. Documentation that signs conforming to CGS 4b-64 have been posted (as

applicable) 6. Copies of utility disconnect letters 7. A project time schedule for each phase of work, including demolition, utility

service/sewer abandonment, etc. 8. Proposed demolition procedures to be utilized, as developed by a competent

person in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.850, and waste management plan 9. Proposed protective/safety measures to be implemented. 10. Proposed dust control measures. 11. Proposed demolition C&D bulky waste disposal facility. 12. Proposed steel/scrap metal recycling facility. 13. Proposed concrete, brick, stone batch processing/recycling facility. 14. Proposed bituminous disposal/recycling facility. 15. A copy of the CTDEP Nuisance Wildlife Control Operator license (as applicable)

301

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0999002A

16. Copies of the Site Postings and Legal Notices Published pursuant to CGS 4b-64 (as applicable).

17. Copies of on-site employee OSHA 10-hour Construction Safety & Health training certificates, or equivalent.

(2) Disposal of Buildings Provisions:

The Contractor shall completely demolish the structures and associated items, remove and dispose of the demolition debris, and abandon utilities as identified in the plans and/or specifications, listed in the proposal, or as directed by the Engineer in coordination with the Department and MNR.

The Contractor shall provide adequate safety measures and suitable protection for the public, State of Connecticut and Metro-North personnel.

The Contractor shall prevent damage to any existing utilities that are to remain in service during demolition. The Contractor shall not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction and the Engineer.

Use of explosives or blasting for demolition purposes will not be permitted.

No burning or flame/torch cutting will be permitted unless approved in advance by the Engineer.

Any items not designated for salvage in the documents that are of salvageable value to the Contractor may be removed as work progresses. The Contractor shall transport its salvaged items from site as they are removed. Storage or sale of such items will not be permitted on site. No requests for additional time will be considered based on delays caused by the Contractor’s salvage work.

The Contractor shall use the methods of demolition required to complete the work in accordance with all codes, ordinances and requirements of governing authorities. Demolition practices shall be acceptable to the Engineer, shall assure the safety of persons, equipment and structures which are to remain, and shall provide adequate protection of the environment. The Contractor shall schedule demolition activities to minimize delays, storage of debris, and construction traffic on-site.

Demolition shall proceed in a systematic manner, from top of structures to ground. No storage of rubble on the site shall be allowed.

If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer. The Contractor shall also comply with applicable laws and regulations regarding removal, handling, disposal, and protection against exposure and environmental pollution.

Demolition operations and removal of debris shall not interfere with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. Shoring, bracing, barricades, fencing and other

302

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0999002A

devices shall be used as necessary to protect adjacent properties and the public. Damage to adjacent facilities caused by demolition operations shall be promptly repaired. The Contractor shall not close or obstruct streets, access drives, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from the Engineer and local authorities.

The Contractor shall implement a fugitive dust suppression program in accordance with the Contract to prevent the off-site migration of particulate matter and/or dust resulting from demolition activities. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to supervise fugitive dust control measures and to monitor airborne particulate matter. The Contractor shall employ reasonable fugitive dust suppression techniques and shall visually observe the amounts of particulate and/or fugitive dust generated.

If the control of fugitive dust and/or particulate matter is not acceptable to the Engineer, the Contractor shall implement corrective measures, including using water or calcium chloride for dust control, temporary enclosures, and other methods to limit and control dust and dirt migration. The contractor shall not create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, water runoff and pollution when using water for dust control. Calcium Chloride for dust control shall conform to the requirements of Article 9.42. Water for dust control shall conform to the requirements of Article 9.43.

The Engineer will conduct ambient air monitoring for contaminants such as total lead, total dust, total fibers, silica, microbial spores, etc. for comparison to applicable standards. If any standard is exceeded, Contractor shall immediately cease operations and modify the engineering controls being used to maintain levels below the applicable standard.

Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall break up, demolish and remove from site for disposal/recycling:

Long Wharf guard booth and all associated appurtenances. All surface debris, brick, stone, concrete, walks and curbs. All footings and foundations to a minimum depth of 24 inches below existing grade

or final grade, whichever depth is lower.

Accumulated debris, rubbish, wood, plaster, roofing, wallboard, and other materials resulting from demolition and related operations shall be removed from the site daily as generated. Steel and scrap metal generated during the demolition process shall be recycled as scrap metal at an approved scrap metal recycling facility.

Demolition materials that have not been characterized as hazardous shall be recycled off site or disposed of at a landfill. Transport non-hazardous materials removed from demolished structures and dispose/recycle off site as C&D bulky waste in accordance with the DEP solid waste management standards. The Contractor shall recycle as much C&D bulky waste as practical, following waste management guidelines such as the US Green Building Council (USGBC) Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design (LEED) Green Building Rating System, in cases where it reduces the overall project costs and does not violate applicable regulations or

303

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0999002A

restrictions. Burning of combustible materials from demolished structures shall not be permitted on site.

The Contractor shall dispose or recycle materials off-site in accordance with the Specifications and all Federal, State and local regulations. A copy of the shipping paper for each load of material shipped off-site for disposal/recycling, including the weight of the load as measured at the disposal/recycling facility, shall be returned to the Engineer.

The foundation and subgrade areas shall be backfilled as indicated on the plans. Any additional material required to bring the subsurface area to grade shall be granular fill in accordance with Article 2.13. Prior to placement of fill materials, areas to be filled shall be free of standing water, frost, frozen material, trash and debris. Construction debris shall not be used as fill within the project limits and shall be properly disposed of in accordance with all regulations. After fill placement and compaction, the Contractor shall grade surface to meet adjacent contours and provide flow to surface drainage structures. Grading shall not create any depressions that can retain water, create any diversions to surface flow, or block the intended flow of surface water.

(3) Salvage and Relocation of Equipment/Materials:

At the pre-demolition coordination meeting, the Contractor, Engineer, the Department, and MNR will determine any elements which will be salvaged and delivered to a location within 25 miles of the NHRY. Relocations elements consist of the guard booth structure, gate operators & assemblies, gate lift arms & assemblies, control cabinets, security & video surveillance appurtenances, and other elements as identified at the pre-demolition coordination meeting. All savaged items shall be packaged and transported in a manner to preserve the existing operational and cosmetic condition. Packaging shall be weather tight, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. All salvaged elements shall be clearly tagged and labeled in a weather resistant manner with the owner’s name (MNR or CTDOT), schedule of contents, date of salvage, source location, storage destination, and the text, “Salvaged by EEC Project No. 301-0182”.

(4) Post-demolition Submittals:

The Contractor shall provide the Engineer, within 30 days of completion of the demolition work, a compliance package; which shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

A. Site sketches indicating the locations of capped utilities (water, sewer, etc) and/or other subsurface structural, electrical or mechanical conditions.

B. Shipping papers from the CTDEP solid waste bulky waste disposal facility indicating receipt and acceptance of C&D bulky waste demolition debris.

C. Shipping papers from the approved scrap metal recycling facility indicating receipt and acceptance of scrap metal debris.

D. Shipping papers from the approved concrete, brick, stone batch processing/recycling facility indicating receipt and acceptance of the recycled debris.

304

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #0999002A

Article 9.99.03 - Construction Methods:

Add the following: No separate payment will be made for the salvage and relocation of elements and is considered incidental work.

305

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1003997A

ITEM #1003997A – REMOVE POLE

Description:

The work under this item shall include the removal of existing utility poles, pole foundations, guys, guy anchors, conduits and wiring, cameras, light fixtures, and any other miscellaneous pole mounted equipment and hardware at the locations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

If removal of a pole designated in the Contract could result in the instability of an adjacent pole, an appropriate stabilization device (back guy or brace with reflective sleeve to height of 8’ above ground) shall be installed before removing the designated pole. All stabilization devices shall be approved by the Engineer.

All poles and attached appurtenances shall remain the property of the Owner unless otherwise specifically released to the Contractor. Items specifically released to the Contractor shall be removed from the site and disposed of properly. Items not specifically released to the Contractor shall be moved to a storage area designated by the Engineer located within the New Haven Rail Yard.

Materials:

The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to all equipment and material incurred during removal and hauling to specified area. All repairs or replacements due to damage or loss by the Contractor shall be made at the Contractor's expense.


Contractor shall remove all existing utility poles, pole foundations, guys, guy anchors, conduits and wiring, cameras, light fixtures, and any other miscellaneous pole mounted equipment and hardware at the locations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

Contractor shall coordinate with Owner prior to pole removals to determine if any items are to be retained by the Owner. All items specifically released to the Contractor shall be removed from the site and disposed of properly; Remove and properly dispose of concrete pole foundations; Backfill voids left by removal of the poles and foundations. Backfill material shall be a granular fill compacted to density equal to the surrounding soil. Pole foundations shall be removed to a minimum of three feet below finished grade or as directed by the Engineer.

306

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1003997A


This work shall be measured for payment by each pole removed. Removal and proper disposal of the utility poles, pole foundations, guys, guy anchors, conduits and wiring, cameras, light fixtures, and any other miscellaneous pole mounted equipment and hardware, on site delivery to storage area for items not specifically released by the Owner, and backfill of voids left by removal of the poles and foundations shall be included in the unit price for this item.

All costs associated with the installation of back guys or braces to stabilize adjacent poles are result of this work shall not be measured for separate payment.

Basis of Payment:

This work shall be paid for at the contract unit price each for "Remove Pole" complete, which price shall include removal of utility poles, pole foundations, guys, guy anchors, conduits and wiring, cameras, light fixtures, and any other miscellaneous pole mounted equipment and hardware, disposing, delivering, hauling, storing, backfill of voids, stabilization of adjacent poles, and all material, equipment, tools and labor incidental thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit Remove Pole EA

307

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1014901A, #1019030A

ITEM #1014901A – REMOVE CABLE ITEM #1019030A – REMOVE AERIAL CABLE

Description:

The work under this item shall include the removal of all existing aerial cable and cable located within individual ducts at the locations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.


All aerial cable removed from the existing poles shall remain the property of the Owner unless otherwise specifically released to the Contractor. Cables specifically released to the Contractor shall be removed from the site and disposed of properly. Cables not specifically released to the Contractor shall be moved to a storage area designated by the Engineer located within the New Haven Rail Yard. The Contractor shall demolish and remove all materials in accordance with instructions and as shown on the Contract Plans. Prior to demolition, Contractor is responsible for verification and coordination of verification for all abandoned circuiting ensuring they serve only the abandoned facilities. Remove abandoned wire back to source of supply, unless noted otherwise or directed in the field by Engineer in coordination with MNR. MNR shall procure and install 200 copper pair and 144 single mode fiber optic cabling in existing duct bank, installed under YPU contract, between specified locations on the contract plans. Upon MNR completion of installation and permission from the Engineer in coordination with MNR, the Contractor shall demolish the indicated items. Temporary supporting means for cabling between TMH-12A and EMU building along track 38 shall also be removed upon permission and notification from the Engineer in coordination with MNR.


This work will be measured for payment by the actual linear foot length of existing cable removed from successive pole locations or from each duct. All cables between successive poles or from each duct shall be measured only once regardless of the number of cables removed between the poles or manholes.

Basis of Payment: This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot for “Remove Aerial Cable”, complete, which price shall include the removal and disposing, delivering, hauling, storing, and all material, equipment, tools and labor incidental thereto.

308

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1014901A, #1019030A

This work will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot for “Remove Cable”, complete, which price shall include the removal and disposal, all materials, tools, equipment and labor incidental thereto. This work also includes moving the removed cables to the designated location.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Remove Cable LF Remove Aerial Cable LF

309

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1015034A

ITEM #1015034A – GROUNDING AND BONDING

Description:

Scope:

A. This specification describes the Contractor requirements for furnishing installing, and testing of grounding loop for the existing cylinder storage shed structure, storage shed fencing, above ground propane tanks with a resistance no greater than 5 Ohms as shown on the Plans.

B. The Contractor shall provide detailed shop drawings satisfying all requirements for approval prior to any site activities.

Related Work:

A. Related requirements are included in, but not limited to, the following:

1. 4/0 AWG 600 Volt Copper Wires

Submittals:

A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, technical data, and certificates for all items of equipment under this section including manufacturer's descriptive literature, catalog data, and other information required to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Drawings shall provide locations of grounding rods, connectors, cables, and other related materials along with details of terminations and access points.

C. Manufacturer’s catalog data for all proposed materials with installation recommendations.

D. Procedures and equipment for testing resistances and electrical continuity.

E. Submit product data on the following:

1. Grounding conductors

2. Connectors, bushings and fittings

3. Exothermic welding process, components, materials, and molds

4. Ground rods, ground rod couplers and driving sleeves

310

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1015034A

F. Submit grounding system test plan and procedures for review and approval prior to testing. Test procedures submitted for approval shall include test report format and proposed probe placement and spacing intervals relative to the ground grid being tested.

G. Contractor shall perform fall-of-potential tests in accordance with IEEE 81 in at least two (2) different directions (two traverses), resulting in at least two (2) test data plots.

H. Grounding system test reports shall include the following as a minimum:

1. Sketch of grounding system being tested showing locations of test probes relative to the ground grid under test.

2. Make, model and calibration date of test instruments.

3. Weather conditions at time of test.

4. Plotted “S” curves resulting from the fall-of-potential tests. Shape of curves shall be satisfactory as determined by the Designer, demonstrating adequate probe spacing evidenced by a distinct horizontal section in the middle of the curve (refer to IEEE 81). Unsatisfactory test data plots shall be rejected and retesting shall be required.

Certification:

A. Certified test reports verifying that ground resistance, when grounding and bonding is installed and connected to the ground grid, does not exceed the values specified in this specification.

Materials:

A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and test a complete grounding system in accordance with the Plans and as specified herein.

B. Bare conductors: Class B stranded, annealed, soft-drawn copper cable conforming to ASTM B3. The conductor size shall be as indicated on the Plans.

C. Ground Rods. UL-listed copper-clad steel rods, ¾ inch diameter, nominal 10 foot sections complying with NEMA GR 1 and UL 467. Carbon steel core and tip, with plated copper cladding of at least 10 mils thickness. Use bronze ground rod couplers, threaded type, if required to provide the total rod lengths indicated on the Plans.

Fittings:

All connections below ground (i.e. buried) shall be exothermic weld type connections. All above-ground connections shall be bolted type. All fittings shall be UL-listed.

311

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1015034A


A. Trenching, excavating and backfilling for installation of underground grounding conductors: in accordance with the Contract Documents. Stone shall be kept clean and free of contaminants.

B. Install ground loop conductors and associated ground rods, connections, and fittings as shown on the Plans. Conductor sizes shall not be less than those shown on the Plans and shall not be less than required by NFPA 70.

C. Perform exothermic welds in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Test all completed exothermic welds by striking with a 2-pound hammer. If cracks develop after striking, replace weld at no additional expense.

D. Drive ground rods vertically into the earth using approved driving sleeves until top of rod is at least eighteen inches (18”) below final grade. If obstructions are encountered during driving, re-drive rod at a 30 degree angle from vertical. If the full length of the rod still cannot be driven entirely into the earth, Contractor shall note the rod location(s) and continue installing the remaining rods shown on the Plans. Before backfilling over the grid, Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the locations at which rods could not be driven to the prescribed depth. Contractor shall then complete rod installation per the direction of the Engineer.

Field Tests:

A. The Contractor shall perform the following field tests after the Grounding has been installed on site and the Engineer has granted permission to test.

B. Testing shall be performed by a NICET or NETA-certified test technician with demonstrated experience in the resistance testing of power substation ground grids. Test frequencies shall be selected to minimize potential interference from 60 Hz induced voltages and harmonics thereof, and stray 60 Hz ac and dc currents.

C. Test reports shall include graphically plotted results of the fall-of-potential tests taken from at least two traverses. Data points and resulting plots shall be made with care and are subject to review and approval by the Designer.

D. If tests indicate that the resistance of the grounding system exceeds five (5) ohms, the Designer shall be immediately notified. Under the Designer’s direction, several additional twenty-foot sectional ground rods will be added to the ground grid to decrease grid resistance, and the grid resistance re-tested. This process shall be repeated if necessary until ground system resistance is five (5) ohms or less.

312

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1015034A

Acceptance Tests:

A. The Contractor shall hire an independent testing agency that shall perform the acceptance tests after satisfactory completion of all field tests to verify the continuity of the two bonding cables between fence structure and ground loop.


“Grounding and Bonding” will be measured on a lump sum basis which will include all required furnishing, shipping, installing, testing, and all associated materials for a complete and functional installation.

Basis of Payment:

This work shall be paid for at the contract lump sum price for "Grounding and Bonding," which shall include all transportation, material, equipment, tools, and labor incidental thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Grounding and Bonding LS

313

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1020005A

ITEM #1020005A - WOOD POLE (45 FEET) Description: This work shall consist of furnishing and installing a wood pole with, ground rod and all other devices, at the location shown on the plans. Materials: Wood poles shall conform to the pertinent requirements of Article M.16.04-2. Wood poles shall be 45' in length. Ground rods shall be 3/4" x 10' copper-clad steel with an approved square head bolt-type ground clamp. Ground wire shall be 4/0 AWG stranded bare soft-drawn copper. Provide high visibility yellow plastic safety covers to a height of eight feet above ground for all guys or braces. Construction Method: The wood pole, with required anchors, ground rod and ground wire, including excavation of earth or rock, shall be installed as detailed, at the locations shown on the plans and directed by the Engineer. Method of Measurement: This work will be measured for payment by the number of wood poles with associated equipment complete and accepted in place. Basis of Payment: This work will be paid for at the contract unit price each for "Wood Pole (45 Feet)", as specified and complete and accepted in place which price shall include all materials including wood pole, ground rod, ground wire, including excavation of earth or rock, compacted granular fill and all labor, tools and work incidental thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Wood Pole (45 Feet) EA.

314

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1206094A

ITEM #1206094A – RELOCATION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING SIGNING


Article 12.06.01 - Description: Add the following: The work under this item shall also include the relocation of existing signing and / or delineators as indicated on the Contract Drawings within the project limits. Article 12.06.03 – Construction Methods: Add the following before the first paragraph: Relocated signing shall be completed in conformance with Article 12.08.03. Relocated delineators shall be completed in conformance with manufacturer’s requirements or per Article 12.05.03.

315

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

ITEM #1301082A – 8” DUCTILE IRON PIPE (WATER MAIN)

ITEM #1301084A – 12” DUCTILE IRON PIPE (WATER MAIN)

ITEM #1302004A – 8” GATE VALVE

ITEM #1302006A – 12” GATE VALVE

ITEM #1302918A – PRECAST CONCRETE VALVE VAULT (WATER MAIN)

ITEM #1303204A – HYDRANT ASSEMBLY (WATER MAIN)

ITEM #1304083A – POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT OF PIPE (WATER MAIN)

General:

Scope:

A. Work under this item shall include domestic and fire water main piping, hydrants, tapping sleeves, flexible expansion joints, valves, meter vaults, backflow perverters, and all associated appurtenances. This item covers installation of new ductile iron water main pipe of the diameter shown on the plans for both domestic and fire protection purposes.

B. Ductile Iron (DI) pipe items include associated fittings unless otherwise called out on the Plans.

C. Precast Concrete Valve Vault item, also referred to as “Meter Pit”, includes precast concrete structure, access cover, ladder & extension, gaskets, water proofing, accessories, and all incidental work, except as otherwise herein provided for.

D. Hydrant assembly item includes installation the locations shown on the Plans, complete as shown, specified or directed. The work includes furnishing and installing pipe, valves, valve boxes, hydrant shoes, hydrants, concrete collars and felt wrapping complete, and all incidental work, except as otherwise herein provided for.

E. Polyethylene encasement of pipe includes All labor, materials, fixtures, equipment, tools and services required for the installation of ductile iron pipe polyethylene encasement shall be furnished and installed in compliance with the following specifications.

F. The Contractor shall perform additional incidental underground exploratory investigations as indicated on the Plans (i.e., test pits, utility detection services, etc.) or as

316

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

directed the Engineer to determine a clear path/space for all new water main items. Revisions are to be made to the relevant Plans by the Contractor based on the underground exploratory investigations. These alterations are to be submitted to the designer, along with the accompanying duct bank profile and detail drawings, for approval prior to proceeding with the work in the field.

Submittals:

A. Product Data: Provide data for each type of pipe, fittings, assemblies, polyethylene encasement, accessory and components specified. Include the following:

1. Manufacturer’s descriptive literature, catalog data and other pertinent information sufficient to clearly demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop drawings and calculations of precast structures including frames & covers in accordance with RWA and contract requirements. Final production shop drawings shall be approved and signed by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered in the State of Connecticut.

C. Test reports: provide test reports for all leakage tests, flow tests, or otherwise directed by engineer.

D. Submit completed Contractor's Material and Test Certificate (FM form 85-B) for the underground water main should to the engineer for FM Global review and acceptance.

E. The Contractor to field verify water main profiles and crossings and submit as-built drawings at completion of job.

Quality Assurance:

A. Provide one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work, who is thoroughly familiar with the types of materials used and execution of the work, and who shall direct all work under this section.

B. Use all means necessary to protect materials and appurtenances before, during, and after installation including proper storage. Follow the manufacturers' recommended procedures for unloading, storage and installation where applicable.

C. In the event of damage or theft, make all repairs and replacements necessary, subject to approval by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Department.

D. Provide the necessary equipment or secure a testing firm to conduct pressure, leakage, disinfection, infiltration, deflection, and lamping tests on the installed utilities, and, if required, concrete testing and loaded truck test.

E. Comply with all applicable standards referenced below and all conditions required by State or local permits.

317

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

Materials: A. General:

1. All materials shall meet requirements of the FM Global Insurance and shall get Insurance and Designer approval and shall be manufactured by one of the following: US Pipe Valve and Hydrant Div Mueller Company Ltd, M&H Valve Co- Division of McWane, Inc, Waterous Co, Tyler Pipe Co Div of McWane Inc, EBAA Iron Inc or Victaulic Company or other Insurance and Designer approved equal.

2. A portion of the work will cross under railroad tracks where a utility protection slab will be required and paid for under a separate item.

B. Pipe:

1. Water pipe shall be ductile iron cement lined designed in accordance with ANS21.50/AWWA C150-96 and manufactured in accordance with ANS A21.51/AWWA C151-96.

2. Ductile iron pipe shall be special thickness Class 52 for diameters 16 inches or less. Pipe classified according to pressure classes designated under AWWA C150/A21.50-96 such as 250 or 350 is not acceptable.

3. Ductile iron pipe shall be double cement-mortar lined in accordance with ANS A21.4/AWWA C104-95.

4. Ductile iron pipe shall be push-on joint conforming to ANS A21.11/AWWA C111 latest version. Pipe shall be delivered in 18-foot lengths.

a. Push-on joints shall be provided with sufficient quantities of accessories conforming to ANS A21.11/AWWA C111.

C. Valves, Fittings, and Couplings:

1. When connecting ductile iron pipe to cast iron pipe the Contractor shall use sleeve couplings. When connecting ductile iron pipe to ductile iron pipe the Contractor shall use solid sleeve mechanical joint fittings manufactured in accordance with these specifications.

2. Sleeve couplings and accessories shall be pressure rated for a minimum of 150 PSI. Couplings shall be ductile iron or steel. The couplings shall be provided with "Cor-Ten" (ASTM A588) bolts and nuts or approved equal.

3. After assembly of couplings and accessories, all surfaces of the bolts and nuts shall be thoroughly coated with two coats of an asphaltic coating. The interior and exterior of the coupling shall be epoxy-coated.

318

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

4. Gaskets shall properly match bell configuration. Push on joint gaskets shall be molded SBR rubber per ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 and ISO 4633.

5. The Fittings shall be gray or ductile iron conforming to AWWA C-110 and have mechanical joints unless otherwise noted.

6. All fittings 4 inches to 24 inches shall be pressure rated at 350 PSI working pressure. Fittings shall conform to the weights, excluding accessories, and dimensions shown in the latest edition of the Handbook of Ductile Iron Pipe and come complete with all joint accessories as required. All accessories (gland, gaskets, T-bolts and nuts) shall be in accordance with AWWA C-111. All mechanical joint bolts (T-bolts) shall be “Cor-Ten” (ASTM A588) or approved equal.

7. Gate valves, unless otherwise indicated, shall be the same size as the main in which they are installed. All gate valves shall be non-rising stem, counter-clockwise opening and provided with a 2-inch square operating nut with the word open and an arrow cast in the metal to indicate direction to open. Valves shall be marked with raised lettering cast on the body indicating manufacturer and working pressure. Working pressure rating shall equal or exceed that of the pressure class of the adjoining pipe unless otherwise indicated.

8. Valves shall be provided with a flanged-by-mechanical joint end with the mechanical joint end designed for connection to cast iron.

9. Provide adaptor to join tapping machine to mechanical joint end. Gaskets shall conform to AWWA C111 and be full faced 1/16-inch cloth inserted rubber with bolt holes pre-punched.

10. Valves shall be AWWA approved in accordance with C-515 (resilient-seated gate valves). All valves shall open counter clockwise.

a. C-515 valves shall have ductile iron bodies, inside screws, resilient seats, and non-rising stems.

b. All bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel.

11. Coat the exterior surfaces of valves at the place of manufacture. Coating shall be a minimum of 6 mils thick epoxy, compliant with AWWA 550 and certified to NSF 61.

12. Bolts and nuts used for bolting flanged gate valves above ground shall be square head Machine bolts and hexagonal nuts conforming to ASTM A307 and ASTM A 563, respectively; Grade B. All bolts and nuts for buried flanged gate valves shall be per ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, respectively; Alloy Group 2, Condition CW1/CW2 (depending on size).

319

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

13. Where the depth of the valve is such that its centerline is more than four feet below grade, provide operating extension stems to bring the operating nut to a point 6 inches below the surface of the ground and/or box cover. Extension stems shall be steel and shall be complete with 2-inch square operating nut.

14. Valve boxes shall be cast iron and be the extension, two piece sliding type of equal quality to Mueller H-10364. Cover shall read WATER or as otherwise noted. Valve boxes shall be provided with gate box aligners and mud caps.

15. Class “C” Concrete as specified in Section M.03.01 shall be used for concrete blocking, as directed by the Designer.

16. Tapping Valve and Sleeve: The tapping sleeve will stainless steel with a connecting flange conforming to AWWA C115 and be of equal quality to Power Seal 3490MJ. All nuts and bolts used with the steel sleeve shall be AISI Type 304 stainless steel. An integral test plug will be provided with the sleeve. The valve shall be AWWA approved in accordance with C-515 (resilient-seated gate valves). All valves shall open counter clockwise. A corporation stop (Mueller 15000 or equal) will be provided in the first length for disinfection.

17. Each flexible expansion joint shall consist of an expansion joint designed and cast as an integral part of a ball and socket type flexible joint, having a minimum per ball deflection of: 20º, 2” - 12”; 15º, 14” - 36”; 12º, 42”-48” and 6-inches minimum expansion. Additional expansion sleeves shall be available and easily added or removed at the factory or in the field. Both standardized mechanical joint and flange end connections shall be available.

18. All internal surfaces (wetted parts) of flexible expansion joints shall be lined with a minimum of 15 mils of fusion bonded epoxy conforming to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C213. Sealing gaskets shall be constructed of EPDM. The coating shall meet ANSI/NSF-61.

19. Flexible expansion joints exterior surfaces shall be coated with a minimum of 6 mils of fusion bonded epoxy conforming to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C116/A21.16.

20. Flexible expansion joints shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to the material requirements of ASTM A536 and ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. Foundry certification of material shall be readily available upon request.

D. Polyethylene encasement

1. Furnished and installed in accordance with AWWA C-105 latest revision to all piping, castings, fittings, valves, and couplings for the entire length of direct-buried ductile iron pipe to be supplied on the project.

320

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

2. The polyethylene encasement shall prevent contact between the pipe and the surrounding backfill and bedding material, but it is not intended to be completely airtight or watertight.

3. The Contractor shall supply 8-mil minimum thickness polyethylene tube manufactured in accordance with AWWA C-105 latest revision for encasement of ductile iron waterline.

4. Polyethylene tube to be supplied shall be black (weather resistant) in color. Tube or sheet width sizes shall be per AWWA C105 as shown on the following chart:

Nominal Pipe Diameter Min. Polyethylene Width for Flat Tube 4” and smaller 14”

6” 16” 8” 20” 10” 24” 12” 27”

5. The polyethylene film supplied shall be clearly marked every two feet along its length with the following information in one-inch high letters:

Manufacturer’s name or trademark Year of Manufacture ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 Minimum film thickness and material type Applicable range of nominal pipe diameter size(s) Warning – Corrosion Protection – Repair any damage. Polyethylene adhesive tape 1-1/2” wide shall be used to seal join

E. Hydrant Assemblies

1. One cast iron hydrant anchor tee, Class 250 or better, mechanical joint ends, cement-lined, bituminous seal coated, complete with accessories and conforming to ANSI/AWWA C502, ANSI/AWWA C550 and ANSI/AWWA C110/A21/10-03 for Ductile Iron, Ductile Iron Compact Fittings. A 6 inch wedge action joint retaining gland as manufactured by EBAA Iron Inc. MEGALUG series 1100 or Insurance and Designer approved equivalent is required at both the hydrant tee and the hydrant.

2. A minimum of 6 feet of 6 inch diameter ductile-iron pipe, class 52, cement lined, conforming to ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.21.51-91 shall be used between the hydrant and the secondary valve.

3. The secondary valve shall be a 6 inch mechanical joint resilient-seated valves, open right style, non-rising stem, 0-ring seals, iron body, bronze mounted, parallel

321

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

seat open right with accessories, and shall meet or exceed ANSI/AWWA C509a-95 or its latest revision and shall be manufactured by one of the following: Kennedy Valve Div. McWane Inc, Mueller Co. or Waterous Co. or other Insurance and Designer approved equal.

4. All hydrants shall have at least a 5-1/4 inch main valve opening. They shall have two 2-1/2 house outlets 180 degrees apart, which shall be at 90 degrees to the one 4 1/2" inch pumper nozzle. All nozzles shall have national standard threads and the pumper nozzle shall be located 18-inches above final grade. Digging of swales will not be permitted. Hydrants will have a nominal 5-inch barrel, 6-inch inlet base with mechanical joint end, breakaway bolts at the flange, and a minimum 5 foot bury. The actual bury will be determined in the field. The hydrant shall meet requirements of the FM Global Insurance and be Metropolitan 250 - Model 94 Fire or Insurance and Designer approved equal. Valve boxes shall be the Dwyer type made of gray cast iron conforming to the requirements of ASTM-Al26 "Standard Specifications for Gray iron Casting – Class C". The top section shall be of the top flange design and shall have no bead on the bottom. The word WATER shall be cast with raised letters in the center of the cover. The base section shall be of the Dwyer design which centers the operating nut for positive access to the valve.

5. All piping and methods of joint restraints required under this Item shall comply with the appropriate sections in the Item "Ductile Iron Pipe" (Any Size).

6. Detailed specifications for any particular component required for incorporation into the work will be provided by Metro North Railroad to the Contractor upon request.

7. Thrust blocks and concrete associated with the hydrant assembly shall be Class "A" concrete conforming to Section M.03. Crushed stone shall conform to Subarticle M.02.05-1.

8. Asphalt impregnated felt wrapping for the concrete collar shall be saturated felt in a uniform, flexible felt of organic fibers, impregnated with an asphalt saturant.

F. Pipe Insulation

1. Pipe insulation shall be exterior grade, wrapped with a waterproof jacket. The insulation shall be at least 2 inches in thickness. Insulation shall be designed for buried applications and shall be fiberglass, cellular glass, expanded polystyrene, or urethane and shall be covered with a waterproof jacket.

a. Fiberglass insulation shall conform to ASTM C553.

b. Cellular glass insulation shall conform to ASTM C552.

322

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

c. Expanded polystyrene insulation shall conform to ASTM C578.

d. Urethane insulation shall conform to ASTM C591.

G. Waterstops

1. Waterstops within each trench spaced every 100’ are required and shall be Concrete Class “C” with no reinforcing.

H. Warning Tape

1. Provide warning tape as required by Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.05.15 – Facilities Construction – Markings for Underground Facilities with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification shall read, "CAUTION, BURIED WATER LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Color and printing shall be permanent, unaffected by moisture or soil. The warning tape shall be acid and alkali-resistant with a minimum tape thickness of 5.0 mils. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 5,800 psi, and a maximum 80 percent elongation.

2.

I. Precast Vault Structure

1. Casting: May be constructed monolithically or in sections. All structures shall be watertight. Splices in structures shall be suitable for submersible use. If the structure is constructed in sections, the joint between sections shall be made watertight with an approved hydrocarbon resistant gasket or with an approved epoxy mortar grout.

2. Access openings: Shall be centered in the roof slab and This shall be constructed in size and shape to accommodate the access cover as shown on the Plans.

3. Access Covers: The access covers shall be single, leaf construction and HS-20 load rated. The covers shall be minimally constructed of 1/4-inch thick, one piece, mill finish, extruded diamond plate aluminum. A channel frame shall be provided with a 1-inch drainage coupling. The inside of the frame shall have a door support ledge on two sides both frame and ledge must be supported by the concrete. The door shall open 90 degrees and automatically lock with a stainless steel hold open arm with aluminum release handle. For ease of operation each door shall incorporate enclosed stainless steel compression spring assist, door shall shut flush with the frame. The lifting handle, hinges and all fastening hardware shall be stainless steel, flush with the door surface, and the unit shall lock with a stainless steel slam lock with removable keys. The cover shall be guaranteed against defects in material and/or workmanship for a period of ten (10) years.

323

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

4. Penetrations: Pipes shall be connected to the manhole walls using an approved cast in flexible watertight connector. Connectors shall be manufactured by Press-Seal Gasket Corporation or approved equal and conform to ASTM C-990.

5. Size: Minimum inside dimensions of shall be as indicated on the Plans.

6. Design Loads: Design loads shall consist of live loads, live load impact, dead load, soil loads, hydrostatic loads and any other expected loads that may occur.

7. Live loads shall be for Cooper E-80. All structures shall be designed to accommodate loading applied at 4’-3” from the centerline of track.

8. Impact loading shall be 30 percent of the live loads.

9. Soil loads shall consist of an earth cover over from zero (0) feet minimum to five (5) feet maximum. Average unit weight of earth shall be assumed to be 100 lbs. per cubic feet.

10. Hydrostatic loading shall be a hydrostatic head of nine (9) feet above base of structure.

11. Concrete: Cement for concrete shall be Portland cement, meeting the requirements of ASTM C150, Type I or Type II. Concrete shall be thoroughly cured and shall attain a compressive strength of at least 5,000 psi prior to delivery.

12. Concrete Reinforcing: Steel shall be new billet steel, deformed steel bars conforming to ASTM A-615 (latest revision), Grade 60. Welded steel wire fabric reinforcing shall conform to ASTM A-185 (latest revision).

a. Minimum cover of reinforcement shall be 3 inches, and shall conform to relevant American Concrete Institute (ACI) cover requirements

13. Each precast module shall be provided with formed male and female joints to insure accurate joint surfaces and tolerance for a watertight seal. All joints between adjoining precast modules shall be primed at the factory and sealed by the vaults manufacturer's personnel when modules are set in the field utilizing a vulcanized butyl rubber compound sealant conforming to AASHTO M-198 (latest revision). All surfaces of the precast structure shall be smooth, even and free from roughness, irregularities and other defects, and shall be suitable for receiving the interior and exterior finishes specified elsewhere herein.

14. Whenever possible, the vault’s walls shall be monolithically cast with the roof and wall slabs. The vault shall have a sump which shall not be less the 4-inches deep and sized with a minimum area of 12-inches x 12-inches.

15. Ladder and ladder extension:

324

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

a. the vault wall-mount access ladder shall each be of aluminum (6061 -T6) or polypropylene (conforming to ASTM D-41D1) with steel and aluminum reinforcement construction. The ladders shall be fastened to the concrete with 316 stainless expansion bolts and shall meet OSHA standard 1910.27 requirements.

b. The ladder rails & supports shall be all welded aluminum construction. Rails and wall supports shall be solid 3/8-inch x 2-1/2 inch flat stock, and rungs shall have a 1-1/4-inch diameter with serrated surface extruded into the rung for slip resistance. The minimum design live load shall be a single concentrated load of 200 lbs.

c. Rung spacing shall be uniform and not exceed 12-inches, the minimum clear length of rungs shall be 15-1/4- inches, and the distance from the center line of the rung to the nearest permanent object shall not be less than 7-inches.

d. The ladder extension assembly shall be constructed of aluminum and stainless steel. The aluminum housing shall mount to the ladder by means of grade 316 stainless steel channel clamps secured to the ladder rungs with grade 316 stainless steel "U" bolts. The aluminum telescoping post shall extend 42-inches above the top of the housing and lock into position with a grade 316 stainless steel pin.

16. All wall penetrations shall be formed utilizing cast-in-place sleeves or cast in couplings, Wall sleeves shall be appropriately sized for use with a mechanical type water seal. Mechanical seals shall be “Linkseal" as manufactured by Thunderline, or equivalent.

17. Utility Anchors: 7/8-inch minimum diameter galvanized steel pulling irons which shall be cast into the manhole walls and not penetrate completely through manhole walls.

18. Manhole Sump: a sump with galvanized grate and a minimum depth of two inches shall be provided and located as indicated on the plans.

19. Exterior Surfaces: refer to waterproofing within this specification.

20. Cleaning and Inspection:

a. All castings which have passed the required tests shall be thoroughly cleaned, inside and out, without the aid of acid or other liquid, and shall be subjected to careful inspection and hammer tests.

b. The castings shall be of the dimensions indicated on the Plans and shall be free from sand or blowholes and cold shuts. No plugging or stopping of

325

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

holes will be allowed. Casting lines and excess materials shall be ground smooth.

21. Manhole Steps: manhole steps shall conform to standards as shown on the Plans. Steps shall be of extruded aluminum or cast iron. Castings shall be true to pattern and free from flaws. All iron castings shall be thoroughly cleaned and then coated with hot coal tar before being delivered. Embedded portions of aluminum steps shall also be heavily coated with bituminous material before being cast into concrete.

22. Waterproofing: all exterior surfaces of precast structures shall be waterproofed with an elastomeric membrane. Membrane shall be hydrocarbon resistant, rubber reinforced asphalt which forms a highly elastomeric waterproof coating, as manufactured by Karnak Corporation “229AR Elastomeric,” or approved equal. The membrane shall be shop applied and touched up in the field as required to repair damage during shipping and to seal field penetrations. Membrane shall be applied at a minimum rate of 4 gallons per 100 sq. ft. to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 40 mils. Joints and cracks shall be filled and reinforced per manufacturer’s recommendations.

J. Aggregate Base

1. Aggregate bases shall be gradation No. 6 crushed stone at depths as indicated in the Plans.

K. Grout

1. Non-shrinking, non-metallic grout shall be in accordance with ASTM C150 premixed compound capable of minimum compression strength of 4,000 pounds per square inch (psi).

2. Water shall be clean and free from deleterious substances.

3. Non-metallic non-shrinking grout shall be factory pre-mixed requiring only water addition in the field.

4. Shrinkage, if any, shall be in accordance with ASTM C827.

L. Backfill

1. Backfill material shall be in accordance with applicable parts of the Contract Documents and approved by the Engineer.

326

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A


A. Confirmation of Existing Conditions:

1. The Contractor shall perform additional underground exploratory investigations as indicated on the Plans (i.e., test pits, utility detection services, etc.) or as directed the Engineer to determine a clear path/space for all new water main items. Verify the location and depth of the existing mains where applicable or as directed by the Designer. Revisions are to be made to the relevant Plans by the Contractor based on the underground exploratory investigations. These alterations are to be submitted to the designer, along with the accompanying duct bank profile and detail drawings, for approval prior to proceeding with the work in the field.

B. Handling Material:

1. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to the pipes or coatings. Pipes or fittings shall not be dropped.

2. Pipes and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection before installation. All defective pipes and fittings shall be removed from the site at no cost to the Department. If any portion of a pipe is cracked or defective the entire length shall be removed.

C. General:

1. Shape trench bottoms to give uniform circumferential support to the full length of each section of pipe.

2. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, water pipe shall be installed with a minimum of 4-feet 6-inches of cover below finish grade.

3. Place bedding material below the bottom of the pipe. Smooth the bottom of the trench to provide continuous support under the pipe. Carefully lower the pipe into the trench, avoiding disturbance of the bed and trench walls, and damage to the pipe. Lay the pipe with the bells on the upgrade end.

4. Clean the coupling ring groove and install the rubber gasket. Lubricate the gasket with the lubricant supplied by the manufacturer of the pipe. Taking care to avoid the entrance of foreign material, join the sections. Check joints to insure proper seal. For ductile iron water mains install 2 brass wedges per joint, unless this requirement is waived by the municipality, or as required differently by the municipality.

5. Remove all lumps, blisters and excess coating from the bell. Wire brush the inside of the bell and wipe clean.

327

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

6. Where a gland is used at a valve or fitting, the gland and rubber gasket will then be placed on the spigot end of the pipe. The pipe will then be pushed forward to seal the spigot end in the bell and the gasket pressed into place within the bell. The gland will then be moved into place and bolted. Tighten the bolts to a torque range of 60-90 foot pounds.

7. After installation of the pipe to the proper line and grade, place granular around the pipe to the top of the pipe, carefully tamping under the haunches. Backfill shall be compacted as required by respective material item.

8. Push-on joints shall be made up by first inserting the gasket into the groove of the bell and applying a thin film of non-toxic gasket lubricant uniformly over the inner surface. The chamfered end of the plain pipe shall be inserted into the gasket and forced past it until it seats against the bottom of the socket.

9. When cutting pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by machine leaving a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Cut ends of pipe shall be beveled to conform to the manufactured spigot end. Cement lining shall be undamaged.

10. Whenever encountered within the trench, existing utilities, including those not shown on the plans, shall be supported.

11. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of AWWA Standard Specification C600, except as otherwise noted herein. A firm, even bearing throughout the length of the pipe shall be constructed by tamping selected material at the sides of the pipe up to the springline. Blocking will not be permitted.

12. When construction is not in progress, including lunchtime; the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by watertight plug or other approved means. The Contractor shall keep the trench free from water while the pipe is being installed.

13. Whenever the pipes require cutting, an approved saw, wheel or hydraulic type cutter shall be used. This work shall be done by the Contractor without extra compensation, in a manner satisfactory to the Designer, and only experienced workers shall be engaged thereon.

14. Fittings, in addition to those shown on the plans, shall be provided, if required, for crossing utilities, which may be encountered.

15. All bends shall be installed with joint restraint gaskets to restrain the bend to the pipe. Additional joint restraint gaskets will be required in each direction from the bend as indicated in Table 1.

Table 1: Number of Restrained Joints, Restrained Joint Lengths (in feet)

328

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

100 psi, Cohesive Granular Soils, 18 Foot Pipe Lengths Fitting Type

Pipe Size 90 Degree 45 Degree 22.5 Degree 11.25 Degree

4” 0,11’ 0,5’ 0,2’ 0,1’ 6” 0,11’ 0,5’ 0,2’ 0,1’ 8” 0,14’ 0,6’ 0,3’ 0,1’ 12” 1,21’ 0,9’ 0,4’ 0,2’

0,2’ = 0 joints on either side of fitting, 2 feet on either side of fitting must be restrained 1,21’ = 1 joint on either side of the fitting, 21 feet on either side of the fitting must be restrained.

16. Calculations for pressures greater than 100 psi or for other soil types will be performed by the Designer.

17. Installation of short pieces on either side of a fitting will not be permitted.

18. Thrust Restraint: Provide thrust restraint at joints using “Mega-lugs” or approved equal. The use of concrete thrust blocks shall be only as shown on the plans or at the direction of the Designer. Where thrust bocks are required, place 4 mil polyethylene around the valve or fitting prior to placing concrete. Place concrete thrust blocks and anchors at all valves and fittings to the schedule shown on the Contract Drawings. Do not backfill until the concrete has cured 24 hours.

19. Continuity of Services: Do not interrupt existing services without Designer’s approval. Schedule interruptions in advance, according to Designer's instructions. Submit, request for interruption with methods proposed to minimize length of interruption, in writing. Interruptions shall be scheduled at such times of day and work to minimize impact on rail operations. Provide 72 hours notice to ConnDOT Rail Operations and Metro North Railroad prior to any interruption to service to rail yard facilities.

D. Separation of Potable Water Mains and Sewer Lines

1. Parallel Installation: Water mains shall be laid at least 10 feet horizontally from any existing or proposed sewer or non-potable line. The distance shall be measured edge to edge. In cases where it is not practical to maintain a ten-foot separation, it is permissible to install a water main closer to a sewer, provided that the water main is laid in a separate trench or on an undisturbed earth shelf located on one side of the sewer at such an elevation that the bottom of the water main is at least 18 inches above the top of the sewer.

2. Crossings: Water mains crossing sewers shall be laid to provide a minimum vertical distance of 18 inches between the outside of the water main and the outside of the sewer. The water main shall cross over the sewer. At crossings, one full length of water pipe shall be located so both joints will be as far from the sewer as possible.

329

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

3. When it is impossible to obtain the horizontal and vertical separation specified, construct both the water main and the sewer or non-potable line with restrained joint cement lined ductile iron pipe.

E. Leakage Testing:

1. The underground pipe lines shall be flushed and hydrostatically tested for strength and leakage in accordance with FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 3-10 Installation and Maintenance of Private Service Mains and Their Appurtenances by the Contractor. FM Global shall be notified at least two weeks in advance of planned testing. Underground mains shall be completed and submitted to FM Global to verify proper testing. The tests for leakage shall last for at least one hour and may be required to last 2 hours. The additional water needed to maintain the required pressure shall be accurately measured in a manner approved by the Designer. The Designer shall be notified 48 hours in advance of testing and will be present during testing. a. Leakage: The maximum allowable leakage for pipelines shall be

according to the following formula: L = S x D x P1/2 / 148,000

L = leakage (gallons per hour) S = length (feet), the lessor of the actual length being tested or the maximum length for determining leakage. Maximum length for determining leakage is 2000 feet. D = pipe diameter (inches) P = test pressure (psi)

2. The Contractor shall repair all leaks discovered under any of the required tests at no additional cost to the Department. The Contractor shall furnish all apparatus, material and labor necessary for making the tests.

3. The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for testing equipment and providing the water for test purposes and shall pay the expense of these arrangements.

4. The Contractor shall dispose of the test water to the site sewer system. Do not discharge to any combined sewer overflow (i.e., the 66-inch brick conduit or the twin box culvert).

F. Disinfection:

1. Upon completion of the pipe line and the strength and leakage testing, the interior of the pipe shall be flushed and then disinfected in all parts. Water supply control (gate) valves installed shall be in the full open position during flushing procedures. Water mains shall be flushed for a minimum of five (5) minutes after water flows clear and free of visible obstructions. The disinfection shall result in eliminating from the new pipe line all evidence of contamination, as determined by tests of the bacterial content of samples of water taken from the new water

330

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

main. The disinfection may be accomplished by introducing into all the various parts of the new water mains a liquid solution containing one percent available chlorine in such volume that the rate of dosage of the water mains shall be at least 50 parts per million of available chlorine. The contact period for this disinfection shall be at least 24 hours, and a longer period will be required if tests of water samples residual chlorine levels show it to be necessary for proper disinfection.

2. The Contractor shall furnish and install suitable interim testing plugs, caps, pumps, pipe connections and other appurtenances as necessary and all labor required for testing bacteria and disinfecting the water mains.

3. Any temporary equipment or materials needed to flush underground mains shall be provided during construction and capable of handling the required water flows. Flushing shall be conducted as follows:

Pipe Size (in.) Minimum Flow Rate (GPM) 4 400 6 900 8 1560 12 3520

4. The Contractor shall dispose of the test water to the site sanitary sewer system.

5. The water system shall be flushed out after its disinfection.

6. All work shall be done in accordance with AWWA C601.

7. Connections at cuttings shall be swabbed with 50 PPM solution of chlorine at locations when other methods are not applicable.

8. Provide one week notice to the Engineer prior to performing disinfection.

G. Underground Utility Marking: underground utility marking tape shall be set one foot 6 inches above, and running parallel with the horizontal projection of the centerline of the completed pipe.

H. Pipe Insulation: Where new water pipe has less than 4 feet 6 inches of cover beneath finish grade, the pipe shall be individually insulated. Insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The insulation shall be covered with a waterproof coating.

I. Shallow Depth Protection: Where new water pipe has less than 4 feet 6 inches of cover beneath finish grade, install shallow depth protection over the pipe as indicated on the plans. Install at least 3 inches of compressible material over the pipe and insulation before pouring the concrete for the shallow depth protection. Install the steel plates on top of the shallow depth protection.

331

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

J. Waterstops: Place concrete waterstop full width of trench from bottom of trench to 12” above pipe every 100’ or as directed by the Engineer. A minimum width of 6” is required for each waterstop.

K. Valves, Couplings, and Fittings:

1. Check operation of all valves before installing.

2. Install per accepted manufacturer's written instructions and the requirements of AWWA C500. All bolt threads shall be lubricated with graphite and oil prior to installation.

3. Install support blocking as shown on the plans.

4. Valve box covers shall be seated flush with the surface of the proposed ground or paved surface. Covers located in areas surfaced or to be surfaced with asphalt or concrete shall be set in a 24-inch diameter x 6-inch thick concrete ring. The concrete ring shall be omitted in other locations.

5. Valves shall be tested prior to installation. Approval by Designer must be obtained prior to backfilling.

6. Each flexible expansion joint shall be pressure tested prior to shipment against its own restraint to a minimum of 350 psi (250 psi for flexible expansion joints 2 inch and 30 inches’ diameter and larger.) A minimum 2:1 safety factor, determined from the published pressure rating, shall apply. FM Global Approval for the 3 inch through 12 inch sizes is required.

7. Anchors and concrete blocking, as required, shall be constructed in locations as directed by the Designer.

8. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve per manufacturer’s requirements.

L. The hydrant connecting pipe shall be the same depth as the distribution main and have a concrete collar 1’-8” x 3’ x 1’ constructed 6 inches below finished grade. The hydrant shall be set in a 3’ x 2’ x 2’ drain pocket of ¾” crushed stone and set on a hydrant “shoe” manufactured specifically for that purpose. Thrust blocking may be required depending on soil type. The hydrant and valve box shall be set plumb. The pumper nozzle shall face the street.

M. Excavation and Backfill: shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Engineer.

N. Installation of Precast Structures

1. The Contractor shall install structures as indicated on the Plans and as approved by the Designer.

332

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

2. Prior to burial and installation, ensure waterproofing has been applied and allowed to cure completely per manufacturer requirements. Field-apply two (2) coats of concrete sealer to exposed exterior surfaces of the precast structre around the duct bank penetrations, conduit penetrations, frame, and field joints. Sealer shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and must be of high quality to prevent water entry.

3. All manholes shall be installed to the elevations and locations as indicated on the Plans and as directed by the Designer. Place the Precast base units on a bedding material base with a thickness least 12 inches after compaction or of greater thickness and compaction if specified elsewhere. The sub base shall be checked for levelness prior to setting. Install top slabs according the Contract Drawings at finished grade. Adjust to grade with pre-approved 3” precast grade rings.

4. Weld precast structure identification names to each cover. The identification names shall be as depicted on the Contract Drawings or as directed by Engineer.

5. Thoroughly clean all manholes, steps, frames and covers of all debris and foreign matter.

O. Polyethylene Encasement

1. All proposed ductile iron pipe water mains and fire mains of any size and associated connections, fittings, gate valves, tapping sleeves, etc. are to be encased in Polyethylene as specified below.

2. The Contractor shall remove all lumps of clay, mud, cinders, etc. on the pipe surface before installation of the polyethylene encasement. During installation, soil or embedment material shall not be trapped between the pipe and the polyethylene.

3. Sufficient slack shall be provided in contouring to prevent stretching the polyethylene where it bridges irregular surfaces, such as bell-spigot interfaces, bolted joints, or fittings and to prevent damage to the polyethylene caused by backfilling operations. Overlaps shall be secured with adhesive tape.

4. For installation below the water table circumferential wraps of tape shall be placed at 2 feet intervals along the barrel of the pipe to minimize the space between the polyethylene and the pipe.

5. Installation on ductile iron pipes shall be in accordance with methods A or B as specified in AWWA-C105 and below:

a. Method A: Cut polyethylene tube to a length approximately 2 feet longer that the pipe section. Slip the tube around the pipe, centering it to provide a one-foot overlay on each adjacent pipe section and bunching it

333

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

accordion-fashion lengthwise until it clears the pipe ends. Lower the pipe into the trench and make up the pipe joint with the preceding section of pipe. A shallow bell hole must be made at the joints to facilitate installation of the polyethylene tube. After assembling the pipe joint, make the overlap of the polyethylene tube. Pull the bunched polyethylene from the preceding length of pipe, slip it over the length of the new length of pipe, and secure it in place. Then slip the end of the polyethylene from the new pipe section over the end of the first wrap until it overlaps the joint at the end of the preceding length of pipe. Secure the overlap in place. Take up the slack along the barrel of the pipe, securing the fold at quarter points. Proceed to the next section of pipe in the same manner.

b. Method B: Cut polyethylene tube to a length approximately one foot shorter than that of the pipe section. Slip the tube around the pipe, centering it to provide 6 inches of bare pipe at each end. Take up the slack width at the top to the pipe for a snug but not tight fit along the barrel of the pipe securing the fold at quarter points. Secure the ends with polyethylene tape.

6. Before making up a joint, slip a three-foot length of polyethylene tube over the end of the preceding pipe section, bunching it accordion-fashion lengthwise. Alternatively, place a three-foot length of polyethylene sheet in the trench under the joint to be made. After completing the joint, pull the three-foot length of polyethylene over or around the joint, overlapping the polyethylene previously installed on each adjacent section of pipe by at least one-foot. Snug each end and secure with polyethylene tape. A shallow bell hole is necessary and shall be made at joints to facilitate the installation of the polyethylene tube or sheet.

7. Care shall be taken when backfilling to prevent damage to the wrapping.

8. Repairs: repair cuts, tears, punctures, or damage to polyethylene with adhesive tape or with a short length of polyethylene sheet, or with a tube cut open, wrapped around the pipe to cover the damaged area, and secure in place.

9. Openings in encasement: provide openings for branches, service taps, blow-offs, air valves, and similar appurtenances by cutting an “X” in the polyethylene and temporarily folding back the film. After the appurtenance is installed, tape the slack securely to the appurtenance, and repair the cut and any other damaged areas in the polyethylene, with any resulting damaged areas being repaired as described previously.

10. To make direct service taps, apply two or three wraps of adhesive tape completely around the polyethylene encased pipe to cover the area where the tapping machine and chain will be mounted. After the tapping machine is mounted, the corporation stop is installed directly through the tape and polyethylene. After the direct tap is

334

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

completed, the entire circumferential area shall be closely inspected for damage and repaired if needed.

11. Junctions between wrapped and unwrapped pipe: Where polyethylene wrapped pipe joins an adjacent pipe that is not wrapped, extend the polyethylene wrap to cover the adjacent pipe for a distance of at least three feet. Secure the end with circumferential turns of adhesive tape.


Ductile iron water pipe will be measured for payment per linear foot, including couplings & fittings, completed and accepted.

Gate valves will be measured for payment and paid for at the Contract unit price bid for the actual number of gate valves installed and approved by the Engineer.

Hydrant assemblies will be measured for payment by the actual number of hydrant assemblies, installed and approved by the Engineer. The assembly is composed of a hydrant, associated valves, fittings, pipe, and couplings to the pay limits identified in the Contract Plans,

Precast concrete valve vault item will be measured for paid for at the Contract lump sum bid. This price shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials and tools required to perform this work.

Polyethylene encasement of pipe item will be measured for payment per linear foot completed in place, which price shall include the cost of installing, repairing, sealing, taping, and all associated work.

Excavation, Trench Excavation, Rock-in-Trench Excavation, No. 6 Crushed Stone, Granular Fill and Suitable Backfill Material shall be paid separately under the applicable Items.

No direct payment will be made for utility protection slabs. Utility protection slabs will be paid for under the applicable Special Provision.

335

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1301082A, #1301084A, #1302004A, #1302006A #1302918A, #1303204A, #1304083A

Basis of Payment:

Ductile iron water pipe will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot, complete in place, including all materials, equipment, testing, tools and labor incidental thereto. Payment shall include full compensation for furnishing and installing pipe, fittings, couplings, insulation, waterstops, and shallow depth protection where required.

Trench Excavation, Rock-In-Trench Excavation and Bedding Material shall be paid for separately under the applicable item.

Pay Item Pay Unit

8” Ductile Iron Pipe (Water Main) L.F. 12” Ductile Iron Pipe (Water Main) L.F. 8” Gate Valve (Water Main) EA. 12” Gate Valve (Water Main) EA. Precast Concrete Valve Vault (Water Main) LS Hydrant Assembly (Water Main) EA. Polyethylene Encasement of Pipe (Water Main) L.F.

336

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1302047A

ITEM #1302047A - RESET GATE BOXES

Description:

Work under this item shall consist of resetting all water and gas gate boxes at the location shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer and in conformity with these specifications.

Materials:

The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to all equipment and materials incurred during resetting of the gate boxes. All repairs or replacements due to damage or loss by the Contractor shall be made at the Contractor's expense.


The Contractor shall reset all water and gas gate boxes where impacted by construction activities or as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall raise or lower the existing water or gas gate box so that the top of the box is flush with finished grade. No disruption to the gas or water lines will be allowed to carry out this work


This work will be measured for payment by the number of gate boxes reset, complete and accepted.

Basis of Payment:

This work will be paid for at the contract unit price each for "Reset Gate Boxes" which price shall include all equipment, labor, delivery and incidentals thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Reset Gate Boxes EA

337

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM# 1500006A

ITEM #1500006A – UTILITY ADJUSTMENT (ESTIMATED COST PLUS) Description: This work shall consist of payment to utility companies by the Contractor for the utility company’s work to install, relocate, and/or adjust certain utility facilities which are affected by the project. The Contractor is responsible to hire and coordinate with the affected utility companies to adjust their respective facilities affected by the Contract work, and to coordinate other Contract work required to facilitate the utility company’s work. The utility work required in this Contract includes: A new connection to South Central Connecticut Regional Water Authority (RWA) existing 16” main running along Long Wharf Street with a 12” water main service connection to a new meter pit located in proximity to existing (and to be decommissioned by the EEC project) Long Wharf Guard Booth. The work also includes obtaining necessary permits, all necessary fittings, gate valves, restraints, wye-tee and fittings associated with 8” domestic water main service, and a new meter pit & associated equipment as required by RWA and identified in the Contract Documents. This work shall include the coordination with RWA, Metro-North Railroad and the Department for connection at RWA infrastructure within Long Wharf Street. Any damage caused by the Contractor or Subcontractors, as determined by the Engineer, shall be corrected by the Contractor in accordance with this specification. The Contractor shall coordinate Contract work required in support of the utility company’s work. Materials: All materials shall be provided by the Contractor, unless otherwise provided by RWA, and shall meet the current standards of the affected service. Construction Methods: The Contractor shall perform all work in coordination with RWA, MNR, and the Department and as directed by the Engineer. Certain work may require use of a licensed and/or certified tradesman when such work is required by local and/or state codes. Any RWA, or other utility customer's service interruption shall be done in a way that minimizes adverse impacts to the customer and affected utility. Any work and materials supplied by RWA, or other utility companies shall be on a billable basis to the Contractor.

338

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM# 1500006A

Method of Measurement The item “Utility Adjustment (Estimated Cost Plus)”, will be measured for payment based on the actual work completed. Basis of Payment: The sum of money shown on the estimate and in the itemized proposal as “Estimated Cost Plus” for this work will be considered the price bid even though payment will be made only for actual work performed. The estimated cost figure is not to be altered in any manner by the bidder. Should the bidder alter the amount shown, the altered figure will be disregarded and the original price will be used to determine the total amount for the contract. The item “Utility Adjustment (Estimated Cost Plus)”, will be paid for as outlined under Article 1.09.04 – Extra and Cost-Plus work. Payment will include all equipment, materials and labor associated with this item. Corrective work required to repair damage caused by the Contractor or its Subcontractors shall not be measured for payment.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Utility Adjustment (Estimated Cost Plus) Estpls

339

Rev. Date 10/18/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501900A

ITEM #1501900A –UNDERGROUND PROPANE GAS LINE

General:

Scope:

A. This item includes the demolition of existing underground propane gas piping and the installation of new underground propane gas piping to reconnect the tanks to the existing yard propane system. A portion of the work will cross under railroad tracks where a utility protection slab will be required and paid for under a separate item.

References:

A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be in accordance with the latest applicable standards of the ASME ANSI, NFPA, ASTM and UL with regard to material, design, construction and testing.

Submittals:

A. Submit the following in accordance with Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.05.02 and NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR – SUBMITTALS.

B. The Contractor shall prepare detailed designs of restraints and anchors for LPG piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Product Data: For each type of material included in the materials section.

D. Shop Drawings: For facility LPG piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. The shops shall be submitted with applicable calculations signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer registered in the state of Connecticut:

1. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for pressure regulator assembly

2. Details restraints, supports, and anchoring systems for the piping.

E. Informational Submittals:

1. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer

2. Welding certificates.

340

Rev. Date 10/18/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501900A

3. Field quality-control reports.

4. Warranties

F. Close out Submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For LPG equipment and accessories to include in the operation, and maintenance manuals specified in Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.08.14 and described in NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR – CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS.

Materials:

Piping, Tubes, and Fittings: A. Corrugated stainless steel Tubing (CSST): ASTM E 84,

1. Tube: Tubing shall be 300 series Stainless Steel Strip conforming to ASTM A240 rated for 25 psi and have an elevated pressure rating of 125G for sizes up to 1 ¼” and 25G for 1 ½” and 2”. Tubing shall not be subjected to heat treating or annealing after the corrugation forming operation.

2. Jacketing: Jacket shall be an extruded fire-retarded engineered polymer designed to enhance the energy dissipating properties of the flexible gas piping. Conductive jacket shall conform to ASTM E-84 (UL723) flame spread rating not to exceed 25 and ASTM-E84 (UL723) smoke density rating shall not exceed 50. Conductive jacket shall be resistant to UV.

3. Fittings: fittings shall be made of yellow brass and be tested and listed by CSA International for use in concealed locations. The fittings shall provide a metal to metal seal. Brass fittings shall not contain gaskets or O-rings to facilitate the seal between the tubing and the fitting.

4. Quality Assurance: CSST shall be listed by CSA International to the performance requirements of ANSI LC 1 / CSA 6.26. The conductive jacket shall meet the requirements of ANSI LC 1 / CSA 6.26, Part 5.16.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedules 40 and 80, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234 for butt welding and socket welding.

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends.

341

Rev. Date 10/18/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501900A

4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.

i. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

Joining Materials:

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for LPG.

Manual Gas Shutoff Valves:

A. Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller for Liquid Service: Comply with ASME B16.33 and UL 842.

1. CWP Rating: 250 psig.

2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.

3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

4. Listing by CSA or agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

5. Valves 1-1/4 inch and larger shall be suitable for LPG service, with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller for Vapor Service: Comply with ASME B16.33.




4. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

5. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inch to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

2. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.

342

Rev. Date 10/18/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501900A

3. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.

4. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.

5. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.

6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Article.


8. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

9. Service: Suitable for LPG service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

Labeling and Identifying:

Detectable Warning Tape: Warning tape shall meet the requirement set forth in Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.05.15 – Facilities Construction – Markings for Underground Facilities and comply with APWA color code requirements.



Examination:

A. Examine roughing-in for LPG piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before piping installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Relocation and Demolition:

A. Purge and make existing LPG piping to remain safe in accordance with NFPA 58, NFPA 54, and the Connecticut Gas Equipment and Piping Code before piping work begins.

Preparation:

A. Inspect LPG piping according to NFPA 58, NFPA 54, and the Connecticut Gas Equipment and Piping Code to determine that LPG utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

B. Comply with NFPA 58, NFPA 54, and the Connecticut Gas Equipment and Piping Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

343

Rev. Date 10/18/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501900A

Piping Installation:


B. Comply with NFPA 58, and NFPA 54, and the Connecticut Gas Equipment and Piping Code requirements for installation and purging of LPG piping.

C. Plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved by the Designer.

D. Install underground, LPG piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

F. Joints for connection to inlets and outlets on regulators, and valves may be flanged or threaded to match the equipment.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install LPG piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Do not use LPG piping as grounding electrode.

Piping Joint Construction:

A. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.


A. Warning tape is to be installed in the fill over all gas lines at a minimum depth of one (1) foot above the pipe and as required by Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.05.15 – Facilities Construction – Markings for Underground Facilities, except where below subgrade under slabs the tape shall be installed 6” above the pipe.

Field Quality Control:

A. Perform tests and inspections.

344

Rev. Date 10/18/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501900A

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test, inspect, and purge LPG according to NFPA 58 and NFPA 54 and the Connecticut Gas Equipment and Piping Code.

C. LPG piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

Training:

A. Refer to Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.08.14 for additional information.

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain LPG equipment.

Outdoor Piping Schedule:

A. Underground LPG vapor piping shall be the following:

1. Underground piping shall consist of 300 type stainless steel cast with an integral polyethylene sleeve. The piping system shall be designed to withstand superimposed loads. The sleeve shall have internal vent channels running lengthwise to direct any leakage along the pipe to the end fitting.

2. Underground fittings shall be made of yellow brass and be tested and listed by CSA International for concealed use. Joints shall be a metal-to-metal seal with no gaskets.

Details of Manufacturers Warranties And Guarantees:


B. The manufacturer shall agree to repair or replace at their own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, any part of the equipment which is found to be defective, due to faulty design, workmanship or material for a minimum period of eighteen months after issuance of certificate of compliance. If it is necessary to return the equipment for warranty repairs, the manufacturer will bear the cost of transportation in both directions and shall be responsible for loss and damage to the equipment during shipment and while in his possession.

C. The manufacturer shall clearly state any exceptions to the above warranty with submittals.

345

Rev. Date 10/18/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501900A


A. All work associated with the propane tank relocation and piping system shall be included in the Lump Sum price for “Propane Tank Relocation.”

B. No direct payment will be made for excavation and backfill. Those items will be paid for under the applicable Special Provisions.

C. No direct payment will be made for utility protection slabs. Utility protection slabs will be paid for under the applicable Special Provision.

Basis of Payment: Propane site work will be paid for on a per linear foot basis.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Underground Propane Gas Piping LF

346

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

ITEM #1501901A –RELOCATE PROPANE GAS TANKS

General:

Scope:

A. This specification describes the requirements for the relocation of two existing propane gas tanks located in the New Haven Rail Yard and the reconnection of these tanks to the existing switch heater propane gas piping system.

B. The relocation portion of this work includes the purging and making safe of two 1990 gallon ASME propane tanks and the relocation of these tanks to a new location within the New Haven Rail Yard. The tanks will be moved to a new structural pad and be secured to new saddles.

C. The piping portion of this work includes the demolition of existing aboveground propane gas piping and the installation of new aboveground piping to reconnect the tanks to the existing yard propane gas system.

D. Propane Gas Tanks relocation shall not begin until the Contractor held a pre-relocation coordination meeting with the Engineer, the Department, and MNR to schedule work with ongoing operations and determine limits of operations. This meeting shall take place a minimum of 3 weeks in advance.

E. This specification also includes the fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) floor grating, railing, stairs, and structural elements located between the two relocated Propane Gas Tanks

References:

A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be in accordance with the latest applicable standards of the ASME ANSI, NFPA, ASTM and UL with regard to material, design, construction and testing.

FRP Products Quality Assurance:

A. The material covered by these specifications shall be furnished by ISO-9001:2000 certified manufacturer of proven ability who has regularly engaged in the manufacture and installation of FRP systems similar to that indicated for this project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in work.

B. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work.

347

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

FRP Products Design Criteria:

A. The design of FRP products including connections shall be in accordance with governing building codes and standards as applicable.

B. Design live loads of FRP gratings shall not be less than 250 pounds per sq. ft. uniformly

distributed or 4,000 pounds concentrated unless specifically stated otherwise in drawings and/or supplementary conditions. Grating deflection at the center of a simple span shall not exceed .25 inches.

C. Design, engineer, fabricate, and install the following FRP fabrications to withstand the structural

loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Structural members shall be designed to support all applied loads. Deflection in any direction shall not be more than L/180 of span for structural members. Connections shall be designed to transfer the loads.

D. Structural Performance of Top and Bottom Rails and Supports:

1. Capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 200 pounds, applied to top rail at any point and in any direction.

2. Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 50 pounds per linear foot applied to the top

rail horizontally with a simultaneous load of 100 pounds per linear foot applied vertically downward.

3. Design need not provide for both concentrated and uniform loads to be applied

concurrently.

Submittals:

A. Submit the following in accordance with Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.05.02 and NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR – SUBMITTALS.

B. Product Data: For each type of material included in the materials section including, where applicable, design tables with materials limits.

C. The Contractor shall prepare detailed designs of restraints and anchors for LPG piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis with calculations signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer registered in the state of Connecticut, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1. Shop Drawings: For facility LPG piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. The shops shall be submitted with applicable

348

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

calculations signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer registered in the state of Connecticut:

2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for pressure regulator assembly

3. Details restraints, supports, and anchoring systems for the tanks, piping, and accessories used on the equipment pad.

D. Shop drawings of all FRP structural members, standard railings, gratings, treads and

appurtenances shall be submitted to the Designer for approval. Shop drawings shall be detailed to include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Dimensions of stairs, gratings and railings, and structural members. 2. Sectional assembly. 3. Location and identification mark. 4. Size and type of supporting frames or framework required. 5. Anchorage required

E. Design Calculations of FRP structural members: Signed and sealed by a qualified licensed and registered Connecticut Professional Engineer.

F. Samples of each type of FRP grating, stairs, structural members, and railing proposed shall be submitted for approval prior to placement of purchase order.

G. Informational Submittals:

1. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer

2. Welding certificates.

3. Field quality-control reports.

H. Close out Submittals:

1. Warranties

2. Operation and Maintenance Data: For LPG equipment and accessories to include in the operation, and maintenance manuals specified in Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.08 and described in NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR – CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS.

Shipping and Storage Instructions:

349

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

A. Refer to Standard Specifications Article 1.06.03 for additional information. B. Wherever practical, all systems, sub-systems and structures shall be shop fabricated and

assembled into the largest practical size suitable for transporting. C. All materials and equipment necessary for the fabrication and installation of the stair structures,

structural shapes, gratings and railing systems shall be stored before, during, and after shipment in a manner to prevent cracking, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping or damage of any kind to the materials or equipment, including damage due to over exposure to the sun. Any material which, in the opinion of the Designer, has become damaged as to be unfit for use shall be promptly removed from the site of work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the damaged material or its removal.

D. Identify and match-mark all materials, items, and fabrications for installation and field assembly.

Materials:

Piping, Tubes, and Fittings:

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedules 40 and 80, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234 for butt welding and socket welding.

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends.

4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.

Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves. Piping Specialties:

A. Flexible Piping Joints:

1. Approved for LPG service.

2. Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.

3. Minimum working pressure of 250 psig and 250 deg F operating temperature.

4. Flanged- or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of minimum 1 ½”-inch misalignment.

350

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

5. Maximum 36-inch length for liquid LPG lines.

B. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller.

3. Strainer Screen: 40 or 60-mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.


C. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.

Joining Materials:

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for LPG.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

Manual Gas Shutoff Valves:

A. See "PROPANE TANK PIPING DETAIL" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller for Liquid Service: Comply with ASME B16.33 and UL 842.




4. Listing by CSA or agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

5. Valves 1-1/4 inch and larger shall be suitable for LPG service, with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

351

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller for Vapor Service: Comply with ASME B16.33.




4. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

5. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inch to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

2. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.

3. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.

4. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.

5. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.

6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Article.


8. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

9. Service: Suitable for LPG service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. Gas Valves:

A. Hydrostatic Relief Valves: Comply with NFPA 58.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

Engineered Controls International, Inc.; RegO Products.

352

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.

Murray Equipment, Inc. Sherwood; a division of Harsco Corporation.

2. Operating Pressure: 350 psig.

3. Body: Brass.

4. Spring: Stainless steel.

5. Disc and Seat: Nitrile.

6. Brass body and stainless-steel, spring-operated valve with resilient rubber disc seat and protective cap.

7. Factory set and tested.

8. Listing: Valves listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

9. Valve shall reseat after relieving pressure.

B. Excess Flow Valves: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Steel, REGO #A3282C for 1-1/4”, or REGO #A3272G for ¾”, or approved equal.

C. Fill Valve: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide REGO 7579, or approved equal

Pressure Regulators:

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for LPG.

2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.

3. Elevation compensator.

4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller.

5. Coordinate pressure set point requirements with METRO NORTH RAIL.

B. Service (First-Stage) Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80:

1. Single stage and suitable for LPG.

353

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.

3. Elevation compensator.

4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller.

Storage Container Accessories:

A. Liquid outlet and vapor inlet and outlet connections shall have shutoff valves with excess-flow safety shutoff valves and bypass and back-pressure check valves with smaller than 0.039-inch drill-size hole to equalize pressure. Liquid-fill connection shall have backflow check valve. These valves shall be installed directly to tank with no bushing between tank and valve

1. Connections: Color-code and tag valves to indicate type

Liquid fill and outlet, red. Vapor inlet and outlet, yellow.

B. Level gage shall indicate current level of liquid in the container. Gages shall also indicate storage container contents; e.g., "Propane."

C. Pressure relief valves, type and number as required by NFPA 58, connected to vapor space and having discharge piping same size as relief-valve outlet and long enough to extend at least 84 inches directly overhead. Identify relief valves as follows:

1. Discharge pressure in psig.

2. Rate of discharge for standard air in cfm.

3. Manufacturer's name.

4. Catalog or model number. FRP Products: A. General Requirements:

1. Materials used in the manufacture of the FRP products shall be new stock of the best quality and shall be free from all defects and imperfections that might affect the performance of the finished product.

2. All materials shall be of the kind and quality specified, and where the quality is

not specified, it shall be the best of the respective kinds and suitable for the purpose intended.

354

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

3. Pultruded FRP products: All FRP products and related components shall be manufactured using a pultruded process utilizing an isophthalic polyester with flame retardant and ultra-violet (UV) inhibitor additives. A synthetic surface veil shall be the outermost layer covering the exterior surface. The FRP shapes shall achieve a flame spread of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM test method E84.

4. After fabrication, all cut ends, holes and abrasions of FRP shapes shall be sealed

with a compatible resin coating to prevent intrusion of moisture. 5. All exposed surfaces shall be smooth and true to form. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Strongwell b. CorGrate Fiberglass Systems c. Structural Fiberglass, Inc. d. Or approved Equal.

B. Structural Shapes and Plates

1. Material - Structural shapes and plate shall be made from isophthalic polyester

resin with fire retardant additives to meet a flame rating of less than 25 per ASTM E-84 and meet the self-extinguishing requirements of ASTM D-635. All structural shapes shall contain a U. V. inhibitor.

2. Process

a. Manufactured by the pultrusion process. b. Structural FRP and plate members composition shall consist of a glass

fiber reinforced polyester or vinyl ester resin matrix, approximately 50% resin to glass ratio. A synthetic surface veil shall be the outermost layer covering the exterior surfaces. Glass strand rovings shall be used internally for longitudinal strength. Continuous strand glass mats shall be used internally for transverse strength.

c. The pultruded structural shapes shall be based on Series 500/525 shapes as

manufactured by Strongwell or approved equal from manufacturer’s listed above and shall meet the following minimum mechanical properties:

Properties Test Method Values Tensile Stress ASTM D638 30,000 psi Tensile Modulus ASTM D638 2.5 x 106 psi Compressive Stress ASTM D695 30,000 psi Compressive Modulus ASTM D695 2.5 x 106 psi

355

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

Flexural Stress ASTM D790 30,000 psi Flexural Modulus ASTM D790 1.6 x 106 psi Tensile Strength Full Section 20,000 psi Compressive Strength Full Section 20,000 psi Shear Strength ASTM D2344 5,500 psi Density ASTM D792 .058 - .062 lbs/in3 24 hr. Water Absorption ASTM D570 0.6% max Coef. of Thermal Expansion ASTM D696 4.4 x 10-6 in/in/°C Modulus of Elasticity Full Section 2.6 psi x 10

d. Pultruded Plate shall be based on Series 500/525 plate as manufactured by

Strongwell or approved equal from manufacturer’s listed above. Plate shall be 1” in thickness and meet the following minimum properties:

Properties Test Method Values Tensile Stress ASTM D638 20,000 psi Tensile Modulus ASTM D638 1.8 x 106 psi Compressive Stress ASTM D695 24,000 psi Compressive Modulus ASTM D695 1.8 x 106 psi Flexural Stress ASTM D790 30,000 psi Flexural Modulus ASTM D790 2 x 106 psi Bearing Stress ASTM D953 32,000 psi Notched Izod Impact, LW ASTM D256 20 ft-lbs/in Barcol Hardness ASTM D253 40 Density ASTM D792 .060 - .068 lbs/in3 24 hr. Water Absorption ASTM D570 0.6% max Coef. of Thermal Expansion ASTM D696 8.0. x 10-6 in/in/°C

e. Color of structural members shall be grey unless otherwise noted by Designer.

3. Attachment Accessories:

a. Attachment accessories for grating and railing structures shall be either

stainless steel type 316 or fiberglass bolts, nuts and saddle clips. Fiberglass bolts and clips shall be pultruded fiberglass reinforced vinyl ester. The hex shaped nut shall be thermoplastic. Plastic washers or fiberglass washers may be used. Size and quantity of fasteners shall be as determined by the FRP manufacturer.

b. Support brackets, angles, anchor bolts and mounting bolts shall be type

316 stainless steel. C. Standard Railings

356

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

1. Material

a. The rails and posts shall be 2” x 2” x .156” square tube or 1.90” O.D. x

1.51” I.D. round handrail system manufactured by the pultrusion process. If pickets are required, they are to be a minimum of 1” square tube. The pultruded parts shall be made with a fire retardant resin that meets the ASTM E-84 test for a flame spread of 25 or less. The resin matrix shall be polyester and shall contain a UV inhibitor. The parts must be coated with an industrial grade polyurethane coating for additional UV protection and wear resistance. The color shall be chosen from manufacturer’s standard colors.

b. Color shall be safety yellow unless otherwise noted by Designer.

c. Mechanical properties shall meet or exceed the values listed in Table 2.

Table 2-Standard Railing Fiberglass Pultruded Material Properties

Minimum Ultimate Coupon Properties (UN)

TEST SQUARE TUBE

ROUND TUBE

PROPERTIES METHOD UNITS VALUES VALUES Tensile Stress, LW ASTM D638 psi 30,000 30,000 Tensile Modulus, LW ASTM D638 106 psi 2.5 2.5 Compressive Stress, LW ASTM D695 psi 30,000 30,000 Compressive Modulus, LW ASTM D695 106 psi 2.5 2.5 Flexural Stress, LW ASTM D790 psi 30,000 30,000 Flexural Modulus, LW ASTM D790 106 psi 1.6 1.6 Short Beam Shear, LW ASTM D2344 psi 4,500 4,500 Density ASTM D792 lbs/in3 .062-.070 .060-.070 24 hr. Water Absorption ASTM D570 % max by wt. .6 .6 Coef. Of Thermal Expansion, LW ASTM D696 10-6 in/in/Fo

4.4 4.4

Measured as a percentage maximum by weight. Typical values because these are shape and composite dependent tests.

2. Fabrication of Standard Railing System - the fiberglass standard railing system

shall be fabricated into finished sections by fabricating and joining together the pultruded square tube using molded or pultruded components; epoxy bonded and connected as shown in the fabrication details. Railing sections shall be fabricated to the size shown on the approved fabrication drawings and shall be piece marked with a water proof tag.

357

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

3. For Side Mount

a. Post shall be constructed with a square or round pultruded bottom plug.

Length shall be sufficient to extend a minimum of 1 inch beyond the uppermost bolt hole to prevent crushing of post tubing. Bolt holes shall provide clearance of 1/16 inch for 1/2 inch diameter bolts/studs. On square tubes, holes shall be on longitudinal center line of post, 1 inch from bottom of post (minimum) and not less than 3 inches apart on center. Posts shall be fastened with stainless steel anchor bolts or studs, 1/2 inch diameter extending no less than 2-1/4 inches into the concrete, or into minimum thickness of 1/4 inch structural steel or pultruded fiberglass.

b. Post locations shall be no greater than 18 inches, nor less than 9 inches

from horizontal or vertical change in handrail direction. For square tubes, post centers shall be no greater than 72 inches apart on any straight run or rail, or 48 inches apart on any inclined rail section.

4. Installation of Handrail Sections

a. The fabricated railing sections shall be supplied complete with fittings by

the FRP manufacturer. The components used to join fabricated sections together may be shipped loose, to be epoxied and riveted, if required in the field by the contractor.

b. The fabricated handrail sections shall be installed as shown on the

approved shop drawings. The handrail sections shall be accurately located, erected plumb and level. The sections shall be fastened to the structure as shown on the approved shop drawings.

D. Pultruded Gratings and Stair Treads

1. General

a. Grating shall be shipped from the manufacturer, palletized and banded with exposed edges protected to prevent damage in shipment.

b. Each piece shall be clearly marked showing manufacturer’s applicable

drawing number. c. Grating shall be DURADEK or DURAGRID as manufactured by

Strongwell or approved equal from manufacturer’s listed above. 2. Design

358

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

a. The interior grating panels shall be based on Strongwell’s Duragrid HD-4000 with bearing bars 2-1/2 inches deep, or approved equal, and shall sustain a deflection of no more than .25 inches under a uniform distributed load of 250 psf and concentrated load of 4000 pounds for the span lengths shown on the plans.

b. The bearing bars shall be joined into panels by passing continuous length

fiberglass pultruded cross rods through the web of each bearing bar. A continuous fiberglass pultruded bar shaped section shall be wedged between the two cross rod spacers mechanically locking the notches in the cross rod spacers to the web of the bearing bars. Continuous chemical bonding shall be achieved between the cross rod spacers and the bearing web and between the bar shaped wedge and the two cross rod spacers locking the entire panel together to give a panel that resists twist and prevents internal movement of the bearing bars.

c. Stair treads shall be capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100 lbs. per

sq. ft. or a concentrated load of 300 lbs. on an area of 4 sq. inches located in the center of the tread, whichever produces greater stress.

d. The top surface of all panels shall have a non-skid grit affixed to the

surface by an epoxy resin followed by a top coat of epoxy resin. e. Hold down clamps shall be type 316L stainless steel saddle clips. A

minimum of 4 each per panel. f. Color shall be safety yellow unless otherwise noted by Designer. g. All bearing bars that are to be exposed to UV shall be coated with

polyurethane coating of a minimum thickness of 1 mil. h. Curb Angle: Curb angle supporting the gratings shall be based on

Strongwell’s fiberglass curb angle or approved substitute. Curb angle shall have a continuous angle that locks into concrete eliminating the need for individual anchors. Fiberglass curb angle shall be engineered using a composite of continuous glass fibers, two continuous strand glass mats a surface veil and fire retardant vinyl ester resin.

C. Products:

1. The FRP grating and stair treads shall be fabricated from bearing bars and cross

rods manufactured by the pultrusion process. The glass fiber reinforcement for the bearing bars shall be a core of continuous glass strand rovings wrapped with continuous strand glass mat. A synthetic surface veil shall be the outermost layer covering the exterior surfaces.

359

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

2. Fiberglass Grating and Stair Treads

a. Fiberglass grating and stair treads shall be made from a chemical resistant, fire retardant polyester resin system with antimony trioxide added to meet the flame rating of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E-84 testing and meet the self-extinguishing requirements of ASTM D-635. U. V. inhibitors are added to the resin.


A. Detectable Warning Tape: Warning tape shall meet the requirement set forth in Form 817 Article 1.20-1.05.15 – Facilities Construction – Markings for Underground Facilities and comply with APWA color code requirements


B. Gas Line and Component Paint:

1. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer

2. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat

3. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel gloss

4. Color: Safety Yellow


Examination:

A. Examine roughing-in for LPG piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before piping installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Examine roughing-in for existing LPG tanks to verify actual locations of tank and piping connections before tank relocation.

D. Proceed with relocation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Relocation and Demolition:

360

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

A. Purge and make existing LPG tanks safe in accordance with NFPA 58, NFPA 54, and the Connecticut Gas Equipment and Piping Code before tanks are relocated.

B. Purge and make existing LPG piping to be demolished safe in accordance with NFPA 58, NFPA 54, and the Connecticut Gas Equipment and Piping Code before piping is demolished.

C. Purge and make existing LPG piping to remain safe in accordance with NFPA 58, NFPA 54, and the Connecticut Gas Equipment and Piping Code before piping work begins.

Preparation:


B. Comply with NFPA 58, NFPA 54, and the Connecticut Gas Equipment and Piping Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

C. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.

Piping Installation:


B. Comply with NFPA 58, and NFPA 54, and the Connecticut Gas Equipment and Piping Code requirements for installation and purging of LPG piping.

C. Plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved by the Designer.

D. Install aboveground LPG piping 30” above grade where practical using strut-channel supports to allow for service and maintenance.

E. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.

Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer.

361

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

G. Joints for connection to inlets and outlets on regulators, and valves may be flanged or threaded to match the equipment.

H. Locate valves for easy access.

I. Install LPG piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

J. Install piping free of sags and bends.

K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

M. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

N. Relief vent connections for regulators and overpressure protection devices shall terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

O. Do not use LPG piping as grounding electrode.

P. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.

Q. Vapor line at tank and associated regulator should be installed above maximum liquid fill line of tank.

Piping Joint Construction:

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.

2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.

3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID of pipe.

362

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified.

5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

Plumbing Connections:

A. Install LPG piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

C. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliances and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.

FRP Product Installation: A. Fastening to in-place construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where

necessary for securing miscellaneous FRP fabrications to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors as required.

B. Cutting, fitting, and placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for

installation of miscellaneous FRP fabrications. Set FRP fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into

concrete masonry or similar construction.

363

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

D. All field cut and drilled edges, holes and abrasions shall be sealed with a catalyzed resin compatible with the original resin as recommended by the manufacturer. The sealing of the edges shall prevent premature fraying at the field cut edges.

E. Install items specified as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Storage Container Relocation and Installation:

A. Install storage container with at least 18” clearance from belly of tank to concrete pad.

B. Fill storage container to at least 80 percent capacity with propane.

C. Install piping connections with flexible connectors to allow for storage container settlement and for thermal expansion and contraction.

D. Ground containers according to NFPA 780.

E. Set storage containers in felt pads on concrete or steel saddles. Install corrosion protection at container-to-felt contact.


A. Warning tape is to be installed in the fill over all gas lines at a minimum depth of one (1) foot above the pipe and as required by Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.05.15 – Facilities Construction – Markings for Underground Facilities, except where below subgrade under slabs the tape shall be installed 6” above the pipe.

Painting:

A. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, regulators, and piping specialties, except components with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

B. Prepare shop primed metal surfaces by solvent wiping, sanding and touching-up shop prime coats. Prepare bare metal surfaces by power tool cleaning [Steel Structures Painting Council SP-3]. Remove rust, welding flux and splatter, burrs, and all other surface defects and foreign substances. Clean surfaces by washing with water followed by phosphate rinsing. Apply prime coats immediately after completion of cleaning.

C. Recoat Time: Allow manufacturer's recommended waiting period between successive coats.

D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.

Concrete Bases:

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base.

364

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

Field Quality Control:

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test, inspect, and purge LPG according to NFPA 58 and NFPA 54 and the Connecticut Gas Equipment and Piping Code.

C. LPG piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

Training:

A. Refer to Standard Specifications Article 1.20-1.08.14 for additional information.

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain LPG equipment.

Outdoor Piping Schedule:

A. Aboveground LPG vapor piping shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

2. Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings.

Details of the Manufacturers Warranties and Guarantees:


B. The manufacturer shall agree to repair or replace at their own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, any part of the equipment which is found to be defective, due to faulty design, workmanship or material for a minimum period of eighteen months after issuance of certificate of compliance. If it is necessary to return the equipment for

365

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1501901A

warranty repairs, the manufacturer will bear the cost of transportation in both directions and shall be responsible for loss and damage to the equipment during shipment and while in his possession.

C. The manufacturer shall clearly state any exceptions to the above warranty with the submittals.

D. The manufacturer shall supply all data and prices of any extended warranties.

Method of Measurement: A. All work associated with the propane tank relocation and piping system shall be included in

the Lump Sum price for “Relocate Propane Gas Tanks”.

B. No direct payment will be made for relocating the propane tanks, but the cost thereof shall be included in the Lump Sum price for “Relocate Propane Gas Tanks”.

C. No direct payment will be made for FRP products, but the cost thereof shall be included in the Lump Sum price for “Relocate Propane Gas Tanks”.

D. No direct payment will be made for excavation and backfill. Those items will be paid for under the applicable Special Provision.

Basis of Payment: Propane site work will be paid for at the Contract unit price bid. This price shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, and tools required to perform this work.

Pay Item Pay Unit

RELOCATE PROPANE GAS TANKS LS

366

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1504010A

ITEM #1504010A -TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF UTILITIES

Description:

Work under this item shall consist of designing, furnishing, placing and subsequently removing temporary sheet piling supports and protection shields which will be necessary to protect and/or stabilize the existing utilities during construction. The work pertaining to the temporary support of utility pipes/facilities (including sanitary sewers and force mains, electrical and existing drainage facilities to remain in service) primarily involves the support and prevention of damages which are possible during the excavation and construction of the proposed facilities as shown on the plans. The Contractor is advised that no service interruption resulting from his operations will be allowed, except as otherwise provided for in the Special Provision "Prosecution and Progress". Extreme caution shall be exercised during all stages of construction to preserve the existing utilities. A Department representative shall be present at the installation of the temporary supports. Further attention shall be paid to "Section 1.20-1.07 - Legal Relations and Responsibilities For Facilities Construction," and the Notice to Contractor for "Protection of Existing Utilities". The Contractor shall notify the Designer prior to the start of his work and shall be responsible for all coordination with the Department. The Contractor shall allow the Designer complete access to the work. Contractors are cautioned that it is their responsibility to verify locations, conditions and field dimensions of all existing features, as actual conditions may differ from information indicated on the plans or contained elsewhere in these specifications.

Materials:

The materials for this work shall be of satisfactory quality for the purpose intended and shall be approved by the Designer. The material shall be intended for use in structures and shall be sound and capable of safely carrying the specified loads.


The Contractor shall prepare Working Drawings and computations showing his proposed method of support and protection for each utility to be supported and protected. Preparation of Working Drawings and computations shall conform to the requirements of Subarticle 1.20-1.05.02. The support shall safely carry all utility dead loads and any imposed loadings under all possible construction conditions. The utility protection shields shall safely carry any imposed loadings under all possible construction conditions. Said supports and protections shall be constructed in a

367

Rev. Date 10/27/17

0301-0182 ITEM #1504010A

manner that will not interfere with the removal of existing drainage pipes or structure or proposed drainage system installation. The design shall be submitted to the Designer for review and approval. The design shall be submitted at least three (3) weeks prior to the beginning of construction. No work will be allowed in the vicinity of any utility until the Contractor receives approval of his support method from the utility representative and the Designer. The Contractor shall use every effort to protect all utilities from damage of any nature that might result from carelessness or negligence in his operations. He shall be held solely and strictly responsible for any damage resulting from such carelessness and negligence. A periodic inspection of the temporary utility support and protection shall be performed by the Contractor, as directed by the Designer. The Contractor shall support and maintain the existing utilities until such time that the new utility system has been installed and all trenches backfilled to finished grade above the utilities. When the temporary utility support and protection systems are no longer required, they shall be removed from the site by the Contractor.


This work, being paid for on a lump sum basis, will not be measured for payment.

Basis for Payment:

The work will he paid for at the contract lump sum price for "Temporary Support of Utilities," which price shall include designing and detailing the temporary supports and protection shields, furnishing and installing said supports and shields, and the removal of said supports and shields, including all materials, equipment, tools and labor incidental thereto.

Pay Item Pay Unit

Temporary Support of Utilities LS

368